Nissan - Frontier - Workshop Manual - 1998 - 1998

Page 855 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6648 Valve Body: Service and Repair Inspection and Overhaul Control Valve Assembly Disassembly Page 462 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9014 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Locations Keyless Entry Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2779 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Circuit Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Connectors Heater Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 8958 Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Without Power Door Locks) Diagnostic Procedure 4 (Driver Side Door Switch Input Signal Check) Models With Power Door Locks Diagnostic Procedure 4 (With Power Door Locks) Models Without Power Door Locks Diagnostic Procedure 4 (Without Power Door Locks) Page 7716 Power Steering Pump: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Pump Maximum Pressure [1] ...................................................................................................................................... 7,649 - 8,238 kPa (1,109 - 1,194 psi) [1]: When idling. Page 9299 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4280 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3560 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5286 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 717 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5690 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2643 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4424 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 8980 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 649 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3996 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4923 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 8064 Blower Motor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box and mating trim. 2. Remove the cooling unit. 3. Disconnect the fan motor resistor. 4. Disconnect the fan motor. 5. Remove the blower case and motor. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the motor from the blower case. INSTALLATION Installation is basically the reverse order of removal. ^ Recharge the A/C system. Page 1020 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 2191 - Use the same procedure as mentioned in step 4. 7. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following parts. - Rocker cover - All spark plugs ADJUSTING Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. 1. Turn crankshaft to position cam lobe on camshaft of valve that must be adjusted upward. 2. Place Tool (A) around camshaft as shown in figure. 3. Rotate Tool (A) so that lifter is pushed down. Before placing Tool (A), rotate notch toward center of cylinder head (See image), to simplify shim removal later. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (A). 4. Place Tool (B) between camshaft and the edge of the valve lifter to retain valve lifter. CAUTION: Tool (B) must be placed as close to camshaft bracket as possible. - Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (B). 5. Remove Tool (A). 6. Remove adjusting shim using a small screwdriver and a magnetic finger. Page 5567 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4229 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7732 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4422 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5709 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3032 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2625 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 4055 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 198 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1181 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CKPS-01 Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) (OBD) Circuit Diagrams Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 9409 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Locations Antitheft Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 520 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2752 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 6700 Page 2225 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3561 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4043 Engine Control Module: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor: Customer Interest MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) BULLETIN NUMBER: NTB99-013 CLASSIFICATION: EC99-001 DATE: April 1, 1999 TITLE: 1998-99 MY FRONTIER TRUCK M/T MIL "ON" P0500 SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied 1998-99 Frontier Truck (manual transmission, KA24DE Engine only) shows the following conditions: 1. MIL "ON" with DTC P0500 stored, 2. CONSULT freeze frame data indicates an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less, 3. No abnormal speedometer indication during test drive, then use this bulletin to repair the incident This incident may be due to a clutch slip condition for more than 10 seconds with a vehicle forward speed of less than 3 mph. This situation could occur during hill holding using clutch slip. Correct this incident by installing the ECM listed in the Parts Information using the following service procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTC stored is P0500 2. Verify the CONSULT freeze frame data stored has an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less (see Figure 1). 3. Conduct test drive to confirm there is no abnormal speedometer indication: a) Connect CONSULT and select Start, Engine, Data Monitor and Main Signals b) Test drive vehicle and ensure the speedometer and the vehicle speed sensor value displayed in Data Monitor provide consistent speed Page 548 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) 1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector. 2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: Approximately 166.5 - 203.5 ohms [at 20°C (68°F)] If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). Page 5366 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Locations Throttle Full Close Switch: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 6080 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 6639 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger With Consult 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". OR Without Consult 1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and reconnect fuel pump fuse. Page 3864 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3839 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4005 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 101 Page 6074 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6499 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2456 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 186 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2829 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2530 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4809 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM. Specifications Fuel Pressure Regulator: Specifications Fuel Pressure Table Fuel Pressure Table Pressure taken at idle. With Vacuum Hose Connected 34 kPa With Vacuum Hose Disconnected 43 kPa Page 2011 Page 430 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. A/T - Mandatory Oil Cooler Cleaning Technical Service Bulletin # 00-056B Date: 021127 A/T - Mandatory Oil Cooler Cleaning Classification: AT00-001b Reference: NTB00-056b Date: November 27, 2002 1988 AND LATER NISSAN VEHICLES AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER CLEANING ATTENTION: This bulletin supersedes NTB91-099, NTB93-007, NTB94-050, and NTB95-109B, and amends NTB00-056a. The applied models/model years and information in the Claims Information section of NTB00-056a was updated. Please discard all paper copies of NTB91-099, NTB93-007, NTB94-050, NTB95-109B, and earlier versions of NTB00-056. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1988 and later with automatic transmission (including the Xtronic CVT automatic transmission) SERVICE INFORMATION Whenever an automatic transmission (A/T) is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. ^ Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T oil cooler and may build up as transmission fluid enters the Cooler Inlet. ^ This debris can contaminate the newly serviced transmission. ^ In severe cases this debris can block or restrict the flow of transmission fluid/oil. In either case, failure of the newly serviced A/T may result. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler through the Cooler Outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. ^ The location of the cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses described in this bulletin determines direction of transmission fluid flow through the cooler. ^ The Inlet and Outlet position varies from model to model, and you must identify the location of the Cooler Inlet and Outlet to successfully perform the cleaning procedure. Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE Workflow to determine the procedure for a particular vehicle. ^ Use Charts A and B in the service procedure to establish the correct Cooler Inlet and Outlet location for the vehicle you are servicing. ^ Then perform the Cleaning, Diagnosis, and Inspection as instructed. Page 8112 When servicing the A/C refrigeration loop, refer to the charts (Figure 2 and 3) to identify the correct 0-ring type. The charts list both NEW and FORMER 0-ring types and illustrates the 0-rings in full-scale size. IMPORTANT POINTS ^ There is NO interchangeability between NEW and FORMER connection type 0-rings. Improper use will cause refrigerant leaks. Therefore, the correct type 0-ring must be used with each application. ^ Nissan vehicles requiring A/C 0-ring replacement should be checked for proper 0-ring part numbers through the applicable parts microfiche. ^ Insure correct 0-ring installation onto tube (see Figure 1). Page 5991 Ignition Coil: Electrical Diagrams WIRING DIAGRAM Page 3068 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3262 Ground Distribution Page 2895 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3638 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9542 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 8012 Page 6803 10. Measure starting force "A" at wheel hub bolt. 11. Install lock washer by tightening the lock nut within 15 to 30 degrees. 12. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions to seat wheel bearing correctly. 13. Measure starting force "B" at wheel hub bolt. Refer to step 10. 14. Wheel bearing preload "C" can be calculated as shown below. C = B - A Wheel bearing preload "C": 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) 15. Repeat steps 3 through 14 until correct axial end play and wheel bearing preload are obtained. 16. Tighten screws to 1.2 - 1.8 Nm (10.4 - 15.6 inch lbs.). 17. Install free running hub. Page 2722 Ground Distribution Locations Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2128 Page 3288 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 857 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4693 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5741 Ground Distribution Page 5359 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4529 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 5086 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2449 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5394 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 7463 Fuse Block-Fuse Arrangement Page 8725 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Locations Ignition Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3913 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 5492 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing Classification: EL99-016V Reference: NTB99-048V Date: March 11, 2010 BATTERY / STARTING / CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissans including Altima Hybrid HEV* 12 volt battery *For information on using this tool with Altima Hybrid 12 volt batteries, refer to NTB07-007. SERVICE INFORMATION The Midtronics GR-8 - Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station is the factory-approved battery, starter, and alternator tester. ^ For warranty documentation purposes, as of September 30, 2008 the GR-8 is the only approved diagnostic tool for batteries, starters, and alternators. ^ Print-outs from this tester are required for claim reimbursements related to batteries, starters, and/or alternators. ^ For additional information regarding claims reimbursements, refer to the current Nissan Assurance Products Resource Manual. ^ For the complete GR-8 User Guide, refer to ASIST - TOOLS & EQUIPMENT. ^ Additional tools and replacement parts can be ordered from TECH-MATE. ^ This essential tool was shipped to your dealership and invoiced to your Nissan Non-Vehicle account in three equal installments of $641.00 (plus applicable taxes) in accordance with your dealer agreement with Nissan North America, Inc. This price includes both the GR8-1200-NI and the EXP-800-NI shipped in April 2008. Nissan vehicles equipped with standard lead/acid batteries use one of two different types with unique battery rating specifications: JIS & CCA. Diagram Information and Instructions Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6482 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 712 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 881 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Connector Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 8731 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 6276 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2279 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 6354 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 8809 The table provides a brief description of some types of paint contamination you may encounter. Select a 2' x 2' test section to perform the following Contamination Test Removal. C. RE-Wash C. Re-Wash with detergent and water solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Rinse with a spray of clean water. Repeat up to four times. D. Clean D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover using a clean terry cloth towel and gentle pressure. Repeat up to four times. E. Applying Finish Kare E. Apply Finish Kare to remove iron particles and acids. See procedure below: Caution: Attempting to buff iron particles will cause severe scratching. 1. Apply Finish Kare # 1119, solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. 2. After the wash and rinse, gently dry the contaminated surfaces with the terry cloth towels to remove the majority of the water. Use gentle pressure Page 568 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3098 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2721 Ground Distribution Page 720 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 5242 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5883 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4223 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3724 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5498 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2275 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1223 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Description and Operation Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch The vehicle is equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch which can be operated by the customer. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the passenger air bag is enabled and could inflate in a frontal collision. When the switch is turned to the OFF position, the passenger air bag is disabled and will not inflate in a frontal collision. After turning the ignition switch ON, a passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator illuminates on the instrument panel for bulb check. The indicator will stay lit if the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the OFF position. If the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the ON position, the indicator will turn off after about 7 seconds. After SRS maintenance or repair, make sure the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the same position (ON or OFF) as when the vehicle arrived for service. Activation / Deactivation Passenger Air Bag If the passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator operation does not correspond to ON/OFF operation of the passenger air bag deactivation switch, perform self-diagnoses for SRS and repair according to the self-diagnostic failure. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". If no self-diagnostic failure is detected, replace the passenger air bag deactivation switch including the key cylinder. Page 8299 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Indicator Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Indicator REMOVAL Passenger Air Bag Module Deactivation Switch Indicator CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes 1. Remove meter cover. 2. Release passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator tabs from back side of meter cover. 3. Remove passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator from front side of meter cover. INSTALLATION To install, reverse removal procedure. After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 3115 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Engine Coolant - Special Refilling Tool Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Special Refilling Tool Classification: TE02-001a Reference: NTB02-011a Date: March 11, 2002 ESSENTIAL TOOL: ENGINE COOLANT REFILL TOOL This bulletin amends NTB02-011. This version has the addition of a Service Procedure. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION If for any reason the vehicle's cooling system needs to be filled with coolant due to a service repair or maintenance, use the Coolant Refill Tool # J-45695. ^ Using this tool properly will ensure complete filling without trapped air bubbles in the cooling system. ^ Air pockets in the cooling system can cause: A) Overheating B) Poor heater performance C) Gurgling noise from the heater core To ensure the tool is used correctly, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the tool and the Service Procedure in this Bulletin. Locations Page 9435 EL-TAIL/L-02 Parking, License, And Tail Lamps Wiring Diagram (Part 2 Of 2) Circuit Diagrams Parking, License And Tail Lamps (Part 1 Of 2) Parking, License, And Tail Lamps (Part 2 Of 2) Parking, License and Tail Lamps Circuit Connectors Page 1165 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2993 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5036 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Description and Operation Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation CONTROL UNIT (Built-In ABS Actuator And Electric Unit) The control unit computes the wheel rotating speed by the signal current sent from the sensor. Then it supplies a DC current to the actuator solenoid valve. It also controls ON-OFF operation of the valve relay and motor relay. If any electrical malfunction should be detected in the system, the control unit causes the warning lamp to light up. In this condition, the ABS will be deactivated by the control unit, and the vehicle's brake system reverts to normal operation. Page 3016 Control Units/Module F29 Control Units/Module Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Speedometer Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 191 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2586 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3275 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor is a basic component of the ECCS. it monitors engine speed and piston position. These input signals to the ECM are used to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other functions. The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-forming circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for a 1° (POS) signal and 4 slits for a 180° (REF) signal. The wave-forming circuit consists of Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes. The rotor plate is positioned between the LED and the photo diode. The LED transmits light to the photo diode. As the rotor plate turns, the slits cut the light to generate rough-shaped pulses. These pulses are converted into on-off signals by the wave-forming circuit and sent to the ECM. The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an assembly except distributor cap. Page 5811 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5743 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 7161 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Service Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Minimum Thickness ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 0.945 in. (24 mm) Maximum Runout ................................................................................................................................ ................................................. 0.0028 in. (0.07 mm) Maximum Thickness Variation ........................................................................................................................................................ 0.0008 in. (0.0203 mm) Outer Diameter .................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 10.9 in. (276.86 mm) Thickness (New) .................................................................................................................................. .................................................. 1.02 in. (25.908 mm Page 2575 Ground Distribution Page 7778 12. Remove rear housing bolts. 13. Remove rear housing together with worm gear assembly. CAUTION: Worm gear assembly cannot be disassembled. When it is removed, be careful not to disengage worm gear from shaft or allow it to drop. 14. Remove teflon ring and O-ring of worm gear assembly. Assembly STEERING GEAR MODEL PB59K 1. Apply a thin coat of ATF to O-ring and install new O-ring on worm gear assembly. Page 434 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4793 Ground Distribution Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4282 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 474 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor is a basic component of the ECCS. it monitors engine speed and piston position. These input signals to the ECM are used to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other functions. The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-forming circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for a 1° (POS) signal and 4 slits for a 180° (REF) signal. The wave-forming circuit consists of Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes. The rotor plate is positioned between the LED and the photo diode. The LED transmits light to the photo diode. As the rotor plate turns, the slits cut the light to generate rough-shaped pulses. These pulses are converted into on-off signals by the wave-forming circuit and sent to the ECM. The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an assembly except distributor cap. Page 6651 a. Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their proper positions. b. Install reamer bolts from bottom of upper body. c. Place oil circuit of lower body face up. Install orifice check spring, orifice check valve. D: mm (inch) 2.0 (0.079) d. Install separator plate on lower body. e. Temporarily install support plates, side plate (with steel ball) and tube brackets. Page 289 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3045 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 966 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1094 Ground Distribution Page 6481 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5626 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 7142 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 5105 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Spark Plug Torque Values Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Torque Spark plug torque 14-22 ft. lb Page 4549 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 8538 B. Insert and remove the ignition key more than 6 times within a 10 second period (at a rate of one insertion/removal cycle per second). The key should be withdrawn from the ignition key cylinder completely each time it is removed. NOTE: Do not rush the insertion/removal key cycling process. The side marker/tail/license lamps and interior illumination will flash twice when this step is accurately completed. C. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. The ignition key should remain in the "ACC" position throughout the remainder of the programming, including programming of additional remote controllers. D. Press any button on the remote controller one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The side marker/tail/license lamps and interior illumination will flash twice when this step is accurately completed and programming is successful. E. If you are programming only one remote, proceed to step 3A. If programming additional remotes, continue with step 2A, below. 2. Programming Additional Remote Controllers (Maximum of 4 Remotes): A. Remain inside the vehicle after programming the first remote. B. Use the driver's power door lock-unlock switch to unlock and then lock the doors. C. Press any button on one of the additional remote controllers one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The side marker/tail/license lamps and interior illumination will flash twice when this step is accurately completed and programming is successful. If there is more than one additional remote to be programmed, repeat steps 2A through 2C above for each additional remote. 3. End Programming: A. Remove the key from the ignition. B. Use the door lock-unlock switch on the driver's door to unlock the doors. Open the driver's door to complete the programming. C. Check the operation of each of the remote controllers by locking/unlocking the doors with each of the remote controllers you have programmed. Page 4616 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 8460 Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Seat Belt Retractor Off-Vehicle Check 1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. Off Vehicle Check Seat Belt Retractor 2. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration. 15 degrees or less tilt: Belt can be pulled out. 35 degrees or more tilt: Belt locks and cannot be pulled out. If NG, replace the retractor assembly. Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Paint: Customer Interest Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Classification: BF87-030 Reference: TS87-145 Date: September 28, 1987 PAINT SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Paint spotting incidents occurring in the U.S. market are not unique to Nissan, but are being experienced by all manufacturers. To date, two separate types of paint spotting incidents have been identified as follows: 1. Particulate Fallout - Tiny solid particles which collect on horizontal panels, causing a dark stain which will penetrate into the paint if not cleaned. 2. Water Spotting - A ringlet or multiple water-drop-shaped light discoloration on dark painted horizontal panels. THESE TYPES OF SPOTTING ARE NOT DUE TO PAINT DEFICIENCY, AND CAN BE PREVENTED THROUGH PROPER CARE. SERVICE PROCEDURE Particulate Fallout Ash, dust, soot and other tiny solid particulate matter from industrial and other sources can be carried many miles. Particulate fallout is most noticeable on the horizontal surfaces (hood, luggage compartment lid, and roof) of the vehicle. If left on a moist, painted surface, the particles will slowly dissolve and bond to the paint, frequently leaving a red stain. This stain can be present even on plastic surfaces such as bumpers if the fallout has an iron content. These spots may be visible on both solid and metallic paints (especially light colors). The particulate can be felt as a sharp point on the paint surface. When viewed through a magnifying lens, the staining may be evident. VEHICLE CARE Every 10 days, or more frequently depending upon local conditions, particulate fallout must be washed off with mild detergent and water to prevent its bonding and staining action. A good carnuba wax coating can help protect against damage from particulate fallout. PARTICULATE FALLOUT REPAIR PROCEDURE In most cases, thoroughly washing the affected area with a water and mild detergent solution (to avoid scratching the finish with dislodged particles) will remove the particulates. After washing the vehicle, a stain, generally orange or red, may still be visible on white or other light colored vehicles. This stain can be removed with a fine compound material. DO NOT APPLY THE COMPOUNDING MATERIAL BEFORE ALL PARTICLES IN THE AFFECTED AREA ARE REMOVED BY THOROUGH WASHING. Water Spotting A photograph of typical water spotting is shown on page 26 of the Nissan Paint Refinishing Guide* (PIN 5REFGD). The spots are most visible when viewed at an angle, usually under fluorescent light. The paint surface is usually smooth to the touch because the spotting is a change in the top surface itself. This is not hard-water residue which will wash off with soap and water. These spots are visible on both solid and metallic paints with dark colors. VEHICLE CARE When a vehicle is stored outside and unprotected, dust patterns develop on the painted surfaces. These patterns guide moisture droplets from a light rain or morning dew to the same location each time. The strong sunlight, repeatedly concentrated on these water droplets, greatly contributes to the spotting. When storing a vehicle unprotected, where the painted surface is repeatedly exposed to a combination of sunlight and light rain (or morning dew), the vehicle MUST be washed AND thoroughly dried at least every two weeks, or more frequently if there is light rain or dew followed by strong sunlight. Page 9086 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 8789 When washing any vehicle, it must be out of direct sunlight and the painted surfaces should be cool to the touch. WATER SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE The method of repairing a water spotted finish varies with the severity (depth of spot in finish) of the spotting. After a thorough washing, perform the following: 1. Water spots on light colored vehicles and some vehicles which have had minimal exposure to the elements can be repaired by buffing. First, apply a fine cutting compound using an orbital buffer to remove a thin layer of the top coat or clear coat. After removal of the spots, buff with glazing compound to remove the fine scratches. 2. More severe spotting can be removed with a coarser cutting compound followed by finer compound and glazing compound to remove the scratches. 3. The most severe water spots on clear coated, dark vehicles can be repaired by wet sanding the affected areas with 1200 grit sandpaper to prepare the surface then spraying a fresh clear coat on those areas. Non-clear coated vehicles should be repairable with either step 1 or 2. * Available through Dyment Distribution Services. Page 679 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The rear heated oxygen sensor (rear HO2S), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used for engine control operation. Page 4059 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3250 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5865 Ground Distribution Page 895 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5389 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5869 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 6111 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2659 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2887 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Locations Fusible Link: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1092 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5800 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Service and Repair Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Head. Page 3034 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9514 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4306 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IATS-01 Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Circuit Diagrams Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 4031 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Locations Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Locations BR-ABS-01 Anti-lock Brake System (Part 1 Of 5) Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch SRS Component Parts Location Page 1051 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6560 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6565 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 9020 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Locations Vacuum Pump: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4172 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4711 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6152 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Classification: EC99-005b Reference: NTB99-053b Date: January 22, 2002 NISSAN REVISED TPS ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE This bulletin amends NTB99-053a. The Service Information and Service Procedure has been revised. In addition, TPS Connector tool (Kent-Moore # J45178) information has been included. Please discard all copies of NTB99-053a. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1995-1998 Maxima (A32) 1996-1998 Pathfinder (R50) 1995-1998 240SX (S14) 1995-1998 Sentra/200SX (B14) w/GA16 & SR20 engines 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998 Frontier (D22) 1995-1997 Altima (U13) 1998 Altima (L30) 1996-1998 Quest (V40) SERVICE INFORMATION The adjustment procedure for the throttle position sensor (TPS) has been revised and standardized for all the Applied Vehicles. ^ The TPS contains a closed throttle position switch (CTPS) and a variable output throttle position sensor. ^ This procedure uses the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) status (ON or OFF) instead of the throttle position sensor (variable output voltage) to adjust the TPS. ^ Incorrect adjustment of the CTPS may cause one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to be displayed: P1447, P0120, P0510, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P1705. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check fast idle cam (FIC) function, if equipped (refer to appropriate Service Manual). When finished, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and the fast idle cam (if equipped) has released. Then turn the engine "OFF". 2. Disconnect the harness connector (see Figure 1) from the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) position of the throttle position sensor (TPS). 3. Connect an ohmmeter across the terminals for the closed throttle position switch (CTPS). Page 4419 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5770 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3076 Ground Distribution Page 8970 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4178 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 8932 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2571 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 125 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 790 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4950 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit MIL - Icon Changed to Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins MIL - Icon Changed to Service Engine Soon Classification: EC96-011 Reference: NTB96-094 Date: October 2, 1996 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) CHANGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1997 Vehicles (except 1997.5 Altima) APPLIED DATES: Various SERVICE INFORMATION Beginning with 1997 model year vehicles, the MIL icon in the instrument panel will be changed. The new icon will read "SERVICE ENGINE SOON". Page 5742 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4148 Ground Distribution Page 8943 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 778 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5169 EGR Control Solenoid: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EGRC-solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. The vacuum signal passes through the solenoid valve. The signal then reaches the EGR valve. When the ECM sends an ON signal, a plunger will then move to cut the vacuum signal from the throttle body to the EGR valve. Page 7596 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 3818 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4019 Page 3456 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2848 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 991 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5192 Ground Distribution Page 4189 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7818 - Press out upper link bushings. INSPECTION - Check adjusting bolts and rubber bushings for damage. Replace if necessary. - Check upper link for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. ASSEMBLY 1. Apply soapsuds to rubber bushing. 2. Press upper link bushing. - Press bushing so that the flange of bushing securely contacts the end surface of the upper link collar. Page 7661 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch 1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine. 2. Check continuity between terminal (1) and ground. If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch. Page 843 indications with no drop-outs or spikes. Note: A 2-3 mph (3-5 kph) difference between the CONSULT display and the speedometer is normal. 4. a) If the speedometer and speed sensor values are 0K, proceed to # 5. b) If the speedometer and speed sensor data are erratic, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to service manual for Diagnosis information. 5. Check the existing ECM part number in the vehicle that is listed either on the CONSULT freeze frame data or checked by CONSULT ECM Part Number function (see Figure 1). 6. If existing Part Number is one of those listed in Table 1, install the appropriate P/N listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 7411 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3691 Page 4284 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5300 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. 2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine side). 3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube. 4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. At idling: With vacuum hose connected Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm.sq, 34 psi) With vacuum hose disconnected Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm.sq, 43 psi) If results are unsatisfactory, perform "Fuel Pressure Regulator Check". Page 4636 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4897 4. Inspect the inside diameter of the solenoid bracket metal pipe (from EVAP canister) for contamination or rust (see Figure 1). A. If contamination or rust is present, replace the solenoid valve bracket and reconnect the vacuum hoses. B. If contamination or rust is not present, reconnect the vacuum hose and use the appropriate section of the applicable service manual to diagnose and repair the vehicle. 5. Ensure the wire harness connector and all hoses are properly connected to the purge volume control valve. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the following claims coding: For DTC P1440 OR For DTC P1444 OR For DTC P1491 Page 547 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transaxle housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis of misfire. Page 6121 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5015 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 6091 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 716 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5249 EGR Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2359 Sunroof - Headliner Squeak Noises Sunroof / Moonroof: All Technical Service Bulletins Sunroof - Headliner Squeak Noises Classification: BT98-003 Reference: NTB98-040 Date: June 1, 1998 1998 FRONTIER SQUEAK NOISE IN HEADLINER NEAR SUNROOF APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1998 Frontier (D22) - sunroof models only SERVICE INFORMATION If a 1998 Frontier exhibits a "scratchy" type of squeak noise in the headliner around the edges of the sunroof, the cause may be the headliner panel rubbing on the vehicle body. Use the following procedure to resolve the incident: SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof panel as follows: A. Remove the sunroof shade panel by turning the securing knobs counterclockwise and pulling the panel down and towards the rear of the vehicle to release (see Figure 1). B. Disconnect the sunroof handle from the sunroof handle latch by depressing the two release buttons on the handle latch while pushing up on the sunroof panel (see Figure 2). Page 601 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2272 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4080 Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3567 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 5522 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2610 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 714 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Locations Keyless Entry Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 9143 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5103 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4231 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Views Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Specifications Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS G Sensor ............................................................................................................................................. ........................ 4.4 - 5.8 Nm (39.1 - 51.2 inch lbs.) Page 5282 Ground Distribution Page 6004 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3087 Leak Detection Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PRE/SE-01 Evaporation Emission Control System Pressure Sensor (EVAP) (DTC: P0450) WIRING DIAGRAM Page 1476 Idle Speed: Adjustments PREPARATION - Make sure that the following parts are in good order. (1) Battery (2) Ignition system (3) Engine oil and coolant levels (4) Fuses (5) ECM harness connector (6) Vacuum hoses (7) Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) (8) Fuel pressure (9) Engine compression (10) EGR valve operation (11) Throttle valve (12) EVAP system - On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". - On models equipped with automatic transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. - When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. - Turn off head lamps, heater blower. - Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 2528 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7585 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. Service and Repair Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Head. MIL - Icon Changed to Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins MIL - Icon Changed to Service Engine Soon Classification: EC96-011 Reference: NTB96-094 Date: October 2, 1996 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) CHANGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1997 Vehicles (except 1997.5 Altima) APPLIED DATES: Various SERVICE INFORMATION Beginning with 1997 model year vehicles, the MIL icon in the instrument panel will be changed. The new icon will read "SERVICE ENGINE SOON". Page 2574 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 1961 - Use the same procedure as mentioned in step 4. 7. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following parts. - Rocker cover - All spark plugs ADJUSTING Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. 1. Turn crankshaft to position cam lobe on camshaft of valve that must be adjusted upward. 2. Place Tool (A) around camshaft as shown in figure. 3. Rotate Tool (A) so that lifter is pushed down. Before placing Tool (A), rotate notch toward center of cylinder head (See image), to simplify shim removal later. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (A). 4. Place Tool (B) between camshaft and the edge of the valve lifter to retain valve lifter. CAUTION: Tool (B) must be placed as close to camshaft bracket as possible. - Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (B). 5. Remove Tool (A). 6. Remove adjusting shim using a small screwdriver and a magnetic finger. Page 7621 b. Apply the above two values to the chart and determine point "A". c. The coordinate (or graduation) indicates that both the front and rear adjusting bolts must be turned outward by 3 graduations. d. Turn the adjusting bolts by the amount corresponding with the 3 graduations. TOE IN WARNING: ALWAYS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE ON A FLAT SURFACE. MAKE SURE THAT NO ONE IS IN FRONT OF THE VEHICLE BEFORE PUSHING IT. Measure toe-in using the following procedure. 1. Bounce front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft.). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point. 4. Measure distance "A" (rear side). 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° (1/2 turn). If the wheels have rotated more than 180° (1/2 turn), try the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push vehicle backward. 6. Measure distance "B" (front side). Total toe-in: Refer to Specification Table. 7. Adjust toe-in by varying the length of both steering tie rods. a. Loosen clamp bolts or lock nuts. b. Adjust toe-in by turning both the left and right tie rod tubes equal amounts. Page 771 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2260 2. Check for leakage. Page 1191 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 739 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3843 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Locations Throttle Full Close Switch: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 979 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3621 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 1083 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Keyless Entry - Remote Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 99-036A Date: 000510 Keyless Entry - Remote Programming Classification: EL99-001A Reference: NTB99-036A Date: May 10, 2000 NISSAN KEYLESS REMOTE ENTRY PROGRAMMING This amended version of NTB99-036 updates the Applied Vehicle, Service Information, and Service This amended Procedure Sections. Please discard all paper copies of NTB99-036 APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-00 Altima (L30) 1998-00 Frontier (D22) 1998-99 Maxima (A32) 2000 Maxima (A33) 1998-00 Pathfinder (R50) 1998-99 Sentra (B14) 2000 Sentra (B15) 1999-00 Quest (V41) 2000 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION If a remote switch assembly (remote controller) for an Applied Nissan vehicle does not operate or operates intermittently, it may need to be re-programmed. Use the following procedure to program the remote controller. NOTE: Not all trim level variations of a given vehicle include the remote controller function. Review the vehicle sales brochure to determine if the vehicle trim level is equipped with the remote controller function before starting the programming procedure. Also confirm that the remote controller(s) being programmed is the correct remote controller for the vehicle. NOTE: A. 1998-99 Altima, Maxima, Pathfinder, Sentra, and Frontier Models, 1999 Quest, and 2000 Frontier Models built before VIN 343314: If the vehicle has more than one remote controller, the remote controllers must all be programmed at the same time (a maximum of 4 remotes can be programmed). B. All 2000 Altima, Maxima, Pathfinder, Sentra, Quest, Xterra, Frontier Crew Cab and Desert Runner Models, and Frontier Models built after VIN 343314: If the vehicle has more than one remote controller, the oldest ID code is erased when programming a new remote when there are already 4 ID codes in memory. If there are less than 4 ID codes stored in memory, then the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased, unless a new remote is programmed after filling all 4 memory positions. A maximum of 4 remotes can be programmed. NOTE: Regarding 2000 Maxima, Pathfinder, and Sentra vehicles: You may use CONSULT-II to program remotes for these vehicles. Refer to the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further information. You may also program these vehicle remotes using the Service Procedure provided below. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Re-programming of an otherwise functional remote controller is not covered by warranty. Page 1899 Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Block. Page 2619 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4151 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 7424 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 7476 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 3266 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5170 EGR Control Solenoid: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EGRC-Solenoid Valve Check air passage continuity. With CONSULT Perform "EGRC SOLENOID VALVE" in "ACTIVE TEST". OR Without CONSULT If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EGRC-solenoid valve. A/C - New Connections & O-Rings A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - New Connections & O-Rings Classification: HA97-O12 Reference: NTB98-005 Date: February 1, 1998 NEW A/C CONNECTION 0-RINGS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan (except Quest) SERVICE INFORMATION This service bulletin identifies differences in A/C 0-rings as they apply to the NEW and FORMER type A/C connections. The NEW type connection has a groove in the tube end in which the 0-ring is seated. The FORMER type connection does not have a groove but instead has an inflated portion on the tube end to support the 0-ring. Refer to Figure 1 for illustrations identifying each connection type. Page 4854 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Remove the EVAP canister. 3. Remove the hose between the EVAP vent control valve and the crossframe member (the largest diameter hose in the rearward position). 4. Check the EVAP control valve. Air should pass through the valve passage when voltage is not applied. A. Apply battery voltage to the valve and make sure the air passage closes (see Figure 1). B. Disconnect the battery voltage and make sure the air passage opens again and does not stick closed. C. Look inside the valve air passage and make sure there is no corrosion/rust on the metal shaft. 5. Check the EVAP canister. A. Check that no liquid will drain from the EVAP canister. B. Weigh the canister (with the vent control valve). The weight should be less than 4 lbs. 6. If either the EVAP vent control valve or the EVAP canister fail one or more of these checks, replace both the vent control valve and the canister (see Parts Information). Installation of the Breather Tube Kit 1. Remove the bedliner (if so equipped) 2. Drill one 25 mm (1 inch) hole in the floor of the vehicle bed at the location shown (see Figure 2). Page 7249 INSPECTION - Check master cylinder inner wall for pin holes or scratches. Replace if damaged. ASSEMBLY 1. Insert secondary piston assembly. Then insert primary piston assembly. - Pay attention to direction of piston cups in figure. Also, insert pistons squarely to avoid scratches on cylinder bore. 2. Install stopper cap. - Before installing stopper cap, ensure that claws are bent inward. 3. Push reservoir tank seals into cylinder body. 4. Push reservoir tank into cylinder body. Page 5345 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 9140 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2117 7. Install distributor, aligning as shown in Figure 10. 8. Install vacuum hoses, electrical harnesses and connectors. Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications Mass Air Flow Table Mass Air Flow Table Supply Voltage 11 - 14 V Output Voltage 0.9 - 1.8 V At idle with engine warmed up and running under no load. Air Flow At Idle 0.9 - 5.8 g/sec Air Flow At 2,500 RPM 7.5 - 13.2 g/sec Page 8969 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 873 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6654 a. Use a wire paper clip to push out parallel pins. b. Remove parallel pins while pressing their corresponding plugs and sleeves. - Remove plug slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out. c. Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal parts. - If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body facedown and lightly tap it with a soft hammer. - Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves. 2. Remove valves at retainer plates. a. Pry out retainer plate with wire paper clip. Page 4751 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5041 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2420 Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4551 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 8716 Page 2236 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 8269 10. To ensure proper connection, completely separate the air bag connector, then firmly snap it back together (see Figure 1). 11. Re-locate the air bag connector and harness to the back side of the knee protector (see Figure 2). 12. Secure a tie wrap around the air bag connector, the harness, and the knee protector, affixing the air bag connector and harness to the back of the knee protector (see Figure 2). 13. Secure a 2nd tie wrap around the knee protector and one side of the harness loop to provide additional support (see Figure 2). NOTE: Be sure to loop the air bag connector harness when affixing it to the knee protector and allow a large enough loop in the harness to reduce stress on the connectors (see Figure 2). 14. Re-connect the vehicle battery. 15. Clear the CONSULT code by selecting "AIR BAG SELF-DIAG. CURRENT" and touch "ERASE". 16. Verify that the air bag light is no longer on. 17. Re-install the glove box assembly. 18. Re-set the radio presets. CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for this incident. A claim to Nissan for the repair of this incident may be denied if the repair is not Page 9281 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4106 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1266 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 662 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Specifications Constant Velocity Joint: Specifications DIMENSIONS Fixed Joint Axial End Play ................................................................................................................... .................................................. 1 mm (0.04 inch) Page 8745 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2564 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4892 5. Install the new hose between the vent control valve and the metal breather tube (see Figure 5). 6. Reinstall the spare tire. 7. If equipped, reinstall the bedliner. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 6296 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1973 Valve Seat: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Head. Page 5887 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3676 Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams EC-MIL/DL-01 MIL & Data Link Connectors Circuit Diagrams MIL & Data Link Connectors MIL and Data Link Connectors Circuit Connectors Page 6173 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7720 1. Remove snap ring, then draw drive shaft out. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop drive shaft. 2. Remove oil seal. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front housing. 3. Remove connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop control valve. ASSEMBLY Assemble oil pump, noting the following instructions. ^ Make sure O-rings and oil seal are properly installed. ^ Always install new O-rings and oil seal. ^ Be careful of oil seal direction. ^ Cam ring, rotor and vanes must be replaced as a set if necessary. ^ When assembling, coat each part with ATF. Page 7494 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 2709 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3756 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). Page 133 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 657 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4671 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2910 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4856 5. Install the new hose between the vent control valve and the metal breather tube (see Figure 5). 6. Reinstall the spare tire. 7. If equipped, reinstall the bedliner. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 5112 Ground Distribution Page 6169 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Resistance 166.5 - 302.5 ohms at 68 deg F Page 1693 which will result in contamination, and damage to recovery/recycle equipment. ^ Use equipment designed to meet Society of Automotive engineers (SAE) standards, which specify R-134a service equipment fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME), and service hose identification (black stripe on hose). ^ Adapters to convert from one size fitting to the other must never be used; refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and system failure may result. ^ The use of incorrect equipment will result in refrigerant and/or lubricant contamination, which may cause A/C system or equipment failure. ^ ACR(4) machine will perform all required service functions (recovery, evacuation, recycle, recharge). ^ High volume A/C service facilities may benefit from "component" A/C service equipment (vacuum pump, weight scale, manifold gauge set) to supplement the ACR(4). Comments regarding recovery/recycling equipment: ^ Be certain to follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. ^ Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ^ Only R-134a containers with a 1/2"-16 ACME can be used to add R-134a to the ACR4 recovery/recycle machine. ^ Periodic maintenance of this equipment is required; follow the manufacturer's recommendations as described in the equipment instruction manual. Page 4438 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 6294 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Classification: EC99-005b Reference: NTB99-053b Date: January 22, 2002 NISSAN REVISED TPS ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE This bulletin amends NTB99-053a. The Service Information and Service Procedure has been revised. In addition, TPS Connector tool (Kent-Moore # J45178) information has been included. Please discard all copies of NTB99-053a. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1995-1998 Maxima (A32) 1996-1998 Pathfinder (R50) 1995-1998 240SX (S14) 1995-1998 Sentra/200SX (B14) w/GA16 & SR20 engines 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998 Frontier (D22) 1995-1997 Altima (U13) 1998 Altima (L30) 1996-1998 Quest (V40) SERVICE INFORMATION The adjustment procedure for the throttle position sensor (TPS) has been revised and standardized for all the Applied Vehicles. ^ The TPS contains a closed throttle position switch (CTPS) and a variable output throttle position sensor. ^ This procedure uses the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) status (ON or OFF) instead of the throttle position sensor (variable output voltage) to adjust the TPS. ^ Incorrect adjustment of the CTPS may cause one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to be displayed: P1447, P0120, P0510, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P1705. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check fast idle cam (FIC) function, if equipped (refer to appropriate Service Manual). When finished, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and the fast idle cam (if equipped) has released. Then turn the engine "OFF". 2. Disconnect the harness connector (see Figure 1) from the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) position of the throttle position sensor (TPS). 3. Connect an ohmmeter across the terminals for the closed throttle position switch (CTPS). Page 9353 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5950 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) 1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector. 2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: Approximately 166.5 - 203.5 ohms [at 20°C (68°F)] If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). Page 8183 Comments regarding condensers: ^ The parallel flow condenser can be identified by the refrigerant end tanks, and smaller, more closely spaced center section tubes. Page 6242 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2692 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6950 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 860 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 277 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4170 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3150 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5990 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2364 Specifications Page 6381 Without Scan Tools (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Perform test drive in "D" position (OD "ON") at least 20 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) (3) Stop the vehicle, turn ignition switch "OFF", wait at least 5 seconds and then turn "ON" (4) Perform "Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)" with ECM. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE COMPONENT INSPECTION Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve 1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3). Resistance: Approximately 25 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] 2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3) with battery voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be operated. 4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Page 112 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 1509 Spark Plug: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 6176 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 5917 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 5898 Ground Distribution Page 6241 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7338 Battery: Service and Repair Charging the Battery CAUTION: - Do not "quick charge" a fully discharged battery. - Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged. - When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the charger first, as this may cause a spark. - If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 60 °C (140 °F) stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature below 60 °C (140 °F). Charging Rates Amps Time 50 1 hour 25 2 hour 10 5 hour 5 10 hour Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate. NOTE: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate. - If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than .050, the battery should be replaced. Page 1072 ^ Refer to Figure 2 that applies to your model. ^ There should be continuity across the terminals with the throttle closed. NOTES: ^ An ohmmeter is used because CONSULT-II cannot display the CTPS status in all of the Applied Vehicles. ^ This adjustment procedure must be made with the TPS installed on the engine of the vehicle. ^ Do not touch the throttle drum when checking the CTPS signal or continuity. Doing so may cause an incorrect adjustment. ^ Nissan recommends using Kent-Moore TPS Connector Tool J-45178 for easy, accurate connection. See NTB01-023 for more information. 4. Refer to Chart 1 and select the correct thickness feeler gauges for your vehicle. 5. Check "A": Insert the thinner feeler gauge "A" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop. ^ The CTPS should have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "0 ohms"). Page 9248 Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1313 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4740 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 2685 Ground Distribution Page 7034 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2369 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 787 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2112 9. Wipe off the links of the timing chain next to the timing marks on the sprockets. Put paint marks on the timing chain, matching them with the timing marks on the cam sprockets and idler sprocket (see Figure 1). 10. Remove cam sprocket bolts, cam sprockets and upper timing chain. 11. Support lower timing chain by using a suitable tool as shown in Figure 2 to avoid chain tensioner spring from coming out. NOTE: This step is only to be applied when the lower cover is not being removed. 12. Remove the idler sprocket. Removal of Lower Timing Chain 1. Drain coolant by removing the cylinder block drain plug and opening the radiator drain cock (Refer to MA section of the Service Manual). 2. Drain engine oil. 3. Remove the following parts: ^ Alternator & A/C compressor drive belts. ^ Cooling fan with coupling. ^ Radiator shroud. 4. Remove the A/C compressor and position it to the side. Remove the idler pulley and bracket as well. 5. Set # 1 piston at TDC on its compression stroke. 6. Remove the distributor. Page 6041 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1873 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine. 2. Turn ignition switch off. 3. Release fuel pressure. 4. Remove all spark plugs 5. Disconnect distributor center cable 6. Attach a compression tester to No 1 cylinder 7. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep throttle valve wide open 8. Crank engine and record highest gauge indication. 9. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above. - Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. Compression pressure: kPa (kg/cm2, psi) /rpm Standard: 1,226 (12.5, 178) /300 Minimum: 1,030 (10.5, 149) /300 Difference limit between cylinders: 98 (1.0,14) /300 10. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through spark plug holes. b. Retest compression. - If adding oil improves cylinder compression, piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. - If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace it. - If compression stays low in two cylinders that are next to each other: a. The cylinder head gasket may be leaking, or b. Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. Page 4676 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 6598 Page 4644 Without CONSULT 1. Remove MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve. 2. Check air passage continuity. 3. If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace solenoid valve. Page 5156 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3148 Ground Distribution Page 2866 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7573 The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3173 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4304 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3329 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6192 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3941 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4224 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 25 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 2878 ^ Refer to Figure 3 for the specific vehicle you are working on CAUTION: Never adjust the throttle slop screw. It is pre-set at the factory. 6. Check "B"; Insert the thicker feeler gauge "B" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop (see Figure 3). The CTPS should NOT have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "OL"). 7. If the results of steps 5 and/or 6 are not OK, loosen the TPS retaining bolts and adjust the CTPS to achieve the correct results. 8. Tighten the TPS retaining bolts, then repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times to check the new adjustment. 9. Re-connect the harness connector to the CTPS portion of the (TPS). Reset throttle position sensor idle position memory. NOTE: Failure to reset the TPS idle position memory may result in the idle speed staying higher than specification. 10. Start engine and warm it to operating temperature. NOTE: Always warm up engine to normal operation temperature, If the engine is cool, the throttle position memory will not be reset correctly. Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 9358 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3564 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Testing and Inspection Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Page 5799 Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications Completely Closed Approx. 0.5 K ohms at 77 deg F Partially Open 0.5 - 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Comqletely Open Approx. 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Page 5946 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9013 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Page 5022 7. Remove the idler pulley assembly from the A/C compressor bracket. 8. Install the new idler pulley assembly making sure the E-ring is installed on the adjusting bolt. 9. Adjust the A/C drive belt deflection to specification. Refer to the "A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification" chart below. A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification 10. Tighten the nut that secures idler pulley to 16 - 22 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb). 11. Re-install the engine under cover. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 2789 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Page 4622 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 8214 Comments regarding leak detector use: ^ Existing R-12 leak detectors currently will not detect R-134a. ^ Many R-134a leak detectors will detect R-12; check with the equipment manufacturer. ^ Always refer to and follow the equipment manufacturers recommendations when operating leak detectors. Comments regarding weight scale use: ^ If the scale allows electronic control of the flow of refrigerant through the scale, (i.e. internal solenoid valves) be certain that the hose fitting size is 1/2"-16 ACME, and that no refrigerant other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricant) have been used with the scale. Charging Cylinder ^ The use of a charging cylinder is not recommended because: ^ The refrigerant may be vented into the air from the top valve of cylinder when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. ^ The accuracy of a charging cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Service Procedures ^ The service procedures for R-134a A/C systems are basically the same as for R-12 A/C systems, however, the following should always be kept in mind: ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge R-134a systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service work. ^ R-134a and R-12 A/C components are not interchangeable. Cleaning of used (in service) components for use with another type of refrigerant and/or lubricant is not an acceptable practice, and may result in A/C system failure. ^ Always use the proper PAG oil when servicing an R-134a A/C system. The Nissan part number for the appropriate PAG compressor oil can be found on the A/C specification label in the engine compartment, and also in the Factory Service Manual, and on the label on the compressor. These oils are only available from your Nissan Parts Department. ^ When leak checking an R-134a system, be certain that you are using a detector which will detect R-134a. ^ As mentioned previously in this bulletin, the R-134a PAG lubricants absorb moisture; PAG oil containers and A/C components containing PAG oil must remain tightly sealed until ready for use. ^ Unlike R-12 systems, R-134a systems do not exhibit a "clear sight glass", even when properly charged. For this reason, the R-134a A/C systems have no sight glass. ^ With R-134a systems it is important to properly control the amount of refrigerant charged into the system during system charging. A charging machine or weight scale must always be used during charging for proper charge determination. ^ Questions regarding R-12 or R-134a should be addressed to your Regional Service Staff or the FIXS Hotline. Page 3767 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 8030 WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC REPLACEMENT 1. Remove free running hub assembly. (4WD) Refer to Locking Hub / Service and Repair. Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Combination Flasher Unit M45 Main Harness (Part 1 Of 2) Main Harness Layout Page 2318 customer should then replace with another set of platinum tip plugs rather than the standard plugs called out in the owners manual. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding table shown. Page 7519 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 9432 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8586 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 1090 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 9422 Ground Distribution Page 4796 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Specifications Page 1375 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 6838 Page 4587 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4460 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1049 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3668 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4117 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5804 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4361 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8938 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3063 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Headlight Connector - Replacement Headlamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Headlight Connector - Replacement Classification: EL01-005 Reference: NTB01-028 Date: May 15, 2001 HEADLIGHT CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except vehicles equipped with Xenon(TM) headlights SERVICE INFORMATION Nissan has established replacement headlight connectors and service procedures to replace damaged connectors on the applied vehicles. If the headlight wire harness connector is damaged, causing intermittent or improper headlight operation, or the connector otherwise needs replacement, follow the procedures in this bulletin. Page 2981 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8434 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 1584 Use a backup wrench on the low hose when tightening the joint connection nut. 8. Reinstall the clip to the support bracket (see Figure 2). Tighten the clip mounting bolt to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 Kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb). 9. Evacuate and recharge the vehicle's A/C system with 0.60 - 0.70 kg (1.32-1.54 lb) of R134a refrigerant. Refer to page HA-51 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C evacuation and recharge procedure. 10. Check the A/C low hose for refrigerant leaks. Refer to pages HA-48 through HA-50 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C leak test procedure. If a leak is found, repair as necessary before proceeding with step 11. 11. Check A/C performance. Refer to page HA-38 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C performance check procedure. A. If the A/C performance is within specification, this service procedure is complete. B. If the A/C performance is not within specification, repair as necessary. Low Hose Angle Adjustment 1. Loosen the joint connection between the A/C low hose and the mating A/C low pipe by turning the joint connection nut 1/4 turn counterclockwise (see Figure 4). CAUTION: Do not loosen the joint connection nut more than 1/4 turn as refrigerant can escape and the 0-ring may become damaged. Also, use a backup wrench on the hose when loosening the joint connection nut. 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the bolt that secures the clip to the support bracket (see Figure 4). 3. Move the A/C low hose so that it is positioned between 0° and 5° relative to the horizontal plane (see Figure 5). 4. Retighten the clip mounting bolt to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 Kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb) Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 773 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch REMOVAL Passenger Air Bag Module Deactivation Switch CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 1. Detach instrument stay cover lower center from instrument panel. 2. Disconnect passenger air bag deactivation switch harness connector and cigarette lighter harness connector. 3. Remove instrument stay cover lower center. 4. Remove two screws and remove passenger air bag deactivation switch. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Passenger air bag deactivation switch is keyed for proper installation. Improper positioning of the switch will result in damage to the switch. NOTE: Be sure that passenger air bag deactivation switch and lock cylinder are in the same position as during removal for proper engagement. To install, reverse removal procedure. After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 621 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Knock sensor - Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M ohms. 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminal (1) and ground. Resistance: 500 - 620 K Ohms [at 25°C (77°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 7586 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Combination Flasher Unit M45 Main Harness (Part 1 Of 2) Main Harness Layout Page 8361 12. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to make sure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 12). 13. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 14. Confirm that the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring by latching and unlatching it and allowing it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 15. Repeat steps 1 through 14 of this procedure on the remaining front seat belt. Page 3526 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4376 Ground Distribution Page 7125 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 1324 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PNP/SW-01 Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Circuit Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 3036 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7254 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder Overhaul - Check all internal parts for wear, rust and damage. Replace if necessary. - Pay attention not to scratch cylinder when installing pistons. Page 883 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-VSS-01 Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Circuit Diagrams Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit (VSS) Connectors Page 4715 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2151 Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 744 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7133 - Check pistons for uneven surface, chips or cracks. Replace if any of these conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with emery sand paper even if rust or foreign objects are stuck to sliding surface. Slide Pin, Pin Bolt And Pin Boot Check for wear, cracks or other damage. Replace if any of these conditions are observed. Rotor Runout 1. Check runout using a dial indicator. Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring. 2. If the runout is out of specification, machine rotor with on-car brake lathe ("MAD, DL-8700", "AMMCO 700 and 705" or equivalent. Thickness If thickness variation exceeds the specification, machine rotor with on-car brake lathe. Thickness variation (at least 8 positions): Maximum 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) ASSEMBLY Page 2860 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1196 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 939 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6557 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4215 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2131 Overall inspection sequence Page 4785 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7741 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 804 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 698 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2453 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3614 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 777 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 6314 Page 93 Page 1894 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Head. Page 7719 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair PRE-DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the following items are found. ^ Oil leak from any point shown in the figure. ^ Deformed or damaged pulley. ^ Poor performance. INSPECTION ^ If pulley and/or pulley shaft is cracked or deformed, replace it. ^ If fluid leak is found around the pulley shaft, replace the oil seal. DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: ^ Parts which can be disassembled are strictly limited. Never disassemble parts other than those specified. ^ Disassemble in as clean a place as possible. ^ Clean your hands before disassembly. ^ Do not use rags; use nylon cloths or paper towels. ^ When disassembling and reassembling, do not let foreign matter enter or contact the parts. Page 6094 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7332 Battery: Testing and Inspection Hydrometer Temperature Correction Hydrometer Temperature Correction Hydrometer Temperature Correction ^ Use the chart to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature. Page 6369 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 6458 Park Gear: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Page 5111 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5344 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Front Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed- end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. Page 3514 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3042 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Locations Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Specified amount ................................................................................................................................. .................................................. 8.75 qts. (7.9 Liters) Page 1026 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9177 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1423 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 7950 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 420 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Specifications Compression Check: Specifications GENERAL ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3545 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 139 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 9129 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2581 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 9134 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5735 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3132 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2672 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4036 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 1435 Alignment: Specifications King Pin Inclination GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................... 10°18' (10.30°) Nominal ...................................................................... ......................................................................................................................... 10°48' (10.80°) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 11°18' (11.30°) Page 4658 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3070 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4972 Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid (the EVAP canister vent control valve) responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows "EVAP Control System (Small Leak)" diagnosis. Page 949 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 403 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Absolute pressure sensor 1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. 2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch "ON" and check output voltage between ECM terminal (45) and engine ground. The voltage should be 3.2 to 4.8 V. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum of -26.7 kPa (-200 mmHg, -7.87 inHg) to absolute pressure sensor as shown in figure and check the output voltage. The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4 V lower than the value measured in step 3. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply vacuum below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 in Hg). 5. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor. Page 5065 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 558 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6265 Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve 1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly. 2. Check torque converter clutch control valve. - Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. - Valve, and sleeve are tree from burrs, dents and scratches. - Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. - Hydraulic line is tree from obstacles. 3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve. Page 5401 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6947 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2879 11. Using CONSULT-II select ENGINE, DATA MONITOR (Manual trigger), Selections From Menu, CLSD THL/P SW, and Enter. 12. Stop engine (turn ignition switch "OFF"). 13. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least five seconds. 14. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least ten seconds. 15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for 1 to 16 times until CLSD THL/P SW in CONSULT-II changes to "ON". Page 9093 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 1027 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3012 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Connector Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 9568 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 2572 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6206 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4737 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 8648 Disclaimer Page 5405 Ground Distribution Page 9557 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1177 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3431 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3492 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6444 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Specified type: Continental U.S. and Alaska ....................................................................................... ............................................................................... Nissan Matic "D" Canada ......................................................................................................................................................... Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid NOTE: Dexron III/Mercon or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an Infiniti dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of Dexron III/Mercon Automatic Transmission Fluid. Front Propeller Shaft Page 633 Oxygen Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 6558 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3133 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7646 Ground Distribution Page 9198 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8930 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4251 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6356 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Specifications Page 7143 Brake Pad: Specifications Pad Minimum Thickness 0.079 in Page 6756 C. Install the two halves of the collet P/N J-45073-2 around the ABS rotor ring making sure the lower lip of each collet is slid under the rotor ring (see Figure 2a). D. Slide the sleeve (P/N J-25852-4) over the two halves of the collet (see Figure 2b). E. Tighten the forcing screw of the extension tube until the rotor ring is pulled free (see Figure 2c). Do not use an impact wrench to tighten the forcing screw. F. Remove the sleeve, collets, extension tube, and rotor ring from the axle shaft. Brake Backing Plate Removal (with inner axle bearing) 1. Clamp the vehicle's axle shaft (on the wheel studs) in a vise. NOTE: Use soft jaws when clamping the wheel studs. 2. Bend down the tabs of the bearing locknut lockwasher with a hammer and punch (see Figure 3). MIL ON - DTC P0420 Set/Exhaust Rattle Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins MIL ON - DTC P0420 Set/Exhaust Rattle Classification: EC00-017 Reference: NTB00-058 Date: July 12, 2000 1998 FRONTIER; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0420 STORED AND/OR EXHAUST RATTLE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998 Frontier (D22) Federal Emissions Specification ONLY APPLIED VIN: up to 1N6DD26Y9WC347717 APPLIED DATE: up to 2/13/98 APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a MIL "ON" with DTC P0420 (Three-Way Catalyst Function) stored in the ECM and/or exhaust rattle noise, the vehicle may have poor three-way catalyst function. This is usually the result of misfire. In severe cases, the catalyst structure may collapse resulting in an exhaust rattle. When proper diagnosis confirms that the three-way catalyst in an Applied Vehicle requires replacement, regardless of the root cause, also install platinum tip spark plugs specified in the Parts Information section. Platinum tip plugs provide enhanced misfire resistance under extreme driving conditions. Use the following service procedure to resolve the incident, should it occur. NOTE: If the three-way catalyst's honeycomb internal structure has collapsed, the debris will typically be trapped in the exhaust piping and muffler, causing an exhaust rattle. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Perform Self-Diagnosis using CONSULT-II. Print and attach the Freeze Frame data to the repair order. 2. If there is a DTC stored in addition to P0420, diagnose and repair the additional DTC(s) first, using the appropriate Service Manual procedure(s). 3. After diagnosing and repairing the vehicle for the non-P0420 DTC, or if P0420 is the only DTC, use the appropriate Service Manual to determine the incident cause, and repair it. NOTE: Always check the secondary ignition circuit. Check distributor cap for moisture, tracking or other indicators of insulator degradation that may cause a misfire under load. 4. If diagnosis has determined that replacement of the three-way catalyst is also necessary, replace it and install four new platinum tip spark plugs from the Parts Information section. NOTE: If the catalyst is being replaced, inspect its internal honeycomb structure by looking into each end of the converter. If the structure has collapsed or deteriorated severely, check the exhaust piping and muffler for debris. Remove all debris from the exhaust system. Replace the muffler as needed. 5. Make a note in the vehicle maintenance logs and notify the customer that platinum tip spark plugs have been installed, and that this is an upgrade from that listed in the owners manual. The maintenance interval for platinum tip spark plugs is 60,000 miles and Nissan recommends that the Page 1284 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-PST/SW-01 Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Diagrams Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 5288 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2723 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5191 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3027 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6046 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3050 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7618 2. Check outside and inside wheel runout. Refer to illustrations. 3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. 5. Check steering linkage for looseness. 6. Check that front shock absorbers work properly by using the standard bounce test. 7. Measure vehicle height (Unladen): H = A - B mm (inch) Refer to Specification Table. a. Exercise the front suspension by bouncing the front of the vehicle 4 or 5 times to ensure that the vehicle is in a neutral height attitude. b. Measure wheel alignment. Refer to Specification Table. c. If wheel alignment is not as specified, adjust vehicle posture. Refer to Specification Table. d. Adjust wheel alignment. Refer to Specification Table. Page 6587 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM controls torque converter clutch solenoid valve to cancel the lock-up condition of A/T. When the solenoid valve is turned on, lock-up is cancelled. When the solenoid valve is turned oft, A/T lock-up is operational. Conditions for lock-up cancel: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned "ON" when; Throttle valve is fully closed (during idling or deceleration) - Engine coolant temperature is below 40° C (104° F) - Engine is stopped Conditions for lock-up operation: Under 55 to 63 km/h (34 to 39 MPH) (2/8 throttle on flat road), lock-up does not operate even when the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is "OFF". - Over 58 to 66 km/h (36 to 41 MPH) (2/8 throttle on flat road), lock-up should operate because the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is "OFF". To confirm vehicle lock-up, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve must be in operation ("ON" during idle and deceleration, and "OFF" during acceleration) and engine speed should drop. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there will be no lock-up. CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. Specifications Ignition Coil: Specifications Primary Resistance Approx. 1.0 ohms at 68 deg F Secondary Resistance Approx. 10 K ohms at 68 deg F Page 7570 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Specifications Compression Check: Specifications GENERAL ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS Page 5167 EGR Control Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-EGRC/V-01 EGRC-solenoid Valve (DTC: P1400) Circuit Diagrams EGRC-solenoid Valve (DTC: P1400) EGRC Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Page 3810 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1162 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7643 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6220 Spark Plug: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3134 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5351 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2852 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2936 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5983 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 631 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1582 1. Visually inspect the metal tube portion of the A/C low hose between the compressor flange and the rubber hose for cracks or signs of leakage such as traces of oil or dirt deposits (see Figure 1). NOTE: Use a mirror and flashlight (as needed) to view the underside of the hose end. Low Hose Leak Detector Inspection 1. Use an approved electronic leak detector (Kent Moore model # J39400 or # J41995) to check the A/C low hose for leaks. Refer to pages HA-48 through HA-50 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the leak check procedure. NOTE: Make sure the electronic leak detector is properly calibrated and that the probe tip filter is clean before performing the leak check. Refer to the leak detector owner's manual to calibrate and/or change the probe tip filter as needed. A/C Low Hose Installation 1. Use appropriate equipment to discharge and recover all remaining refrigerant from the vehicle's A/C system. Refer to pages HA-51 and HA-52 of the 1998 Nissan Frontier Service manual for the discharge and recovery procedure. Page 6159 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 831 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 6411 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4287 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Diagram Information and Instructions Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6970 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position switch is "ON". ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. Methods of Preventing Over-Discharge Battery: Service and Repair Methods of Preventing Over-Discharge CAUTION: If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables: - Use a 12-volt booster battery. - After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact. - Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity. The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery. - The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept clean and dry. - The terminal connections should be clean and tight. - At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level. - When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of time, disconnect the negative battery terminal. (If the vehicle has an extended storage switch, turn it off.) - Check the charge condition of the battery. Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a close check on charge condition to prevent overdischarge. Page 3732 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1192 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5267 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications Mass Air Flow Table Mass Air Flow Table Supply Voltage 11 - 14 V Output Voltage 0.9 - 1.8 V At idle with engine warmed up and running under no load. Air Flow At Idle 0.9 - 5.8 g/sec Air Flow At 2,500 RPM 7.5 - 13.2 g/sec Page 3639 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3604 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Diagrams EC-ECTS-01 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Circuit Diagrams Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT REFRIGERANT KILOGRAMS POUNDS (US) 0.75-0.85 1.65-1.87 Page 7587 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. Page 1422 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 3107 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1785 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 6321 Page 2295 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Views Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 4713 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 6285 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9233 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5494 Ground Distribution Page 163 Page 6779 6. Separate drive shaft from knuckle spindle by slightly tapping end of drive shaft. DISASSEMBLY Final Drive Side (TS82F) 1. Remove plug seal from slide joint housing by lightly tapping around slide joint housing. 2. Remove boot bands. 3. Move boot and slide joint housing toward wheel side, and put matching marks. 4. Remove snap ring. Page 505 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3918 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 6942 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 8404 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 6757 3. Install the bearing lock nut wrench P/N J-45073-1 on the axle locknut (see Figure 4a). 4. Loosen and remove the axle locknut (see Figure 4b). 5. Slide the extension tube and sleeve over the vehicle's axle shaft (see Figure 1b). 6. Install the two halves of the bearing puller jaw P/N J-45073-7 over the brake backing plate studs (see Figure 5a). 7. Slide the sleeve P/N J-25852-4 over the bearing puller jaw halves (see Figure 5b). 8. Install a nut on each brake backing plate stud (see Figure 5c). 9. Tighten the forcing screw of the extension tube until the brake backing plate (with inner wheel bearing) is pulled free (see Figure 5d). IMPORTANT: Do not use an impact wrench to tighten the forcing screw. 10. Remove the sleeve, bearing puller jaws, extension tube, and backing plate (with inner axle bearing) from the axle shaft. 11. If needed, press the inner axle bearing race out of the backing plate using conventional pressing methods. Outer Axle Bearing Removal (from axle shaft) 1. Slide the extension tube and sleeve over the vehicle's axle shaft (see Figure 1b). Page 8587 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 137 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 967 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3218 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 9453 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4109 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4591 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5749 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5188 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Diagram Information and Instructions Dome Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3120 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 983 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5938 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4186 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Adjustments Heater Control Valve Cable: Adjustments TEMPERATURE CONTROL CABLE - When adjusting ventilator door rod and defrost door rod, first disconnect mode control cable from side link. Reconnect and readjust mode control cable. - Move temperature control lever to max. COLD position. Set air mix door lever in full hot mode. Pull on outer cable in direction of arrow and then clamp it. - After positioning temperature control cable, check that it operates properly. Page 293 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1102 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6374 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4584 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 882 Control Units/Module F29 Control Units/Module Page 4535 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5416 Fuel Injector: Connector Views Injector Injector Circuit Connectors Page 6835 Wheel Hub (Locking): Specifications Page 650 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5490 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3067 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4905 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2383 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 648 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Description and Operation Fast Idle Cam: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The FIC is installed on the throttle body to maintain adequate engine speed while the engine is cold. It is operated by a volumetric change in wax located inside the thermo-element. The thermoelement is operated by engine coolant temperature. Page 8774 F. Inspect for damage using fluorescent light source and magnification. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. G. Use abrasive cleaning on test section to remove up to 0.5 mil of damaged top/clear coat.* If damage is less than 0.5 mil deep, clean affected panels with abrasive method. After polishing, inspect for swirl marks using halogen lights. If damage is more than 0.5 mil deep, the affected panels must be repaired either by re-clear, re-color/clear coat, or re-color coated (on vehicles with no final clear coat). A. Wash Procedure Wash Equipment and Materials: Spray wash system (a mobile or stationary unit with hand held spray similar to a coin operated car wash that provides soap solution, rinse water and de-ionized final rinse). Car wash detergent containing no phosphates, (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100). Clean 100% cotton terry cloth towels. De-ionized water for the final rinse. De-ionized water is highly recommended as it reduces water spotting. De-ionizing cylinders can be purchased or rented from water purification companies 1. During the summer months, the early morning hours are the best time to wash a car unless you can wash and dry it in the shade. Never wash a car under the hot sun. All paint is subject to water spot damage when washed under the sun due to high surface temperature. 2. Thoroughly rinse oft the surface dirt and foreign materials with a spray of clean tap water. 3. Gently apply detergent and water solution (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Caution: When washing a convertible rear window use gentle horizontal and vertical strokes, do not use a circular motion.Use a clean terry cloth towel. Also refer to NTB92-092 for additional information on convertible wash procedure. 4. Rinse with a spray of clean tap water. Make sure all detergent is flushed off the body. If soap dries on the convertible rear window or some moldings it may cause streaking. Use a spray of de-ionized water for the final rinse. 5. Use a clean damp terry cloth towel and gentle pressure to remove the majority of the rinse water allowing the remaining water film to air dry. Replace the towel frequently to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. 6. Always wash, rinse, and dry a vehicle beginning with the roof and glass. Then the hood and trunk followed by the vertical surfaces. Wash, rinse, and dry one section at a time if low humidity causes fast drying. Do not allow soap solution or rinse water to dry on the finish. B. Identifying Contamination Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp or a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is most easily done with a 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Page 6523 13. Remove the shifter assembly by sliding it backward, then down slightly, then forward (see Figure 9). 14. Apply white grease to the end of the main tube and install the new shifter assembly by inserting the main tube over the knob at the top of the steering column bracket (see Figure 9). CAUTION: DO NOT get white grease on the interior upholstery. 15. Install the (2) grade 7 bolts (identified by the 7 on the head) to attach the A" control device to the steering column (refer to Figure 8). Bolt torque specification: 64 to 80 in/lb (0.86 to 1.10 kg/m). 16. Check to make sure no wires are pinched or trapped between the shifter assembly and the steering column. 17. Connect the All cable to the A/T shifter assembly (refer to Figure 7). 18. Connect the brake pedal interlock solenoid harness located under the steering column assembly (refer to Figure 6). 19. Connect the key lock rod from the All shifter assembly and insert the pin clip (refer to Figure 5). 20. Install the spring clip from the parts kit onto the A/T shifter assembly (see Figure 10). 21. Apply white grease to the pivot end and shaft of the shift lever and install it into the A/T shifter assembly. Insert the clevis pin from the steering column side to secure the lever and then install the pin clip. Secure the O/D switch wire to the main tube with the tie wrap from the parts kit and reposition the rubber boot over the lever connector. Ensure the O/D switch wire is routed through the notch on the boot (refer to Figures 4 & 5). CAUTION: DO NOT get white grease on the interior upholstery. 22. Connect the O/D switch wire connector (on the top of the steering column) and install it on the mounting bracket (refer to Figure 4). If the bracket was broken during removal, use a tie wrap (not provided) to secure the overdrive switch wire connector to the steering column. Ensure that it does not rattle. Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Coil: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8806 Finish Kare products are marketed by mobile distributors which will deliver the product directly to your dealership. If a Finish Kare distributor is not located in your area, Finish Kare can be contacted at the number above for direct shipment from their national office. Page 2223 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Diagram Information and Instructions Leak Detection Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 2582 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Specifications Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS G Sensor ............................................................................................................................................. ........................ 4.4 - 5.8 Nm (39.1 - 51.2 inch lbs.) Keyless Entry - Remote Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 99-036A Date: 000510 Keyless Entry - Remote Programming Classification: EL99-001A Reference: NTB99-036A Date: May 10, 2000 NISSAN KEYLESS REMOTE ENTRY PROGRAMMING This amended version of NTB99-036 updates the Applied Vehicle, Service Information, and Service This amended Procedure Sections. Please discard all paper copies of NTB99-036 APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-00 Altima (L30) 1998-00 Frontier (D22) 1998-99 Maxima (A32) 2000 Maxima (A33) 1998-00 Pathfinder (R50) 1998-99 Sentra (B14) 2000 Sentra (B15) 1999-00 Quest (V41) 2000 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION If a remote switch assembly (remote controller) for an Applied Nissan vehicle does not operate or operates intermittently, it may need to be re-programmed. Use the following procedure to program the remote controller. NOTE: Not all trim level variations of a given vehicle include the remote controller function. Review the vehicle sales brochure to determine if the vehicle trim level is equipped with the remote controller function before starting the programming procedure. Also confirm that the remote controller(s) being programmed is the correct remote controller for the vehicle. NOTE: A. 1998-99 Altima, Maxima, Pathfinder, Sentra, and Frontier Models, 1999 Quest, and 2000 Frontier Models built before VIN 343314: If the vehicle has more than one remote controller, the remote controllers must all be programmed at the same time (a maximum of 4 remotes can be programmed). B. All 2000 Altima, Maxima, Pathfinder, Sentra, Quest, Xterra, Frontier Crew Cab and Desert Runner Models, and Frontier Models built after VIN 343314: If the vehicle has more than one remote controller, the oldest ID code is erased when programming a new remote when there are already 4 ID codes in memory. If there are less than 4 ID codes stored in memory, then the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased, unless a new remote is programmed after filling all 4 memory positions. A maximum of 4 remotes can be programmed. NOTE: Regarding 2000 Maxima, Pathfinder, and Sentra vehicles: You may use CONSULT-II to program remotes for these vehicles. Refer to the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further information. You may also program these vehicle remotes using the Service Procedure provided below. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Re-programming of an otherwise functional remote controller is not covered by warranty. Page 1038 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5290 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 138 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4156 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 8842 C. Remove the sunroof panel by lifting the panel so that it stands straight up, then slide it toward the drivers side to release it from the hinge brackets (see Figure 3). Place the sunroof panel in a safe place until it is reinstalled. 2. Remove the sunroof weather strip from the vehicle body (see Figure 4). Page 6588 NOTE: If "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform the test at a temperature of -10° C (14° F) or higher. With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 5 seconds. (3) Start engine. (4) Select "TCC S/V FNCTN P1776" of "A/T (TCC S/N)" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. (5) Touch "START". (6) When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take approximately 20 seconds.) Selector lever: D (OD "ON") Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) CMPS.RPM (REF): Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) B/FUEL SCHDL: 2.5 - 5 ms THRTL POS SEN: Less than 1.3V If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2). (7) Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELFDIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE". OR With Generic Scan Tool (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Perform test drive in "D" position (OD "ON") at least 20 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) (3) Select MODE 7 with GST. OR Page 2455 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3013 Control Units/Module F29 Control Units/Module Page 9379 Headlamp: Electrical Diagrams Canada Schematic (For Canada) Circuit Schematic Page 1544 7. Remove the idler pulley assembly from the A/C compressor bracket. 8. Install the new idler pulley assembly making sure the E-ring is installed on the adjusting bolt. 9. Adjust the A/C drive belt deflection to specification. Refer to the "A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification" chart below. A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification 10. Tighten the nut that secures idler pulley to 16 - 22 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb). 11. Re-install the engine under cover. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 4716 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2747 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications For FRONT or REAR Heated Oxygen Sensors. Resistance 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 77 deg F Page 9418 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 9255 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1215 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 5677 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Tank fuel temperature sensor Check resistance by heating with hot water as shown in the figure or a heat gun. If NG, replace tank fuel temperature sensor. Page 591 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4025 Page 507 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2770 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 901 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6145 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 7979 Wheels: Specifications DIMENSIONS Aluminum Wheel: Maximum Radial Runout ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) Maximum Lateral Runout ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) Steel Wheel: 14 Inch: Painted: Maximum Radial Runout ................................................................................................................................................. 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) Maximum Lateral Runout ................................................................................................................................................ 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) Plated: Maximum Radial Runout ................................................................................................................................................. 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) Maximum Lateral Runout ................................................................................................................................................ 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) 15 Inch: Maximum Radial Runout ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) Maximum Lateral Runout ...................................................................................................................................................... 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) NOTE: Runout average = (Outside runout value + inside runout value) x 0.5 Page 5189 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 7149 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 1010 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 107 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 1915 Connecting Rod: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Block. Wheel Fastener Torque Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Torque Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Lug Nut ................................................................................................................................................ ............................ 118 - 147 Nm (87 - 108 ft. lbs.) Page 791 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5403 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 7653 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Specifications Parking Brake Control: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Control Mounting Bracket ....................................................................................................................................... 10.8 - 14.6 Nm (96 - 129.6 inch lbs.) Page 4152 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2995 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2869 Throttle Full Close Switch: Connector Views Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 849 indications with no drop-outs or spikes. Note: A 2-3 mph (3-5 kph) difference between the CONSULT display and the speedometer is normal. 4. a) If the speedometer and speed sensor values are 0K, proceed to # 5. b) If the speedometer and speed sensor data are erratic, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to service manual for Diagnosis information. 5. Check the existing ECM part number in the vehicle that is listed either on the CONSULT freeze frame data or checked by CONSULT ECM Part Number function (see Figure 1). 6. If existing Part Number is one of those listed in Table 1, install the appropriate P/N listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4067 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 271 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6395 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3661 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6783 1. Apply multi-purpose grease. 2. Install bearing spacer onto drive shaft. Make sure that the bearing spacer is facing in the proper direction. 3. After installing wheel hub and wheel bearing, adjust wheel bearing preload. 4. When installing drive shaft, adjust drive shaft axial end play by selecting a suitable snap ring. a. Temporarily install new snap ring on drive shaft in the same thickness as it was installed before removal. b. Set dial gauge on drive shaft end. c. Measure axial end play of drive shaft. Axial end play: 0.45 mm (0.0177 inch) or less d. If axial end play is not within the specified limit, select another snap ring. Available Driveshaft Snap Rings Thickness And Part No. 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) ...................................................................................... ............................................................................ 39253-88 G10 1.3 mm (0.051 inch) ........................ .......................................................................................................................................... 39253-88 G11 1.5 mm (0.059 inch) ..................................................................................................................... ............................................. 39253-88 G12 1.7 mm (0.067 inch) ....................................................... ........................................................................................................... 39253-88 G13 Page 456 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 8744 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5633 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Paint - Refinish Paint Codes/Cross Reference Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Refinish Paint Codes/Cross Reference Classification: BT97-004 Reference: NTB97-052 Date: July 30, 1997 1998 MODEL REFINISH PAINT CODES APPLIED VEHICLES: All SERVICE INFORMATION Page 380 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and oil may be hot. - For M/T models, put gearshift lever in Neutral "N" position. For A/T models, put selector lever in Park "P" position. 1. Check oil level. 2. Remove oil pressure switch. 3. Install pressure gauge. 4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 5. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load. - If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks. 6. Install oil pressure switch with sealant. Page 6781 - After drive shaft has been assembled, ensure that it moves smoothly over its entire range without binding. - Use Nissan genuine grease, or equivalent after every overhaul. Final Drive Side (TS82F) 1. Install new small boot band, boot and side joint housing to drive shaft. Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damaging boot during installation. 2. Install spider assembly securely, making sure marks are properly aligned. - Press-fit with spider assembly serration chamfer facing shaft. 3. Install new snap ring. 4. Pack with grease. Specified amount of grease: 95 - 105 grams (3.35 - 3.70 ounce) 5. Make sure that the boot is properly installed on the drive shaft groove. Set the boot so that it does not swell or deform when its length is "L". Length "L1": 95 - 97 mm (3.74 - 3.82 inch) 6. Lock new large boot band securely with a suitable tool, then lock new small boot band. Page 3601 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4514 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4296 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3620 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Specifications Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Switch Nut ........................................................................................................................................... ........................... 12 - 15 Nm (108 - 132 inch lbs.) Page 6788 Constant Velocity Joint: Application and ID Final Drive Side ................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... TS82F Wheel Side .......................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ ZF100 Page 2807 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 957 Leak Detection Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board diagnosis. Page 5638 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4072 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Front Seat Belt Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt CAUTION: - Do not disassemble buckle or seat belt assembly. - Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out. - Never oil tongue and buckle. - If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the seat belt assembly. - If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly. - When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly. After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached hardware. Front Seat Belt REMOVAL Remove front seat. 1. Remove buckle. 2. Remove floor anchor bolt. 3. Remove adjuster cover and upper guide loop anchor bolt. - For King Cab models, remove jump seat. - Remove rear pillar lower and upper garnishes. 4. Remove guide plate. 5. Remove two adjuster bolts and adjuster assembly. (Refer to "A" in image). Page 832 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PNP/SW-01 Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Circuit Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 2106 4. Use a suitable tool, such as a small pry bar or large screwdriver (approximately 12 inches long). Pry the cam bracket as shown in Figure 2, while applying approximately 3 pounds (1.4 kg.) of force to the end of the tool. This will produce approximately 30 pounds (13.6 kg) of force against the cam bracket (shown schematically in Figure 1). CAUTION: The amount of movement of the cam bracket is so small that no noticeable movement will be observed. Do not apply excessive force to the cam bracket. 5. While holding pressure (approximately 3 pounds, 1.4 kg) on the end of the pry bar, tighten the bolts sufficiently to ensure the bracket will not move when the pressure is released. 6. Tighten the bolts in two steps, first to 17 inch pounds (0.1 NM. 0.01 kg m) and finally to 104 inch pounds (0.7 NM, 0.07 kg m) of torque. 7. Repeat this procedure for each of the nine remaining cam brackets. 8. Install the new upper chain tensioner (P/N 13070-9E003) following the normal Service Manual procedure. 9. Remove the rag from the timing chain area and reassemble. 10. Start engine and check for oil leaks and unusual noises. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Front Wheel Bearing Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Wheel Bearing - Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. - Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) - Adjust wheel bearing preload if there is any axial end play or wheel bearing does not turn smoothly. Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Front Differential Specified amount ................................................................................................................................. .................................................. 2.75 pts. (1.3 Liters) Rear Differential Specified amount: H190A .................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. 3.125 pts. (1.5 Liters) C200 ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..... 2.75 pts. (1.3 Liters) Page 2605 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 675 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Connectors Page 1811 10. Measure starting force "A" at wheel hub bolt. 11. Install lock washer by tightening the lock nut within 15 to 30 degrees. 12. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions to seat wheel bearing correctly. 13. Measure starting force "B" at wheel hub bolt. Refer to step 10. 14. Wheel bearing preload "C" can be calculated as shown below. C = B - A Wheel bearing preload "C": 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) 15. Repeat steps 3 through 14 until correct axial end play and wheel bearing preload are obtained. 16. Tighten screws to 1.2 - 1.8 Nm (10.4 - 15.6 inch lbs.). 17. Install free running hub. Page 824 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2090 Timing Chain: Service Precautions PART 1 OF 3 PART 2 OF 3 PART 3 OF 3 Page 2116 Use Genuine Nissan RTV silicone sealant P/N 999MP-A7007, Three Bond P/N TB1207D or equivalent. c. Also place RTV sealant on the head gasket surface. CAUTION: Be careful not to tear or damage the cylinder head gasket. CAUTION: Be careful upper timing chain does not slip or jump when installing the camshaft sprocket cover. d. Install camshaft sprocket cover. 5. Install rubber plugs into cylinder head after applying RTV sealant (see Figure 8). 6. Install rocker cover, tightening the bolts as shown in Figure 9. Page 1433 Alignment: Specifications Camber GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 0°06' (0.10°) Nominal ...................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. 0°36' (0.60°) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 1°06' (1.10°) Left And Right Difference ............................................................................................................................................................ 0°45' (0.75°) or less Page 493 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4154 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5279 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 504 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1080 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1303 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2678 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4298 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1912 Tightening procedure. Note: Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces. a. Tighten all bolts to 2 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.). b. Tighten all bolts to 9.0 to 11.8 Nm (0.92 to 1.2 kg-m, 79.9 - 104.2 inch lbs.). Cylinder Head Tighten cylinder head bolts in numerical order a. Tighten all bolts to 29 Nm (3.0 kg-m, 22 ft. lbs.). b. Tighten all bolts to 79 Nm (8.1 kg-m, 59 ft. lbs.). c. Loosen all bolts completely d. Tighten all bolts to 25 to 34 Nm (2.5 to 3.5 kg-m, 18 to 25 ft. lbs.). e. Turn all bolts 86 +5/-0 degrees clockwise, or if an angle wrench is not available, tighten bolts to 75 to 84 Nm (7.6 to 8.6 kg-m, 55 to 62 ft. lbs.). Crank Shaft Main Bearing Cap Bolts Removal Sequence Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 1529 7. Remove the idler pulley assembly from the A/C compressor bracket. 8. Install the new idler pulley assembly making sure the E-ring is installed on the adjusting bolt. 9. Adjust the A/C drive belt deflection to specification. Refer to the "A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification" chart below. A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification 10. Tighten the nut that secures idler pulley to 16 - 22 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb). 11. Re-install the engine under cover. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 3720 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1882 a. Tighten all bolts to 2 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.). b. Tighten all bolts to 9.0 to 11.8 Nm (0.92 to 1.2 kg-m, 79.9 - 104.2 inch lbs.). - Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces. 6. Install camshaft sprockets. 7. Install rubber plugs as follows. (1) Apply liquid gasket to rubber plugs. (2) Install rubber plugs, then move them by hand to uniformly spread the gasket on cam sprocket cover surface. Rubber plugs should be installed flush with the cylinder head surface. 8. Install distributor. - Make sure that No. 1 piston is set at TDC and that distributor rotor is set at No. 1 cylinder spark position. 9. Install rocker cover. 8 - 11 Nm (0.8 - 1.1 kg-m, 69 - 95 inch lbs.). 10. Install all spark plugs with high-tension cords. 11. Connect injector harness connector and replace injector tube assembly with injectors. 12. Install the following parts. - Radiator shroud - Cooling fan with coupling Page 1258 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2341 Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Page 9531 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9278 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3157 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 259 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation The sensor unit consists of a gear-shaped sensor rotor and a sensor element. The element contains a bar magnet around which a coil is wound. The sensor is installed on the back of the brake rotor and the back of the rear brake drum. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a sine-wave pattern. The frequency and voltage increase(s) as the rotating speed increases. Page 2423 Page 5098 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6288 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1768 Page 1085 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3193 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 455 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5826 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 218 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 602 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5126 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 5158 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6318 Page 7839 1. Disconnect shock absorber lower end, and remove U-bolts. 2. Disconnect spring shackle. 3. Disconnect front pin. INSPECTION - Check leaf spring for cracks. Replace if necessary. - Check front bracket and pin, shackle, U-bolts and spring pad for wear, cracks, straightness and damaged threads. Replace if necessary. - Check all bushings for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. - Rear spring front bushing, make sure that front bushing is properly installed. (4WD) INSTALLATION 1. Apply soapsuds to rubber bushing. 2. Install spring shackle and front pin, and finger tighten the nuts. 3. Install spring pad and nuts under leaf spring or axle case. 4. Tighten U-bolt mounting nuts diagonally. Page 4020 Page 8086 - Using the holder to prevent drive plate rotation, tighten the bolt to 12 to 15 N.m (1.2 to 1.5 kg-m, 9 to 11 ft-lb) torque. ^ After tightening the bolt, check that the pulley rotates smoothly. - Check clearance all the way around the clutch disc. Disc-to-pulley clearance: 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace adjusting spacer and recheck. BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. Page 1153 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Specifications Power Steering Pressure Switch: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................................... .............................. 1.7 - 2.3 Nm (15 - 20 inch lbs.) Page 6153 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 1419 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 5553 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 8572 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 530 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 8989 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2271 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2914 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance 2.1 - 2.9 K ohms at 68 deg F 0.27 - 0.38 K ohms at 176 deg F Page 6868 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment Part 1 of 4 Page 6577 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 8537 ^ Re-programming of additional remote controllers is not covered by warranty. ^ Remote controller replacement due to customer abuse, purse/pocket damage, and/or loss is not covered by warranty. ^ The replacement of the remote controller battery is not covered by warranty. Service Procedure For 1998-2000 Maxima, Pathfinder, Sentra, Altima, and Frontier Vehicles 2000 Quest and Xterra Vehicles: 1. Programming Procedure: A. Get in the vehicle. Close and lock all doors using the driver's power door lock-unlock switch. B. Insert and remove the ignition key more than 6 times within a 10 second period (at a rate of one insertion/removal cycle per second). The key should be withdrawn from the ignition key cylinder completely each time it is removed. NOTE: Do not rush the insertion/removal key cycling process. C. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. The ignition key should remain in the "ACC" position throughout the remainder of the programming, including programming of additional remote controllers. D. Press any button on the remote controller one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The hazard warning lights will flash twice when this step is accurately completed and programming is successful. For 2000 Quest vehicles, the side marker/tail/license lamps will flash twice when programming is successful. E. If you are programming only one remote, proceed to step 3A. If programming additional remotes, continue with step 2A, below. 2. Programming Additional Remote Controllers (Maximum of 4 Remotes): A. Remain inside the vehicle after programming the first remote. B. Use the driver's power door lock-unlock switch to unlock and then lock the doors. C. Press any button on one of the additional remote controllers one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The hazard warning lights will flash twice when programming is successful. For 2000 Quest vehicles, the side marker/tail/license lamps will flash twice when programming is successful. If there is more than one additional remote to be programmed, repeat steps 2A through 2C above for each additional remote. 3. End Programming: A. Remove the key from the ignition. B. Use the door lock-unlock switch on the driver's door to unlock the doors. Open the driver's door to complete the programming C. Check the operation of each of the remote controllers by locking/unlocking the doors with each remote controller you have programmed. For 1999 Quest Vehicles: 1. Programming Procedure: A. Get in the vehicle. Close and lock all doors using the driver's power door lock-unlock switch. MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) BULLETIN NUMBER: NTB99-013 CLASSIFICATION: EC99-001 DATE: April 1, 1999 TITLE: 1998-99 MY FRONTIER TRUCK M/T MIL "ON" P0500 SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied 1998-99 Frontier Truck (manual transmission, KA24DE Engine only) shows the following conditions: 1. MIL "ON" with DTC P0500 stored, 2. CONSULT freeze frame data indicates an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less, 3. No abnormal speedometer indication during test drive, then use this bulletin to repair the incident This incident may be due to a clutch slip condition for more than 10 seconds with a vehicle forward speed of less than 3 mph. This situation could occur during hill holding using clutch slip. Correct this incident by installing the ECM listed in the Parts Information using the following service procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTC stored is P0500 2. Verify the CONSULT freeze frame data stored has an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less (see Figure 1). 3. Conduct test drive to confirm there is no abnormal speedometer indication: a) Connect CONSULT and select Start, Engine, Data Monitor and Main Signals b) Test drive vehicle and ensure the speedometer and the vehicle speed sensor value displayed in Data Monitor provide consistent speed Page 6683 Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments 1. Adjust pedal height with pedal stopper bolt or ASCD clutch switch. Pedal height "H": 221 - 231 mm (8.70 - 9.09 inch) 2. Adjust pedal free play by turning master cylinder push rod. Then tighten lock nut. Pedal free play "A": 9 - 16 mm (0.35 - 0.63 inch) Pedal free play, measured at pedal pad includes the following: Free play due to clevis pin and clevis pin hole, push rod and master cylinder. 3. Make sure that clevis pin can rotate smoothly. If not, readjust pedal free play with master cylinder push rod. Page 3113 Ground Distribution Page 4428 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 353 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 809 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5582 Idle Up Control Valve: Electrical Diagrams Idle Air CTRL Valve (IACV)-FICD Solenoid Valve EC-FICD-01 IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve Circuit Diagrams IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Page 117 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 4927 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 383 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Testing and Inspection Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Ignition wires 1. Inspect wires for cracks, damage, burned terminals and for improper fit. 2. Measure the resistance of wires to their distributor cap terminal. Move each wire while testing to check for intermittent breaks. Resistance: 13.6 - 18.4 K Ohms (4.15 - 5.61 K Ohms/ft) at 25°C (77°F) If the resistance exceeds the above specification, inspect ignition wire to distributor cap connection. Clean connection or replace the ignition wire with a new one. Page 6362 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5197 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload [1] ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.9 - 48.1 Nm (1.5 - 10.8 lbs.) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Cage To Baffle Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 54 - 74 Nm (40 - 54 ft. lbs.) Bearing Lock Nut ........................................................................................................................................................... 245 - 294 Nm (181 - 217 ft. lbs.) [1]: At bearing cage bolt. Page 1227 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Indicator Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Indicator REMOVAL Passenger Air Bag Module Deactivation Switch Indicator CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes 1. Remove meter cover. 2. Release passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator tabs from back side of meter cover. 3. Remove passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator from front side of meter cover. INSTALLATION To install, reverse removal procedure. After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 5081 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4056 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 9273 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 8210 Comments regarding tubes and hoses: ^ Some R-134a tubes and hoses have reversed male/female connections to prevent interchangeability with R-12 components. R134A Service Tools & Equipment ^ R-12 and R-134a require separate and non-interchangeable sets of recovery, recycle, and recharge equipment, because the refrigerants and lubricants are not compatible and cannot be mixed even in the smallest amounts. ^ DO NOT attempt to use one set of equipment for both R-12 and R-134a, as all equipment contains residual amounts of refrigerant and/or lubricant, Page 2270 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1631 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Specified type ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... API GL-5 Specified viscosity at ambient temperature ranges: Below 10°C (50°F) ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................... SAE 75W Below 30°C (86°F) ...................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... SAE 80W Below 40°C 104°F) .................................. .................................................................................................................................. SAE 75W-90/SAE 80W-90 Between 30°C (86°F) and -10°C (14°F) ........................................................... ..................................................................................................... SAE 85W Between 40°C (104°F) and 0°C (32°F) .................................................................................................................................... ................................. SAE 90 Above 10°C (50°F) ............................................................................... ................................................................................................................... SAE 140 NOTE: 80W-90 is preferable for ambient temperatures below 40°C (104°F) Page 6377 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-LKPU-01 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Circuit Diagrams Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Page 823 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 9576 Main Harness (Part 2 Of 2) Main Harness Layout Index Page 298 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Diagrams EC-ECTS-01 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Circuit Diagrams Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 6247 Ground Distribution Page 2924 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Locations Circuit Breaker: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3925 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Hub, Rotor and Wheel Bearing Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Hub, Rotor and Wheel Bearing Page 5875 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9605 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the glass mounting bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the glass mounting bolts. 5. Raise up the door glass and hold with a suction lifter. 6. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the module assembly. 7. Remove the door regulator assembly from the module assembly. 8. Remove the power window motor from the regulator. Disclaimer Page 4227 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 5419 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Injector 1. Disconnect injector harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. Resistance: 10 - 14 Ohms [at 25° C (775° F)] If NG, replace injector. Page 2798 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater COMPONENT INSPECTION Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater Check resistance between terminals (3) and (1). Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 25°C (77°F) Check continuity between terminals (2) and (1), (3) and (2). Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the front heated oxygen sensor. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 7450 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 1845 Wheel Hub (Locking): Diagrams Page 5543 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6599 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 6619 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Specifications Radio Antenna - Bent/Broken Antenna Mast: All Technical Service Bulletins Radio Antenna - Bent/Broken Classification: EL98-001 Reference: NTB98-022 Date: March 15, 1998 BROKEN OR BENT RADIO ANTENNA (FIXED) DUE TO IMPROPER TORQUE APPLIED VEHICLES: All models with fixed (whip) radio antennae SERVICE INFORMATION The fixed antenna rod may bend or break during vehicle usage if it is not properly tightened during installation. Use this bulletin to ensure that every fixed antenna is correctly tightened during pre-delivery inspection. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Add a drop of Loc-Tite (Red) to the threaded portion of the antenna. 2. Use an inch-pound torque wrench and a crowfoot socket (or equivalent tools) to torque the fixed antenna rod. CAUTION: Do not use pliers or adjustable wrenches that might scratch the surface of the antenna rod. Torque Specification: 3.4 - 3.6 N.m (30 - 32 in-lb) Page 491 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 9431 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2736 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Knock sensor - Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M ohms. 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminal (1) and ground. Resistance: 500 - 620 K Ohms [at 25°C (77°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection Check continuity between terminals. Page 3694 Page 3860 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4756 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 5120 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4314 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5999 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7366 Ignition Ballast Resistor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 6170 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 352 Brake Light Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Pinion Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Pinion Seal FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT (FRONT FINAL DRIVE: MODEL R180A) 1. Remove front propeller shaft. 2. Loosen drive pinion nut. Tool number: ST38060002 (J34311) 3. Remove companion flange using puller. 4. Remove front oil seal. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of oil seal. Press front oil seal into carrier. Tool number: ST30720000(J25405) 6. Install companion flange and drive pinion nut. 7. Install propeller shaft. Page 1694 Comments regarding R-134a manifold gauge set: ^ Be certain that the gauge face indicates R134a or 134a. ^ Be certain that the manifold gauge set has the 1/2" - 16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses, ensuring that only R-134a service hoses are used. ^ Be certain that no refrigerants other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricants) are used with the manifold gauge set. Page 3625 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 9449 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3547 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3699 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 6736 DRIVE PINION PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT Page 6050 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5829 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4507 Ground Distribution Page 3190 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3525 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2725 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 3337 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4780 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 9551 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4393 EC-FRO2-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Connectors Heater Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6475 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2927 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2549 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Specifications Parking Brake Lever: Specifications Lever Stroke: [1] ......................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 10 - 12 [2] ................................................................................ .............................................................................................................................................. 1 [1] Under a force of 196 N (44 lbs.). [2] When warning switch comes on. Page 99 Page 2361 Page 4443 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 4063 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 7423 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 4825 customer should then replace with another set of platinum tip plugs rather than the standard plugs called out in the owners manual. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding table shown. MIL ON - DTC P1440, P1444, or P1491 (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid: Customer Interest MIL ON - DTC P1440, P1444, or P1491 (EVAP) CLASSIFICATION: EC98-034 REFERENCE: NTB98-113 DATE: February 1, 1999 TITLE: 1998-99 FRONTIER MIL ON WITH DTC P1440, P1444, OR P1491 STORED IN THE ECM APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED VIN: Vehicles built before 1N6DD26SXXC315372 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before October 21, 1998 APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If a 1998-99 Frontier has a MIL ON with DTC P1440, P1444 or P1491 stored in the ECM, the cause may be contamination in the purge volume control valve. Rust inside of the solenoid bracket metal pipe may be the source of the contamination. Contamination can enter the purge volume control valve and cause it to stick open. Use the following service procedure to resolve this incident, if it should occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the intake manifold vacuum hose from the solenoid bracket metal pipe (intake manifold side). See Figure 1. 2. Connect a vacuum pump to the solenoid bracket metal pipe (intake manifold side). See Figure 1. 3. Apply vacuum to the purge volume control valve. A. If vacuum cannot be maintained (valve is leaking), replace the purge volume control valve and proceed with step 4. B. If vacuum can be maintained (valve is not leaking), proceed with step 4. Page 6037 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8935 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5921 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6056 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 6063 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 5408 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures A/T - Mandatory Oil Cooler Cleaning Technical Service Bulletin # 00-056B Date: 021127 A/T - Mandatory Oil Cooler Cleaning Classification: AT00-001b Reference: NTB00-056b Date: November 27, 2002 1988 AND LATER NISSAN VEHICLES AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER CLEANING ATTENTION: This bulletin supersedes NTB91-099, NTB93-007, NTB94-050, and NTB95-109B, and amends NTB00-056a. The applied models/model years and information in the Claims Information section of NTB00-056a was updated. Please discard all paper copies of NTB91-099, NTB93-007, NTB94-050, NTB95-109B, and earlier versions of NTB00-056. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1988 and later with automatic transmission (including the Xtronic CVT automatic transmission) SERVICE INFORMATION Whenever an automatic transmission (A/T) is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. ^ Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T oil cooler and may build up as transmission fluid enters the Cooler Inlet. ^ This debris can contaminate the newly serviced transmission. ^ In severe cases this debris can block or restrict the flow of transmission fluid/oil. In either case, failure of the newly serviced A/T may result. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler through the Cooler Outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. ^ The location of the cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses described in this bulletin determines direction of transmission fluid flow through the cooler. ^ The Inlet and Outlet position varies from model to model, and you must identify the location of the Cooler Inlet and Outlet to successfully perform the cleaning procedure. Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE Workflow to determine the procedure for a particular vehicle. ^ Use Charts A and B in the service procedure to establish the correct Cooler Inlet and Outlet location for the vehicle you are servicing. ^ Then perform the Cleaning, Diagnosis, and Inspection as instructed. Page 775 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2790 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Connectors Page 2655 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7126 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 2599 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Specifications Power Steering Pressure Switch: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................................... .............................. 1.7 - 2.3 Nm (15 - 20 inch lbs.) Locations Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1202 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5198 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4777 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 288 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3735 Ground Distribution Page 2853 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2942 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6327 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 1073 ^ Refer to Figure 3 for the specific vehicle you are working on CAUTION: Never adjust the throttle slop screw. It is pre-set at the factory. 6. Check "B"; Insert the thicker feeler gauge "B" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop (see Figure 3). The CTPS should NOT have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "OL"). 7. If the results of steps 5 and/or 6 are not OK, loosen the TPS retaining bolts and adjust the CTPS to achieve the correct results. 8. Tighten the TPS retaining bolts, then repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times to check the new adjustment. 9. Re-connect the harness connector to the CTPS portion of the (TPS). Reset throttle position sensor idle position memory. NOTE: Failure to reset the TPS idle position memory may result in the idle speed staying higher than specification. 10. Start engine and warm it to operating temperature. NOTE: Always warm up engine to normal operation temperature, If the engine is cool, the throttle position memory will not be reset correctly. Locations Crash Zone Sensor SRS Component Parts Location Page 4916 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 862 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Diagram Information and Instructions EGR Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3856 Ignition Output Signal: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3080 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 432 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2376 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 1402 Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. Page 2701 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake air temperature sensor Check resistance as shown in the figure. If NG, replace intake air temperature sensor. Page 9427 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7595 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 6357 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7870 Torsion Bar: Service and Repair Page 8186 Page 3721 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6301 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5147 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Front Wheel Bearing Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Wheel Bearing - Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. - Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) - Adjust wheel bearing preload if there is any axial end play or wheel bearing does not turn smoothly. Page 9516 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4015 Page 6416 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 3568 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CMPS-01 Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Circuit Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 5901 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Shoe: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Locations EGR Control Solenoid: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 7184 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 6118 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5043 Ground Distribution Page 1674 Comments regarding vacuum pump use: ^ The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the lubrication for R-134a A/C systems. ^ The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure, causing the vacuum pump lubricant to migrate out of the pump if the pump is switched oft after evacuation (vacuuming) and there is no shut off valve between the pump and the hose. ^ To prevent the migration of vacuum pump lubricant into service hoses, it is necessary to use a valve (which can be manually opened or closed) near the connection of the service hose to the pump. ^ On a vacuum pump which is equipped with an isolation valve (usually part of the vacuum pump), closing this valve will isolate the service hose from the pump. ^ For pumps without an isolation valve, be certain that the service hose is equipped with a manual shut off valve near the pump end of the hose. ^ Hoses which contain an automatic shut off valve at the end of the service hose must be disconnected from the vacuum pump to prevent the migration of lubricant; as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricant may migrate (with pump off). ^ One-way valves which open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition are not recommended, because this valve may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum. Page 6112 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4385 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6246 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2787 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Connectors Maximum Voltage Monitoring Page 6585 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-LKPU-01 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Circuit Diagrams Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Suspension - Strut Leak Guideline Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Strut Leak Guideline Classification: FA99-001 Reference: NTB99-001 NISSAN VEHICLE STRUT REPLACEMENT GUIDELINES Date: February 15, 1999 APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1990-2000 Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides information to correctly identify leaking struts that qualify for replacement under warranty. Use this bulletin to accurately diagnose a leaking strut, which should be replaced. This bulletin also provides information to correctly identify a strut which has slight oil seepage, a condition which is considered normal, does not affect the strut's operation or performance and does not require replacement. SERVICE PROCEDURE Strut leaks are caused by deterioration of the oil seal due to wear, internal contamination, or external contamination (i.e. outside dust or anti corrosion spray entry). These factors can affect the strut seal mechanism and result in a gross oil leak. In such an instance, the strut needs to be replaced. NOTE: If strut leakage is diagnosed in one strut, do not automatically replace struts on both sides. Replace the leaking strut only. Strut seepage occurs as a thin layer of oil sticks to the strut's shaft and passes through the seal. A very small amount of oil can escape and stain the upper exterior of the strut. The amount of oil seepage present on the strut can be affected by ambient temperature variations and driving conditions (extreme hot or cold weather or rough road conditions can increase the amount of seepage). Seepage is considered a normal condition since it does not affect the operation and performance of the strut. Use the following information to identify strut leakage versus strut seepage: The following criteria can also be applied to shock absorbers. 1. Strut Leakage - Strut Needs To Be Replaced: Page 7364 Ground Distribution Page 452 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6167 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4382 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5369 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. it measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 1055 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4295 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7022 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3152 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5636 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Diagram Information and Instructions Radio/Stereo: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3359 Page 1538 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Service Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications Service Specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Page 4437 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 8578 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 8746 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1137 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4903 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6195 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 799 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair Air Bleeding Procedure 1. Raise front end of vehicle until wheels are clear of the ground. 2. Add fluid into oil tank to specified level. Then quickly turn steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly touch steering stoppers. NOTE: Repeat steering wheel operation until fluid level no longer decreases. 3. Start engine. 4. Repeat step 2 above. NOTE: Incomplete air bleeding will cause the following to occur. When this happens, bleed air again. a. Air bubbles in reservoir tank b. Clicking noise in oil pump c. Excessive buzzing in oil pump NOTE: Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil pump. This is common when the vehicle is stationary or while turning steering wheel slowly. This does not affect performance or durability of the system. Page 8997 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 210 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2933 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 6073 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 541 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 9297 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9566 Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams EL-TAIL/L-01 Parking, License, And Tail Lamps Wiring Diagram (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1675 Comments regarding leak detector use: ^ Existing R-12 leak detectors currently will not detect R-134a. ^ Many R-134a leak detectors will detect R-12; check with the equipment manufacturer. ^ Always refer to and follow the equipment manufacturers recommendations when operating leak detectors. Comments regarding weight scale use: ^ If the scale allows electronic control of the flow of refrigerant through the scale, (i.e. internal solenoid valves) be certain that the hose fitting size is 1/2"-16 ACME, and that no refrigerant other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricant) have been used with the scale. Charging Cylinder ^ The use of a charging cylinder is not recommended because: ^ The refrigerant may be vented into the air from the top valve of cylinder when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. ^ The accuracy of a charging cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Service Procedures ^ The service procedures for R-134a A/C systems are basically the same as for R-12 A/C systems, however, the following should always be kept in mind: ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge R-134a systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service work. ^ R-134a and R-12 A/C components are not interchangeable. Cleaning of used (in service) components for use with another type of refrigerant and/or lubricant is not an acceptable practice, and may result in A/C system failure. ^ Always use the proper PAG oil when servicing an R-134a A/C system. The Nissan part number for the appropriate PAG compressor oil can be found on the A/C specification label in the engine compartment, and also in the Factory Service Manual, and on the label on the compressor. These oils are only available from your Nissan Parts Department. ^ When leak checking an R-134a system, be certain that you are using a detector which will detect R-134a. ^ As mentioned previously in this bulletin, the R-134a PAG lubricants absorb moisture; PAG oil containers and A/C components containing PAG oil must remain tightly sealed until ready for use. ^ Unlike R-12 systems, R-134a systems do not exhibit a "clear sight glass", even when properly charged. For this reason, the R-134a A/C systems have no sight glass. ^ With R-134a systems it is important to properly control the amount of refrigerant charged into the system during system charging. A charging machine or weight scale must always be used during charging for proper charge determination. ^ Questions regarding R-12 or R-134a should be addressed to your Regional Service Staff or the FIXS Hotline. Page 5404 Ground Distribution Page 4176 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Specifications Brake Light Switch: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Switch Nut ........................................................................................................................................... ........................... 12 - 15 Nm (108 - 132 inch lbs.) Page 7885 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT Adjust wheel bearing preload after wheel bearing has been replaced or front axle has been reassembled. Adjust wheel bearing preload as follows: 1. Before adjustment, thoroughly clean all parts to prevent dirt entry. 2. Apply multi-purpose grease sparingly to the following parts: - Threaded portion of spindle - Contact surface between wheel bearing washer and outer wheel bearing - Grease seal lip - Wheel hub 18 - 23 grams (0.63 - 0.81 ounce) 3. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.). 4. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions. 5. Loosen wheel bearing lock nut so that torque becomes 0 Nm (0 ft. lbs.). 6. Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.). 7. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions. 8. Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.). 9. Measure wheel bearing axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) Page 9419 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Diagram Information and Instructions Leak Detection Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6802 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT Adjust wheel bearing preload after wheel bearing has been replaced or front axle has been reassembled. Adjust wheel bearing preload as follows: 1. Before adjustment, thoroughly clean all parts to prevent dirt entry. 2. Apply multi-purpose grease sparingly to the following parts: - Threaded portion of spindle - Contact surface between wheel bearing washer and outer wheel bearing - Grease seal lip - Wheel hub 18 - 23 grams (0.63 - 0.81 ounce) 3. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.). 4. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions. 5. Loosen wheel bearing lock nut so that torque becomes 0 Nm (0 ft. lbs.). 6. Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.). 7. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions. 8. Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.). 9. Measure wheel bearing axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) Recall 98V065000: Seat Belt May Get Cut/Sliced Seat Belt: Recalls Recall 98V065000: Seat Belt May Get Cut/Sliced Year: 1998 Make: NISSAN TRUCK Model: FRONTIER Year of Recall: '98 Type of Report: Vehicle Potential Number of Units Affected: 20000 Summary: Vehicle Description: Light duty passenger trucks equipped with bucket seats. In certain frontal crashes, the front seat belt can slip between the seat bottom finisher and the seat back plastic recliner handle where it can be cut by the sharp edge of the metal portion of the recliner lever. If the seat belt is completely severed, it can increase the risk of serious injury to an occupant in a crash. Dealers will replace the plastic handle on the end of the seat back reclining lever with a different shape handle which will prevent the seat belt from slipping between the handle and the seat. Owner notification is expected to begin during April 1998. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Nissan at 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261). Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Page 7360 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2515 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Connector Views Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Connectors Front Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front REPLACEMENT 1. Support lower link with jack. 2. Remove bolt and nut that hold shock absorber. 3. Reverse procedure to install. INSPECTION Except for nonmetallic parts, clean all parts with suitable solvent and dry with compressed air. Use compressed air to blow dirt and dust off of nonmetallic parts. Check for oil leakage and cracks. Replace if necessary. - Check piston rod for cracks, deformation and other damage. Replace if necessary. - Check rubber parts for wear, cracks, damage and deformation. Replace if necessary. Page 3550 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Interior - Seat Belt Latch Plate Button Missing Technical Service Bulletin # 99-022C Date: 030805 Interior - Seat Belt Latch Plate Button Missing Classification: RS99-001C Reference; NTB99-022C Date: August 5, 2003 FRONT SEAT BELT LATCH PLATE RETAINING BUTTON MISSING The Applied Vehicles and Service Information sections of this bulletin have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of NTB99-022. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM: ^ The front seat belt latch plate of an applied vehicle slides to the end of the seat belt, sliding down the belt to the floor at the base of the B pillar. ^ This happens because the seat belt latch plate retaining button is lost or damaged. ^ The seat belt and retractor are in serviceable condition, ACTION: Use this bulletin to replace the retaining button and clean, and refurbish the driver's and passenger's front seat belt "D" rings. NOTE: This button is required to hold the seat belt latch plate at the shoulder location, preventing it from sliding to the floor when the belt is released. NOTE: The purpose of "ACTION" is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 1048 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5547 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION IACV-AAC Valve Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector. - Check IACV-AAC valve resistance. Resistance: Approximately 10 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] - Check plunger for seizing or sticking. - Check for broken spring. Page 4344 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Knock sensor - Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M ohms. 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminal (1) and ground. Resistance: 500 - 620 K Ohms [at 25°C (77°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 3671 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6656 - Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. Control Valves Inspection Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs. Assembly 1. Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores. Page 5696 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1180 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Axle Shaft, Conventional Fixed/Floating Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Axle Shaft, Conventional Fixed/Floating REMOVAL NOTE: - Before removing the rear axle, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly. Then move it away from the axle. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensor becoming inoperative. - Wheel bearing does not require maintenance. - If growling noise is emitted from wheel bearing during operation, replace wheel bearing assembly. - If the wheel bearing assembly is removed, it must be replaced. The old assembly must not be re-used. 1. Disconnect parking brake cable and brake tube. 2. Remove nuts securing wheel bearing cage with baffle plate. 3. Draw out axle shaft with Tool. NOTE: When drawing out axle shaft, be careful not to damage oil seal. 4. Remove O-ring. 5. Remove oil seal. Page 9247 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2783 EC-FRO2/H-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Page 1389 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Page 2714 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Specifications Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Specifications Spiral Cable Spiral Cable Driver Air Bag Module Special Bolt(s) 15 - 25 Nm Page 6156 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2409 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4208 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3297 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6880 Description and Operation EGR Backpressure Transducer: Description and Operation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The EGRC-BPT valve monitors exhaust pressure to activate the diaphragm, controlling throttle body vacuum applied to the EGR valve. In other words, recirculated exhaust gas is controlled in response to positioning of the EGR valve or to engine operation. Page 1312 Ground Distribution Specifications Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Specifications Resistance Approx. 10 ohms at 77 deg F Page 980 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6814 Axle Nut: Service and Repair Diagrams Page 1671 Comments regarding tubes and hoses: ^ Some R-134a tubes and hoses have reversed male/female connections to prevent interchangeability with R-12 components. R134A Service Tools & Equipment ^ R-12 and R-134a require separate and non-interchangeable sets of recovery, recycle, and recharge equipment, because the refrigerants and lubricants are not compatible and cannot be mixed even in the smallest amounts. ^ DO NOT attempt to use one set of equipment for both R-12 and R-134a, as all equipment contains residual amounts of refrigerant and/or lubricant, Page 2824 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 201 Ground Distribution Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications PRESSURE PRESSURE Fuel pressure with vacuum hose connected 235 kpa (34 psi) Fuel pressure with vacuum hose disconnected 294 kpa (43 psi) Page 7650 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 295 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5155 Ground Distribution Page 1109 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 396 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4517 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9150 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Electrical Diagrams EL-AT/IND-01 Wiring Diagram Circuit Diagrams Wiring Diagram A/T Indicator Circuit Connectors Page 4734 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 132 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8766 Page 6660 - Install control valves. Page 6084 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1778 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 4465 Ground Distribution Specifications Stabilizer Link: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Link Pins .............................................................................................................................................. .................................. 16 - 22 Nm (12 - 16 ft. lbs.) Page 9548 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7461 Fuse: Locations Fuse ID Power Supply Routing: Schematic (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7367 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 7825 c. Remove ball joint tightening nuts. Support lower link with jack. d. Remove knuckle spindle from upper and lower links. INSPECTION Knuckle Spindle Check knuckle spindle for deformation, cracks and other damage by using a magnetic exploration or dyeing test. Bearing Spacer (2WD) Check bearing spacer for damage. Needle Bearing (4WD) Check needle bearing for wear, scratches, pitting, flaking and burn marks. INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease and install needle bearing into knuckle spindle. (4WD) CAUTION: Make sure that needle bearing is facing in the proper direction. 2. Install knuckle spindle to upper and lower ball joints with lower link jacked up. CAUTION: Make sure that oil and grease do not come into contact with tapered areas of ball joint, knuckle spindle and threads of ball joint. 3. Connect tie-rod to knuckle spindle. 4. After installing knuckle spindle, adjust wheel bearing preload. Refer to Wheel Bearing. Page 190 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 9367 Headlamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example A/C - System Changes As Result of R-134A Refrigerant Technical Service Bulletin # 92-001 Date: 920101 A/C - System Changes As Result of R-134A Refrigerant Classification: HA92-OO1 Reference: NTB92-OO1 Date: January 1992 A/C SYSTEM CHANGES FOR R-134A REFRIGERANT (ALL MODELS) APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Service Information Introduction Due to its harmful effect on the ozone layer, R-12 is being phased out and replaced by R-134a, which does not harm the ozone layer. While the R-134a A/C system is very similar to an R-12 A/C system, the differences in the refrigerant, lubricants, and service equipment are important. Nissan A/C systems will change from R-12 to R-134a at the time of new vehicle (full model change) introduction, or in some cases by model year update to an existing model line. This bulletin describes all of the general differences between the R-12 and R-134a systems. For details of an R-134a system for a specific model, refer to that model's service manual or new product information. Refrigerant Handling Precautions ^ R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ Use only specified lubricant for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ The specified R-134a lubricant absorbs moisture from the atmosphere at a rapid rate, therefore the following handling precautions must be observed: ^ When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. ^ When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Also, complete the connection of all refrigerant tubes and hoses without delay to minimize the entry of moisture into the system. ^ Use the specified lubricant from a sealed container only. Containers must be re-sealed immediately after dispensing the lubricant. Lubricant in containers which are not properly sealed will become moisture saturated. Such lubricant is no longer suitable for use and should be properly disposed. ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE standards to discharge R-134a Systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. ^ Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ^ Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 125° (52°C). ^ Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. ^ Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ^ Keep refrigerant away from open flames: hazardous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ^ Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. Page 4181 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 6627 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 821 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 6702 Page 6126 Ground Distribution Page 3803 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 5496 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2724 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 8203 ^ The graph on the following page shows that PAG oil left open to air (e.g. in an unsealed container) will absorb 2% moisture (by weight) in 120 hours (5 days). ^ PAG containers, and any A/C component which contains PAG oil (such as the compressor) should remain tightly capped and sealed until ready for use. ^ If you believe that a container of PAG oil may not have been adequately re-sealed after opening, dispose of the oil properly and use oil from a new sealed container. ^ When installing or servicing an A/C system, the refrigerant tube and hose connections should be sealed (all connections made and tightened to specification) without delay. ^ The above precautions will keep the absorption of moisture into the system to a minimum. Using moisture saturated PAG oil in R-134a systems may lead to the formation of acids and related system damage or failure. ^ Do not allow refrigerant oil (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S) to contact styrofoam, as the lubricant will damage this material. Page 9244 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4121 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 673 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Connectors Minimum Voltage Monitoring Specifications Torsion Bar: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Front: Lower Link Spindle .................................................................................................................................................... 109 147 Nm (80 - 108 ft. lbs.) Spring Torque Arm: Small Bolt ............................................................................................................................................ ...................... 45 - 60 Nm (33 - 44 ft. lbs.) Large Bolt ......................................................................... ....................................................................................... 89 - 118 Nm (66 - 87 ft. lbs.) Rear: Anchor Arm Bolt ............................................................................................................................................................. 30 - 40 Nm (22 - 30 ft. lbs.) Page 4123 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Connector Views Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 5631 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2469 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6754 If the rear axle bearing, rear axle seal, or Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) rotor ring need to be replaced on one of the applied vehicles listed above, use the "Rear Axle Bearing Removal Kit" P/N J-45073 to remove these pressed-on components. This kit replaces special tools J-25852-B and J-25864-01, which were previously used for similar types of work, but are now obsolete and cannot be used on the current applied vehicles (listed above). Refer to the "Essential Tool Shipment" flyer shown for additional information. Page 6960 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 6857 3. Adjust thrust clearance between bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping yoke. 4. Check to see that journal moves smoothly and check for axial play. Axial play: 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) or less Page 1314 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 938 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6522 9. Disconnect the key lock rod from the A/T shifter assembly by removing the pin clip. Retain this pin clip for reuse (see Figure 6). 10. Disconnect the brake pedal interlock solenoid harness located under the steering column assembly (see Figure 6). 11. Disconnect the A/T cable from the rear of the A/T shifter assembly by prying the connector straight back with a door trim removal tool (see Figure 7). 12. Remove the (2) 6mm bolts securing the assembly (see Figure 8). Page 6624 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7031 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4907 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4973 Canister Vent Valve: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve With CONSULT Check air passage continuity. Perform "VENT CONTROL/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. OR Without CONSULT If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, clean valve using air blower or replace as necessary. If portion (B) is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Idler Pulley: Customer Interest A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Classification: HA99-006 Reference: NTB99-070 Date: October 5, 1999 A/C IDLER PULLEY WHINE NOISE AT 3000 ENGINE RPM (FOUR CYLINDER ENGINE ONLY) APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) - 2WD 2000 Xterra (WD22) - 2WD APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle exhibits a whine noise at or around 3,000 engine RPM, the cause may be the air conditioning (A/C) idler pulley. Use the service procedure listed below to diagnose and correct the incident. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Run the engine at or around 3,000 RPM with the A/C ON and OFF to determine when the whine noise occurs. NOTE: The A/C will operate with the A/C button turned off if the mode selector is in the foot/defrost or defrost position and the fan is turned on. To ensure the A/C is off, move the fan speed selector to the off position. A. If the whine noise occurs with the A/C off (A/C compressor not operating), look for other sources of the whine noise. B. If the whine noise only occurs when the A/C is on (A/C compressor operating) and the noise can be pin pointed to the idler pulley with a stethoscope or Chassis Ears(TM), proceed with step 2. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Loosen (but do not remove) the nut that secures the idler pulley (see Figure 1). 4. Remove the E-ring from the idler pulley adjusting bolt (see Figure 1). 5. Remove the idler pulley adjusting bolt. 6. Remove the A/C compressor drive belt from the idler pulley. Page 5753 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS-01 Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Circuit Diagrams Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 5194 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2681 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5206 EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passage way. When the EGR valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passage way changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. Page 2911 Throttle Position Sensor: Connector Views Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 7114 If necessary, adjust brake pedal free height. Fig. 8 Adjusting Input Rod 1. Loosen lock nut and adjust pedal free height by turning brake booster input rod. Then tighten lock nut. NOTE: Make sure that the tip of input rod stays inside. 2. Loosen lock nut and adjust clearance "C" with stop lamp switch respectively. Then tighten lock nut. 3. Check pedal free play. NOTE: Make sure that stop lamp is off when pedal is released. 4. Check brake pedal's depressed height while engine is running. If lower than specification, check for leaks, air in system, or damage to components (master cylinder, wheel cylinder, etc.). Then make necessary repairs. Spark Plug Torque Values Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Torque Spark plug torque 14-22 ft. lb Page 145 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7599 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 6407 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4401 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the front heated oxygen sensor heater corresponding to the engine speed. OPERATION Page 807 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4598 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4414 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2450 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5270 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7333 Battery: Testing and Inspection Specific Gravity Check 1. Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level. 2. Use the chart below to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature. Hydrometer Temperature Correction Page 3196 Throttle Full Close Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-TP/SW-01 Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Circuit Diagrams Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 3516 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 9371 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 9354 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2919 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1169 Ground Distribution Page 8111 Page 2146 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 9564 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5488 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4442 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-PST/SW-01 Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Diagrams Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 654 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Engine Compartment Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7815 Control Arm: Service and Repair Upper, Front Page 8309 disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the specified number of turns. Always perform SRS Self-diagnosis after installing the air bag module. 6. Connect spiral cable to air bag harness and tighten screws. Install steering column covers. Installing Steering Wheel 7. Install steering wheel, setting spiral cable pin guide, and pull spiral cable connectors through. 8. Connect horn connector and engage spiral cable with pawls in steering wheel. 9. Tighten steering wheel nut. Steering Wheel Nut: 29 - 39 N-m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) Special Bolts Torque 10. Position driver air bag module and tighten with new special bolts. 11. Connect driver air bag module connector. 12. Install all lids. 13. Connect both battery cables. 14. Conduct Self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly (Use CONSULT or warning lamp check.). Turn the steering wheel fully to the right and left to check that the spiral cable is set in the neutral position. 15. If air bag warning lamp blinks (at the User mode), it shows the spiral cable may be snapped due to its improper position. Perform Self-diagnosis again. (Use CONSULT or warning lamp check.) If a malfunction is detected, replace the spiral cable with a new one. NOTE: After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 766 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 5974 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1933 Tightening procedure. Note: Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces. a. Tighten all bolts to 2 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.). b. Tighten all bolts to 9.0 to 11.8 Nm (0.92 to 1.2 kg-m, 79.9 - 104.2 inch lbs.). Cylinder Head Tighten cylinder head bolts in numerical order a. Tighten all bolts to 29 Nm (3.0 kg-m, 22 ft. lbs.). b. Tighten all bolts to 79 Nm (8.1 kg-m, 59 ft. lbs.). c. Loosen all bolts completely d. Tighten all bolts to 25 to 34 Nm (2.5 to 3.5 kg-m, 18 to 25 ft. lbs.). e. Turn all bolts 86 +5/-0 degrees clockwise, or if an angle wrench is not available, tighten bolts to 75 to 84 Nm (7.6 to 8.6 kg-m, 55 to 62 ft. lbs.). Crank Shaft Main Bearing Cap Bolts Removal Sequence ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 3762 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 130 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 565 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4159 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 7927 - Remove bearing outer races with suitable brass bar. INSPECTION Thoroughly clean wheel bearings and wheel hub. Wheel Bearings Make sure wheel bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Wheel Hub Check wheel hub for cracks by using a magnetic exploration or dyeing test. ASSEMBLY 1. Install bearing outer race with Tool until it seats in hub. 2. On models with ABS, install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press. Always replace sensor rotor with new one. Pay attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown in figure. 3. Pack multi-purpose grease in wheel hub and hub cap. Page 6844 - Remove bearing outer races with suitable brass bar. INSPECTION Thoroughly clean wheel bearings and wheel hub. Wheel Bearings Make sure wheel bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Wheel Hub Check wheel hub for cracks by using a magnetic exploration or dyeing test. ASSEMBLY 1. Install bearing outer race with Tool until it seats in hub. 2. On models with ABS, install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press. Always replace sensor rotor with new one. Pay attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown in figure. 3. Pack multi-purpose grease in wheel hub and hub cap. Page 7822 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Page 8032 - Remove bearing outer races with suitable brass bar. INSPECTION Thoroughly clean wheel bearings and wheel hub. Wheel Bearings Make sure wheel bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Wheel Hub Check wheel hub for cracks by using a magnetic exploration or dyeing test. ASSEMBLY 1. Install bearing outer race with Tool until it seats in hub. 2. On models with ABS, install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press. Always replace sensor rotor with new one. Pay attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown in figure. 3. Pack multi-purpose grease in wheel hub and hub cap. Page 472 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4957 Ground Distribution Page 6061 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 958 Leak Detection Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. 4. Check output voltage between ECM terminal (62) and engine ground. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply vacuum below -20 kPa (-150 mmHg, -5.91 inHg) or pressure over 20.0 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg). 5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Page 5967 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6115 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3136 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7997 Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Bearing Nut Torque SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload ................................................... ............................................................................................................ 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) Return Angle ................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 15 - 30° TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Lock Nut: Initial .................................................................................................................................................... ............................ 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Final ............................................................................ ............................................................................................ 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) Page 7024 Ground Distribution Page 9207 Ground Distribution Page 4190 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2148 Idle Speed: Adjustments PREPARATION - Make sure that the following parts are in good order. (1) Battery (2) Ignition system (3) Engine oil and coolant levels (4) Fuses (5) ECM harness connector (6) Vacuum hoses (7) Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) (8) Fuel pressure (9) Engine compression (10) EGR valve operation (11) Throttle valve (12) EVAP system - On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". - On models equipped with automatic transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. - When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. - Turn off head lamps, heater blower. - Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Specifications Page 3823 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4911 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9454 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2713 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 876 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4317 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7755 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Upper Ball Joint Ball Joint: Service and Repair Upper Ball Joint UPPER AND LOWER BALL JOINT REPLACEMENT - Separate knuckle spindle from upper and lower links. Refer to Steering Knuckle. INSPECTION - Check joints for play. If ball is worn and play in axial direction is excessive or joint is hard to swing, replace.as a upper link or lower link. Axial end play "C": Upper link = 0 mm (0 inch) Lower link (2WD) = 1.3 mm (0.051 inch) or less (4WD) = 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less - Check dust cover for damage. Replace dust cover and dust cover clamp if necessary. Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 583 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IATS-01 Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Circuit Diagrams Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 5911 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor is a basic component of the ECCS. it monitors engine speed and piston position. These input signals to the ECM are used to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other functions. The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-forming circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for a 1° (POS) signal and 4 slits for a 180° (REF) signal. The wave-forming circuit consists of Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes. The rotor plate is positioned between the LED and the photo diode. The LED transmits light to the photo diode. As the rotor plate turns, the slits cut the light to generate rough-shaped pulses. These pulses are converted into on-off signals by the wave-forming circuit and sent to the ECM. The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an assembly except distributor cap. Page 6632 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4944 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6414 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 8346 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 8634 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 911 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3495 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-MAFS-01 Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Diagrams Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 8209 Page 1193 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3260 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2772 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 414 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 6355 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2518 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Absolute pressure sensor 1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. 2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch "ON" and check output voltage between ECM terminal (45) and engine ground. The voltage should be 3.2 to 4.8 V. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum of -26.7 kPa (-200 mmHg, -7.87 inHg) to absolute pressure sensor as shown in figure and check the output voltage. The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4 V lower than the value measured in step 3. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply vacuum below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 in Hg). 5. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor. Page 1104 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7228 Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: If leakage occurs around joints, retighten or, if necessary, replace damaged parts. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. 2. Check for oil leakage by fully depressing brake pedal while engine is running. Page 5142 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5942 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4238 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 7177 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 2940 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7113 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments COMPONENTS ADJUSTMENT - Check brake pedal free height from melt sheet. - H: Free height: Automatic Transmission: 212 - 222 mm (8.35 - 8.74 inch) - Manual Transmission: 209 - 219 mm (8.23 - 8.62 inch) - D: Depressed height (under force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lbs.) with engine running): 120 mm (4.72 inch) - C: Clearance between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch: 0.3 - 1.0 mm (0.012 0.039 inch) A: Pedal free play: 1 - 3 mm (0.04 - 0.12 inch) Page 2491 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6125 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5897 Ground Distribution Page 875 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Locations Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Exhaust Pipe: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 3961 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 8520 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 9213 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Paint - Removal of Environmental Particles Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Removal of Environmental Particles Classification: BT01-048a Reference: NTB01-087a Date: December 17, 2001 ALL NISSAN; REMOVAL OF ENVIRONMENTAL IRON PARTICLES FROM PAINT This bulletin has been revised. The Claims Information was updated. Please discard paper copies NTB01-087. APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Environmental iron particles can be identified as follows: ^ Small rust/orange dots with black centers on light colored surfaces, ^ Small white or silver dots with a "rainbow hue" around the edge on dark colored surfaces. In both cases, the surface will feel rough or gritty to the touch. The steps in the Service Procedure have been found effective in most cases for removing environmental iron particles (sometimes called "rail dust") from a vehicle's painted surfaces. Refer to the Service Procedure of this bulletin for instructions on repairing this type of environmental damage if it should occur. However, refer to the Claims Information section at the end of this bulletin for important claims information concerning environmental claims. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: In most cases these environmental iron particles can be easily removed. However, the longer they are left untreated, the more damage they can create, and the harder they are to remove. In rare, more severe cases, spots of paint blistering can occur. 1. Use a magnifying glass to check if iron particles are present. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and warm water. Completely dry the vehicle. Note: There are 3 Steps of damage repair possible that should be completed in the order given. ^ Start with Step A first. Complete Step B if necessary. ^ Proceed to Step C only if iron particles are not removed in the preceding steps. 3. Repair the paint damage. A. Light/Medium Damage (surface level only) Remove the iron particles using a clay bar such as Clay Magic(TM) by Auto Wax Company, Inc., SPC40 Overspray Clay by PPG, a "clay like" surface cleaning material such as Erazer(TM) by K.E.L. Mfg., or equivalent. WARNING: Read and follow the manufacturer's procedure before using. B. Medium Damage (surface level only) Remove the iron particles using a chemical cleaning product such as: Page 4125 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The absolute pressure sensor is connected to the MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve by a hose. The sensor detects ambient barometric pressure and intake manifold pressure and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure increases, the voltage rises. Page 5489 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6204 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 454 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Locations Keyless Entry Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 6098 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 971 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5965 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5174 EGR Temperature Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 9361 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5123 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4721 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: If both DTC P0120 (0403) and DTC P0510 (0203) are displayed, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510 first. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch", which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. Page 567 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6709 4. Use hose clamps and temporarily connect a length of suitable hose between the bypass valve fittings that go to the oil cooler (see Figure 6). 5. Pinch/clamp the temporary hose to prevent flow through the loop (see Figure 6). 6. Cover the end of the bypass inlet line with a shop rag to catch any oil spray. 7. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) into the outlet for 10 second intervals, three times (see Figure 6). 8. Re-connect the transmission lines and remove the temporary hose loop (see Figure 7). 9. Go to Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles). 1996-98 Pathfinder (R50) Cleaning the Optional Air Cooled Oil-Cooler (Air Cooler) 1. Place an oil drain pan under the A/T air cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses (see Points A and B, Figure 8). 2. Disconnect the Inlet and Outlet hoses from the air cooler (see Points A and B, Figure 8). 3. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the air cooler Outlet hose (see Point B, Figure 8). CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath the vapors or the spray mist. Page 2889 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Locations Page 755 Throttle Full Close Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-TP/SW-01 Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Circuit Diagrams Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 6888 Page 374 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7475 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1056 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 920 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5370 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Mass air flow sensor 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between terminal (54) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above check. 5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust. Page 6677 Page 6474 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5350 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3043 EGR Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3296 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 954 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3293 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 596 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 8900 Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Engine Compartment Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Component Parts And Harness Connector Location A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Drive Belt: Customer Interest A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Classification: HA99-006 Reference: NTB99-070 Date: October 5, 1999 A/C IDLER PULLEY WHINE NOISE AT 3000 ENGINE RPM (FOUR CYLINDER ENGINE ONLY) APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) - 2WD 2000 Xterra (WD22) - 2WD APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle exhibits a whine noise at or around 3,000 engine RPM, the cause may be the air conditioning (A/C) idler pulley. Use the service procedure listed below to diagnose and correct the incident. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Run the engine at or around 3,000 RPM with the A/C ON and OFF to determine when the whine noise occurs. NOTE: The A/C will operate with the A/C button turned off if the mode selector is in the foot/defrost or defrost position and the fan is turned on. To ensure the A/C is off, move the fan speed selector to the off position. A. If the whine noise occurs with the A/C off (A/C compressor not operating), look for other sources of the whine noise. B. If the whine noise only occurs when the A/C is on (A/C compressor operating) and the noise can be pin pointed to the idler pulley with a stethoscope or Chassis Ears(TM), proceed with step 2. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Loosen (but do not remove) the nut that secures the idler pulley (see Figure 1). 4. Remove the E-ring from the idler pulley adjusting bolt (see Figure 1). 5. Remove the idler pulley adjusting bolt. 6. Remove the A/C compressor drive belt from the idler pulley. Page 3949 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7601 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 3494 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 1273 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4699 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3749 Page 3116 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6312 Alignment Specifications Page 5777 Ground Distribution Page 5274 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7104 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear REPLACEMENT Refer to the illustration when servicing Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications PRESSURE PRESSURE Fuel pressure with vacuum hose connected 235 kpa (34 psi) Fuel pressure with vacuum hose disconnected 294 kpa (43 psi) Page 3591 Ground Distribution Page 3144 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4110 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5796 ^ Refer to Figure 2 that applies to your model. ^ There should be continuity across the terminals with the throttle closed. NOTES: ^ An ohmmeter is used because CONSULT-II cannot display the CTPS status in all of the Applied Vehicles. ^ This adjustment procedure must be made with the TPS installed on the engine of the vehicle. ^ Do not touch the throttle drum when checking the CTPS signal or continuity. Doing so may cause an incorrect adjustment. ^ Nissan recommends using Kent-Moore TPS Connector Tool J-45178 for easy, accurate connection. See NTB01-023 for more information. 4. Refer to Chart 1 and select the correct thickness feeler gauges for your vehicle. 5. Check "A": Insert the thinner feeler gauge "A" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop. ^ The CTPS should have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "0 ohms"). Page 4672 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3542 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1424 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 8707 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2726 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 6001 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5069 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 6161 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 941 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2308 2. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of water pump. - Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant Part No. 999 MP-A7007, Three Bond TB1207D or equivalent. Page 7069 Ground Distribution Page 8982 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 8738 Ground Distribution Page 1605 Refer to the "Essential Tool Shipment" flyer shown for additional information. This special tool is "Essential" and was automatically sent to all Nissan dealers. Additional tools can be ordered from Tech-Mate (1-800-662-2001) for $196.43 each. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the tool for complete refill procedure. Key points to ensure the cooling system is purged of air bubbles are as follows; Always start with an Empty Radiator For step 2 of the Operating Instructions: ^ To hold the coolant mixture supply, use a clean bucket or other suitable container that is larger than the cooling system's total capacity. ^ The amount of coolant mixture in the refill supply must be more than needed to fill the system completely. Page 8953 With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [5], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to warning chime unit terminal (1). Ground is supplied to warning chime unit terminal (8) through body grounds (M14) and (M68). When a signal, or combination of signals, is received by the warning chime unit, the warning chime will sound. Ignition key warning chime With the key in the ignition key cylinder, the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position, and the driver's door open, the warning chime will sound. A battery positive voltage is supplied: ^ from key switch terminal (2) ^ to warning chime unit terminal (5). Ground is supplied: ^ to warning chime unit terminal (7) ^ from door switch LH terminal (2). Door switch LH terminal (3) is grounded through body grounds (M14) and (M68). Light warning chime With ignition switch OFF or ACC position, driver's door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, the warning chime will sound. A battery positive voltage is supplied: ^ from lighting switch terminal (12) ^ to warning chime unit terminal (4). Ground is supplied: ^ to warning chime unit terminal (7) ^ from door switch LH terminal (2). Door switch LH terminal (3) is grounded through body grounds (M14) and (M68). Seat belt warning chime The warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds when ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON and seat belt is unfastened. Ground is supplied: ^ to warning chime unit terminal (2) ^ from seat belt buckle switch terminal (1). Seat belt buckle switch terminal (2) is grounded through body grounds (M14) and (M68) Page 3053 EGR Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-EGR/TS-01 EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) Circuit Diagrams EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) EGR Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 6313 Page 5764 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 1478 Page 6089 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Specifications Brake Light Switch: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Switch Nut ........................................................................................................................................... ........................... 12 - 15 Nm (108 - 132 inch lbs.) Page 5932 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1990 7. Remove the idler pulley assembly from the A/C compressor bracket. 8. Install the new idler pulley assembly making sure the E-ring is installed on the adjusting bolt. 9. Adjust the A/C drive belt deflection to specification. Refer to the "A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification" chart below. A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification 10. Tighten the nut that secures idler pulley to 16 - 22 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb). 11. Re-install the engine under cover. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 3174 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 942 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5531 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5945 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Testing and Inspection Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Switch/Check Combination Switch Check Page 4206 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 7396 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6360 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4463 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3457 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Connector Views Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 2823 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and oil may be hot. - For M/T models, put gearshift lever in Neutral "N" position. For A/T models, put selector lever in Park "P" position. 1. Check oil level. 2. Remove oil pressure switch. 3. Install pressure gauge. 4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 5. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load. - If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks. 6. Install oil pressure switch with sealant. Page 9306 Dome Lamp: Testing and Inspection MODELS WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS Trouble Diagnoses (For Models With Power Door Locks) SYMPTOM: Room lamp does not turn on when any door is opened, or timer does not operate properly. Page 3637 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5554 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5341 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4862 7. Remove the idler pulley assembly from the A/C compressor bracket. 8. Install the new idler pulley assembly making sure the E-ring is installed on the adjusting bolt. 9. Adjust the A/C drive belt deflection to specification. Refer to the "A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification" chart below. A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification 10. Tighten the nut that secures idler pulley to 16 - 22 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb). 11. Re-install the engine under cover. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 4919 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3790 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the amount of air which bypasses the throttle valve via IACV-AAC valve. The IACV-AAC valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The camshaft position sensor detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the ON/OFF time of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warm up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner and power steering). COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IACV-AAC valve The IACV-AAC valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of air that will flow through the valve. The more air that flows through the valve, the higher the idle speed. Page 2999 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6335 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 5984 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 8307 CAUTION: - Do not attempt to disassemble spiral cable. - Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable. Page 6311 Page 4374 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3520 Ground Distribution Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Front Differential Specified amount ................................................................................................................................. .................................................. 2.75 pts. (1.3 Liters) Rear Differential Specified amount: H190A .................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. 3.125 pts. (1.5 Liters) C200 ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..... 2.75 pts. (1.3 Liters) Page 2836 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch 1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine. 2. Check continuity between terminal (1) and ground. If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch. Specifications EGR Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance 7.9 - 9.7 M ohms at 32 deg F 0.57 - 0.70 M ohms at 122 deg F 0.08 - 0.10 M ohms at 212 deg F Voltage 4.81 VDC at 32 deg F 2.81 VDC at 122 deg F 0.8 VDC at 212 deg F Page 3231 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5659 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 8447 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 2329 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3704 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 3945 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4904 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6519 2. From the driver's side floor area, looking up behind the driver lower instrument panel, the lower portion of the steering column should be visible. On the bottom side of the steering column just in front of the driver lower instrument panel should be a white paper label with a four digit date code (see Figure 1). NOTE: Vehicles within the campaign range that were repaired prior to this campaign (i.e. as a Port Modification) will have an orange label over or adjacent to the white paper label. These vehicles do not require additional repair. 3. If the A/T shifter assembly replacement is required, proceed to the Service Procedure section of this bulletin. PARTS INFORMATION Parts for this voluntary safety recall must be ordered through Nissan's Customer Care Parts Ordering Program. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. Towing Expense: If required, towing expenses to the nearest Nissan dealer should be submitted using expense code 501. Page 5993 Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Ignition Coil 1. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 2. Remove distributor cap. 3. Check resistance as shown in the figure. If NG, replace distributor assembly as a unit. Locations EGR Valve: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 6693 Pressure Plate: Specifications Torque Specifications CLUTCH DISC INSPECTION Check the following items, and replace as necessary. Clutch disc, for burns, discoloration and oil or grease leakage - Clutch disc, for wear of facing Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) - Clutch disc, for backlash of spline and runout of facing Maximum backlash of spline (at outer edge of disc): 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) Runout limit: 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) Distance of runout check point (from hub center): 115 mm (4.53 inch) INSTALLATION - Apply recommended grease to contact surface of splines. - Too much lubricant may damage clutch disc facing. Page 6289 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1126 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4603 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 6043 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6813 REPLACEMENT 1. Set auto-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove auto-lock free running hub. 3. Remove snap ring. 4. Remove spindle washer and thrust washer. 5. After installing auto-lock free running hub, check operation. NOTE: When installing it, apply recommended grease to the parts shown in the above illustration. Page 5664 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9209 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1728 Fuse: Diagrams Fuse a. If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. b. Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. c. Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. d. Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 8701 ^ Re-programming of additional remote controllers is not covered by warranty. ^ Remote controller replacement due to customer abuse, purse/pocket damage, and/or loss is not covered by warranty. ^ The replacement of the remote controller battery is not covered by warranty. Service Procedure For 1998-2000 Maxima, Pathfinder, Sentra, Altima, and Frontier Vehicles 2000 Quest and Xterra Vehicles: 1. Programming Procedure: A. Get in the vehicle. Close and lock all doors using the driver's power door lock-unlock switch. B. Insert and remove the ignition key more than 6 times within a 10 second period (at a rate of one insertion/removal cycle per second). The key should be withdrawn from the ignition key cylinder completely each time it is removed. NOTE: Do not rush the insertion/removal key cycling process. C. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. The ignition key should remain in the "ACC" position throughout the remainder of the programming, including programming of additional remote controllers. D. Press any button on the remote controller one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The hazard warning lights will flash twice when this step is accurately completed and programming is successful. For 2000 Quest vehicles, the side marker/tail/license lamps will flash twice when programming is successful. E. If you are programming only one remote, proceed to step 3A. If programming additional remotes, continue with step 2A, below. 2. Programming Additional Remote Controllers (Maximum of 4 Remotes): A. Remain inside the vehicle after programming the first remote. B. Use the driver's power door lock-unlock switch to unlock and then lock the doors. C. Press any button on one of the additional remote controllers one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The hazard warning lights will flash twice when programming is successful. For 2000 Quest vehicles, the side marker/tail/license lamps will flash twice when programming is successful. If there is more than one additional remote to be programmed, repeat steps 2A through 2C above for each additional remote. 3. End Programming: A. Remove the key from the ignition. B. Use the door lock-unlock switch on the driver's door to unlock the doors. Open the driver's door to complete the programming C. Check the operation of each of the remote controllers by locking/unlocking the doors with each remote controller you have programmed. For 1999 Quest Vehicles: 1. Programming Procedure: A. Get in the vehicle. Close and lock all doors using the driver's power door lock-unlock switch. Page 361 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Combination Switch/Replacement ^ Each switch can be replaced without removing combination switch base. Combination Switch/Replacement ^ To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching screws. Combination Switch/Replacement ^ Before installing the steering wheel, align the turn signal cancel tab with the notch of combination switch. Page 5409 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 9530 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5629 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1930 Oil Pump Page 5414 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8349 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 638 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6221 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug ID Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. FR5AP-10 Cold .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. FR6AP-10 Optional ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................... FR7AP-10 Page 3717 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 981 Ground Distribution Specifications Control Arm: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Lower Link ........................................................................................................................................... ............................ 109 - 147 Nm (80 - 108 ft. lbs.) Upper Link ............................................................ ............................................................................................................... 98 - 118 Nm (72 - 87 ft. lbs.) Page 5163 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front REPLACEMENT Refer to the illustration when servicing, noting the following: CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. When removing the front wheel hub or rear axle shaft assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly and move it away. Page 1053 Ground Distribution Page 4539 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2877 ^ Refer to Figure 2 that applies to your model. ^ There should be continuity across the terminals with the throttle closed. NOTES: ^ An ohmmeter is used because CONSULT-II cannot display the CTPS status in all of the Applied Vehicles. ^ This adjustment procedure must be made with the TPS installed on the engine of the vehicle. ^ Do not touch the throttle drum when checking the CTPS signal or continuity. Doing so may cause an incorrect adjustment. ^ Nissan recommends using Kent-Moore TPS Connector Tool J-45178 for easy, accurate connection. See NTB01-023 for more information. 4. Refer to Chart 1 and select the correct thickness feeler gauges for your vehicle. 5. Check "A": Insert the thinner feeler gauge "A" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop. ^ The CTPS should have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "0 ohms"). Page 3746 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1009 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 8184 Comments regarding liquid tanks: ^ For R-134a, the sight glass has been deleted. Refer to the service procedures section of this bulletin for additional information regarding the refrigerant charge determination. Pressure switches are not interchangeable between R-12 and R-134a systems. Page 1178 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1554 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 5733 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3477 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4290 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5706 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 9215 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4103 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5532 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6184 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 7990 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT Adjust wheel bearing preload after wheel bearing has been replaced or front axle has been reassembled. Adjust wheel bearing preload as follows: 1. Before adjustment, thoroughly clean all parts to prevent dirt entry. 2. Apply multi-purpose grease sparingly to the following parts: - Threaded portion of spindle - Contact surface between wheel bearing washer and outer wheel bearing - Grease seal lip - Wheel hub 18 - 23 grams (0.63 - 0.81 ounce) 3. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.). 4. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions. 5. Loosen wheel bearing lock nut so that torque becomes 0 Nm (0 ft. lbs.). 6. Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.). 7. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions. 8. Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.). 9. Measure wheel bearing axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) Page 4537 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1023 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3185 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4675 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3799 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Page 5926 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6178 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transaxle housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis of misfire. Page 5077 Ground Distribution Page 8735 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC P1491 (EVAP) Stored Fuel Tank Cut Valve: Customer Interest Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC P1491 (EVAP) Stored Classification: EC02-008 Reference: NTB02-033 Date: March 21, 2002 DTC 1491 (VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE) DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1998-2002 All Models SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin is an aid to the diagnostic procedures in the Service Manual for DTC P1491. If one of the applied vehicles has the MIL "ON" with DTC P1491 (Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve) stored in Self-Diagnostic Results, use the service procedure in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual to help you diagnosis the incident, if it should occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the Vacuum Cut Valve is installed correctly (See Figure 1). NOTE: ^ The Vacuum Cut Valve will not work correctly and a DTC will be stored if it is installed upside-down. ^ The Vacuum Cut Valve is a white plastic valve near the fuel tank and EVAP canister. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and turn the ignition key to "N" (do not start the engine). 3. On CONSULT II, select ENGINE - DATA MONITOR - SELECTION FROM MENU - EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR. 4. Note the EVAP System Pressure Sensor Voltage Confirm that it is reading in a normal range for a key ON arid engine OFF condition. NOTE: For 2001 models and earlier: ^ Voltage in step 4 should be near 3.36 volts. ^ The normal range is between 3.32 - 3.40 volts. For 2002 models: Page 6306 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position switch is "ON". ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. Testing and Inspection Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Ignition wires 1. Inspect wires for cracks, damage, burned terminals and for improper fit. 2. Measure the resistance of wires to their distributor cap terminal. Move each wire while testing to check for intermittent breaks. Resistance: 13.6 - 18.4 K Ohms (4.15 - 5.61 K Ohms/ft) at 25°C (77°F) If the resistance exceeds the above specification, inspect ignition wire to distributor cap connection. Clean connection or replace the ignition wire with a new one. Page 788 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1745 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2415 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5435 Fuel Pump Relay: Connector Locations Main Harness (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7187 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 3831 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Page 7757 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 8149 Use the Diagnosis/Repair Flow Chart shown to determine the diagnosis and repair of the vehicle. Low Hose Visual and Leak Detector Inspection Low Hose Visual Inspection Page 7717 Page 4023 Page 3587 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 411 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 779 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3508 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5860 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7253 Wheel Cylinder: Testing and Inspection - Check wheel cylinder for leakage. - Check for wear, damage and loose conditions. Replace if any such conditions exists. Page 522 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4679 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Page 557 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4037 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 483 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 439 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. it measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 4083 Seat Belt Retractor On-Vehicle Check Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Seat Belt Retractor On-Vehicle Check Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All outboard 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats in outboard seating positions. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. ALR Function Stationary Check 1. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. 2. Retract the belt partially; a clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating retractor is in the automatic locking (ALR) mode. 3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out of retractor. Belt must lock and not extend further. If NG, replace the retractor assembly. 4. Allow the entire length of belt to retract to cancel the ALR mode. ELR Function Moving Check (all Outboard Seating Positions) WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten driver's seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 mph). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stop, seat belts should lock and not extend. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. Page 2716 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6113 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2375 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 9507 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1096 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9549 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2671 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4293 Ground Distribution Page 6524 23. Install the driver's side lower knee protector bar using the (2) grade 4 bolts (identified by the 4 on the head) (refer to Figure 3). Bolt torque specification: 29 to 38 in/lb (0.33 to 0.41 kg/m). 24. Carefully install the driver's side lower panel by lifting it into place and snapping the panel underneath the instrument cluster. Install (1) screw located above the hood lock release lever and (1) screw located under the parking brake lever (refer to Figure 2). 25. Identify the airbag harness by its yellow connector end for the spiral cable and ensure it doesn't interfere with the steering column cover installation. Damage to this harness may result in unintended airbag deployment. 26. Place a clean shop towel over the lower knee protector to protect the steering column cover during installation. 27. Carefully install the steering column upper and lower covers and install the (5) screws from the underside and installing the garnish around the key switch. Be careful not to over tighten these screws or pinch any wires. 28. Remove the shop towel from the knee protector. 29. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 30. Turn ignition on. 31. Operate the O/D switch at the end of the shift lever and confirm that the O/D indicator light turns on and off with the switch. 32. Depress brake pedal and move shift lever through all gear positions. Confirm that the transmission engages each position and that the shift indicator displays the correct gear position. 33. Return the shift lever to the park position. 34. Release the brake pedal and confirm that the gear shift lever will not move from the park position. 35. Confirm that the ignition key can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition key is in the "Lock" position and the transmission shift lever is in the "Park" position. 36. Start the engine and confirm that no dash warning lights are on. 37. Reset the radio presets. Page 1132 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5857 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7156 Technical Service Bulletin # 92-062A Date: 990617 Brakes - AMMCO On Car Lathe Operating Guidlines REFERENCE: NTB92-062A CLASSIFICATION: BR92-004A DATE: June 17,1999 TITLE: AMMCO ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE OPERATING GUIDELINES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models This amended version of NTB92-062 adds a CAUTION and a NOTE to the Service Procedure. Please discard all paper copies of NTB92-062. SERVICE INFORMATION To ensure the best possible surface finish and least amount of run-out and rotor thickness variation when using the Ammco on-car brake lathe, the following guidelines should be observed. Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE Before mounting the brake lathe on the vehicle ensure the following: 1. The V-way between the carriage and carriage gib must be clean and adjusted properly (see Operation Manual for adjustment procedure). Wipe off sliding surfaces with a soft cloth after each use. 2. The cutters and cutting bits must be tight in their mounts and positioned properly. Change cutting bits when they become dull. 3. When securing the adjustable mounting brackets to the caliper mount/knuckle the mounting surfaces must be smooth and free of burrs. 4. Make sure the adjustable mounting brackets are securely mounted to caliper mount/knuckle. There should be no movement between the cutting tool and the caliper mount/knuckle. ROTOR DRIVING UNIT Before using the drive unit ensure the following: Page 5579 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3883 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4657 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 7684 Standard length "L" (4WD): 297.6 mm (11.72 inch) CAUTION: Make sure that tie rod bars are screwed into tie rod tube more than 29 mm (1.14 inch) (2WD), 22 mm (0.87 inch) (4WD). INSPECTION Ball Joint And Swivel Joint 1. Check joints for play. If ball or swivel stud is worn and play in axial direction is excessive or joint is hard to swing, replace as a complete unit. Swinging force (Measure point: Cotter pin hole) "A": Ball joint: 15.7 - 147.1 N (3.5 - 33.1 lbs.) Rotating torque "B": Ball joint: 0.5 - 4.9 Nm (4.3 - 43.4 inch lbs.) Swivel joint: 1.0 - 5.9 Nm (8.7 - 52.1 inch lbs.) Axial end play "C": Ball joint: 0 mm (0 inch) Swivel joint: 0 mm (0 inch) 2. Check condition of dust cover. If it is cracked excessively replace dust cover. When replacing dust cover, be careful not to damage it. 3. Lubricate joint with multi-purpose grease, if necessary. 4. When installing boot band with commercial service tool, be careful not to overexpand it. CAUTION: Be careful not to apply grease or oil to taper of joint. Idler Arm Assembly - Check rubber bushing of idler arm for breakage, wear or play, and if necessary replace. - Lubricate idler arm assembly with multi-purpose grease, if necessary. Relay Rod And Tie-Rod - Check tie rod and relay rod for breakage, bends or cracks, and replace with a new one if necessary. Steering Damper - Check for oil leaking from damper, and replace if necessary. Fixing Location - Check fixing location (nuts and cotter pins) for looseness, play or breakage. - When looseness or play is found, check for wear on tapered portion of joints, gear arm of idler arm. - When reassembling each joint, use new cotter pins. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 528 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 749 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 9283 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6277 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7919 Page 2731 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6423 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM controls torque converter clutch solenoid valve to cancel the lock-up condition of A/T. When the solenoid valve is turned on, lock-up is cancelled. When the solenoid valve is turned oft, A/T lock-up is operational. Conditions for lock-up cancel: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned "ON" when; Throttle valve is fully closed (during idling or deceleration) - Engine coolant temperature is below 40° C (104° F) - Engine is stopped Conditions for lock-up operation: Under 55 to 63 km/h (34 to 39 MPH) (2/8 throttle on flat road), lock-up does not operate even when the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is "OFF". - Over 58 to 66 km/h (36 to 41 MPH) (2/8 throttle on flat road), lock-up should operate because the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is "OFF". To confirm vehicle lock-up, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve must be in operation ("ON" during idle and deceleration, and "OFF" during acceleration) and engine speed should drop. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there will be no lock-up. CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. Page 4060 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4902 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 8416 The top section of the tape (from which the backing sheet was peeled off in step 5) should be placed so that it is pointing down toward the floor of the vehicle. The "unexposed" bottom section of the tape should be pointing up toward the ceiling of the vehicle (see Figure 9A). 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 9B). ^ The unexposed bottom section of the tape will be pulled through and hang over the top of the "D" ring (see Figure 9B). Stop pulling when you see this. 8. As the top section of the adhesive-exposed tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring (see Figure 9B above and Figure 10). NOTE: Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface in these procedural steps so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. IMPORTANT: Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. Replace the tape with a new piece if this should occur. 9. Run your finger over the surface of the newly applied tape to firmly apply it to the back side of the "D" ring. Press down the edges of the tape, and smooth out any air bubbles or wrinkles (see Figure 10). 10. Peel off the remaining, unexposed bottom section of the tape backing (see Figure 11A). 11. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Take care to apply the tape so that no wrinkles are present. Press down the edges of the tape (see Figure 11B). Page 3853 Ground Distribution Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door For removal of door trim refer to Door Trim in INTERIOR TRIM for details. After adjusting door or door lock check door lock operation. Page 7925 WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC REPLACEMENT 1. Remove free running hub assembly. (4WD) Refer to Locking Hub / Service and Repair. Page 1076 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 2687 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3675 Data Link Connector: Connector Views MIL & Data Link Connectors MIL and Data Link Connectors Circuit Connectors Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair VALVE OIL SEAL 1. Remove rocker cover. 2. Remove camshaft. 3. Remove valve spring and valve oil seal with Tool or a suitable tool. Piston concerned should be set at TDC to prevent valve from falling. 4. Apply engine oil to new valve oil seal and install it with Tool. OIL SEAL INSTALLING DIRECTION Install new oil seal in the direction shown. FRONT OIL SEAL 1. Remove radiator shroud and crankshaft pulley 2. Remove front oil seal - Be careful not to scratch front cover. Page 4173 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4057 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 1040 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Locations Fuse Block: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Door Switch: Locations BR-ABS-01 Anti-lock Brake System (Part 1 Of 5) SRS Component Parts Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5045 Leak Detection Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4789 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6302 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3497 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Mass air flow sensor 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between terminal (54) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above check. 5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust. Page 6351 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2868 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Upper Ball Joint Ball Joint: Specifications Upper Ball Joint DIMENSIONS Vertical End Play ................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Castle Nut ............................................................................................................................................ ............................... 78 - 147 Nm (58 - 108 ft. lbs.) Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Specified amount: With oil filter ......................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 4.125 qts. (3.9 Liters) Without oil filter .................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 3.875 qts. (3.7 Liters) Page 388 Ground Distribution Page 4634 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 63 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 2474 Ignition Control Module: Electrical Diagrams WIRING DIAGRAM Page 5358 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5649 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 7619 CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION Before checking camber, caster or kingpin inclination, move vehicle up and down on turning radius gauge to minimize friction. Ensure that the vehicle is in correct posture. - Measure camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust in accordance with the following procedures. Camber, Caster, and Kingpin inclination: Refer to Specification Table. - In the following two cases, temporarily tighten the adjusting bolts while aligning the matching marks with the slits as shown in the figure and measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination: (1) When replacing the upper link or other suspension parts with new ones (2) When matching marks were not painted on adjusting bolts before suspension disassembly procedures. - If matching marks were already painted during suspension disassembly, align the matching marks with the slits, then temporarily tighten the adjusting bolts. Measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination. ADJUSTMENT Page 3051 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3310 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5718 ^ Refer to Figure 2 that applies to your model. ^ There should be continuity across the terminals with the throttle closed. NOTES: ^ An ohmmeter is used because CONSULT-II cannot display the CTPS status in all of the Applied Vehicles. ^ This adjustment procedure must be made with the TPS installed on the engine of the vehicle. ^ Do not touch the throttle drum when checking the CTPS signal or continuity. Doing so may cause an incorrect adjustment. ^ Nissan recommends using Kent-Moore TPS Connector Tool J-45178 for easy, accurate connection. See NTB01-023 for more information. 4. Refer to Chart 1 and select the correct thickness feeler gauges for your vehicle. 5. Check "A": Insert the thinner feeler gauge "A" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop. ^ The CTPS should have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "0 ohms"). Page 2014 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 7814 CAUTION: Make matching marks and measure dimension "L" when loosening adjusting nut until there is no tension on torsion bar spring. 2. Remove shock absorber lower fixing bolt. 3. Remove stabilizer car connecting bolt. 4. Separate lower link ball joint from knuckle spindle. 5. Remove front lower link fixing nut. 6. Remove bushing of lower link spindle from frame with Tool. 7. After installing lower link, adjust wheel alignment and vehicle height. INSPECTION Lower Link And Lower Link Spindle - Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Lower Link Bushing - Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary. Page 1962 7. Determine replacement adjusting shim size as follows. a. Using a micrometer determine thickness of removed shim. b. Calculate thickness of new adjusting shim so valve clearance comes within specified values. R = Thickness of removed shim N = Thickness of new shim M = Measured valve clearance Intake & Exhaust: N = R + [M - 0.37 mm (0.0146 inch)] Shims are available in thicknesses from 1.96 mm (0.0772 inch) to 2.68 mm (0.1055 in), in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch). c. Select new shim with thickness as close as possible to calculated value. 8. Install new shim using a suitable tool. - Install with the surface on which the thickness is stamped facing down. 9. Place Tool (A) as mentioned in steps 2 and 3. 10. Remove Tool (B). 11. Remove Tool (A). 12. Recheck valve clearance. Page 1390 Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Page 1573 Use a backup wrench on the low hose when tightening the joint connection nut. 8. Reinstall the clip to the support bracket (see Figure 2). Tighten the clip mounting bolt to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 Kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb). 9. Evacuate and recharge the vehicle's A/C system with 0.60 - 0.70 kg (1.32-1.54 lb) of R134a refrigerant. Refer to page HA-51 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C evacuation and recharge procedure. 10. Check the A/C low hose for refrigerant leaks. Refer to pages HA-48 through HA-50 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C leak test procedure. If a leak is found, repair as necessary before proceeding with step 11. 11. Check A/C performance. Refer to page HA-38 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C performance check procedure. A. If the A/C performance is within specification, this service procedure is complete. B. If the A/C performance is not within specification, repair as necessary. Low Hose Angle Adjustment 1. Loosen the joint connection between the A/C low hose and the mating A/C low pipe by turning the joint connection nut 1/4 turn counterclockwise (see Figure 4). CAUTION: Do not loosen the joint connection nut more than 1/4 turn as refrigerant can escape and the 0-ring may become damaged. Also, use a backup wrench on the hose when loosening the joint connection nut. 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the bolt that secures the clip to the support bracket (see Figure 4). 3. Move the A/C low hose so that it is positioned between 0° and 5° relative to the horizontal plane (see Figure 5). 4. Retighten the clip mounting bolt to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 Kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb) Page 2403 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 8068 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 4104 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Master Cylinder Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications Master Cylinder DIMENSIONS Bore Diameter ..................................................................................................................................... ......................................... 23.81 mm (0.94 inches) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Nuts ..................................................................................................................................... ........................... 12 - 15 Nm (108 - 132 inch lbs.) Flare Nuts ............................................................ ................................................................................................................... 15 - 18 Nm (11 - 13 ft. lbs.) Valve Stopper ............................................................................................................................................................. 2.0 - 3.4 Nm (17.4 - 30.4 inch lbs.) Page 1879 Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Torque Specifications LOWER TIMING CHAIN 1. Install crankshaft sprocket, oil pump drive gear and oil thrower. - Make sure that mating marks of crankshaft sprocket face front of engine. 2. Position crankshaft so that No. 1 piston is set at TDC. 3. Install idler sprocket and lower timing chain. - Set lower timing chain on the sprockets, aligning mating marks. Be careful not to damage cylinder head gasket when installing lower timing chain. 4. Install chain tension arm and chain guide. 5. Install lower timing chain tensioner. - When installing, insert a suitable pin into pin hole to stop piston. After installation remove the pin to release piston. 6. Install front cover. - Use a scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from mating surface - Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block. - Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to front cover. - Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant, Part No. 999 MP-A7007, Three Bond TB1207D or equivalent. Page 3330 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 8382 3. Slide the seat belt latch plate to a position higher than the button position (i.e., between the button location and the shoulder anchor loop). See Figure 2. 4. Find the original button position (hole). Then insert the button half (with the center pin) into the belt. Go in from the plastic side of the latch plate (see Figure 2). 5. On the opposite side of the belt (on the metal side of the latch plate) fit the button half with the hole over the protruding pin (see Figure 2 & 3). 6. Use an adjustable wrench with smooth jaws. Place it as shown in Figure 4, then finger tighten the jaws. Page 4360 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Front Differential Pinion Gear: Specifications Front Differential DRIVE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT DRIVE PINION PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT Page 9433 License Plate Lamp: Connector Views Parking, License And Tail Lamps (Part 1 Of 2) Parking, License, And Tail Lamps (Part 2 Of 2) Parking, License and Tail Lamps Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4354 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4342 Knock Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-KS-01 Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Circuit Diagrams Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 4270 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transaxle housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis of misfire. Specifications Center Link: Specifications DIMENSIONS Ball Joint Swinging Force [1] ............................................................................................................................................ 15.7 147.1 N (3.5 - 33.1 lbs.) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Castle Nuts (At Inner Tie Rod) .............................................................................................................................................. 54 - 98 Nm (40 - 72 ft. lbs.) [1]: Measure point at the cotter pin hole. Page 417 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3844 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2335 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4624 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1890 Camshaft: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Head. Page 3291 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8934 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 100 Page 2673 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 1553 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 6943 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4002 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Idler Pulley: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Classification: HA99-006 Reference: NTB99-070 Date: October 5, 1999 A/C IDLER PULLEY WHINE NOISE AT 3000 ENGINE RPM (FOUR CYLINDER ENGINE ONLY) APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) - 2WD 2000 Xterra (WD22) - 2WD APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle exhibits a whine noise at or around 3,000 engine RPM, the cause may be the air conditioning (A/C) idler pulley. Use the service procedure listed below to diagnose and correct the incident. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Run the engine at or around 3,000 RPM with the A/C ON and OFF to determine when the whine noise occurs. NOTE: The A/C will operate with the A/C button turned off if the mode selector is in the foot/defrost or defrost position and the fan is turned on. To ensure the A/C is off, move the fan speed selector to the off position. A. If the whine noise occurs with the A/C off (A/C compressor not operating), look for other sources of the whine noise. B. If the whine noise only occurs when the A/C is on (A/C compressor operating) and the noise can be pin pointed to the idler pulley with a stethoscope or Chassis Ears(TM), proceed with step 2. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Loosen (but do not remove) the nut that secures the idler pulley (see Figure 1). 4. Remove the E-ring from the idler pulley adjusting bolt (see Figure 1). 5. Remove the idler pulley adjusting bolt. 6. Remove the A/C compressor drive belt from the idler pulley. Page 3099 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Interior - Seat Belt Latch Plate Button Missing Technical Service Bulletin # 99-022C Date: 030805 Interior - Seat Belt Latch Plate Button Missing Classification: RS99-001C Reference; NTB99-022C Date: August 5, 2003 FRONT SEAT BELT LATCH PLATE RETAINING BUTTON MISSING The Applied Vehicles and Service Information sections of this bulletin have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of NTB99-022. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM: ^ The front seat belt latch plate of an applied vehicle slides to the end of the seat belt, sliding down the belt to the floor at the base of the B pillar. ^ This happens because the seat belt latch plate retaining button is lost or damaged. ^ The seat belt and retractor are in serviceable condition, ACTION: Use this bulletin to replace the retaining button and clean, and refurbish the driver's and passenger's front seat belt "D" rings. NOTE: This button is required to hold the seat belt latch plate at the shoulder location, preventing it from sliding to the floor when the belt is released. NOTE: The purpose of "ACTION" is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 2547 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC P1491 (EVAP) Stored Fuel Tank Cut Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC P1491 (EVAP) Stored Classification: EC02-008 Reference: NTB02-033 Date: March 21, 2002 DTC 1491 (VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE) DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1998-2002 All Models SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin is an aid to the diagnostic procedures in the Service Manual for DTC P1491. If one of the applied vehicles has the MIL "ON" with DTC P1491 (Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve) stored in Self-Diagnostic Results, use the service procedure in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual to help you diagnosis the incident, if it should occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the Vacuum Cut Valve is installed correctly (See Figure 1). NOTE: ^ The Vacuum Cut Valve will not work correctly and a DTC will be stored if it is installed upside-down. ^ The Vacuum Cut Valve is a white plastic valve near the fuel tank and EVAP canister. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and turn the ignition key to "N" (do not start the engine). 3. On CONSULT II, select ENGINE - DATA MONITOR - SELECTION FROM MENU - EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR. 4. Note the EVAP System Pressure Sensor Voltage Confirm that it is reading in a normal range for a key ON arid engine OFF condition. NOTE: For 2001 models and earlier: ^ Voltage in step 4 should be near 3.36 volts. ^ The normal range is between 3.32 - 3.40 volts. For 2002 models: Page 9184 Backup Lamp: Connector Views Back-up Lamp Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Differential Carrier Gear Oil Rear: H190A ........................................................................................................................................ .............................................. 1.5 liters (3-1/8 pt) C200 .................................................................................................................................................... ................................... 1.3 liters (2-3/4 pt) Front (4WD):R180A ............................................................................................................................. ............................................. 1.3 liters (2-3/4 pt) Page 7321 Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Battery - Charging/Replacement Procedure CLASSIFICATION: EL94-001 REFERENCE: NTB94-009 DATE: MARCH 4, 1994 BATTERY CHARGING/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S) All SERVICE INFORMATION As the demands on the vehicle battery increase with the complexity of electrical systems, there is a need for a usable, consistent and repeatable procedure for determining the need for charging or replacement of vehicle batteries. It is the Dealer's responsibility to determine the condition/chargeability of a battery, prior to replacement of the battery. SERVICE PROCEDURE See the following illustrations for BATTERY CHARGING/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. Battery Charging/Replacement Procedure Page 7372 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 6398 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 6590 Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve 1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly. 2. Check torque converter clutch control valve. - Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. - Valve, and sleeve are tree from burrs, dents and scratches. - Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. - Hydraulic line is tree from obstacles. 3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve. Page 640 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 9279 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 106 Attachment General Procedure Page 5001 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 7374 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2242 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Testing and Inspection Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Check continuity between terminals at each switch position. Replacement Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Replacement COMPONENTS REMOVAL CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ^ In the case of brake fluid leakage from the master cylinder, disassemble the cylinder. Then check piston cups for deformation or scratches and replace necessary parts. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to air bleeder valve 2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve, depressing brake pedal to empty fluid from master cylinder. 3. Remove brake pipe flare nuts. 4. Remove master cylinder mounting nuts. INSTALLATION CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid DOT 3. ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 817 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7652 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5253 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1441 2. Check outside and inside wheel runout. Refer to illustrations. 3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. 5. Check steering linkage for looseness. 6. Check that front shock absorbers work properly by using the standard bounce test. 7. Measure vehicle height (Unladen): H = A - B mm (inch) Refer to Specification Table. a. Exercise the front suspension by bouncing the front of the vehicle 4 or 5 times to ensure that the vehicle is in a neutral height attitude. b. Measure wheel alignment. Refer to Specification Table. c. If wheel alignment is not as specified, adjust vehicle posture. Refer to Specification Table. d. Adjust wheel alignment. Refer to Specification Table. Page 7319 2) Look into each individual cell and verify that the electrolyte covers the lead plates in the battery and is no higher than the bottom of the vent well (see Figure 1). 3) If necessary, add only distilled water to all cells with low electrolyte levels, bringing the electrolyte levels up to the bottom of the vent well. 4) Re-install the cell plugs. 5) Check that the terminal connections are tight. Clean and tighten the connections as needed. NOTES: ^ For optimum performance and battery life, fill all cells to the appropriate level. ^ If you remove the battery cables to clean the terminals, record the radio pre-sets before removing. Re-set the radio pre-sets and the clock after cables are reinstalled. CAUTIONS: ^ Always use distilled water when adjusting battery fluid levels. DO NOT use tap water or electrolyte (acid). ^ DO NOT overfill the battery cells. B. Batteries With White Cases: 1) Shine a light at the front of the battery case and determine the electrolyte level mark on the face of the battery case (see Figure 2). 2) Verify that the electrolyte level is up to the "Upper Level" mark (see Figure 2). 3) If the electrolyte level is below the "Upper Level" mark, remove the cell plugs. 4) Add distilled water to the cells to bring the electrolyte up to the "Upper Level" mark. Page 9259 EL-ROOM/L-02 Interior Room Lamp (Part 2 Of 3) Circuit Diagrams Interior Room Lamp (Part 1 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp (Part 2 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp Circuit Connectors Page 6006 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3822 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Audio - Front Door Speaker Buzz Noise Speaker: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Front Door Speaker Buzz Noise Classification: EL98-002 Reference: NTB98-031 Date: April 15, 1998 1998 FRONTIER DOOR SPEAKER "BUZZ" NOISE REPAIR APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1998 Frontier (with factory installed audio system) SERVICE INFORMATION If a 1998 Frontier exhibits a "buzz" noise at the door speakers when the radio volume is increased, use the following service procedure to minimize or eliminate the "buzz" noise. Note: Apply the service procedure listed below to both doors. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front door finisher. 2. Remove the speaker assembly from the door (see Figure 1). Page 9030 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 3875 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3781 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Locations Ignition Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3917 Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 614 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 7499 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Installation Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Installation To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. 3 - 5 N.m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6234 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 9489 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3186 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 8983 Ground Distribution Page 5872 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 7015 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 8190 which will result in contamination, and damage to recovery/recycle equipment. ^ Use equipment designed to meet Society of Automotive engineers (SAE) standards, which specify R-134a service equipment fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME), and service hose identification (black stripe on hose). ^ Adapters to convert from one size fitting to the other must never be used; refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and system failure may result. ^ The use of incorrect equipment will result in refrigerant and/or lubricant contamination, which may cause A/C system or equipment failure. ^ ACR(4) machine will perform all required service functions (recovery, evacuation, recycle, recharge). ^ High volume A/C service facilities may benefit from "component" A/C service equipment (vacuum pump, weight scale, manifold gauge set) to supplement the ACR(4). Comments regarding recovery/recycling equipment: ^ Be certain to follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. ^ Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ^ Only R-134a containers with a 1/2"-16 ACME can be used to add R-134a to the ACR4 recovery/recycle machine. ^ Periodic maintenance of this equipment is required; follow the manufacturer's recommendations as described in the equipment instruction manual. Page 2707 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1817 Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Bearing Nut Torque SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload ................................................... ............................................................................................................ 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) Return Angle ................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 15 - 30° TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Lock Nut: Initial .................................................................................................................................................... ............................ 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Final ............................................................................ ............................................................................................ 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) Page 5575 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6737 Pinion Gear: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Differential; Service and Repair. Page 3895 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5809 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 867 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1030 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The tank fuel temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 695 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5074 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Specifications Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Switch Nut ........................................................................................................................................... ........................... 12 - 15 Nm (108 - 132 inch lbs.) Page 3452 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5797 ^ Refer to Figure 3 for the specific vehicle you are working on CAUTION: Never adjust the throttle slop screw. It is pre-set at the factory. 6. Check "B"; Insert the thicker feeler gauge "B" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop (see Figure 3). The CTPS should NOT have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "OL"). 7. If the results of steps 5 and/or 6 are not OK, loosen the TPS retaining bolts and adjust the CTPS to achieve the correct results. 8. Tighten the TPS retaining bolts, then repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times to check the new adjustment. 9. Re-connect the harness connector to the CTPS portion of the (TPS). Reset throttle position sensor idle position memory. NOTE: Failure to reset the TPS idle position memory may result in the idle speed staying higher than specification. 10. Start engine and warm it to operating temperature. NOTE: Always warm up engine to normal operation temperature, If the engine is cool, the throttle position memory will not be reset correctly. Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications CAPACITY CAPACITY TOTAL SYSTEM CAPACITY LITERS TOTAL SYSTEM CAPACITY OUNCES (US) 0.20 6.8 Page 5927 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5205 EGR Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-EGR/TS-01 EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) Circuit Diagrams EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) EGR Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Specifications Page 4318 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2601 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5090 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 7730 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6393 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Testing and Inspection Turn Signal Flasher: Testing and Inspection Combination Flasher Unit Check Combination Flasher Unit Check ^ Before checking, ensure that bulbs meet specifications. ^ Connect a battery and test lamp to the combination flasher unit, as shown. Combination flasher unit is properly functioning if it blinks when power is supplied to the circuit. Page 5329 Page 9217 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor: Customer Interest MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) BULLETIN NUMBER: NTB99-013 CLASSIFICATION: EC99-001 DATE: April 1, 1999 TITLE: 1998-99 MY FRONTIER TRUCK M/T MIL "ON" P0500 SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied 1998-99 Frontier Truck (manual transmission, KA24DE Engine only) shows the following conditions: 1. MIL "ON" with DTC P0500 stored, 2. CONSULT freeze frame data indicates an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less, 3. No abnormal speedometer indication during test drive, then use this bulletin to repair the incident This incident may be due to a clutch slip condition for more than 10 seconds with a vehicle forward speed of less than 3 mph. This situation could occur during hill holding using clutch slip. Correct this incident by installing the ECM listed in the Parts Information using the following service procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTC stored is P0500 2. Verify the CONSULT freeze frame data stored has an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less (see Figure 1). 3. Conduct test drive to confirm there is no abnormal speedometer indication: a) Connect CONSULT and select Start, Engine, Data Monitor and Main Signals b) Test drive vehicle and ensure the speedometer and the vehicle speed sensor value displayed in Data Monitor provide consistent speed Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 661 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Specifications Clutch Disc: Specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Air Bleeder Screw 5 - 7 ft.lb Page 594 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3319 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5000 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 4913 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 705 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4003 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8925 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3986 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 1297 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5412 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 7297 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation The sensor unit consists of a gear-shaped sensor rotor and a sensor element. The element contains a bar magnet around which a coil is wound. The sensor is installed on the back of the brake rotor and the back of the rear brake drum. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a sine-wave pattern. The frequency and voltage increase(s) as the rotating speed increases. Specifications Parking Brake Cable: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Front Cable: Mounting Bolts .................................................................................................................................................. 10.8 14.6 Nm (96 - 129.6 inch lbs.) Front/Rear Cable Holder ............................................................................................................................................ 4.3 - 5.8 Nm (38.2 - 51.2 inch lbs.) Rear Cable: Mounting Bolts ................................................................................................................................................... 10.8 14.6 Nm (8.0 - 10.8 inch lbs.) Page 5367 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 4363 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2613 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1277 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Thermal Control Amp. Inspection Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Thermal Control Amp. Inspection 1. Run engine, and operate A/C system. 2. Connect the voltmeter from harness side. 3. Check thermo control amp. operation shown in the table. Page 8717 Page 2589 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor is a basic component of the ECCS. it monitors engine speed and piston position. These input signals to the ECM are used to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other functions. The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-forming circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for a 1° (POS) signal and 4 slits for a 180° (REF) signal. The wave-forming circuit consists of Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes. The rotor plate is positioned between the LED and the photo diode. The LED transmits light to the photo diode. As the rotor plate turns, the slits cut the light to generate rough-shaped pulses. These pulses are converted into on-off signals by the wave-forming circuit and sent to the ECM. The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an assembly except distributor cap. Page 5755 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 7674 REMOVAL 1. Remove free running hub assembly. (4WD) Refer to Locking Hub. Page 3800 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 8371 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 3118 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 135 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3766 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 9552 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 8727 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4635 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7073 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2013 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 4124 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-AP/SEN-01 Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Diagrams Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 7918 Wheel Hub (Locking): Specifications Page 4742 Ground Distribution Page 460 Ground Distribution Page 757 Throttle Full Close Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Closed Throttle Position Switch 1. tart engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector. 4. Check continuity between terminals (5) and (6) while opening throttle valve manually. If NG, replace throttle position switch. Page 2827 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7567 Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Page 4184 Ground Distribution Page 3827 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve Service and Repair Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION - Remove release bearing. - Install release bearing with suitable drift. - Install retainer spring and holder spring. INSPECTION Check the following items, and replace as necessary. Release bearing, to see that it rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear - Release sleeve and withdrawal lever rubbing surface, for wear, rust and damage LUBRICATION Page 3551 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7324 Battery: Specifications Information not supplied by manufacturer Page 1761 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 7061 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 8929 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2778 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8823 following: 1. Water spots on light colored vehicles and some vehicles which have had minimal exposure to the elements can be repaired by buffing. First, apply a fine cutting compound using an orbital buffer to remove a thin layer of the top coat or clear coat. After removal of the spots, buff with glazing compound to remove the fine scratches. 2. More severe spotting can be removed with a coarser cutting compound followed by finer compound and glazing compound to remove the scratches. 3. The most severe water spots on clear coated, dark vehicles can be repaired by wet sanding the affected areas with 1200 grit sandpaper to prepare the surface then spraying a fresh clear coat on those areas. Non-clear coated vehicles should be repairable with either step 1 or 2. * Available through Dyment Distribution Services. Page 6372 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2768 Ground Distribution Page 4256 Ground Distribution Page 8813 Paint: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 87-145 Date: 870928 Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Classification: BF87-030 Reference: TS87-145 Date: September 28, 1987 PAINT SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Paint spotting incidents occurring in the U.S. market are not unique to Nissan, but are being experienced by all manufacturers. To date, two separate types of paint spotting incidents have been identified as follows: 1. Particulate Fallout - Tiny solid particles which collect on horizontal panels, causing a dark stain which will penetrate into the paint if not cleaned. 2. Water Spotting - A ringlet or multiple water-drop-shaped light discoloration on dark painted horizontal panels. THESE TYPES OF SPOTTING ARE NOT DUE TO PAINT DEFICIENCY, AND CAN BE PREVENTED THROUGH PROPER CARE. SERVICE PROCEDURE Particulate Fallout Ash, dust, soot and other tiny solid particulate matter from industrial and other sources can be carried many miles. Particulate fallout is most noticeable on the horizontal surfaces (hood, luggage compartment lid, and roof) of the vehicle. If left on a moist, painted surface, the particles will slowly dissolve and bond to the paint, frequently leaving a red stain. This stain can be present even on plastic surfaces such as bumpers if the fallout has an iron content. These spots may be visible on both solid and metallic paints (especially light colors). The particulate can be felt as a sharp point on the paint surface. When viewed through a magnifying lens, the staining may be evident. VEHICLE CARE Every 10 days, or more frequently depending upon local conditions, particulate fallout must be washed off with mild detergent and water to prevent its bonding and staining action. A good carnuba wax coating can help protect against damage from particulate fallout. PARTICULATE FALLOUT REPAIR PROCEDURE In most cases, thoroughly washing the affected area with a water and mild detergent solution (to avoid scratching the finish with dislodged particles) will remove the particulates. After washing the vehicle, a stain, generally orange or red, may still be visible on white or other light colored vehicles. This stain can be removed with a fine compound material. DO NOT APPLY THE COMPOUNDING MATERIAL BEFORE ALL PARTICLES IN THE AFFECTED AREA ARE REMOVED BY THOROUGH WASHING. Water Spotting A photograph of typical water spotting is shown on page 26 of the Nissan Paint Refinishing Guide* (PIN 5REFGD). The spots are most visible when viewed at an angle, usually under fluorescent light. The paint surface is usually smooth to the touch because the spotting is a change in the top surface itself. This is not hard-water residue which will wash off with soap and water. These spots are visible on both solid and metallic paints with dark colors. VEHICLE CARE When a vehicle is stored outside and unprotected, dust patterns develop on the painted surfaces. These patterns guide moisture droplets from a light rain or morning dew to the same location each time. The strong sunlight, repeatedly concentrated on these water droplets, greatly contributes to the spotting. Page 6846 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Manual Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set knob of manual-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove manual-lock free running hub. 3. When installing manual-lock free running hub, make sure the hub is in the FREE position. NOTE: Apply multi-purpose grease to the parts shown in the illustration. 4. Check operation of manual-lock free running hub after installation. INSPECTION - Check that the knob moves smoothly and freely. - Check that the clutch moves smoothly in the body. Page 6623 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 618 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 5656 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9211 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3089 Leak Detection Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. 4. Check output voltage between ECM terminal (62) and engine ground. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply vacuum below -20 kPa (-150 mmHg, -5.91 inHg) or pressure over 20.0 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg). 5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Page 592 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 789 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 8202 Comments regarding PAG refrigerant oils: ^ PAG oil absorbs moisture from the air at an exceptionally fast rate, and moisture can damage the A/C system. Page 7823 REMOVAL 1. Remove free running hub assembly. (4WD) Refer to Locking Hub. Page 2850 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Brakes - ABS Sensor Precaution Using On Car Brake Lathe Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Sensor Precaution Using On Car Brake Lathe Classification: BR99-006 Reference: NTB99-040 Date: June 16, 1999 NISSAN ABS SENSOR CAUTION WHEN USING ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles With ABS SERVICE INFORMATION When using an on-car brake lathe to resurface rotors, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Metal shavings that collect on the ABS wheel speed sensor may cause the ABS warning light to come on, or, may cause intermittent activation of the ABS under normal braking conditions. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the following procedure to prevent accumulation of metallic shavings on the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet when using an on-car brake lathe: 1. When the vehicle is on the service lift, make sure the ignition key is in the "off" position. NOTE: Rotating a wheel, monitored by an ABS wheel speed sensor, while the ignition key is in the "on" position, may trigger a wheel speed sensor error code. The warning light may remain on even after the self diagnoses memory is cleared with CONSULT. If this occurs, the warning light will turn off when driving over 9 mph (20 Km/h) after clearing the self diagnoses memory. 2. Prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet during rotor resurfacing. 3. Clean and remove all metallic particles from the surface of the rotor and the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet after rotor resurfacing. The ABS wheel speed sensor can be cleaned with compressed air. CAUTION: Always wear safety goggles when applying compressed air. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. Page 1315 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Engine - Rattle Noise After Overnight Cold Soak Timing Chain Tensioner: Customer Interest Engine - Rattle Noise After Overnight Cold Soak Classification: EM99-001 Reference: NTB99-079 Date: October 28, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER RATTLE NOISE AFTER OVERNIGHT COLD SOAK APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-1999 Frontier (D22) With KA24DE Engine APPLIED ENGINE #: Prior to KA24-816611 SERVICE INFORMATION Use this bulletin to perform repairs if an applied 1998 or 1999 Frontier equipped with a KA24DE engine exhibits a rattle noise after sitting overnight (cold soak). The noise this bulletin addresses would be evident in the valve cover area, and would last about three seconds. The noise would not occur again until another overnight cold soak. SERVICE PROCEDURE Diagnose This incident, if it occurs, would only be heard after an overnight soak. If a rattle noise can be duplicated while the engine is warm, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to engine noise diagnoses. Repair Use the following procedure to replace the cam bracket bolts and upper chain tensioner: 1. Remove the valve cover and place a rag under the cam sprocket to prevent parts from falling down into the timing cover. 2. Starting at the front cam bracket on the intake cam, remove the two bolts securing the cam bracket to the head (see Figure 1). It is not necessary to remove the cam bracket. 3. Install two new (Counter Measure) bolts (P/N 13058-2J203) finger tight. Page 5866 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3007 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1673 Comments regarding R-134a manifold gauge set: ^ Be certain that the gauge face indicates R134a or 134a. ^ Be certain that the manifold gauge set has the 1/2" - 16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses, ensuring that only R-134a service hoses are used. ^ Be certain that no refrigerants other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricants) are used with the manifold gauge set. Page 9160 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2881 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 427 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1302 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3559 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3474 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 389 Ground Distribution Page 1998 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 1352 ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. Page 5528 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Specifications Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5322 Page 2542 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 196 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4145 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 489 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 4660 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7210 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Specifications Page 4753 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9451 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1139 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7533 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Air Bleeder Screw 5 - 7 ft.lb Page 2909 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 569 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3583 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Hub, Rotor and Wheel Bearing Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Hub, Rotor and Wheel Bearing Page 2505 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3870 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5737 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5061 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 97 Page 5708 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 514 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 564 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3154 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5761 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 8942 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2776 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 8034 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Manual Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set knob of manual-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove manual-lock free running hub. 3. When installing manual-lock free running hub, make sure the hub is in the FREE position. NOTE: Apply multi-purpose grease to the parts shown in the illustration. 4. Check operation of manual-lock free running hub after installation. INSPECTION - Check that the knob moves smoothly and freely. - Check that the clutch moves smoothly in the body. Page 8747 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2378 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 7597 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 4441 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 2496 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 9523 Spot Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2649 Ground Distribution Page 2392 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4530 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3624 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 2229 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7632 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9510 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 8308 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Aligning Turn Signal Cancel Tab 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Align the turn signal cancel tab with the notch of the combination switch as shown. 3. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 4. Rotate the spiral cable fully clockwise until tight. Installation - Air Bag Module And Spiral Cable 5. Rotate the spiral cable counterclockwise as specified and align white pin with arrow on housing. - Power Steering: Approx. 2.5 turns from neutral position. - Manual Steering: Approx. 4 turns from neutral position. When spiral cable is centered, white pin is aligned with arrow on housing and yellow wheel shows in window. CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap during steering operation if the spiral cable is installed improperly. Also, with the steering linkage Adjustments Neutral Safety Switch: Adjustments 1. Remove control linkage and manual lever from manual shaft. 2. Set manual shaft in "N" position. 3. Loosen inhibitor switch fixing bolts. 4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both inhibitor switch and manual as near vertical as possible. 5. Tighten inhibitor switch fixing bolts. 6. Remove pin. 7. Reinstall any part removed. 8. Adjust control linkage. Refer to Transmission and Drivetrain. 9. Check continuity of inhibitor switch. Page 5038 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 918 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT INSPECTION Front heated oxygen sensor With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Select "MANU TRIG" and "HI SPEED" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT, and select "FR O2 SENSOR" and "FR O2 MNTR". (3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. (4) Touch "RECORD" on CONSULT screen. (5) Check the following. - "FR O2 MNTR" in "DATA MONITOR" mode changes from "RICH" to "LEAN" to "RICH" 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: cycle | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | FR O2 MNTR R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R R = "FR O2 MNTR", "RICH" L = "FR O2 MNTR", "LEAN" - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage goes below 0.35V at least once. - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage never exceeds 1.0V. OR Without CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals (50) (sensor signal) and (32) (ECM ground). (3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. - Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR). - The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. - The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time. - The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. Page 1385 Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander Page 2280 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6330 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 7642 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Locations Page 4673 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2401 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 1121 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 1395 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. Page 3323 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2422 Page 1510 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug ID Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. FR5AP-10 Cold .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. FR6AP-10 Optional ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................... FR7AP-10 Page 5343 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6652 f. Temporarily assemble lower and upper bodies, using reamer bolt as a guide. Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls, orifice check spring and orifice check valve. g. Install and temporarily tighten bolts and tube brackets in their proper locations. 2. Install solenoids. a. Attach O-ring and install overdrive cancel solenoid valve and side plate onto lower body. b. Attach O-ring and install torque converter clutch solenoid valve onto upper body. 3. Tighten bolt. Control Valve Upper Body Page 3596 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 6682 Page 5858 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2766 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5125 Leak Detection Valve: Electrical Diagrams EC-BYPS/V-01 Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (DTC: P1490) Circuit Diagrams Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (DTC: P1490) Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 4686 ^ Refer to Figure 3 for the specific vehicle you are working on CAUTION: Never adjust the throttle slop screw. It is pre-set at the factory. 6. Check "B"; Insert the thicker feeler gauge "B" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop (see Figure 3). The CTPS should NOT have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "OL"). 7. If the results of steps 5 and/or 6 are not OK, loosen the TPS retaining bolts and adjust the CTPS to achieve the correct results. 8. Tighten the TPS retaining bolts, then repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times to check the new adjustment. 9. Re-connect the harness connector to the CTPS portion of the (TPS). Reset throttle position sensor idle position memory. NOTE: Failure to reset the TPS idle position memory may result in the idle speed staying higher than specification. 10. Start engine and warm it to operating temperature. NOTE: Always warm up engine to normal operation temperature, If the engine is cool, the throttle position memory will not be reset correctly. Page 5814 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 1399 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. Front Wheel Bearing Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Wheel Bearing - Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. - Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) - Adjust wheel bearing preload if there is any axial end play or wheel bearing does not turn smoothly. Page 628 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 697 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 750 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 3633 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4596 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4877 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Remove the EVAP canister. 3. Remove the hose between the EVAP vent control valve and the crossframe member (the largest diameter hose in the rearward position). 4. Check the EVAP control valve. Air should pass through the valve passage when voltage is not applied. A. Apply battery voltage to the valve and make sure the air passage closes (see Figure 1). B. Disconnect the battery voltage and make sure the air passage opens again and does not stick closed. C. Look inside the valve air passage and make sure there is no corrosion/rust on the metal shaft. 5. Check the EVAP canister. A. Check that no liquid will drain from the EVAP canister. B. Weigh the canister (with the vent control valve). The weight should be less than 4 lbs. 6. If either the EVAP vent control valve or the EVAP canister fail one or more of these checks, replace both the vent control valve and the canister (see Parts Information). Installation of the Breather Tube Kit 1. Remove the bedliner (if so equipped) 2. Drill one 25 mm (1 inch) hole in the floor of the vehicle bed at the location shown (see Figure 2). Page 977 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6105 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 4710 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3055 EGR Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EGR Temperature Sensor Check resistance change and resistance value. If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor. MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) BULLETIN NUMBER: NTB99-013 CLASSIFICATION: EC99-001 DATE: April 1, 1999 TITLE: 1998-99 MY FRONTIER TRUCK M/T MIL "ON" P0500 SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied 1998-99 Frontier Truck (manual transmission, KA24DE Engine only) shows the following conditions: 1. MIL "ON" with DTC P0500 stored, 2. CONSULT freeze frame data indicates an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less, 3. No abnormal speedometer indication during test drive, then use this bulletin to repair the incident This incident may be due to a clutch slip condition for more than 10 seconds with a vehicle forward speed of less than 3 mph. This situation could occur during hill holding using clutch slip. Correct this incident by installing the ECM listed in the Parts Information using the following service procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTC stored is P0500 2. Verify the CONSULT freeze frame data stored has an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less (see Figure 1). 3. Conduct test drive to confirm there is no abnormal speedometer indication: a) Connect CONSULT and select Start, Engine, Data Monitor and Main Signals b) Test drive vehicle and ensure the speedometer and the vehicle speed sensor value displayed in Data Monitor provide consistent speed Page 8972 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Specifications Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7688 Page 9256 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2652 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3689 Page 4688 Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications Completely Closed Approx. 0.5 K ohms at 77 deg F Partially Open 0.5 - 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Comqletely Open Approx. 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Page 6130 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 9175 Backup Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3769 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5628 Ground Distribution Page 7198 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder Overhaul - Check all internal parts for wear, rust and damage. Replace if necessary. - Pay attention not to scratch cylinder when installing pistons. Page 8002 Axle Nut: Service and Repair Diagrams Page 2535 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch REMOVAL Passenger Air Bag Module Deactivation Switch CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 1. Detach instrument stay cover lower center from instrument panel. 2. Disconnect passenger air bag deactivation switch harness connector and cigarette lighter harness connector. 3. Remove instrument stay cover lower center. 4. Remove two screws and remove passenger air bag deactivation switch. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Passenger air bag deactivation switch is keyed for proper installation. Improper positioning of the switch will result in damage to the switch. NOTE: Be sure that passenger air bag deactivation switch and lock cylinder are in the same position as during removal for proper engagement. To install, reverse removal procedure. After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 6175 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7612 Alignment: Specifications King Pin Inclination GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................... 10°18' (10.30°) Nominal ...................................................................... ......................................................................................................................... 10°48' (10.80°) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 11°18' (11.30°) Page 274 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 9505 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4150 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 776 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5746 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 6701 Page 7546 ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. Page 4380 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3517 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 9357 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3487 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 7928 4. Apply multi-purpose grease to each bearing cone. 5. Pack grease seal lip with multi-purpose grease, then install it into wheel hub with suitable drift. Page 3227 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1066 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 7487 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 4932 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve With CONSULT 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. If OK, inspection end. If NG, go to following step. 3. Check air passage continuity. If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. OR Without CONSULT Check air passage continuity. If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace solenoid valve. Page 5417 Fuel Injector: Electrical Diagrams EC-INJECT-01 Injector Circuit Diagrams Injector Injector Circuit Connectors Page 3768 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4135 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1459 Overall inspection sequence Page 8590 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3579 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2302 3. Install thermostat with jiggle valve or air bleeder at upper side. 4. Install water inlet housing. 5. Install water hose to water inlet housing. 6. Install air cleaner and air duct assembly. 7. Refill engine coolant. - After installation, run engine for a few minutes, and check for leaks. Page 4335 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 6832 Page 9280 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 9262 The timer is canceled, and interior room lamp turns off when: ^ driver's door is locked with remote controller, or ^ ignition switch is turned ON. The smart entrance control unit will shut off the room light if left on for 30 minutes. ON-OFF control When the room lamp switch is in the "DOOR" position, when the driver side door or passenger door is opened the room lamp turns on. When any door is opened and then closed while the ignition switch is not in the ON position, the room lamp timer operates. MODELS WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [26], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to room lamp terminal (+). With the room lamp switch ON, ground is supplied: ^ through body grounds (M14) and (M68) ^ to room lamp terminal (-). When a door is opened with the room lamp switch in "DOOR" position, ground is supplied: ^ through door switch LH or RH terminal (1) ^ to room lamp switch terminal (SW). With power and ground supplied, the room lamp turns ON. Testing and Inspection Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Check continuity between terminals at each switch position. A/C - Refrigerant Charging Equipment Maintenance Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Charging Equipment Maintenance Classification: HA00-001 Reference: NTB00-026 Date: March 13, 2000 ACR4 REFRIGERANT MACHINE MAINTENANCE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles with R-134a Air Conditioning SERVICE INFORMATION To ensure accurate air conditioning system diagnosis and repair, it is critical that periodic maintenance be performed on your refrigerant charging equipment (ACR4 machine) and that proper operating techniques be used. Additionally, as refrigerant charge amounts continue to become smaller, it is vital that your refrigerant charging equipment be as accurate as possible. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the information listed under the "Maintenance" section of this bulletin to "tune-up" your ACR4 machine to keep it operating at top performance. Refer to information listed under "Operational Tips" to ensure the highest level of charging accuracy when using the ACR4 machine. IMPORTANT: ACR4 maintenance should be conducted following the manufacture's instructions and recommended schedule. For details about performing ACR4 maintenance, refer to the ACR4 Operating Instruction Manual (Tech-Mate P/N J39500-7). Additional information related to ACR4 maintenance and operation is available in the May 1998 edition of Tech Talk and SIR video # 57. The ACR4 Operating Instruction Manual can be ordered from Tech-Mate by calling 800-662-2001. NOTE: A maintenance kit is available for the ACR4 machine through Tech-Mate (P/N J-39500-MAINT). The kit includes: vacuum pump oil, a desiccant/filter and two O-rings (for the desiccant/filter). The ACR4 Maintenance Kit can be ordered from Tech-Mate by calling 800-662-2001. Maintenance Vacuum Pump Oil Change the vacuum pump oil every 10 hours of operation (when display reads "OIL") or sooner if contamination is seen through the sight glass (see Figure 1). Filter/Dryer Page 9186 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 5654 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1269 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5924 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 9122 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 9144 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 115 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 1468 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 7026 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Locations Keyless Entry Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4262 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 503 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4959 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1443 1. Both camber and caster angles are adjusted by adjusting bolts. - If the kingpin inclination is outside specifications, check the front suspension parts for wear or damage. Replace faulty parts with new ones. 2. From the measured value, read the coordinate (or: graduation) at the intersecting point in the graph. a. If the coordinate (or graduation) at the intersecting point is positive, move the pin outward by turning the corresponding adjusting bolt by the indicated graduation. b. If the coordinate (or graduation) at the intersecting point is negative, move the pin inward by turning the corresponding adjusting bolt by the indicated graduation. After properly moving the pin(s), tighten the front and rear adjusting bolts to specifications. 3. Re-measure to ensure that the camber and caster are within specified tolerances. [Example] a. Measured values corresponding with the two values indicated below: (See Chart for 4WD models.) Camber angle: -0° 06' (-0.10°) Caster angle: 2°10' (2.17°) Page 6085 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3002 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7057 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7079 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7431 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 9288 Ground Distribution Page 8922 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9162 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 9364 Ground Distribution Page 429 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3929 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1883 - Air duct 13. Install vacuum hoses, fuel tubes, wires, harness and connectors and so on. Page 7641 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2623 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Views Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 9554 Ground Distribution Page 2541 Ground Distribution Page 7235 Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Service and Repair NOTE: Always replace together with master cylinder as an assembly. Page 5397 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4051 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2998 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6090 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Body - Windshield Cracking Information Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Cracking Information Classification: BT09-052 Reference: NTB09-091 Date: August 25, 2009 WINDSHIELD CRACKING APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models SERVICE INFORMATION The Purpose of this bulletin is to give Nissan dealers guidelines to help determine if windshield breakage is covered under warranty or is the customer's responsibility. Nissan North America (NNA) is not responsible for damage to glass that is a result of objects striking or scratching the glass. However, NNA is responsible for manufacturing issues such as distorted glass and cracks that are due to improper installation or damage to the glass during vehicle assembly. NNA typically does not find any type of cracks in the windshield due to stress in vehicles with over 5000 miles. Glass damage can be categorized in 3 general areas: 1. Cracks due to objects striking the glass. 2. Cracks due to scratch in glass surface. 3. Distortion or cracks due to manufacturing issues. CLAIMS INFORMATION Part Return Process Reminder Refer to WB/07-010: Nissan is announcing a new requirement in the process for parts return to assist engineers in analyzing part issues. Dealers are now required to mark glass and other components returned that have "visible issues" using a grease pencil or similar instrument to highlight the area damaged. 1) How to determine if glass damage is due to objects striking the glass. Cracks from objects striking the glass Page 5390 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3290 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 948 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Locations Page 523 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 9298 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3673 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3306 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3990 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6856 - When installing center bearing, position the "F" mark on center bearing toward front of vehicle. - Apply a coat of multi-purpose lithium grease containing molybdenum disulfide to the end face of the center bearing and both sides of the washer. - Stake the nut. Always use new one. - Align match marks when assembling tubes. JOURNAL 1. Assemble journal bearing. Apply recommended multi-purpose grease on bearing inner surface. When assembling, be careful that needle bearing does not fall down. 2. Select snap ring that will provide specified play in axial direction of journal, and install them. Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.06 mm (0.0024 inch). Page 7017 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 1323 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 1207 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2357 Page 8592 Radio/Stereo: Connector Views Audio (Part 1 Of 2) Base Audio System Circuit Connectors Audio (Part 2 Of 2) Premium Audio System Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement Page 5882 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5937 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7212 Brake Caliper: Specifications Piston Cylinder Bore Diameter 1.685 in No. Of Cylinders 2 Connecting Bolt 12 - 14 ft.lb Bleeder Screw 61 - 78 in.lb Main Pin Bolts 16 - 23 ft.lb Torque Member Fixing Bolt 53 - 72 ft.lb ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 3248 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5731 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4718 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9430 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7817 1. Remove shock absorber. 2. Separate upper ball joint stud from knuckle spindle. CAUTION: Support lower link with jack. 3. Put matching marks on adjusting bolts and remove adjusting bolts. INSTALLATION 1. While aligning the adjusting bolts with the matching marks, install the upper link. If a new upper link or any other suspension part is installed, align the matching mark with the slit as indicated in the figure, then install the upper link. 2. Install shock absorber. 3. Tighten adjusting bolts under unladen condition with tires on ground. 4. After installing, check wheel alignment. Adjust if necessary. DISASSEMBLY Page 437 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 570 Ground Distribution Page 3081 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1688 Page 7011 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6326 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 975 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 49 Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Thermo Control Amp. Check POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK Check power supply circuit for thermo control amp. with ignition switch ON. 1. Disconnect thermo control amp. harness connector. 2. Connect voltmeter from harness side. 3. Measure voltage across terminal (1) and body ground. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Check body ground circuit for thermo control amp. with ignition switch ON, air conditioner switch ON and fan switch ON. 1. Disconnect thermo control amp. harness connector. 2. Connect ohmmeter from harness side. 3. Check for continuity between terminal No. (2) and body ground. If the ground circuit is NG, check the following. - A/C switch - Fan switch - Harness for open or short between thermo control amp. and A/C switch - Harness for open or short between A/C switch and fan switch - Fan switch ground circuit. Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance 2.1 - 2.9 K ohms at 68 deg F 0.27 - 0.38 K ohms at 176 deg F Page 4473 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6207 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 7568 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) Page 2720 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3286 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 96 Page 1310 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 572 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4053 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3982 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Diagram Information and Instructions Leak Detection Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 1097 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3473 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3101 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Service and Repair Shift Fork: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Page 8031 2. Remove brake caliper assembly without disconnecting hydraulic line. CAUTION: Be careful not to depress brake pedal, or piston will pop out. - Make sure brake hose is not twisted. 3. Remove lock washer. (4WD) 4. Remove wheel bearing lock nut. 2WD: With suitable tool 4WD: With Tool 5. Remove wheel hub and wheel bearing. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop outer bearing. 6. After installing wheel hub and wheel bearing, adjust wheel bearing preload. DISASSEMBLY Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Specified amount ................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 2.375 qts. (2.2 Liters) Page 8315 Impact Sensor: Locations G Sensor SRS Component Parts Location Description G Sensor The G Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Page 917 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 8584 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3636 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 5017 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 7036 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 7872 1. Move dust cover. 2. Paint matching marks on the torsion bar spring and the corresponding arm. NOTE: Always use paint to place the matching mark; do not scribe the affected parts. 3. Measure anchor bolt protrusion "L" and remove the lock nut and adjusting nut. CAUTION: Before removing the nuts, ensure that twisting force is eliminated from the torsion bar springs. 4. Remove torsion bar spring. - Pull out anchor arm rearward, then withdraw torsion bar spring rearward. (2WD) - Remove torque arm. (2WD) - Remove torque arm fixing nuts, then withdraw torsion bar spring forward with torque arm. (4WD) INSPECTION - Check torsion bar spring for wear, twist, bend and other damage. - Check serrations of each part for cracks, wear, twist and other damage. - Check dust cover for cracks. INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Adjustment of anchor arm adjusting nut is in tightening direction only. - Do not adjust by loosening anchor arm adjusting nut. 1. Install torque arm to lower link. (2WD) 2. Coat multi-purpose grease on the serration of torsion bar spring. Page 8778 area (2' x 2' or less). Spread the liquid around with the pad before turning the buffer "ON". Use an overlapping pattern to assure even polishing effort on all areas. 3. Second use a dual action sander with either a 3M foam pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing liquid over the work area (2' x 2' or less). Polish with the same technique as above. Do not polish dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. If build up occurs, cool the surface with clean water and dry with a clean terry cloth towel and clean the foam pad. Use a slower speed to prevent heating the surface and ground the vehicle to a metal water pipe to reduce static electricity. INSPECTION Gently clean a small section with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Inspect the surface for swirl marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. CAUTION: If you clean with an alcohol and water cleaning solution it will cause damage to plastic lenses. The damage is not immediately visible, but develops later Buffing Buffing is done with a 8" buffer at 1500-1750 RPM to remove sanding scratches. 1. Clean the surface of all residue before buffing. 2. Apply a buffing liquid and spread it over the work area (2' x 2' or less) with the buffing pad before turning the buffer "ON". Keep the pad nearly flat and move it slowly but continuously over the area. Use an overlapping pattern to assure even buffing effort on all areas. Do not buff dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for sanding marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. If necessary, gently clean a small section of the surface with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Sanding 1. Soak the sand paper in water with lubricant such as Meguiar's # 0016, for at least 15 minutes before use. Mask the fenders and doors to reduce cleanup time. Wet sanding with a lubricant prevents buildup on the paper and consequent gouging of the finish. 2. Sand with 2000 grit sand paper using a sanding pad, never by hand alone. Apply plenty of water while sanding in one direction only, no more than 12-15 strokes. Do not sand in a circular pattern. Do not sand over body lines and panel edges. Rinse the paper frequently to prevent gouging. NOTE: Wet sanding vehicles with the New Cross Link Clear Coat (NCLC) hard clear coat requires a more aggressive sanding stroke. Vehicles with a conventional clear coat require a normal sanding stroke. 3. Rinse with water and squeegee gently. As the squeegee clears the water, inspect for damage. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for damage under both strong fluorescent lights and full sunlight (a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away is necessary on cloudy days). A smooth dull sanded surface is expected at this time. Bright spots or other irregularities indicate the damage needs more sanding, up to the 0.5 mil standard. 4. After the damage is removed, measure the paint thickness in several places to determine if less than 0.5 mil has been removed. 5. If the damage was deeper than 0.5 mil, the surface must be re-clear coated, or re-color coated on vehicles with no clear coat. Refer to the Warranty Paint and Body Self-Study Course, or the Warranty Flat Rate Manual for assistance. 6. If the damage has been removed with less than 0.5 mil of the color/clear coat removed, buff and polish to remove the sanding marks. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair DISARMING AIR BAGS 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 2. Disconnect Air Bag Module connector. CAUTION: For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any air bag system connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. CAUTION: Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or on the complete harness, for easy identification. ARMING AIR BAGS 1. Connect Air Bag Module connector. 2. Connect both battery cables. 3. Conduct Self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to Testing and Inspection / Self-Diagnostic Procedures. Page 6149 Optional Splice Example Diagrams MIL ON - DTC P1440, P1444, or P1491 (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins MIL ON - DTC P1440, P1444, or P1491 (EVAP) CLASSIFICATION: EC98-034 REFERENCE: NTB98-113 DATE: February 1, 1999 TITLE: 1998-99 FRONTIER MIL ON WITH DTC P1440, P1444, OR P1491 STORED IN THE ECM APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED VIN: Vehicles built before 1N6DD26SXXC315372 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before October 21, 1998 APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If a 1998-99 Frontier has a MIL ON with DTC P1440, P1444 or P1491 stored in the ECM, the cause may be contamination in the purge volume control valve. Rust inside of the solenoid bracket metal pipe may be the source of the contamination. Contamination can enter the purge volume control valve and cause it to stick open. Use the following service procedure to resolve this incident, if it should occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the intake manifold vacuum hose from the solenoid bracket metal pipe (intake manifold side). See Figure 1. 2. Connect a vacuum pump to the solenoid bracket metal pipe (intake manifold side). See Figure 1. 3. Apply vacuum to the purge volume control valve. A. If vacuum cannot be maintained (valve is leaking), replace the purge volume control valve and proceed with step 4. B. If vacuum can be maintained (valve is not leaking), proceed with step 4. Page 9612 condition. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify wiper scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Inspect the wiper paths (may be a single scratch of a group of scratches) ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify metal object scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from metal objects such as keys and metal buttons. ^ These scratches are typically sharp and can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify scratches caused by a contaminated towel as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from wiping the glass with a towel that has sand particles or dirt on it. Page 3336 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3460 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Absolute pressure sensor 1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. 2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch "ON" and check output voltage between ECM terminal (45) and engine ground. The voltage should be 3.2 to 4.8 V. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum of -26.7 kPa (-200 mmHg, -7.87 inHg) to absolute pressure sensor as shown in figure and check the output voltage. The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4 V lower than the value measured in step 3. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply vacuum below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 in Hg). 5. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor. Page 6855 1. Place matching marks on propeller shaft and flange or yoke. 2. Remove snap ring. 3. Remove pushed out journal bearing by lightly tapping yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage journal and yoke hole. 4. Remove bearing at opposite side in above operation. Put marks on disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions. ASSEMBLY CENTER BEARING Page 3038 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4630 Ground Distribution Page 7873 3. Place lower link in the position where bound bumper clearance "C" is O. Clearance "C": O mm (O inch) 4. Install torsion bar spring. (2WD) Install torsion bar spring with torque arm. (4WD) NOTE: Be sure to install right and left torsion bar springs correctly. 5. While aligning the anchor arm with the matching mark, install the anchor arm to the torsion bar spring. If a new torsion bar spring or anchor arm is installed, adjust anchor arm length to the dimension indicated in the figure. Standard length "G": (2WD) = 6 - 18 mm (0.24 - 0.71 inch) (4WD) = 25 - 39 mm (0.98 - 1.54 inch) Page 4506 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 8574 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6236 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 105 Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 4006 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-PST/SW-01 Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Diagrams Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 5118 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5140 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3979 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3623 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7144 Brake Pad: Service and Repair WARNING: CLEAN BRAKE PADS WITH A VACUUM DUST COLLECTOR TO MINIMIZE THE HAZARD OF AIRBORNE MATERIALS. CAUTION: ^ When cylinder body is open, do not depress brake pedal or caliper piston will pop out. ^ Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on rotor. Always replace shims when replacing pads. ^ If shims are rusted or show peeling of the rubber coat, replace them with new shims. ^ It is not necessary to remove connecting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. 1. Remove master cylinder reservoir cap. 2. Remove lower pin bolt. 3. Open cylinder body upward. Then remove pad retainers, return spring and inner and outer shims. Standard pad thickness: 10 mm (0.39 inch) Pad wear limit: 2.0 mm (0.079 inch) NOTE: Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will return to reservoir when pushing back piston. Page 9275 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6253 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7951 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 7469 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 6621 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2907 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6023 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1150 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Locations Security Lamp/Indicator: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5525 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6490 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 6409 Ground Distribution Page 2602 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2913 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: If both DTC P0120 (0403) and DTC P0510 (0203) are displayed, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510 first. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch", which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. Page 5083 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3312 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CKPS-01 Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) (OBD) Circuit Diagrams Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 2646 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 8219 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications TYPE TYPE PAG TYPE PAG PART NUMBER R KLH00-PAGR1 or R2 Page 6437 Clutch: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Page 3168 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Diagram Information and Instructions EGR Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 2997 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 741 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6027 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Transistor 1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor & power transistor harness connector and ignition coil harness connector. 2. Check power transistor resistance between terminals (2) and (8). If NG, replace distributor assembly. Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 140 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4372 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3688 Page 3886 Ground Distribution Page 3261 Ground Distribution Page 2342 Page 3381 Page 482 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 9350 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4731 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7322 Quick Battery Charge Page 6477 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Locations Safing Sensor: Locations SRS Component Parts Location Description Safing Sensor The Safing Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Page 7504 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 769 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 816 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 3332 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4778 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9469 Parking Lamp: Electrical Diagrams EL-TAIL/L-01 Parking, License, And Tail Lamps Wiring Diagram (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4545 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2552 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 6765 Axle Shaft: Capacity Specifications Final Drive Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 95 - 105 grams (3.35 - 3.70 ounce) Wheel Side .................................................................................. .............................................................................. 135 - 145 grams (4.76 - 5.11 ounce) Page 1668 Page 2718 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 829 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Specifications Impact Sensor: Specifications Crash Zone Sensor Crash Zone Sensor Special Bolt(s) 15 - 25 Nm Page 2379 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6119 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 1420 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 5485 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3161 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The tank fuel temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Campaign - A/C Hose Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 98-064 Date: 980908 Campaign - A/C Hose Replacement Reference: NTB98-064 Date: September 8, 1998 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN 1998 FRONTIER POOR OR NO A/C COOLING DUE TO A/C LOW HOSE CRACKING CAMPAIGN I.D. # P8163 APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1998 Frontier (D22) built before VIN # 1N6DD2***WC387655 INTRODUCTION Some 1998 Frontiers may develop refrigerant leaks in the vehicle's air conditioner lower return hose due to vibration. To ensure customer satisfaction and prevent any future inconvenience, Nissan has initiated a Voluntary Service Campaign to install a bracket on the lower return hose of the air conditioning system to minimize this vibration. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P8163 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this Campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 90,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is a dealer responsibility to check (with SERVICE-COMM) each vehicle falling within the range of this service campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from your dealership, other Nissan dealerships, private parties, or vehicles presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. A list of affected customers in your area will be sent to Nissan regional offices for distribution to Nissan dealers once all of the customer notification letters have been sent. This list will assist you in identifying those vehicles involved in this service campaign. Each dealership service department is encouraged to contact these vehicle owners to have the required inspections and repairs completed on their vehicle. CUSTOMER FOCUS Maintaining a strong customer relationship throughout the Frontier Air Conditioner Lower Return Hose Campaign is one of the key goals of NMC. Each and every action taken by Nissan and the servicing dealer will have a significant impact in retaining current Frontier owners as future customers. Page 3595 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6283 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1075 Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications Completely Closed Approx. 0.5 K ohms at 77 deg F Partially Open 0.5 - 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Comqletely Open Approx. 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Page 6945 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Specifications Diagnosis Sensor Unit: Specifications Diagnosis Sensor Unit Diagnosis Sensor Unit Special Bolt 15 - 25 Nm Page 3777 Ground Distribution Page 3469 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5780 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 8724 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8179 Technical Service Bulletin # 92-001 Date: 920101 A/C - System Changes As Result of R-134A Refrigerant Classification: HA92-OO1 Reference: NTB92-OO1 Date: January 1992 A/C SYSTEM CHANGES FOR R-134A REFRIGERANT (ALL MODELS) APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Service Information Introduction Due to its harmful effect on the ozone layer, R-12 is being phased out and replaced by R-134a, which does not harm the ozone layer. While the R-134a A/C system is very similar to an R-12 A/C system, the differences in the refrigerant, lubricants, and service equipment are important. Nissan A/C systems will change from R-12 to R-134a at the time of new vehicle (full model change) introduction, or in some cases by model year update to an existing model line. This bulletin describes all of the general differences between the R-12 and R-134a systems. For details of an R-134a system for a specific model, refer to that model's service manual or new product information. Refrigerant Handling Precautions ^ R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ Use only specified lubricant for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ The specified R-134a lubricant absorbs moisture from the atmosphere at a rapid rate, therefore the following handling precautions must be observed: ^ When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. ^ When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Also, complete the connection of all refrigerant tubes and hoses without delay to minimize the entry of moisture into the system. ^ Use the specified lubricant from a sealed container only. Containers must be re-sealed immediately after dispensing the lubricant. Lubricant in containers which are not properly sealed will become moisture saturated. Such lubricant is no longer suitable for use and should be properly disposed. ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE standards to discharge R-134a Systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. ^ Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ^ Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 125° (52°C). ^ Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. ^ Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ^ Keep refrigerant away from open flames: hazardous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ^ Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. Page 5779 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 490 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 1168 Ground Distribution Page 6075 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7929 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Manual Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set knob of manual-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove manual-lock free running hub. 3. When installing manual-lock free running hub, make sure the hub is in the FREE position. NOTE: Apply multi-purpose grease to the parts shown in the illustration. 4. Check operation of manual-lock free running hub after installation. INSPECTION - Check that the knob moves smoothly and freely. - Check that the clutch moves smoothly in the body. Page 2511 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 3212 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 7158 Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Sensor Precaution Using On Car Brake Lathe Classification: BR99-006 Reference: NTB99-040 Date: June 16, 1999 NISSAN ABS SENSOR CAUTION WHEN USING ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles With ABS SERVICE INFORMATION When using an on-car brake lathe to resurface rotors, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Metal shavings that collect on the ABS wheel speed sensor may cause the ABS warning light to come on, or, may cause intermittent activation of the ABS under normal braking conditions. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the following procedure to prevent accumulation of metallic shavings on the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet when using an on-car brake lathe: 1. When the vehicle is on the service lift, make sure the ignition key is in the "off" position. NOTE: Rotating a wheel, monitored by an ABS wheel speed sensor, while the ignition key is in the "on" position, may trigger a wheel speed sensor error code. The warning light may remain on even after the self diagnoses memory is cleared with CONSULT. If this occurs, the warning light will turn off when driving over 9 mph (20 Km/h) after clearing the self diagnoses memory. 2. Prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet during rotor resurfacing. 3. Clean and remove all metallic particles from the surface of the rotor and the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet after rotor resurfacing. The ABS wheel speed sensor can be cleaned with compressed air. CAUTION: Always wear safety goggles when applying compressed air. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. Page 1475 Idle Speed: Specifications IDLE SPEED IDLE SPEED Idle speed M/T 800 +/- 50 RPM Idle speed A/T ( in N position) 800 +/- 50 RPM Refer to idle speed adjustments Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5979 Ground Distribution Page 3806 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6233 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6003 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4966 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2614 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 8811 3M materials: Meguiar's materials: Misc: 8" buffer (1500-1750 RPM) Dual action sander, variable speed Terry cloth towels (100% cloth) NOTE: Always use separate pads for each liquid (mark the backside of each pad with the type of liquid used) and clean the pads frequently. Use of a wool pad on clear coat is limited to the polishing type of pad and is always followed by a foam Dad on a dual action sander to remove swirl marks. Measuring Paint Film Thickness Before any abrasive removal, measure the initial film thickness at several places to establish an average figure. After each abrasive step measure several places again to determine how much paint film was removed. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the mil gauge you are using for measurement and calibration. If you do not have a thickness gauge use the following rule of thumb during abrasive removal; When the "orange peel" surface is removed, 0.5 mil has been removed. Polishing Polishing is done in two steps: The first step is with an 8" buffer and the second step with a dual action sander to remove buffing and swirl marks. Low speed (1500-1750 RPM) is necessary to prevent overheating the surface. CAUTION: Do not polish or buff a surface dry. More than the usual quantity of liquid must be used to keep the paint surface cool. Wipe the excess material off with a clean soft towel after each operation 1. Clean the surface of all residue before polishing. 2. Use an 8" buffer (at 1500 - 1750 RPM) with either a 3M wool polishing pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing compound over the work Page 4982 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Remove the EVAP canister. 3. Remove the hose between the EVAP vent control valve and the crossframe member (the largest diameter hose in the rearward position). 4. Check the EVAP control valve. Air should pass through the valve passage when voltage is not applied. A. Apply battery voltage to the valve and make sure the air passage closes (see Figure 1). B. Disconnect the battery voltage and make sure the air passage opens again and does not stick closed. C. Look inside the valve air passage and make sure there is no corrosion/rust on the metal shaft. 5. Check the EVAP canister. A. Check that no liquid will drain from the EVAP canister. B. Weigh the canister (with the vent control valve). The weight should be less than 4 lbs. 6. If either the EVAP vent control valve or the EVAP canister fail one or more of these checks, replace both the vent control valve and the canister (see Parts Information). Installation of the Breather Tube Kit 1. Remove the bedliner (if so equipped) 2. Drill one 25 mm (1 inch) hole in the floor of the vehicle bed at the location shown (see Figure 2). Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Resistance 166.5 - 302.5 ohms at 68 deg F Page 1911 Rocker Cover Camshaft Brackets Page 7801 Ball Joint: Specifications Lower Ball Joint DIMENSIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ................................... 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Castle Nut ............................................................................................................................................ ............................. 118 - 191 Nm (87 - 141 ft. lbs.) Page 5618 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 287 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Specifications Water Pump: Specifications CAUTION: When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belts. - Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. - After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester. REMOVAL 1. Drain coolant from engine. 2. Remove fan coupling with fan. 3. Remove power steering pump drive belt, generator drive belt and A/C compressor drive belt. 4. Remove water pump. INSPECTION - Check body assembly for rust or corrosion. - Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. INSTALLATION 1. Use a scraper to remove liquid gasket from water pump. - Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block. Brakes - ABS Sensor Precaution Using On Car Brake Lathe Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Sensor Precaution Using On Car Brake Lathe Classification: BR99-006 Reference: NTB99-040 Date: June 16, 1999 NISSAN ABS SENSOR CAUTION WHEN USING ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles With ABS SERVICE INFORMATION When using an on-car brake lathe to resurface rotors, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Metal shavings that collect on the ABS wheel speed sensor may cause the ABS warning light to come on, or, may cause intermittent activation of the ABS under normal braking conditions. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the following procedure to prevent accumulation of metallic shavings on the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet when using an on-car brake lathe: 1. When the vehicle is on the service lift, make sure the ignition key is in the "off" position. NOTE: Rotating a wheel, monitored by an ABS wheel speed sensor, while the ignition key is in the "on" position, may trigger a wheel speed sensor error code. The warning light may remain on even after the self diagnoses memory is cleared with CONSULT. If this occurs, the warning light will turn off when driving over 9 mph (20 Km/h) after clearing the self diagnoses memory. 2. Prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet during rotor resurfacing. 3. Clean and remove all metallic particles from the surface of the rotor and the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet after rotor resurfacing. The ABS wheel speed sensor can be cleaned with compressed air. CAUTION: Always wear safety goggles when applying compressed air. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. Page 930 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8737 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5722 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3586 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3349 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Knock sensor - Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M ohms. 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminal (1) and ground. Resistance: 500 - 620 K Ohms [at 25°C (77°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 44 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 9243 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6871 Part 4 of 4 Page 3451 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3254 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5786 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 465 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4890 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Remove the EVAP canister. 3. Remove the hose between the EVAP vent control valve and the crossframe member (the largest diameter hose in the rearward position). 4. Check the EVAP control valve. Air should pass through the valve passage when voltage is not applied. A. Apply battery voltage to the valve and make sure the air passage closes (see Figure 1). B. Disconnect the battery voltage and make sure the air passage opens again and does not stick closed. C. Look inside the valve air passage and make sure there is no corrosion/rust on the metal shaft. 5. Check the EVAP canister. A. Check that no liquid will drain from the EVAP canister. B. Weigh the canister (with the vent control valve). The weight should be less than 4 lbs. 6. If either the EVAP vent control valve or the EVAP canister fail one or more of these checks, replace both the vent control valve and the canister (see Parts Information). Installation of the Breather Tube Kit 1. Remove the bedliner (if so equipped) 2. Drill one 25 mm (1 inch) hole in the floor of the vehicle bed at the location shown (see Figure 2). Page 3421 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CHECKING Check valve clearance while engine is warm but not running. 1. Remove rocker cover and all spark plugs 2. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke - Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. - Check that valve lifters on No 1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No 4 are tight. If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as above. 3. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 4. Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement adjusting shim. Valve clearance (Hot): Intake: 0.31 - 0.39 mm (0.012 - 0.015 inch) Exhaust: 0.33 - 0.41 mm (0.013 - 0.016 inch) 5. Turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align mark on crankshaft pulley with pointer. 6. Check those valves shown in the figure. Page 5133 EGR Backpressure Transducer: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EGRC-BPT Valve 1. Plug one of two ports of EGRC-BPT valve. 2. Vacuum from the other port and check leakage without applying any pressure from under EGR-BPT valve. Leakage should exist. Page 8163 Use a backup wrench on the low hose when tightening the joint connection nut. 8. Reinstall the clip to the support bracket (see Figure 2). Tighten the clip mounting bolt to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 Kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb). 9. Evacuate and recharge the vehicle's A/C system with 0.60 - 0.70 kg (1.32-1.54 lb) of R134a refrigerant. Refer to page HA-51 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C evacuation and recharge procedure. 10. Check the A/C low hose for refrigerant leaks. Refer to pages HA-48 through HA-50 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C leak test procedure. If a leak is found, repair as necessary before proceeding with step 11. 11. Check A/C performance. Refer to page HA-38 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C performance check procedure. A. If the A/C performance is within specification, this service procedure is complete. B. If the A/C performance is not within specification, repair as necessary. Low Hose Angle Adjustment 1. Loosen the joint connection between the A/C low hose and the mating A/C low pipe by turning the joint connection nut 1/4 turn counterclockwise (see Figure 4). CAUTION: Do not loosen the joint connection nut more than 1/4 turn as refrigerant can escape and the 0-ring may become damaged. Also, use a backup wrench on the hose when loosening the joint connection nut. 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the bolt that secures the clip to the support bracket (see Figure 4). 3. Move the A/C low hose so that it is positioned between 0° and 5° relative to the horizontal plane (see Figure 5). 4. Retighten the clip mounting bolt to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 Kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb) Page 3378 Idle Speed: Specifications IDLE SPEED IDLE SPEED Idle speed M/T 800 +/- 50 RPM Idle speed A/T ( in N position) 800 +/- 50 RPM Refer to idle speed adjustments Page 5907 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6081 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3655 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2463 Ground Distribution Page 6730 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Specified type ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... API GL-5 Specified viscosity at ambient temperature ranges: Below 10°C (50°F) ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................... SAE 75W Below 30°C (86°F) ...................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... SAE 80W Below 40°C 104°F) .................................. .................................................................................................................................. SAE 75W-90/SAE 80W-90 Between 30°C (86°F) and -10°C (14°F) ........................................................... ..................................................................................................... SAE 85W Between 40°C (104°F) and 0°C (32°F) .................................................................................................................................... ................................. SAE 90 Above 10°C (50°F) ............................................................................... ................................................................................................................... SAE 140 NOTE: 80W-90 is preferable for ambient temperatures below 40°C (104°F) Page 6994 REAR OIL SEAL 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove rear oil seal. 3. Install rear oil seal. - Before installing apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip. 4. Install rear propeller shaft. Page 7898 Axle Nut: Service and Repair Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Auto Lock Knob ................................................................................................................................... .................................. 25 - 34 Nm (18 - 25 ft. lbs.) Lock Washer Screw .................................................................................................................................................... 1.2 1.8 Nm (10.4 - 15.7 inch lbs.) Manual Lock Knob ............................................................................... ................................................................................. 25 - 34 Nm (18 - 25 ft. lbs.) Page 7185 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Evaporative Emissions Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Classification: EC98-007B Reference: NTB98-058B Date: August 7, 2001 MIL "ON" WITH EVAP SYSTEM DTCs STORED DUE TO LAUNCHING A WATERCRAFT ATTENTION: This bulletin amends NTB98-058A. Applied Vehicle information has been expanded and Parts Information has been revised. Please discard all paper copies of NTB98-058A. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998-2001 Frontier (D22) SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle is used to launch watercraft and exhibits the following symptoms: 1. The EVAP canister is found to have water in it and 2. It has one or more of the following DTC codes stored in Self Diagnosis: ^ P0440 (EVAP-small leak) ^ P1440 (EVAP-small leak) D22 only ^ P0446 (EVAP canister vent control valve) ^ P1446 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck closed) D22 only ^ P1448 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck open) D22 only ^ P0450 (EVAP pressure sensor) ^ P0443 (EVAP purge control valve & solenoid valve) ^ P1445 (EVAP purge volume control valve) D21 only ^ P1444 (EVAP purge volume control solenoid valve) D22 only Use the Service Procedure provided in this bulletin to replace the EVAP canister and install the replacement EVAP breather tube kit to prevent water/mud/dirt entry into the EVAP system. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect CONSULT-II. 2. From the Engine menu, select Self Diag Results. 3. Touch PRINT. Then select FF Data and touch PRINT again. 4. Use the appropriate service manual to resolve the stored DTC. 5. To determine if there is damage to the EVAP system, proceed to Removal and Inspection Testing. 6. Then go to Installation of the Breather Tube Kit and Installation of the EVAP system. Removal and Inspection Testing Page 4377 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1841 Page 786 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3110 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6417 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3362 Overall inspection sequence Page 2855 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 2688 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2186 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine. 2. Turn ignition switch off. 3. Release fuel pressure. 4. Remove all spark plugs 5. Disconnect distributor center cable 6. Attach a compression tester to No 1 cylinder 7. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep throttle valve wide open 8. Crank engine and record highest gauge indication. 9. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above. - Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. Compression pressure: kPa (kg/cm2, psi) /rpm Standard: 1,226 (12.5, 178) /300 Minimum: 1,030 (10.5, 149) /300 Difference limit between cylinders: 98 (1.0,14) /300 10. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through spark plug holes. b. Retest compression. - If adding oil improves cylinder compression, piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. - If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace it. - If compression stays low in two cylinders that are next to each other: a. The cylinder head gasket may be leaking, or b. Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 3935 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3778 Ground Distribution Page 729 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2381 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 932 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4179 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2706 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2921 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3102 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 6162 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Air Bag - Harness Replacement, Not Repair Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag - Harness Replacement, Not Repair Classification: RS97-002 Reference: NTB97-017 AIR BAG HARNESS REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLE(S) ALL SERVICE INFORMATION The next update to the Warranty Flat Rate Manual will include the following correction to the RQ section regarding the air bag harness: WAS:Repair the Air Bag Harness RQ30AA IS: Replace the Air Bag Harness RQ30AA DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR, SPLICE OR MODIFY ANY AIR BAG HARNESS UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. Refer to the RS section of the appropriate service manual for SRS diagnostic/inspection information. Page 5228 EGR Temperature Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 492 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4606 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-VSS-01 Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Circuit Diagrams Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit (VSS) Connectors Page 8741 Mirrors: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4548 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1689 Page 7562 Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander Page 500 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1350 The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. Page 4589 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 7081 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PNP/SW-01 Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Circuit Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 394 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1823 Axle Nut: Service and Repair Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Auto Lock Knob ................................................................................................................................... .................................. 25 - 34 Nm (18 - 25 ft. lbs.) Lock Washer Screw .................................................................................................................................................... 1.2 1.8 Nm (10.4 - 15.7 inch lbs.) Manual Lock Knob ............................................................................... ................................................................................. 25 - 34 Nm (18 - 25 ft. lbs.) Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front REPLACEMENT Refer to the illustration when servicing, noting the following: CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. When removing the front wheel hub or rear axle shaft assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly and move it away. Page 8483 Safing Sensor: Service and Repair SRS Component Parts Location Description Safing Sensor The Safing Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. It can not be serviced separately. Malfunction of the Safing Sensor requires replacement of the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Refer to Diagnosis Sensor Unit / Service and Repair. Page 3505 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5671 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3993 Ground Distribution Page 7824 2. Remove wheel hub and rotor disc. Refer to Wheel Hub. 3. Separate drive shaft from knuckle spindle by slightly tapping drive shaft end. (4WD) 4. Separate tie-rod from knuckle spindle with Tool. Install stud nut conversely on stud bolt so as not to damage stud bolt. 5. Separate knuckle spindle from ball joints. a. Loosen (do not remove) upper and lower ball joint tightening nuts. b. Separate knuckle spindle from upper and lower ball joint studs with tool. During above operation, never remove ball joint nuts which are loosened in step (a) above. Tool: 2WD ST29020001 (J24319-01) 4WD HT72520000 (J125730-B), or equivalent. Page 737 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2978 Page 7531 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 2795 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the rear healed oxygen sensor heater corresponding to the engine speed. OPERATION Page 3802 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart MIL ON - DTC P0420 Set/Exhaust Rattle Catalytic Converter: Customer Interest MIL ON - DTC P0420 Set/Exhaust Rattle Classification: EC00-017 Reference: NTB00-058 Date: July 12, 2000 1998 FRONTIER; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0420 STORED AND/OR EXHAUST RATTLE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998 Frontier (D22) Federal Emissions Specification ONLY APPLIED VIN: up to 1N6DD26Y9WC347717 APPLIED DATE: up to 2/13/98 APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a MIL "ON" with DTC P0420 (Three-Way Catalyst Function) stored in the ECM and/or exhaust rattle noise, the vehicle may have poor three-way catalyst function. This is usually the result of misfire. In severe cases, the catalyst structure may collapse resulting in an exhaust rattle. When proper diagnosis confirms that the three-way catalyst in an Applied Vehicle requires replacement, regardless of the root cause, also install platinum tip spark plugs specified in the Parts Information section. Platinum tip plugs provide enhanced misfire resistance under extreme driving conditions. Use the following service procedure to resolve the incident, should it occur. NOTE: If the three-way catalyst's honeycomb internal structure has collapsed, the debris will typically be trapped in the exhaust piping and muffler, causing an exhaust rattle. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Perform Self-Diagnosis using CONSULT-II. Print and attach the Freeze Frame data to the repair order. 2. If there is a DTC stored in addition to P0420, diagnose and repair the additional DTC(s) first, using the appropriate Service Manual procedure(s). 3. After diagnosing and repairing the vehicle for the non-P0420 DTC, or if P0420 is the only DTC, use the appropriate Service Manual to determine the incident cause, and repair it. NOTE: Always check the secondary ignition circuit. Check distributor cap for moisture, tracking or other indicators of insulator degradation that may cause a misfire under load. 4. If diagnosis has determined that replacement of the three-way catalyst is also necessary, replace it and install four new platinum tip spark plugs from the Parts Information section. NOTE: If the catalyst is being replaced, inspect its internal honeycomb structure by looking into each end of the converter. If the structure has collapsed or deteriorated severely, check the exhaust piping and muffler for debris. Remove all debris from the exhaust system. Replace the muffler as needed. 5. Make a note in the vehicle maintenance logs and notify the customer that platinum tip spark plugs have been installed, and that this is an upgrade from that listed in the owners manual. The maintenance interval for platinum tip spark plugs is 60,000 miles and Nissan recommends that the Page 9287 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 898 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 985 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments PREPARATION - Make sure that the following parts are in good order. (1) Battery (2) Ignition system (3) Engine oil and coolant levels (4) Fuses (5) ECM harness connector (6) Vacuum hoses (7) Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) (8) Fuel pressure (9) Engine compression (10) EGR valve operation (11) Throttle valve (12) EVAP system - On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". - On models equipped with automatic transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. - When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. - Turn off head lamps, heater blower. - Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 6193 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3631 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Description and Operation EGR Backpressure Transducer: Description and Operation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The EGRC-BPT valve monitors exhaust pressure to activate the diaphragm, controlling throttle body vacuum applied to the EGR valve. In other words, recirculated exhaust gas is controlled in response to positioning of the EGR valve or to engine operation. Page 9540 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2863 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Locations Page 9363 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3584 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3654 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 1170 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7075 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2085 NOTE: Make sure the flat side of the distributor drive shaft is facing the engine (see Figure 6). Failure to do so will result in the distributor being out of time. 8. Install the following parts: a. Crankshaft pulley. b. A/C compressor and idler pulley bracket. c. Radiator shroud and cooling fan with coupling. d. A/C compressor, alternator and power steering pump drive belts. e. Air duct. Installation of Upper Timing Chain 1. Install the lower timing chain (refer to "Installation of Lower Timing Chain" in this bulletin). 2. Install upper timing chain and sprockets, using the painted reference marks made during removal. 3. Install chain tensioner. Remove the pin holding the tensioner piston in the bore of the tensioner. 4. Install camshaft sprocket cover: a. Use a scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from the mating surfaces of the engine block and camshaft sprocket cover. b. Apply a continuous bead of RTV sealant to the cover as shown in Figure 7. NOTE: Page 8035 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Auto Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set auto-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove auto-lock free running hub. 3. Remove snap ring. 4. Remove spindle washer and thrust washer. 5. After installing auto-lock free running hub, check operation. NOTE: When installing it, apply recommended grease to the parts shown in the above illustration. Page 8329 Diagnosis Sensor Unit: Service and Repair Description CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - The special bolts are coated with bonding agent while the other bolt is for ground. Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new coated bolts. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation. Make sure that there are no deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If there are any visible signs of damage, replace with a new one. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure they are free of deformities and rust. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Removal Of Diagnosis Sensor Unit 1. Disconnect driver and passenger air bag module connectors. 2. Remove console box. 3. Disconnect air bag diagnosis sensor unit connector. 4. Remove bolts from air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Use TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T5O) to remove special bolts. 5. Remove the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. To install, reverse the removal procedure. After replacement, perform self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". CAUTION: Air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with forward mark "<=" pointing towards the front of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for cracks deformities and rust before installation and replace as required. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 3255 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 175 Main Harness (Part 2 Of 2) Fuel Pump Relay Connector # M46 Page 3417 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine. 2. Turn ignition switch off. 3. Release fuel pressure. 4. Remove all spark plugs 5. Disconnect distributor center cable 6. Attach a compression tester to No 1 cylinder 7. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep throttle valve wide open 8. Crank engine and record highest gauge indication. 9. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above. - Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. Compression pressure: kPa (kg/cm2, psi) /rpm Standard: 1,226 (12.5, 178) /300 Minimum: 1,030 (10.5, 149) /300 Difference limit between cylinders: 98 (1.0,14) /300 10. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through spark plug holes. b. Retest compression. - If adding oil improves cylinder compression, piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. - If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace it. - If compression stays low in two cylinders that are next to each other: a. The cylinder head gasket may be leaking, or b. Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. Page 792 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6491 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2641 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Specifications Page 9136 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9458 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4642 BARO / MAP Sensor Switching Valve: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve switches its air flow passage according to the voltage signal sent from the ECM. When voltage is supplied from the ECM, the MAP/BARO switch solenoid turns "ON". Then, the absolute pressure sensor can monitor the ambient barometric pressure. When voltage is not supplied from the ECM, the MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve turns "OFF". Then, the sensor monitors intake manifold pressure. Page 1853 4. Apply multi-purpose grease to each bearing cone. 5. Pack grease seal lip with multi-purpose grease, then install it into wheel hub with suitable drift. Page 3619 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing order Firing order Firing order 1-3-4-2 Page 6315 Page 626 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 2522 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 9460 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Diagram Information and Instructions EGR Control Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7675 2. Remove wheel hub and rotor disc. Refer to Wheel Hub. 3. Separate drive shaft from knuckle spindle by slightly tapping drive shaft end. (4WD) 4. Separate tie-rod from knuckle spindle with Tool. Install stud nut conversely on stud bolt so as not to damage stud bolt. 5. Separate knuckle spindle from ball joints. a. Loosen (do not remove) upper and lower ball joint tightening nuts. b. Separate knuckle spindle from upper and lower ball joint studs with tool. During above operation, never remove ball joint nuts which are loosened in step (a) above. Tool: 2WD ST29020001 (J24319-01) 4WD HT72520000 (J125730-B), or equivalent. Page 4278 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Component Locations Page 3952 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Connectors Maximum Voltage Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Connectors Minimum Voltage Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Page 1724 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 3821 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 1943 Page 2670 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3030 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4366 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 8164 5. Retighten the joint connection nut to 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb). CAUTION: Use a backup wrench on the low hose when tightening the joint connection nut. Low Hose Bracket Installation 1. Separate the two halves of the bracket by removing the screw. 2. Install the two halves of the bracket on the compressor end of the A/C low hose at the tube bend closest to the compressor flange (see Figure 6). NOTE: When installing the bracket, make sure the bracket half with the weld nut on the side points away from the engine. 3. Install and tighten the bracket screw to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb). Specifications Impact Sensor: Specifications Crash Zone Sensor Crash Zone Sensor Special Bolt(s) 15 - 25 Nm Page 4112 Ground Distribution Page 5859 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications Front SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload ................................................... ............................................................................................................ 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) Return Angle ................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 15 - 30° TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Lock Nut: Initial .................................................................................................................................................... ............................ 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Final ............................................................................ ............................................................................................ 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) Rear SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload [1] ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.9 - 48.1 Nm (1.5 - 10.8 lbs.) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Cage To Baffle Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 54 - 74 Nm (40 - 54 ft. lbs.) Bearing Lock Nut ........................................................................................................................................................... 245 - 294 Nm (181 - 217 ft. lbs.) [1]: At bearing cage bolt. Page 7986 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications Use a Quality, Multi-purpose wheel bearing grease. Page 2842 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 765 Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications Completely Closed Approx. 0.5 K ohms at 77 deg F Partially Open 0.5 - 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Comqletely Open Approx. 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Page 4488 Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications Completely Closed Approx. 0.5 K ohms at 77 deg F Partially Open 0.5 - 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Comqletely Open Approx. 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3711 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 6562 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 6293 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7371 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2935 Ground Distribution Page 3524 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4698 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2410 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3748 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 4968 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7917 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 5124 Leak Detection Valve: Connector Views Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (DTC: P1490) Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 416 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 1082 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5078 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 8750 Mirrors: Connector Views Mirror Power Door Mirror Circuit Connectors Page 12 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 7393 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3515 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 9426 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3379 Idle Speed: Adjustments PREPARATION - Make sure that the following parts are in good order. (1) Battery (2) Ignition system (3) Engine oil and coolant levels (4) Fuses (5) ECM harness connector (6) Vacuum hoses (7) Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) (8) Fuel pressure (9) Engine compression (10) EGR valve operation (11) Throttle valve (12) EVAP system - On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". - On models equipped with automatic transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. - When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. - Turn off head lamps, heater blower. - Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 1400 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). Page 4323 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 1084 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5464 Service Manual for Refueling Control Valve inspection procedures. 8. If the DTC confirmation is still NG after step 7, or the vehicle is not equipped with ORVR, do the following: a. Disconnect two (2) lines from the Vacuum Cut Valve. One that goes to the fuel tank and one that goes to the EVAP Canister (see figure 1). b. Use a hand vacuum pump to check each of the two (2) disconnected hoses for free flow. Make sure they are clear into the fuel tank (vent line) and into the EVAP Canister (see figure 2). NOTE: ^ Figure 2 includes ORVR system. Refer to the appropriate service manual to determine if your vehicle has ORVR or not. ^ The lines between the Vacuum Cut Valve and Fuel Tank, and between the Vacuum Cut Valve and EVAP Canister may go through a metal line. Make sure the lines are clear between the Vacuum Cut Valve and Fuel Tank, and between the Vacuum Cut Valve and EVAP Canister, including any metal lines. c. If any blockage is found, determine the cause and repair as necessary. Blockage in either of these lines will cause a DTC. 9. If all of the above checks do not locate the source of the incident, refer to the appropriate Service Manual for further DTC P1491 diagnosis. Page 208 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 5663 Ground Distribution Page 6140 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor is a basic component of the ECCS. it monitors engine speed and piston position. These input signals to the ECM are used to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other functions. The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-forming circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for a 1° (POS) signal and 4 slits for a 180° (REF) signal. The wave-forming circuit consists of Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes. The rotor plate is positioned between the LED and the photo diode. The LED transmits light to the photo diode. As the rotor plate turns, the slits cut the light to generate rough-shaped pulses. These pulses are converted into on-off signals by the wave-forming circuit and sent to the ECM. The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an assembly except distributor cap. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3715 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 445 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4808 Control Units/Module F29 Control Units/Module Diagram Information and Instructions Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6580 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Specifications Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS G Sensor ............................................................................................................................................. ........................ 4.4 - 5.8 Nm (39.1 - 51.2 inch lbs.) Page 5823 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5876 Ignition Ballast Resistor: Electrical Diagrams WIRING DIAGRAM Page 1166 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 782 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3039 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Diagram Information and Instructions Spot Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 164 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). Page 5356 Ground Distribution Service and Repair Evaporator Case: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Evacuate the A/C system. 2. Disconnect the two refrigerant lines from the engine compartment. - Cap the A/C lines to prevent moisture from entering the system. 3. Remove the glove box and mating trim. 4. Disconnect the thermal amp. connector. 5. Remove the cooling unit. 6. Separate the cooling unit case, and remove the evaporator. INSTALLATION Installation is basically the reverse order of removal. Recharge the A/C system. Page 3151 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5710 Throttle Full Close Switch: Connector Views Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 9382 EL-DTRL-03 Headlamp Wiring Diagram (For Canada) (Part 3 Of 3) Headlamp (For Canada) (Part 1 Of 3) Headlamp (For Canada) (Part 2 Of 3) Page 3475 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 8418 Seat Belt: Specifications Front Seat Belts Buckle 43 - 55 Nm Anchor Bolt(s) 43 - 55 Nm Adjuster Bolt(s) 43 - 55 Nm Retractor Bolt(s) / Screw(s) 43 - 55 Nm Rear Seat Belt Buckle 43 - 55 Nm Anchor Bolt(s) 43 - 55 Nm Page 9148 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2857 Ground Distribution Page 4942 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5257 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8468 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Lock Cylinder Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Lock Cylinder REMOVAL Passenger Air Bag Module Deactivation Switch Lock Cylinder CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 1. Detach instrument stay cover lower center from instrument panel. 2. Disconnect passenger air bag deactivation switch harness connector and cigarette lighter harness connector 3. Remove instrument stay cover lower center. 4. Remove four screws and housing from instrument stay cover lower center. 5. Remove clip from bottom of housing. 6. Remove passenger air bag deactivation switch lock cylinder from front of housing. INSTALLATION NOTE: Be sure that passenger air bag deactivation switch and lock cylinder are in the same position as during removal for proper engagement. To install, reverse removal procedure. After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 3892 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 854 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2192 7. Determine replacement adjusting shim size as follows. a. Using a micrometer determine thickness of removed shim. b. Calculate thickness of new adjusting shim so valve clearance comes within specified values. R = Thickness of removed shim N = Thickness of new shim M = Measured valve clearance Intake & Exhaust: N = R + [M - 0.37 mm (0.0146 inch)] Shims are available in thicknesses from 1.96 mm (0.0772 inch) to 2.68 mm (0.1055 in), in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch). c. Select new shim with thickness as close as possible to calculated value. 8. Install new shim using a suitable tool. - Install with the surface on which the thickness is stamped facing down. 9. Place Tool (A) as mentioned in steps 2 and 3. 10. Remove Tool (B). 11. Remove Tool (A). 12. Recheck valve clearance. Page 1862 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Tightening Sequence Lug Nut Torque Patterns IMPORTANT Check all parts, including rims, lug studs, lug nuts, and mating surfaces of hubs and tire rims for rust, damage, or dirt. Clean mating surfaces with a wire brush to remove any foreign material. Replace any damaged parts as needed. Careless installation of tire/rim assemblies in a vehicle is a major cause of tire installation problems. Proper installation, including fastener torque, is essential to economical, safe and trouble free service. Use only the proper sizes and types of fasteners for safe and proper service. Tighten the fasteners a quarter turn at a time using the tightening sequence diagram as a guide. This is very important to prevent misalignment of the wheel. Continue tightening the fasteners in sequence until the fasteners are tightened to the proper torque (See WHEEL FASTENER TORQUE). CAUTION: Improper torque or tightening sequence can cause distortion, fatigue cracks, or alignment problems. After driving the vehicle for a short distance, recheck the wheel fastener torque. Parts will usually seat naturally, reducing the torque on the fasteners. Retorque all fasteners to the proper torque. Page 7042 Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve 1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly. 2. Check torque converter clutch control valve. - Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. - Valve, and sleeve are tree from burrs, dents and scratches. - Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. - Hydraulic line is tree from obstacles. 3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair DISARMING AIR BAGS 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 2. Disconnect Air Bag Module connector. CAUTION: For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any air bag system connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. CAUTION: Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or on the complete harness, for easy identification. ARMING AIR BAGS 1. Connect Air Bag Module connector. 2. Connect both battery cables. 3. Conduct Self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to Testing and Inspection / Self-Diagnostic Procedures. Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 5976 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5819 Ground Distribution Page 4730 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 907 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7357 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 733 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 292 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5692 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 291 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3592 Ground Distribution Page 5559 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4241 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3071 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 6500 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload [1] ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.9 - 48.1 Nm (1.5 - 10.8 lbs.) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Cage To Baffle Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 54 - 74 Nm (40 - 54 ft. lbs.) Bearing Lock Nut ........................................................................................................................................................... 245 - 294 Nm (181 - 217 ft. lbs.) [1]: At bearing cage bolt. Page 1550 Page 102 Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 968 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4659 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3519 Ground Distribution Page 5346 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4305 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Views Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 2226 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1264 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5073 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1696 Comments regarding leak detector use: ^ Existing R-12 leak detectors currently will not detect R-134a. ^ Many R-134a leak detectors will detect R-12; check with the equipment manufacturer. ^ Always refer to and follow the equipment manufacturers recommendations when operating leak detectors. Comments regarding weight scale use: ^ If the scale allows electronic control of the flow of refrigerant through the scale, (i.e. internal solenoid valves) be certain that the hose fitting size is 1/2"-16 ACME, and that no refrigerant other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricant) have been used with the scale. Charging Cylinder ^ The use of a charging cylinder is not recommended because: ^ The refrigerant may be vented into the air from the top valve of cylinder when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. ^ The accuracy of a charging cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Service Procedures ^ The service procedures for R-134a A/C systems are basically the same as for R-12 A/C systems, however, the following should always be kept in mind: ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge R-134a systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service work. ^ R-134a and R-12 A/C components are not interchangeable. Cleaning of used (in service) components for use with another type of refrigerant and/or lubricant is not an acceptable practice, and may result in A/C system failure. ^ Always use the proper PAG oil when servicing an R-134a A/C system. The Nissan part number for the appropriate PAG compressor oil can be found on the A/C specification label in the engine compartment, and also in the Factory Service Manual, and on the label on the compressor. These oils are only available from your Nissan Parts Department. ^ When leak checking an R-134a system, be certain that you are using a detector which will detect R-134a. ^ As mentioned previously in this bulletin, the R-134a PAG lubricants absorb moisture; PAG oil containers and A/C components containing PAG oil must remain tightly sealed until ready for use. ^ Unlike R-12 systems, R-134a systems do not exhibit a "clear sight glass", even when properly charged. For this reason, the R-134a A/C systems have no sight glass. ^ With R-134a systems it is important to properly control the amount of refrigerant charged into the system during system charging. A charging machine or weight scale must always be used during charging for proper charge determination. ^ Questions regarding R-12 or R-134a should be addressed to your Regional Service Staff or the FIXS Hotline. Page 6658 Disassembly 1. Remove valves at parallel pins. 2. Remove valves at retainer plates. Valve Springs Inspection Page 5002 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 4508 Ground Distribution Page 3345 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7188 Brake Shoe: Specifications Thickness Specifications Thickness Specifications Minimum Lining Thickness 0.059 in On Vehicle Service Valve Body: Service and Repair On Vehicle Service REMOVAL 1. Drain ATF from drain plug. 2. Remove oil pan and gasket. 3. Remove oil strainer. 4. Disconnect harness connector. 5. Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts. Bolt Length And Location Be careful not to drop manual valve out of valve body. 6. Remove solenoids and valves from valve body if necessary. 7. Remove terminal cord assembly if necessary. 8. Remove accumulators (A), (B), (C) and (D) by applying compressed air if necessary. Hold each piston with a rag. 9. Reinstall any part removed. - Always use new sealing parts. - After installing control valve assembly, make sure that selector lever can be moved to all positions. Page 7654 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1304 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5320 Idle Speed: Adjustments PREPARATION - Make sure that the following parts are in good order. (1) Battery (2) Ignition system (3) Engine oil and coolant levels (4) Fuses (5) ECM harness connector (6) Vacuum hoses (7) Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) (8) Fuel pressure (9) Engine compression (10) EGR valve operation (11) Throttle valve (12) EVAP system - On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". - On models equipped with automatic transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. - When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. - Turn off head lamps, heater blower. - Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Instruments - Electrochromic Mirror Diagnostics Mirrors: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Electrochromic Mirror Diagnostics Classification: EL04-036 Reference: NTB04-133 Date: November 9, 2004 NISSAN; AUTO-DIMMING ELECTROCHROMIC (EC) MIRROR* DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2000-2005 Sentra (B15), 1997-2005 Altima (U13 & L30), 2000-2004 Maxima (A33 & A34), 2000-2005 Quest (V41 & V42), 1998-2004 Frontier (D22), 2000-2004 Xterra (WD22) IF YOU CONFIRM The Auto Dimming Electrochromic (EC) Mirror* needs service. ACTION Use the Guide for assistance. Guide exclusively for the Auto Dimming Electrochromic (EC) Mirror* With: ^ Electronic Compass Display or ^ Electronic Compass & Temperature Display *Manufactured by the Donnelly Corporation, Holland, MI. The name Donnelly is embossed in the back of the mirror case along with patent and other information. Page 9563 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Diagrams Page 2082 9. Wipe off the links of the timing chain next to the timing marks on the sprockets. Put paint marks on the timing chain, matching them with the timing marks on the cam sprockets and idler sprocket (see Figure 1). 10. Remove cam sprocket bolts, cam sprockets and upper timing chain. 11. Support lower timing chain by using a suitable tool as shown in Figure 2 to avoid chain tensioner spring from coming out. NOTE: This step is only to be applied when the lower cover is not being removed. 12. Remove the idler sprocket. Removal of Lower Timing Chain 1. Drain coolant by removing the cylinder block drain plug and opening the radiator drain cock (Refer to MA section of the Service Manual). 2. Drain engine oil. 3. Remove the following parts: ^ Alternator & A/C compressor drive belts. ^ Cooling fan with coupling. ^ Radiator shroud. 4. Remove the A/C compressor and position it to the side. Remove the idler pulley and bracket as well. 5. Set # 1 piston at TDC on its compression stroke. 6. Remove the distributor. Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 499 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4516 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 1665 Comments regarding condensers: ^ The parallel flow condenser can be identified by the refrigerant end tanks, and smaller, more closely spaced center section tubes. Page 3172 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 8177 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - R134a Charge Amount/Lubricant Chart Classification: HA95-013 Reference: NTB95-068 Date: July 5, 1995 R134a CHARGE AMOUNTS/PAG LUBRICANT CHART APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All equipped with R134a A/C systems SERVICE INFORMATION For reference, the chart in this bulletin has been prepared. It contains information by vehicle model and year regarding A/C systems conversion dates to R-134a type systems. Please note, the dates shown indicate the conversion date at the manufacturing level, not on dealer installed units. Page 6016 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4464 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5824 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 680 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the rear healed oxygen sensor heater corresponding to the engine speed. OPERATION Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Fuel Gauge: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 6026 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ignition Coil & Power Transistor The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to the power transistor. The power transistor switches on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. As the primary circuit is turned on and off, the proper high voltage is induced in the coil secondary circuit. Page 730 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7436 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Installation Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Installation To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. 3 - 5 N.m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4470 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5562 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 5640 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-MAFS-01 Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Diagrams Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Battery Safety Warning Battery: Service Precautions Battery Safety Warning WARNING: - Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. - Do not "quick charge" a fully discharged battery. - Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged. - When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the charger first, as this may cause a spark. - If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 60 °C (140 °F) stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature below 60 °C (140 °F). Page 3187 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 8978 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 9393 Headlamp: Testing and Inspection Trouble Diagnosis (For Canada)) Daytime Light Control Unit Inspection Table (Part 1 Of 2) Page 933 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3896 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3970 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater COMPONENT INSPECTION Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater Check resistance between terminals (3) and (1). Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 25°C (77°F) Check continuity between terminals (2) and (1), (3) and (2). Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the front heated oxygen sensor. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Page 2972 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 1342 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 5157 EGR Control Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4631 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8638 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 7468 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4536 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2500 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2903 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5529 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4532 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 8216 Additionally the PAG lubricant type, part numbers and system recharge amounts are listed for each model. Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications DIMENSIONS Diaphragm Diameter: Primary ................................................................................................................................................ ..................................... 230 mm (9.06 inches) Secondary .................................................................. ............................................................................................................... 205 mm (8.07 inches) Output Rod Length .................................................................................................................................... 10.275 10.525 mm (0.4045 - 0.4144 inches) Page 8906 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2553 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-MAFS-01 Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Diagrams Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 656 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4677 Throttle Full Close Switch: Connector Views Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 6711 ^ before removing the extension adapter hose from the cooler Outlet hose, ^ turn the can over and spray only propellant for a few seconds to avoid fluid spilling back out of the cooler hose. 5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler Inlet hose (see Figure 10). 6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 11). 7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 11). 8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the cooler Outlet hose to force any remaining cleaner or fluid into the coffee filter (see Figure 11). 9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler Inlet hose. 10. Proceed with Inspection Procedure. Inspection Procedure Page 6422 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 1050 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3863 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Testing and Inspection Fuel/Water Separator: Testing and Inspection Water Separator 1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. 2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. 3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. 4. Check that (A) and (C) are not clogged by blowing air into (B) with (A), and then (C) plugged. 5. In case of NG in items 2 4, replace the parts. - Do not disassemble water separator. Page 3972 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater COMPONENT INSPECTION Rear heated oxygen sensor heater Check the following. 1. Check resistance between terminals (2) and (3). Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 25°C (77°F) 2. Check continuity. If NG, replace the rear heated oxygen sensor. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Page 6780 5. Detach spider assembly with press. 6. Draw out boot. Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damaging the boot. Wheel Side (ZF100) CAUTION: The joint on the wheel side cannot be disassembled. Before separating joint assembly, put matching marks on drive shaft and joint assembly. - Separate joint assembly with suitable tool. Be careful not to damage threads on drive shaft. Remove boot bands. INSPECTION Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent, and dry with compressed air. Check parts for evidence of deformation and other damage. Drive Shaft - Replace drive shaft if it is twisted or cracked. Boot - Check boot for fatigue, cracks and wear. Replace boot with new boot bands. Joint Assembly (Final Drive Side) - Replace any parts of double offset joint which show signs of scorching, rust, wear or excessive play. - Check serration for deformation. Replace if necessary. - Check slide joint housing for any damage. Replace if necessary. Joint Assembly (Wheel Side) - Replace joint assembly if it is deformed or damaged. ASSEMBLY Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT INSPECTION Front heated oxygen sensor With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Select "MANU TRIG" and "HI SPEED" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT, and select "FR O2 SENSOR" and "FR O2 MNTR". (3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. (4) Touch "RECORD" on CONSULT screen. (5) Check the following. - "FR O2 MNTR" in "DATA MONITOR" mode changes from "RICH" to "LEAN" to "RICH" 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: cycle | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | FR O2 MNTR R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R R = "FR O2 MNTR", "RICH" L = "FR O2 MNTR", "LEAN" - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage goes below 0.35V at least once. - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage never exceeds 1.0V. OR Without CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals (50) (sensor signal) and (32) (ECM ground). (3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. - Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR). - The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. - The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time. - The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. Page 2488 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 9109 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 4163 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Mass air flow sensor 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between terminal (54) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above check. 5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust. Page 3216 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4116 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4292 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2926 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1672 which will result in contamination, and damage to recovery/recycle equipment. ^ Use equipment designed to meet Society of Automotive engineers (SAE) standards, which specify R-134a service equipment fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME), and service hose identification (black stripe on hose). ^ Adapters to convert from one size fitting to the other must never be used; refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and system failure may result. ^ The use of incorrect equipment will result in refrigerant and/or lubricant contamination, which may cause A/C system or equipment failure. ^ ACR(4) machine will perform all required service functions (recovery, evacuation, recycle, recharge). ^ High volume A/C service facilities may benefit from "component" A/C service equipment (vacuum pump, weight scale, manifold gauge set) to supplement the ACR(4). Comments regarding recovery/recycling equipment: ^ Be certain to follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. ^ Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ^ Only R-134a containers with a 1/2"-16 ACME can be used to add R-134a to the ACR4 recovery/recycle machine. ^ Periodic maintenance of this equipment is required; follow the manufacturer's recommendations as described in the equipment instruction manual. Page 5981 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7337 Battery: Service and Repair Specific Gravity Check 1. Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level. - When electrolyte level is too low, tilt battery case to raise it for easy measurement. Hydrometer temperature correction 2. Use the chart to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature. Page 2228 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9619 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Combination Switch/Replacement - Each switch can be replaced without removing combination switch base. Combination Switch/Replacement COMBINATION SWITCH BASE REMOVAL - To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching screws. Combination Switch/Replacement - Before installing the steering wheel, align the turn signal cancel tab with the notch of combination switch. Page 5337 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications CAPACITY CAPACITY TOTAL SYSTEM CAPACITY LITERS TOTAL SYSTEM CAPACITY OUNCES (US) 0.20 6.8 Locations Fuel Tank Unit: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8151 2. Disconnect the A/C low hose from the A/C compressor and from the A/C low pipe coming from the evaporator (see Figure 2). 3. Remove the clip from the support bracket (see Figure 2). 4. Remove the old hose from the vehicle. 5. Apply Nissan A/C system oil "Type R" (P/N: KLH00-PAGR0) to the 0-ring on the compressor end of the new hose and to the 0-ring on the existing A/C low pipe (coming from the evaporator). NOTE: If it is necessary to replace the 0-ring on either the new A/C low hose or the existing low pipe, use the correct 0-ring specified for "Captured 0-ring" type A/C connections (0-ring P/N: 92473-N8210). 6. Install the compressor end of the new A/C low hose to the compressor (see Figure 2) and tighten the mounting bolt to 14 - 18 N.m (1.4 - 1.8 kg-m, 10 - 13 ft-lb). 7. Install the other end of the A/C low hose to the existing A/C low pipe so that the hose is positioned between 0° and 5° relative to the horizontal plane (see Figure 3). Tighten the joint connection nut to 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb). CAUTION: Page 8720 Disclaimer Page 4577 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4741 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3938 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4426 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5905 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Diagram Information and Instructions Leak Detection Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3951 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Circuit Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Connectors Heater Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 7557 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 4547 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3448 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 498 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3299 Ground Distribution Page 2569 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2565 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 161 Page 531 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3890 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Locations Neutral Start Relay (Inhibitor Relay): Locations Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 7648 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 6210 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 703 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 1179 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2690 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5275 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 1519 - Use the same procedure as mentioned in step 4. 7. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following parts. - Rocker cover - All spark plugs ADJUSTING Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. 1. Turn crankshaft to position cam lobe on camshaft of valve that must be adjusted upward. 2. Place Tool (A) around camshaft as shown in figure. 3. Rotate Tool (A) so that lifter is pushed down. Before placing Tool (A), rotate notch toward center of cylinder head (See image), to simplify shim removal later. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (A). 4. Place Tool (B) between camshaft and the edge of the valve lifter to retain valve lifter. CAUTION: Tool (B) must be placed as close to camshaft bracket as possible. - Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (B). 5. Remove Tool (A). 6. Remove adjusting shim using a small screwdriver and a magnetic finger. Page 6618 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 7745 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Diagrams Page 5668 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 8438 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 2891 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 9529 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2732 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Flasher: Testing and Inspection Combination Flasher Unit Check Combination Flasher Unit Check ^ Before checking, ensure that bulbs meet specifications. ^ Connect a battery and test lamp to the combination flasher unit, as shown. Combination flasher unit is properly functioning if it blinks when power is supplied to the circuit. Page 6601 Workflow Page 4632 BARO / MAP Sensor Switching Valve: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Specifications Suspension Control ( Automatic - Electronic ): Specifications This Suspension System uses components that are serviced as assemblies only. Page 5573 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 9408 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1929 Cylinder Block Components Page 533 Ground Distribution Page 6707 2. Identify which hose is the Inlet and which hose is the Outlet to the oil cooler (refer to Charts A and B). 3. Disconnect the oil cooler Inlet and Outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes (see Figure 3). ^ For Frontier (D22) w/bypass valve, remove the oil cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the bypass valve fittings (see Figure 6 shown) NOTE: If rubber material from a cooler hose remains on the steel tube or fitting, replace the rubber hose. 4. Allow any transmission fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the oil pan. 5. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-A0006) into the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 4). Page 7217 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Overhaul COMPONENTS DISASSEMBLY 1. Push out pistons and dust covers with compressed air. Use a wooden block so that both pistons come out evenly. WARNING: DO NOT PLACE YOUR FINGERS IN FRONT OF PISTON. CAUTION: ^ Do not scratch or score cylinder wall. ^ CL28VD type front disc brake uses plastic pistons, handle them carefully. 2. Remove piston seals with a suitable tool. INSPECTION Cylinder Body Check inside surface of cylinders for scores, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign objects. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. - Minor damage from rust or foreign objects may be eliminated by polishing the surface with a fine emery sandpaper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. CAUTION: Use brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oil. Piston Page 3232 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6635 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 9260 MODELS WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS EL-ROOM/L-03 Interior Room Lamp (Part 3 Of 3) Circuit Diagrams Interior Room Lamp (Part 3 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp Circuit Connectors Page 9123 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6708 CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only in areas with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath vapors or mist from spray. 6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds. NOTE: For Quest vehicles (V40/V41 Models), before removing the extension adapter hose from the cooler Outlet hose, turn the can over and spray only propellant (gas) for a few seconds. This will avoid fluid spill back out of the cooler hose. 7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 5). 8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the cooler Outlet hose 9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the cooler Outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. 11. Place an oil drain pan under the banjo bolts that connect the oil cooler steel lines to the transmission. 12. Remove the "banjo" bolts at the transmission, and pull the line fittings away from the transmission. 13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Go to the Workflow chart for next step. Frontier (D22) Cooler Bypass Cleaning 1. Place an oil drain pan under oil cooler hoses or lines before removing them. 2. Remove the lines from the transmission and allow the oil to drain from the lines (See Figure 6). 3. Remove the lines from the bypass valve (see Figure 6). Page 3936 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4748 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1163 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7355 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications Mass Air Flow Table Mass Air Flow Table Supply Voltage 11 - 14 V Output Voltage 0.9 - 1.8 V At idle with engine warmed up and running under no load. Air Flow At Idle 0.9 - 5.8 g/sec Air Flow At 2,500 RPM 7.5 - 13.2 g/sec Page 4225 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4118 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2560 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 9142 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Page 1301 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5261 EGR Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EGR Temperature Sensor Check resistance change and resistance value. If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor. Page 5325 Overall inspection sequence Page 7370 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 9602 If you also remove door glass, refer to Service Manual for procedures. TYPE-A: DOOR SASH + SEALING SCREEN TYPE (FR/RR) 1. Remove the door finisher assembly. 2. Remove the sealing screen and the door speaker (if equipped). 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the glass mounting bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the glass mounting bolts. 5. Raise up the door glass and hold with a suction lifter. 6. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove regulator assembly. 7. Disassemble the power window motor from the regulator. NOTE: These procedures are typical way for each type. The procedures differ according to model, so refer to Service Manual for more detail. If you also remove door glass, refer to Service Manual for procedures. TYPE-B: DOOR SASH + MODULE (FR)/FRAME (RR) TYPE Page 2774 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3634 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5247 Ground Distribution Page 4504 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Diagram Information and Instructions Parking Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3894 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 727 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2892 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 1119 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 1318 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5576 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1058 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2091 Timing Chain: Service and Repair For upper and lower timing chain replacement procdeure see TSB 98-094. Page 9181 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 6359 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5873 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3832 EC-FICD-01 IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve WIRING DIAGRAM COMPONENT INSPECTION IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve Disconnect IACV-FICD solenoid valve harness connector. - Check for clicking sound when applying 12V direct current to terminals. Page 5545 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Electrical Diagrams EC-AAC/V-01 Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve (DTC: P0505) WIRING DIAGRAM Page 5284 Leak Detection Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3879 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2880 Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications Completely Closed Approx. 0.5 K ohms at 77 deg F Partially Open 0.5 - 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Comqletely Open Approx. 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Page 3214 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 808 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5849 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5930 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1271 Ground Distribution Page 6214 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Knock sensor - Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M ohms. 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminal (1) and ground. Resistance: 500 - 620 K Ohms [at 25°C (77°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 8990 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7862 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear REPLACEMENT - Remove shock absorber by disconnecting upper and lower end. - Reverse procedure to install. INSPECTION - If oil leakage, cracks and deformation occurs, replace shock absorber assembly. - If rubber bushings are cracked and deformed, replace rubber bushings. Page 5268 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 740 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5754 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: If both DTC P0120 (0403) and DTC P0510 (0203) are displayed, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510 first. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch", which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. Page 664 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Circuit Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Connectors Heater Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 509 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Diagrams EC-ECTS-01 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Circuit Diagrams Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 1144 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor is a basic component of the ECCS. it monitors engine speed and piston position. These input signals to the ECM are used to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other functions. The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-forming circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for a 1° (POS) signal and 4 slits for a 180° (REF) signal. The wave-forming circuit consists of Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes. The rotor plate is positioned between the LED and the photo diode. The LED transmits light to the photo diode. As the rotor plate turns, the slits cut the light to generate rough-shaped pulses. These pulses are converted into on-off signals by the wave-forming circuit and sent to the ECM. The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an assembly except distributor cap. Page 7633 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5521 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5501 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4439 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Locations Idle Up Control Valve: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 833 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 7365 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 423 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3124 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 2205 ^ This will help avoid pulling in air at the end of the refilling procedure. NOTE: ^ See the appropriate Service Manual for cooling system refill capacity. ^ Use Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. For step 3 of the Operating Instructions: ^ Make sure to Purge all air from the Refill Tube (intake hose) before beginning the refill process. NOTE: The Venturi will NOT be harmed if some coolant goes through it during the air purge process. ^ Place the container of coolant mixture above the level of the radiator during the refill process. Page 2385 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 209 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 639 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4925 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 7855 A strut which is leaking and needs to be replaced will exhibit a substantial amount of oil around the exterior body of the strut. The oil layer will extend below the spring seat (dish), will be thick, contain large pieces of dust and debris, and will saturate the strut rod (see Figure 1). 2. Strut Seepage (Considered Normal/Does Not Affect Operation and Performance) - Strut Does Not Need to be Replaced: A strut which is seeping will exhibit a thin layer of oil stain on the exterior body of the strut. The oil stain will not usually extend beyond the spring seat (dish) but may extend past the spring seat under conditions such as changes in ambient temperature or driving conditions. The oil stain will not be thick nor will it contain dust or debris (see Figure 1). Page 4678 Throttle Full Close Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-TP/SW-01 Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Circuit Diagrams Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 2048 a. Insert Tool between cylinder block and oil pan. Be careful not to damage aluminum mating surface. Do not insert screwdriver, or oil pan flange will be damaged. b. Slide Tool by tapping on the side of the Tool with a hammer. 8. Pull out oil pan from front side. INSTALLATION 1. Use a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan - Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block. 2. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of oil pan. - Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant, Part No. 999 MP-A7007, Three Bond TB1207D or equivalent. Apply to groove on mating surface. Allow 7 mm (0.28 inch) clearance around bolt hole. - Be sure liquid gasket diameter is 3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 inch). - Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating. Page 6349 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5653 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 143 Ground Distribution Page 3997 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3602 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5293 Leak Detection Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PRE/SE-01 Evaporation Emission Control System Pressure Sensor (EVAP) (DTC: P0450) WIRING DIAGRAM Page 2494 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6266 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve 1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3). Resistance: Approximately 25 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] 2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3) with battery voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be operated. 4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve 1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly. 2. Check torque converter clutch control valve. - Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. - Valve, and sleeve are tree from burrs, dents and scratches. - Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. - Hydraulic line is tree from obstacles. 3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve. Page 3126 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. it measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 8598 Radio/Stereo: Testing and Inspection Radio Trouble Diagnoses Chart SPEAKER 1. Disconnect speaker harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between speaker terminals (+) and (-). ^ The resistance should be 2 - 4 Ohms. 3. Using jumper wires, momentarily connect a 9 V battery between speaker terminals (+) and (-). ^ A momentary hum or pop should be heard. ANTENNA Using a jumper wire, clip an auxiliary ground between antenna and body. ^ If reception improves, check antenna ground (at body surface). ^ If reception does not improve, check main feeder cable for short circuit or open circuit. RADIO All voltage inspections are made with: ^ Ignition switch ON or ACC ^ Radio ON ^ Radio connected (If removed for inspection, supply a ground to the case using a jumper wire). Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4729 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 6955 Ground Distribution Page 4039 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 8849 C. Remove the sunroof panel by lifting the panel so that it stands straight up, then slide it toward the drivers side to release it from the hinge brackets (see Figure 3). Place the sunroof panel in a safe place until it is reinstalled. 2. Remove the sunroof weather strip from the vehicle body (see Figure 4). Page 5241 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4328 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 7520 Page 4600 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 8215 Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - R134a Charge Amount/Lubricant Chart Classification: HA95-013 Reference: NTB95-068 Date: July 5, 1995 R134a CHARGE AMOUNTS/PAG LUBRICANT CHART APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All equipped with R134a A/C systems SERVICE INFORMATION For reference, the chart in this bulletin has been prepared. It contains information by vehicle model and year regarding A/C systems conversion dates to R-134a type systems. Please note, the dates shown indicate the conversion date at the manufacturing level, not on dealer installed units. Hub, Rotor and Wheel Bearing Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Hub, Rotor and Wheel Bearing Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 1762 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 5533 Ground Distribution Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT REFRIGERANT KILOGRAMS POUNDS (US) 0.75-0.85 1.65-1.87 Model PB48S Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications Model PB48S Power Steering Line Flare Nut: Low Pressure ....................................................................................................................................... ............................. 39 - 49 Nm (29 - 36 ft. lbs.) High Pressure ............................................................ ....................................................................................................... 29 - 39 Nm (20 - 29 ft. lbs.) Page 4392 EC-FRO2-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Page 8316 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Description 4WD Models The diagnosis sensor unit will deploy the air bags if the G-sensor and/or the crash zone sensor activates simultaneously with the safing sensor while the ignition switch is ON. The passenger air bag does not deploy when the passenger air bag deactivation switch is turned to the OFF position. Page 736 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2278 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7908 Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Specifications Page 5729 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5239 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 7610 Alignment: Specifications Camber GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 0°06' (0.10°) Nominal ...................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. 0°36' (0.60°) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 1°06' (1.10°) Left And Right Difference ............................................................................................................................................................ 0°45' (0.75°) or less Page 3702 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 6036 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications Mass Air Flow Table Mass Air Flow Table Supply Voltage 11 - 14 V Output Voltage 0.9 - 1.8 V At idle with engine warmed up and running under no load. Air Flow At Idle 0.9 - 5.8 g/sec Air Flow At 2,500 RPM 7.5 - 13.2 g/sec Page 6809 Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Bearing Nut Torque SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload ................................................... ............................................................................................................ 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) Return Angle ................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 15 - 30° TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Lock Nut: Initial .................................................................................................................................................... ............................ 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Final ............................................................................ ............................................................................................ 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) Page 5364 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 1155 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 9352 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3340 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5273 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3496 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. it measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 4703 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5391 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 103 Page 9292 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6190 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 9197 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2587 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 7021 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 7907 Page 9021 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 972 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 902 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 502 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 9249 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 7162 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection RUNOUT 1. Check runout using a dial indicator. Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring. 2. If the runout is out of specification, machine rotor with on-car brake lathe ("MAD, DL-8700", "AMMCO 700 and 705" or equivalent. THICKNESS If thickness variation exceeds the specification, machine rotor with on-car brake lathe. Thickness variation (at least 8 positions): Maximum 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Rotor repair limit (minimum thickness) 24.0 mm (0.945 in) Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair DISARMING AIR BAGS 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 2. Disconnect Air Bag Module connector. CAUTION: For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any air bag system connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. CAUTION: Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or on the complete harness, for easy identification. ARMING AIR BAGS 1. Connect Air Bag Module connector. 2. Connect both battery cables. 3. Conduct Self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to Testing and Inspection / Self-Diagnostic Procedures. Page 5179 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2816 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7082 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 8280 10. To ensure proper connection, completely separate the air bag connector, then firmly snap it back together (see Figure 1). 11. Re-locate the air bag connector and harness to the back side of the knee protector (see Figure 2). 12. Secure a tie wrap around the air bag connector, the harness, and the knee protector, affixing the air bag connector and harness to the back of the knee protector (see Figure 2). 13. Secure a 2nd tie wrap around the knee protector and one side of the harness loop to provide additional support (see Figure 2). NOTE: Be sure to loop the air bag connector harness when affixing it to the knee protector and allow a large enough loop in the harness to reduce stress on the connectors (see Figure 2). 14. Re-connect the vehicle battery. 15. Clear the CONSULT code by selecting "AIR BAG SELF-DIAG. CURRENT" and touch "ERASE". 16. Verify that the air bag light is no longer on. 17. Re-install the glove box assembly. 18. Re-set the radio presets. CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for this incident. A claim to Nissan for the repair of this incident may be denied if the repair is not Page 6684 4. Adjust clearance "C" shown in the figure while fully depressing clutch pedal. Clearance "C": 0.1 - 1.0 mm (0.004 - 0.039 inch) Page 1198 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5092 Leak Detection Solenoid: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve Check air passage continuity. With CONSULT Perform "VC/V BYPASS/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. OR Without CONSULT If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve. Page 3160 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TFTS-01 Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Circuit Diagrams Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 9389 Headlamp: Description and Operation System Description (For Canada) The headlamp system for Canada vehicles contains a daytime light control unit that activates the high beam headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights will continue to operate when the parking brake is applied. If the daytime light control unit receives a ground signal from the generator, the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once a battery positive voltage signal is sent to the daytime light control unit from the generator. Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 15 A fuse (No. [38], located in the fuse and fusible link box) ^ to daytime light control unit terminal (3) and ^ to lighting switch terminal (8). Power is also supplied at all times: ^ through 15 A fuse (No. [37], located in the fuse and fusible link box) ^ to daytime light control unit terminal (2) and ^ to lighting switch terminal (5). With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [5], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to daytime light control unit terminal (12). With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [7], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to daytime light control unit terminal (1). Ground is supplied to daytime light control unit terminal (9) through body grounds (E12) and (E54). HEADLAMP OPERATION Low beam operation When the lighting switch is turned to headlamp "ON" (2ND) position, "LOW BEAM" (B), power is supplied: ^ from lighting switch terminal (7) ^ to RH headlamp terminal (D) ^ to daytime light control unit terminal (4). Ground is supplied to RH headlamp terminal (E) through body grounds (E12) and (E54). Also, when the lighting switch is turned to headlamp "ON" (2ND) position, "LOW BEAM" (B), power is supplied: ^ from lighting switch terminal (10) ^ to LH headlamp terminal (D). Ground is supplied: ^ to LH headlamp terminal (E) ^ from daytime light control unit terminal (7) ^ through daytime light control unit terminal (9) ^ through body grounds (E12) and (E54). With power and ground supplied, the low beam headlamps illuminate. High beam operation/flash-to-pass operation When the lighting switch is turned to headlamp "ON" (2ND) position, "HIGH BEAM" (A) or "FLASH TO PASS" (C) position, power is supplied: ^ from lighting switch terminal (6) ^ to terminal (M) of RH headlamp. When the lighting switch is turned to headlamp "ON" (2ND) position, "HIGH BEAM" (A) or "FLASH TO PASS" (C) position, power is supplied: ^ from lighting switch terminal (9) ^ to daytime light control terminal (5) ^ to combination meter terminal (17) for the high beam indicator ^ through daytime light control terminal (6) ^ to terminal (M) of LH headlamp. Ground is supplied in the same manner as low beam operation. Page 9482 Main Harness (Part 2 Of 2) Main Harness Layout Index Page 2404 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9302 EL-ROOM/L-02 Interior Room Lamp (Part 2 Of 3) Circuit Diagrams Interior Room Lamp (Part 1 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp (Part 2 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp Circuit Connectors Page 9533 Spot Lamp: Electrical Diagrams EL-INT/L-01 Spot Lamps Circuit Diagrams Spot Lamps Circuit Connectors Page 4014 Page 4026 Page 2819 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7884 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Wheel Bearing - Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. - Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) Page 3182 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3641 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CKPS-01 Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) (OBD) Circuit Diagrams Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 2512 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3197 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 7080 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 1145 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Camshaft position sensor 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal (49) and ground, ECM terminal (44) or (48) and ground. If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sensor. Page 1662 ^ Do not introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component, because contamination will occur. ^ R-134a in the presence of oxygen and under pressure may form a combustible mixture. Therefore, never introduce compressed air into any R-134a container, cylinder, A/C component, recover/recycle equipment, or other service equipment. This includes "empty" containers. Refrigerant Terminology Please use the correct name or names when specifying refrigerants. The guidelines are listed below: ^ Freon --> is a registered trademark of DuPont, and should only be used if referring to DuPont R-12. ^ DuPont's trade name for R-134a (automotive use) is Suva-->Trans A/C. ^ When referring to refrigerants, the terms Freon-->and Suva--> should not be used as a general reference. The proper terms are R-12 and R-134a Comments regarding refrigerants: ^ R-12 and R-134a are not compatible with each other and should never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. ^ R-134a for automotive use has a special tank fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME) which is compatible with automotive service equipment ^ When purchasing R-134a, be certain that the fitting size on the tank is 1/2" - 16 ACME. This thread size is easy to recognize by the square thread, as shown. ^ Although R-134a has no ozone depletion potential (ODP), it does have a slight global warming potential (GWP). Due to this slight GWP, as well as its high cost, venting of R-134a into the air is not recommended. ^ Recovery/recycling of R-134a will be required by U.S. Federal Law, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990. Page 7780 6. Before installing, apply a thin coat of ATF to O-ring and install new O-ring into sector shaft cover. 7. Apply a thin coat of ATF to U-packing and install new U-packing into sector shaft cover. NOTE: Direct grooved side of U-packing to needle bearing. 8. Before installing sector shaft, apply multi-purpose grease to adjusting screw and adjusting screw shim. Install sector shaft into sector shaft cover. Set adjusting screw to its outermost position. 9. Before installing oil seal, apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. Install new oil seal into gear housing with suitable tool. 10. Set piston rack at straight ahead position. Turn piston rack about 10 - 15° toward yourself with your finger. This enables smooth insertion of sector gear. 11. Gradually insert sector shaft into gear housing. Page 3294 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 9147 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3882 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6540 23. Install the driver's side lower knee protector bar using the (2) grade 4 bolts (identified by the 4 on the head) (refer to Figure 3). Bolt torque specification: 29 to 38 in/lb (0.33 to 0.41 kg/m). 24. Carefully install the driver's side lower panel by lifting it into place and snapping the panel underneath the instrument cluster. Install (1) screw located above the hood lock release lever and (1) screw located under the parking brake lever (refer to Figure 2). 25. Identify the airbag harness by its yellow connector end for the spiral cable and ensure it doesn't interfere with the steering column cover installation. Damage to this harness may result in unintended airbag deployment. 26. Place a clean shop towel over the lower knee protector to protect the steering column cover during installation. 27. Carefully install the steering column upper and lower covers and install the (5) screws from the underside and installing the garnish around the key switch. Be careful not to over tighten these screws or pinch any wires. 28. Remove the shop towel from the knee protector. 29. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 30. Turn ignition on. 31. Operate the O/D switch at the end of the shift lever and confirm that the O/D indicator light turns on and off with the switch. 32. Depress brake pedal and move shift lever through all gear positions. Confirm that the transmission engages each position and that the shift indicator displays the correct gear position. 33. Return the shift lever to the park position. 34. Release the brake pedal and confirm that the gear shift lever will not move from the park position. 35. Confirm that the ignition key can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition key is in the "Lock" position and the transmission shift lever is in the "Park" position. 36. Start the engine and confirm that no dash warning lights are on. 37. Reset the radio presets. Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 6941 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 798 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: If both DTC P0120 (0403) and DTC P0510 (0203) are displayed, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510 first. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch", which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. Page 3272 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 894 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity [1] ................................................................................................................................. 1000 - 1100 ml (35.2 - 38.7 Imperial Fluid Ounces) [1] At the normal operating temperature of 60 - 80° C (140 - 176° F). Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 9202 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2675 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5332 Page 3873 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6419 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1047 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6397 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 152 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 1606 ^ This will help avoid pulling in air at the end of the refilling procedure. NOTE: ^ See the appropriate Service Manual for cooling system refill capacity. ^ Use Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. For step 3 of the Operating Instructions: ^ Make sure to Purge all air from the Refill Tube (intake hose) before beginning the refill process. NOTE: The Venturi will NOT be harmed if some coolant goes through it during the air purge process. ^ Place the container of coolant mixture above the level of the radiator during the refill process. Page 9126 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7234 Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION CAUTION: ^ Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder. ^ Use new brake fluid "DOT 3". ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on paint areas, wash it away with water immediately. ^ Depress pedal slowly when raising front brake pressure. ^ Check rear brake pressure 2 seconds after front brake pressure reaches specified value. Disconnect harness connector from ABS actuator and electric unit before checking. 1. Remove front LH tire. 2. Connect tool to air bleeders on front LH brake caliper and rear LH or RH brake wheel cylinder. 3. Install front LH tire. CAUTION: Before installing front LH tire, confirm the tool is not touching the front LH wheel. 4. Bleed air from the tool. 5. Check fluid pressure by depressing brake pedal - Applied pressure (front brake) D1: 6,375 kPa (924 psi) - Output pressure (rear brake) D2: 3,334 - 3,825 kPa (484 - 555 psi) - If output pressure is out of specifications, replace master cylinder assembly 6. Bleed air after disconnecting the tool. 7. Install front LH tire. Page 7229 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair COMPONENTS REMOVAL CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ^ All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling. 1. Connect vinyl tube to air bleeder valve. 2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. 3. Remove flare nut connecting brake tube and hose, then withdraw lock spring. 4. Cover openings to prevent entrance of dirt whenever disconnecting brake line. INSPECTION - Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. INSTALLATION CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid DOT 3. ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 6616 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Keyless Entry - Remote Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 99-036A Date: 000510 Keyless Entry - Remote Programming Classification: EL99-001A Reference: NTB99-036A Date: May 10, 2000 NISSAN KEYLESS REMOTE ENTRY PROGRAMMING This amended version of NTB99-036 updates the Applied Vehicle, Service Information, and Service This amended Procedure Sections. Please discard all paper copies of NTB99-036 APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-00 Altima (L30) 1998-00 Frontier (D22) 1998-99 Maxima (A32) 2000 Maxima (A33) 1998-00 Pathfinder (R50) 1998-99 Sentra (B14) 2000 Sentra (B15) 1999-00 Quest (V41) 2000 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION If a remote switch assembly (remote controller) for an Applied Nissan vehicle does not operate or operates intermittently, it may need to be re-programmed. Use the following procedure to program the remote controller. NOTE: Not all trim level variations of a given vehicle include the remote controller function. Review the vehicle sales brochure to determine if the vehicle trim level is equipped with the remote controller function before starting the programming procedure. Also confirm that the remote controller(s) being programmed is the correct remote controller for the vehicle. NOTE: A. 1998-99 Altima, Maxima, Pathfinder, Sentra, and Frontier Models, 1999 Quest, and 2000 Frontier Models built before VIN 343314: If the vehicle has more than one remote controller, the remote controllers must all be programmed at the same time (a maximum of 4 remotes can be programmed). B. All 2000 Altima, Maxima, Pathfinder, Sentra, Quest, Xterra, Frontier Crew Cab and Desert Runner Models, and Frontier Models built after VIN 343314: If the vehicle has more than one remote controller, the oldest ID code is erased when programming a new remote when there are already 4 ID codes in memory. If there are less than 4 ID codes stored in memory, then the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased, unless a new remote is programmed after filling all 4 memory positions. A maximum of 4 remotes can be programmed. NOTE: Regarding 2000 Maxima, Pathfinder, and Sentra vehicles: You may use CONSULT-II to program remotes for these vehicles. Refer to the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further information. You may also program these vehicle remotes using the Service Procedure provided below. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Re-programming of an otherwise functional remote controller is not covered by warranty. Page 8583 Radio/Stereo: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2466 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4774 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 543 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9397 Headlamp: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement The headlamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. The bulb can be replaced from the engine compartment side without removing the headlamp body. ^ Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. 1. Disconnect the battery cable. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the back side of the bulb. 3. Unclip the bulb retaining clip, and then remove it. 4. Remove the Headlamp bulb carefully. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ^ Do not leave Headlamp reflector without bulb for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering Headlamp body may affect the performance of the Headlamp. Remove Headlamp bulb from the Headlamp reflector just before a replacement bulb is installed. Page 8220 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair The lubricant used to lubricate the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Whenever any A/C component is replaced or gas leakage occurs, lubricant must be added. If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: ^ Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor ^ Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) LUBRICANT Name: Nissan A/C System Lubricant Type R Part No.: KLH00-PAGR0 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the flowchart shown. Page 2786 EC-RRO2/H-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Page 7737 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 526 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 453 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2760 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 9550 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6410 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1855 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Auto Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set auto-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove auto-lock free running hub. 3. Remove snap ring. 4. Remove spindle washer and thrust washer. 5. After installing auto-lock free running hub, check operation. NOTE: When installing it, apply recommended grease to the parts shown in the above illustration. Page 986 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 9447 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5614 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1308 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Combination Flasher Unit M45 Main Harness (Part 1 Of 2) Main Harness Layout Page 4219 Ground Distribution Page 3659 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4021 Page 123 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8740 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments PREPARATION - Make sure that the following parts are in good order. (1) Battery (2) Ignition system (3) Engine oil and coolant levels (4) Fuses (5) ECM harness connector (6) Vacuum hoses (7) Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) (8) Fuel pressure (9) Engine compression (10) EGR valve operation (11) Throttle valve (12) EVAP system - On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". - On models equipped with automatic transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. - When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. - Turn off head lamps, heater blower. - Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 8984 Ground Distribution Page 4960 Canister Vent Valve: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3324 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4212 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5424 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Service and Repair Governor: Service and Repair GOVERNOR VALVE 1. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. 2. Support A/T assembly with a jack. 3. Remove rear engine mounting member from A/T assembly. 4. Remove rear extension from transmission case. 5. Remove governor valve assembly. 6. Inspect and repair governor valve assembly. Refer to Transmission Overhaul. Page 5064 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4685 ^ Refer to Figure 2 that applies to your model. ^ There should be continuity across the terminals with the throttle closed. NOTES: ^ An ohmmeter is used because CONSULT-II cannot display the CTPS status in all of the Applied Vehicles. ^ This adjustment procedure must be made with the TPS installed on the engine of the vehicle. ^ Do not touch the throttle drum when checking the CTPS signal or continuity. Doing so may cause an incorrect adjustment. ^ Nissan recommends using Kent-Moore TPS Connector Tool J-45178 for easy, accurate connection. See NTB01-023 for more information. 4. Refer to Chart 1 and select the correct thickness feeler gauges for your vehicle. 5. Check "A": Insert the thinner feeler gauge "A" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop. ^ The CTPS should have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "0 ohms"). Page 6358 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4573 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1477 Page 858 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2620 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9124 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2597 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3552 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5051 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 6798 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications Use a Quality, Multi-purpose wheel bearing grease. Page 5639 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 4396 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Connectors Minimum Voltage Monitoring Page 7493 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 5323 Page 4102 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4188 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 652 Ground Distribution Page 1154 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 742 Ground Distribution Page 5751 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2762 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3580 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 6628 Ground Distribution Page 3610 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Page 304 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 5054 Leak Detection Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PRE/SE-01 Evaporation Emission Control System Pressure Sensor (EVAP) (DTC: P0450) WIRING DIAGRAM Page 5899 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 6488 Ground Distribution Page 6483 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5825 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2245 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7295 Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Front: Sensor 13-17 ft.lb Cable 39.1-51.2 in.lb Rear Sensor (At Backing Plate) 13-17 ft.lb Page 861 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 7677 5. After installing drive shaft, check drive shaft axial end play. (4WD) Do not reuse snap ring once it has been removed. Refer to Axle Shaft Assembly, Constant Velocity Type / Service and Repair. Page 3653 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1411 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). Page 6837 Wheel Hub (Locking): Diagrams Page 7543 Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander Page 390 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9366 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2696 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 6801 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Wheel Bearing - Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. - Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) Page 2699 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 3946 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 9365 Ground Distribution Page 7139 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 3239 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: If both DTC P0120 (0403) and DTC P0510 (0203) are displayed, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510 first. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch", which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. Page 8270 performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding. Locations Antitheft Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 9374 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4069 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5037 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3877 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3338 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Steering - Pull/Drift Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8812 area (2' x 2' or less). Spread the liquid around with the pad before turning the buffer "ON". Use an overlapping pattern to assure even polishing effort on all areas. 3. Second use a dual action sander with either a 3M foam pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing liquid over the work area (2' x 2' or less). Polish with the same technique as above. Do not polish dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. If build up occurs, cool the surface with clean water and dry with a clean terry cloth towel and clean the foam pad. Use a slower speed to prevent heating the surface and ground the vehicle to a metal water pipe to reduce static electricity. INSPECTION Gently clean a small section with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Inspect the surface for swirl marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. CAUTION: If you clean with an alcohol and water cleaning solution it will cause damage to plastic lenses. The damage is not immediately visible, but develops later Buffing Buffing is done with a 8" buffer at 1500-1750 RPM to remove sanding scratches. 1. Clean the surface of all residue before buffing. 2. Apply a buffing liquid and spread it over the work area (2' x 2' or less) with the buffing pad before turning the buffer "ON". Keep the pad nearly flat and move it slowly but continuously over the area. Use an overlapping pattern to assure even buffing effort on all areas. Do not buff dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for sanding marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. If necessary, gently clean a small section of the surface with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Sanding 1. Soak the sand paper in water with lubricant such as Meguiar's # 0016, for at least 15 minutes before use. Mask the fenders and doors to reduce cleanup time. Wet sanding with a lubricant prevents buildup on the paper and consequent gouging of the finish. 2. Sand with 2000 grit sand paper using a sanding pad, never by hand alone. Apply plenty of water while sanding in one direction only, no more than 12-15 strokes. Do not sand in a circular pattern. Do not sand over body lines and panel edges. Rinse the paper frequently to prevent gouging. NOTE: Wet sanding vehicles with the New Cross Link Clear Coat (NCLC) hard clear coat requires a more aggressive sanding stroke. Vehicles with a conventional clear coat require a normal sanding stroke. 3. Rinse with water and squeegee gently. As the squeegee clears the water, inspect for damage. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for damage under both strong fluorescent lights and full sunlight (a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away is necessary on cloudy days). A smooth dull sanded surface is expected at this time. Bright spots or other irregularities indicate the damage needs more sanding, up to the 0.5 mil standard. 4. After the damage is removed, measure the paint thickness in several places to determine if less than 0.5 mil has been removed. 5. If the damage was deeper than 0.5 mil, the surface must be re-clear coated, or re-color coated on vehicles with no clear coat. Refer to the Warranty Paint and Body Self-Study Course, or the Warranty Flat Rate Manual for assistance. 6. If the damage has been removed with less than 0.5 mil of the color/clear coat removed, buff and polish to remove the sanding marks. Page 122 Engine Control Module: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 4108 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. G Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair G Sensor SRS Component Parts Location Description G Sensor The G Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. It can not be serviced separately. Malfunction of the G Sensor requires replacement of the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Refer to Diagnosis Sensor Unit / Service and Repair. Page 1057 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4967 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2077 Page 2735 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. * Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 519 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4146 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6541 TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Classification: EC99-005b Reference: NTB99-053b Date: January 22, 2002 NISSAN REVISED TPS ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE This bulletin amends NTB99-053a. The Service Information and Service Procedure has been revised. In addition, TPS Connector tool (Kent-Moore # J45178) information has been included. Please discard all copies of NTB99-053a. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1995-1998 Maxima (A32) 1996-1998 Pathfinder (R50) 1995-1998 240SX (S14) 1995-1998 Sentra/200SX (B14) w/GA16 & SR20 engines 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998 Frontier (D22) 1995-1997 Altima (U13) 1998 Altima (L30) 1996-1998 Quest (V40) SERVICE INFORMATION The adjustment procedure for the throttle position sensor (TPS) has been revised and standardized for all the Applied Vehicles. ^ The TPS contains a closed throttle position switch (CTPS) and a variable output throttle position sensor. ^ This procedure uses the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) status (ON or OFF) instead of the throttle position sensor (variable output voltage) to adjust the TPS. ^ Incorrect adjustment of the CTPS may cause one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to be displayed: P1447, P0120, P0510, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P1705. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check fast idle cam (FIC) function, if equipped (refer to appropriate Service Manual). When finished, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and the fast idle cam (if equipped) has released. Then turn the engine "OFF". 2. Disconnect the harness connector (see Figure 1) from the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) position of the throttle position sensor (TPS). 3. Connect an ohmmeter across the terminals for the closed throttle position switch (CTPS). Page 4341 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 4952 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7456 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5998 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3479 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3300 Ground Distribution Page 3106 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4250 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3747 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ECM consists of a microcomputer, diagnostic test mode selector, and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine. Page 4746 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4480 Throttle Full Close Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Closed Throttle Position Switch 1. tart engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector. 4. Check continuity between terminals (5) and (6) while opening throttle valve manually. If NG, replace throttle position switch. Page 5032 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 7974 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 5537 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications PRESSURE PRESSURE Fuel pressure with vacuum hose connected 235 kpa (34 psi) Fuel pressure with vacuum hose disconnected 294 kpa (43 psi) Page 706 Ground Distribution Page 3022 EGR Temperature Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2658 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6219 Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Gap Spark plug gap mm. 1.0-1.1 Spark plug gap in. 0.039-0.043 Page 1720 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6202 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4297 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 620 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. * Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 1100 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7056 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3710 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 9555 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 8630 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 4574 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1410 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications Front SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload ................................................... ............................................................................................................ 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) Return Angle ................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 15 - 30° TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Lock Nut: Initial .................................................................................................................................................... ............................ 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Final ............................................................................ ............................................................................................ 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) Rear SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload [1] ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.9 - 48.1 Nm (1.5 - 10.8 lbs.) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Cage To Baffle Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 54 - 74 Nm (40 - 54 ft. lbs.) Bearing Lock Nut ........................................................................................................................................................... 245 - 294 Nm (181 - 217 ft. lbs.) [1]: At bearing cage bolt. Page 685 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater COMPONENT INSPECTION Rear heated oxygen sensor heater Check the following. 1. Check resistance between terminals (2) and (3). Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 25°C (77°F) 2. Check continuity. If NG, replace the rear heated oxygen sensor. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing order Firing order Firing order 1-3-4-2 Testing and Inspection Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Ignition wires 1. Inspect wires for cracks, damage, burned terminals and for improper fit. 2. Measure the resistance of wires to their distributor cap terminal. Move each wire while testing to check for intermittent breaks. Resistance: 13.6 - 18.4 K Ohms (4.15 - 5.61 K Ohms/ft) at 25°C (77°F) If the resistance exceeds the above specification, inspect ignition wire to distributor cap connection. Clean connection or replace the ignition wire with a new one. Page 5661 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5863 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4033 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Locations Cruise Control Servo: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 7659 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-PST/SW-01 Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Diagrams Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 162 Page 4260 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4169 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8152 Use a backup wrench on the low hose when tightening the joint connection nut. 8. Reinstall the clip to the support bracket (see Figure 2). Tighten the clip mounting bolt to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 Kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb). 9. Evacuate and recharge the vehicle's A/C system with 0.60 - 0.70 kg (1.32-1.54 lb) of R134a refrigerant. Refer to page HA-51 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C evacuation and recharge procedure. 10. Check the A/C low hose for refrigerant leaks. Refer to pages HA-48 through HA-50 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C leak test procedure. If a leak is found, repair as necessary before proceeding with step 11. 11. Check A/C performance. Refer to page HA-38 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the A/C performance check procedure. A. If the A/C performance is within specification, this service procedure is complete. B. If the A/C performance is not within specification, repair as necessary. Low Hose Angle Adjustment 1. Loosen the joint connection between the A/C low hose and the mating A/C low pipe by turning the joint connection nut 1/4 turn counterclockwise (see Figure 4). CAUTION: Do not loosen the joint connection nut more than 1/4 turn as refrigerant can escape and the 0-ring may become damaged. Also, use a backup wrench on the hose when loosening the joint connection nut. 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the bolt that secures the clip to the support bracket (see Figure 4). 3. Move the A/C low hose so that it is positioned between 0° and 5° relative to the horizontal plane (see Figure 5). 4. Retighten the clip mounting bolt to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 Kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb) Page 3490 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 810 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4046 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 6008 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4126 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Absolute pressure sensor 1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. 2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch "ON" and check output voltage between ECM terminal (45) and engine ground. The voltage should be 3.2 to 4.8 V. 4. Use pump to apply vacuum of -26.7 kPa (-200 mmHg, -7.87 inHg) to absolute pressure sensor as shown in figure and check the output voltage. The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4 V lower than the value measured in step 3. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply vacuum below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 in Hg). 5. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor. Page 2899 Ground Distribution Page 4670 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1325 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 5666 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6336 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 1691 Page 5658 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 6059 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1088 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7897 Axle Nut: Service and Repair Diagrams Page 5832 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: If both DTC P0120 (0403) and DTC P0510 (0203) are displayed, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510 first. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch", which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. Recall - A/T Shifter Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 98-032 Date: 980401 Recall - A/T Shifter Replacement Reference: NTB98-032 Date April 1, 1998 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 1998 FRONTIER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SHIFTER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO: 98V-064 APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998 Frontier (D22) APPLIED VIN: 1N6DD21S*WC305007 to WC330328 INTRODUCTION There is a possibility that on some 1998 Frontier trucks, a securing pin inside the Automatic Transmission Shifter Assembly could come loose. This could allow the shift lever to be inadvertently moved out of the "Park" position without the key in the ignition and could result in unexpected movement of the vehicle if the parking brake is not engaged. There may also be difficulty in shifting the lever in or out of "Park" with the key in the ignition. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number 98V-064 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED Approximately 3,000 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new cars, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to also correct any used trucks in their inventory which fall within the range of this campaign prior to sale. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Check Service Comm to verify that the campaign procedure has not already been performed on this vehicle. Page 5625 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 510 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 5818 Ground Distribution Page 5985 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3175 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1203 Ground Distribution Page 7164 - Remove bearing outer races with suitable brass bar. INSPECTION Thoroughly clean wheel bearings and wheel hub. Wheel Bearings Make sure wheel bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Wheel Hub Check wheel hub for cracks by using a magnetic exploration or dyeing test. ASSEMBLY 1. Install bearing outer race with Tool until it seats in hub. 2. Install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press. (Models with ABS) Always replace sensor rotor with new one. Pay attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown in figure. 3. Pack multipurpose grease in wheel hub and hub cap. Page 3303 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 8384 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring, sliding it over all areas of the "D" ring where it contacts the seat belt (see Figure 7) until all residue is removed. NOTE: It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring before the following steps of the procedure are completed. Failure to remove all residue build up will result in poor adhesion of the special fluorine resin tape. 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the two fluorine resin tape sections provided in the kit (see Figure 8). 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 9A. NOTE: Page 7544 The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. Page 7965 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 5768 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 9406 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 616 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3307 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6567 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1326 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position switch is "ON". ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. Page 8160 Use the Diagnosis/Repair Flow Chart shown to determine the diagnosis and repair of the vehicle. Low Hose Visual and Leak Detector Inspection Low Hose Visual Inspection Page 2929 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Diagram Information and Instructions Absolute Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6251 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Body - Window Regulator/Motor Service Update Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Window Regulator/Motor Service Update Classification: BT04-021 Reference: NTB04-064 Date: May 25, 2004 NISSAN; WINDOW REGULATOR/MOTOR SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan APPLIED DATES: 1995 to current date SERVICE INFORMATION If you should need to service the window regulator or motor on an Applied model, removing the door window is no longer needed. See the chart to find out which revised service procedure in this bulletin applies to the vehicle you are working on. Removal and Installation of Regulator Assembly NOTE: These procedures are typical way for each type. The procedures differ according to model, so refer to Service Manual for more detail. Page 9314 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Combination Switch/Replacement ^ Each switch can be replaced without removing combination switch base. Combination Switch/Replacement ^ To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching screws. Combination Switch/Replacement ^ Before installing the steering wheel, align the turn signal cancel tab with the notch of combination switch. Page 6177 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CKPS-01 Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) (OBD) Circuit Diagrams Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 3413 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug ID Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. FR5AP-10 Cold .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. FR6AP-10 Optional ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................... FR7AP-10 Page 3192 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4878 3. Directly above this 25 mm hole, drill one 8 mm (0.31 in.) hole in the inside edge of the vehicle bed rail (see Figure 3). 4. Deburr both drilled holes and coat the bare metal surfaces with an anti-corrosive paint. 5. Install the rubber grommet (from the kit) into the 25 mm drilled hole. 6. Install the metal breather tube into the grommet and fasten the upper plastic bracket to the bed rail through the 8 mm drilled hole with the bolt and nut from the kit (see Figure 4). Installation of the EVAP System 1. Install the EVAP canister. 2. Install the EVAP vent control valve. 3. Reconnect the two small diameter original hoses to the canister. 4. Reconnect the vent control valve electrical harness. Page 5782 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5705 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3512 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2979 Diagram Information and Instructions Absolute Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3040 Ground Distribution Page 665 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Connectors Maximum Voltage Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Connectors Minimum Voltage Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Operation (For Canada) Headlamp: Description and Operation Operation (For Canada) Operation (Daytime Light System For Canada) After starting the engine with the lighting switch in the "OFF" or parking lamp (1ST) position, the headlamp high beam automatically turns on. Lighting switch operations other than the above are the same as conventional light systems. Page 3554 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5386 Fuel Injector: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 9467 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 334 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 485 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2248 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 7948 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 1129 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9258 Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams MODELS WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS EL-ROOM/L-01 Interior Room Lamp (Part 1 Of 3) Page 3824 Idle Up Control Valve: Connector Views Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve (DTC: P0505) Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve Circuit Connectors Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-FICD Solenoid Valve IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Page 6678 Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair INSPECTION Check the following items, and replace as necessary. Rubbing surface of cylinder and piston, for uneven wear, rust and damage - Piston with piston cup, for wear and damage - Piston spring, for wear and damage - Dust cover, for cracks, deformation and damage Page 3006 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1388 ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. Page 2711 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2715 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 8025 Wheel Hub (Locking): Diagrams Page 3842 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7100 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 574 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3589 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6179 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) 1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector. 2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: Approximately 166.5 - 203.5 ohms [at 20°C (68°F)] If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). Page 8063 Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection Operation Check 1. Start engine. 2. Check blower motor. 3. Slide tan control lever to 1-speed and blower motor should operate on 1-speed. 4. Slide fan control lever to 2-speed and continue checking blower speed until all speeds are checked. Page 6748 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Cover Gasket REAR COVER GASKET REPLACEMENT (REAR FINAL DRIVE: MODEL C200) 1. Drain gear oil. 2. Remove rear cover and rear cover gasket. 3. Install new rear cover gasket and rear cover. 4. Fill final drive with recommended gear oil. Page 1015 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger With Consult 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". OR Without Consult 1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and reconnect fuel pump fuse. Locations Door Switch: Locations BR-ABS-01 Anti-lock Brake System (Part 1 Of 5) SRS Component Parts Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3127 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Mass air flow sensor 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between terminal (54) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above check. 5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust. Page 1014 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6040 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 6031 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 2380 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 9237 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2140 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 3627 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4041 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 6331 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8421 6. Remove retractor bolt and screw. 7. Remove retractor. Page 9138 Ground Distribution Page 5720 11. Using CONSULT-II select ENGINE, DATA MONITOR (Manual trigger), Selections From Menu, CLSD THL/P SW, and Enter. 12. Stop engine (turn ignition switch "OFF"). 13. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least five seconds. 14. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least ten seconds. 15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for 1 to 16 times until CLSD THL/P SW in CONSULT-II changes to "ON". Page 2730 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3236 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 431 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3967 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the rear healed oxygen sensor heater corresponding to the engine speed. OPERATION Page 3146 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3770 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2854 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5089 Leak Detection Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-BYPS/V-01 Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (DTC: P1490) Circuit Diagrams Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (DTC: P1490) Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 150 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6563 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload [1] ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.9 - 48.1 Nm (1.5 - 10.8 lbs.) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Cage To Baffle Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 54 - 74 Nm (40 - 54 ft. lbs.) Bearing Lock Nut ........................................................................................................................................................... 245 - 294 Nm (181 - 217 ft. lbs.) [1]: At bearing cage bolt. Specifications Wheel Cylinder: Specifications Cylinder Bore Diameter 0.8125 in Bleeder Screw 61 - 78 in.lb Crank Lever Bolt 14 - 18 ft.lb Crank Lever Nut 20.8 - 39.1 in.lb Mounting Bolts 52 - 95 in.lb Pulley Bolt 40 - 54 ft.lb Page 8187 Page 3667 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 537 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2639 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5699 Ground Distribution Page 5100 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7893 Axle Nut: Specifications Axle / Bearing Lock Nut TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Screws ................................................................................................................................. .................................. 49 - 69 Nm (36 - 51 ft. lbs.) Page 525 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Crash Zone Sensor SRS Component Parts Location Page 9305 The timer is canceled, and interior room lamp turns off when: ^ driver's door is locked with remote controller, or ^ ignition switch is turned ON. The smart entrance control unit will shut off the room light if left on for 30 minutes. ON-OFF control When the room lamp switch is in the "DOOR" position, when the driver side door or passenger door is opened the room lamp turns on. When any door is opened and then closed while the ignition switch is not in the ON position, the room lamp timer operates. MODELS WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [26], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to room lamp terminal (+). With the room lamp switch ON, ground is supplied: ^ through body grounds (M14) and (M68) ^ to room lamp terminal (-). When a door is opened with the room lamp switch in "DOOR" position, ground is supplied: ^ through door switch LH or RH terminal (1) ^ to room lamp switch terminal (SW). With power and ground supplied, the room lamp turns ON. Page 6494 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4956 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2660 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Drum: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 3156 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications GAP AND TORQUE GAP AND TORQUE Clutch Air Gap 0.3-0.6 MM. 0.012-0.024 IN. Center Bolt Torque 12-15 NM. 9-11 FT. LB. Page 5519 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3453 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 885 Control Units/Module F29 Control Units/Module Page 7682 Idler Arm: Service and Repair STEERING LINKAGE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Refer to the illustrations when servicing. 1. Remove pitman arm with Tool. ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Transfer Case Shift Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transfer Case Shift Shaft Seal 1. Remove front propeller shaft. 2. Remove companion flange. Refer to "CENTER CASE OIL SEAL", in Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal. 3. Remove transfer control lever from transfer outer shift lever. Then remove outer shift lever. 4. Remove shift shaft oil seal. - Be careful not to damage cross shaft. 5. Install shift shaft oil seal. - Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip. 6. Install transfer control linkage. 7. Install companion flange. Refer to "CENTER CASE OIL SEAL", in Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal. 8. Install front propeller shaft. Page 3198 Throttle Full Close Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Closed Throttle Position Switch 1. tart engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector. 4. Check continuity between terminals (5) and (6) while opening throttle valve manually. If NG, replace throttle position switch. Page 6263 NOTE: If "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform the test at a temperature of -10° C (14° F) or higher. With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 5 seconds. (3) Start engine. (4) Select "TCC S/V FNCTN P1776" of "A/T (TCC S/N)" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. (5) Touch "START". (6) When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take approximately 20 seconds.) Selector lever: D (OD "ON") Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) CMPS.RPM (REF): Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) B/FUEL SCHDL: 2.5 - 5 ms THRTL POS SEN: Less than 1.3V If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2). (7) Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELFDIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE". OR With Generic Scan Tool (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Perform test drive in "D" position (OD "ON") at least 20 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) (3) Select MODE 7 with GST. OR Page 2531 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4285 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 7748 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Specifications Backing Plate: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Backing Plate/Pulley Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... 54 74 Nm (40 - 54 ft. lbs.) Page 6948 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 1926 Cylinder Head Components Page 5016 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 3135 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Switch: Testing and Inspection Check continuity between terminals at each position. Page 5285 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5535 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5330 Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Tires: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 9369 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Locations Neutral Start Relay (Inhibitor Relay): Locations Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 1213 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2406 Ground Distribution Page 1021 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 8026 Page 5684 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6582 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5674 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Connector Views Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 1480 Page 4371 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3764 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3780 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid: Customer Interest Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Classification: EC98-007B Reference: NTB98-058B Date: August 7, 2001 MIL "ON" WITH EVAP SYSTEM DTCs STORED DUE TO LAUNCHING A WATERCRAFT ATTENTION: This bulletin amends NTB98-058A. Applied Vehicle information has been expanded and Parts Information has been revised. Please discard all paper copies of NTB98-058A. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998-2001 Frontier (D22) SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle is used to launch watercraft and exhibits the following symptoms: 1. The EVAP canister is found to have water in it and 2. It has one or more of the following DTC codes stored in Self Diagnosis: ^ P0440 (EVAP-small leak) ^ P1440 (EVAP-small leak) D22 only ^ P0446 (EVAP canister vent control valve) ^ P1446 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck closed) D22 only ^ P1448 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck open) D22 only ^ P0450 (EVAP pressure sensor) ^ P0443 (EVAP purge control valve & solenoid valve) ^ P1445 (EVAP purge volume control valve) D21 only ^ P1444 (EVAP purge volume control solenoid valve) D22 only Use the Service Procedure provided in this bulletin to replace the EVAP canister and install the replacement EVAP breather tube kit to prevent water/mud/dirt entry into the EVAP system. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect CONSULT-II. 2. From the Engine menu, select Self Diag Results. 3. Touch PRINT. Then select FF Data and touch PRINT again. 4. Use the appropriate service manual to resolve the stored DTC. 5. To determine if there is damage to the EVAP system, proceed to Removal and Inspection Testing. 6. Then go to Installation of the Breather Tube Kit and Installation of the EVAP system. Removal and Inspection Testing Page 7683 2. Remove tie rod from knuckle arm with Tool. DISASSEMBLY Idler Arm Assembly - Apply coat of multi-purpose grease to bushing. - Press bushing into idler body, and insert shaft of idler bracket carefully until bushing protrudes. Relay Rod And Tie-Rod 1. When tie rod ball joints and tie rod bar are separated, adjust tie rod length correctly. NOTE: Adjustment should be done between ball stud centers. 2. Lock tie rod clamp nut so that ball joint on outer ball stud is as follows with respect to that on inner ball stud. Standard length "L" (2WD): 343.9 mm (13.54 inch) Page 1636 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Specified Type: a)Nissan Matic "D" or equivalent Automatic Transmission Fluid [1] b)API GL-4 [2] [1]Dexron III/Mercon or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an Infiniti dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of Dexron III/Mercon Automatic Transmission Fluid. [2]Specified viscosity at ambient temperature ranges: Below 10°C (50°F) ............................................................................................................................... ................................................................. SAE 75W Below 30°C (86°F) ............................................ .................................................................................................................................................... SAE 80W Below 40°C 104°F) ..................................................................................................................... ............................................... SAE 75W-90/SAE 80W-90 Between 30°C (86°F) and -10°C (14°F) ... ............................................................................................................................................................. SAE 85W Between 40°C (104°F) and 0°C (32°F) ............................................................................... ...................................................................................... SAE 90 Above 10°C (50°F) .......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......... SAE 140 NOTE: 75W-90 is preferable for ambient temperatures below 40°C (104°F) Page 9436 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 2832 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 426 Ground Distribution Page 151 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 3142 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5803 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Grounding Point: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 144 Ground Distribution Page 3616 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6489 Ground Distribution Page 2347 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Sunroof - Headliner Squeak Noises Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Sunroof - Headliner Squeak Noises Classification: BT98-003 Reference: NTB98-040 Date: June 1, 1998 1998 FRONTIER SQUEAK NOISE IN HEADLINER NEAR SUNROOF APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1998 Frontier (D22) - sunroof models only SERVICE INFORMATION If a 1998 Frontier exhibits a "scratchy" type of squeak noise in the headliner around the edges of the sunroof, the cause may be the headliner panel rubbing on the vehicle body. Use the following procedure to resolve the incident: SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof panel as follows: A. Remove the sunroof shade panel by turning the securing knobs counterclockwise and pulling the panel down and towards the rear of the vehicle to release (see Figure 1). B. Disconnect the sunroof handle from the sunroof handle latch by depressing the two release buttons on the handle latch while pushing up on the sunroof panel (see Figure 2). Page 2755 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 276 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 1043 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3563 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Audible Warning Device: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Diagnostic Procedure 1 (Lighting Switch Input Signal Check) Models With Power Door Locks Diagnostic Procedure 1 (With Power Door Locks) Models Without Power Door Locks Page 3031 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 333 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 5518 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 795 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5910 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CMPS-01 Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Circuit Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 6141 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Camshaft position sensor 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal (49) and ground, ECM terminal (44) or (48) and ground. If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sensor. Page 3808 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2859 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1003 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5486 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2980 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 5789 Throttle Full Close Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-TP/SW-01 Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Circuit Diagrams Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 2374 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 4425 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 467 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3459 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The absolute pressure sensor is connected to the MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve by a hose. The sensor detects ambient barometric pressure and intake manifold pressure and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure increases, the voltage rises. Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the two heater hoses from inside the engine compartment. 3. Remove the cooling unit. a. Evacuate the A/C system using refrigerant recovery equipment. b. Disconnect the two refrigerant lines from the engine compartment. - Cap the A/C lines to prevent moisture from entering the system. c. Remove the glove box and mating trim d. Disconnect the thermal amplifier connector. e. Remove the cooling unit. 4. Remove the steering member assembly. 5. Remove the heater unit. 6. Remove the heater core. INSTALLATION Installation is basically the reverse order of removal. Refill the cooling system. - Recharge the A/C system. Page 8818 The table provides a brief description of some types of paint contamination you may encounter. Select a 2' x 2' test section to perform the following Contamination Test Removal. C. RE-Wash C. Re-Wash with detergent and water solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Rinse with a spray of clean water. Repeat up to four times. D. Clean D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover using a clean terry cloth towel and gentle pressure. Repeat up to four times. E. Applying Finish Kare E. Apply Finish Kare to remove iron particles and acids. See procedure below: Caution: Attempting to buff iron particles will cause severe scratching. 1. Apply Finish Kare # 1119, solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. 2. After the wash and rinse, gently dry the contaminated surfaces with the terry cloth towels to remove the majority of the water. Use gentle pressure Page 2712 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6866 Page 3073 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6771 Axle Shaft: Testing and Inspection Check boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage or grease leakage. Page 3798 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1283 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 464 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6005 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 9286 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 813 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6324 Attachment General Procedure Page 3998 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2749 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3276 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Camshaft position sensor 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal (49) and ground, ECM terminal (44) or (48) and ground. If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sensor. Page 2588 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CMPS-01 Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Circuit Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 3958 EC-RRO2/H-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Page 6617 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2964 indications with no drop-outs or spikes. Note: A 2-3 mph (3-5 kph) difference between the CONSULT display and the speedometer is normal. 4. a) If the speedometer and speed sensor values are 0K, proceed to # 5. b) If the speedometer and speed sensor data are erratic, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to service manual for Diagnosis information. 5. Check the existing ECM part number in the vehicle that is listed either on the CONSULT freeze frame data or checked by CONSULT ECM Part Number function (see Figure 1). 6. If existing Part Number is one of those listed in Table 1, install the appropriate P/N listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4007 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 5719 ^ Refer to Figure 3 for the specific vehicle you are working on CAUTION: Never adjust the throttle slop screw. It is pre-set at the factory. 6. Check "B"; Insert the thicker feeler gauge "B" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop (see Figure 3). The CTPS should NOT have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "OL"). 7. If the results of steps 5 and/or 6 are not OK, loosen the TPS retaining bolts and adjust the CTPS to achieve the correct results. 8. Tighten the TPS retaining bolts, then repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times to check the new adjustment. 9. Re-connect the harness connector to the CTPS portion of the (TPS). Reset throttle position sensor idle position memory. NOTE: Failure to reset the TPS idle position memory may result in the idle speed staying higher than specification. 10. Start engine and warm it to operating temperature. NOTE: Always warm up engine to normal operation temperature, If the engine is cool, the throttle position memory will not be reset correctly. Page 8973 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3784 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 8956 Diagnostic Procedure 1 (Without Power Door Locks) Diagnostic Procedure 2 (Key Switch Input Signal Check) Models With Power Door Locks Diagnostic Procedure 2 (With Power Door Locks) Models Without Power Door Locks Page 4692 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1122 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5617 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1797 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Page 3840 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 8372 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 5281 Ground Distribution Page 2114 b. Install new crankshaft seal in front cover (see Figure 4). c. Apply a continuous bead of RTV sealant to the front cover (see Figure 5). NOTE: Use Genuine Nissan RTV silicone sealant P/N 999MP-A7007, Three Bond P/N TB1207D or equivalent. c. Also place RTV sealant on the head gasket surface. d. Install the front cover to the engine. 6. Install oil strainer and oil pan, referring to "Installation" in the "OIL PAN" section of the Service Manual. 7. Install the oil pump and distributor drive shaft. Page 4207 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger With Consult 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". OR Without Consult 1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and reconnect fuel pump fuse. Page 5771 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6305 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4917 Ground Distribution Page 4149 Ground Distribution Page 9199 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 919 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8719 MIRROR TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE Compass zone adjustment Adjust compass zone after EC mirror installation or change of geographical location: 1. The zone setting is factory preset to Zone 8. Refer to Compass Calibration Zone Map (Figure 1) to find correct compass zone setting for your geographical location. To change the zone setting, press and hold right button until "ZONE" appears in display. Press button repeatedly until desired compass zone number is reached. The display will change back to the compass direction after 3 seconds right button is not activated. Calibration adjustment (Compass Reset) The compass function calibrates itself under normal driving conditions. However, occasional circumstances may cause the compass to operate inaccurately. Calibrate the mirror compass if only one direction or a limited number of directions are displayed, no mater which way you are traveling. To reset the compass, follow these instructions: Drive to an open, level area away from large metallic objects or structures. 2. Turn off non-essential electrical accessories (rear window defrost, heater/air conditioning, wipers) and close doors. 3. Press and hold the button to the left of the display window, for approximately 3 seconds, until "CAL" text appears in the display. Release the button to enter the calibration mode. 4. Drive slowly in a circle until "CAL" text disappears in the display, (about two or three circles). 5. The compass reset procedure is now complete. Page 4531 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4395 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Connectors Maximum Voltage Monitoring Diagram Information and Instructions Canister Vent Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5035 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 9417 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 9521 Ground Distribution Page 5687 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7186 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 6573 Ground Distribution Page 627 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 3593 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Specified amount ................................................................................................................................. .................................................. 8.75 qts. (7.9 Liters) Page 3597 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4331 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1131 Ground Distribution Page 4540 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1626 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Specified type ...................................................................................................................................... .................................... API GL-4 SAE 75W-90 only Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 8816 CLAIMS INFORMATION Repairs of environmental contamination discovered and reported at the time of vehicle delivery to the dealership can be claimed utilizing procedures outlined in Warranty Bulletin WB92-003 dated January 24, 1992. Outline of Procedures A. Wash with detergent such as (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), then dry. B. Identify the type of contamination using fluorescent lights and magnification. If paint over-spray is found, a specialized repair process is needed. If paint contamination other than paint over spray is suspected, test a 2' x 2' section on each affected panel as follows to determine the severity of damage and repair effort needed: C. Re-wash several times to remove detergent and water soluble spots. If spots are removed, wash affected panels. D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover for solvent soluble spots. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. E. To remove iron particles and acid rain residue, use Finish Kare # 1119 followed by # 883 (apply # 883 several times if necessary) and always neutralize with # 118SC. Page 7622 NOTE: - Make sure that the tie rod bars are screwed into the tie rod tube more than 35 mm (1.38 inch). - Make sure that the tie rods are the same length. Standard length (A = B): 2WD = 343.9 mm (13.54 inch) 4WD = 297.6 mm (11.72 inch) c. Tighten clamp bolts or lock nuts, then torque them. WHEEL TURNING ANGLE 1. Set wheels in straight-ahead position. Then move vehicle forward until front wheels rest properly on turning radius gauge. 2. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning angle. On power steering models, turn steering wheel to full lock and apply force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 - 147 N (22 - 33 lbs.) with engine at idle. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel at full lock for more than 15 seconds. Wheel turning angle (Full turn): Refer to Specification Table. Page 6200 Ground Distribution Page 1455 Page 7053 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 6171 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7401 Fuse: Diagrams Fuse a. If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. b. Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. c. Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. d. Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 3320 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3772 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Campaign - A/C Hose Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 98-064 Date: 980908 Campaign - A/C Hose Replacement Reference: NTB98-064 Date: September 8, 1998 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN 1998 FRONTIER POOR OR NO A/C COOLING DUE TO A/C LOW HOSE CRACKING CAMPAIGN I.D. # P8163 APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1998 Frontier (D22) built before VIN # 1N6DD2***WC387655 INTRODUCTION Some 1998 Frontiers may develop refrigerant leaks in the vehicle's air conditioner lower return hose due to vibration. To ensure customer satisfaction and prevent any future inconvenience, Nissan has initiated a Voluntary Service Campaign to install a bracket on the lower return hose of the air conditioning system to minimize this vibration. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P8163 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this Campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 90,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is a dealer responsibility to check (with SERVICE-COMM) each vehicle falling within the range of this service campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from your dealership, other Nissan dealerships, private parties, or vehicles presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. A list of affected customers in your area will be sent to Nissan regional offices for distribution to Nissan dealers once all of the customer notification letters have been sent. This list will assist you in identifying those vehicles involved in this service campaign. Each dealership service department is encouraged to contact these vehicle owners to have the required inspections and repairs completed on their vehicle. CUSTOMER FOCUS Maintaining a strong customer relationship throughout the Frontier Air Conditioner Lower Return Hose Campaign is one of the key goals of NMC. Each and every action taken by Nissan and the servicing dealer will have a significant impact in retaining current Frontier owners as future customers. Page 1408 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. Page 4291 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4045 Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4386 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 598 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3698 Attachment General Procedure Page 4522 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 8516 B. Insert and remove the ignition key more than 6 times within a 10 second period (at a rate of one insertion/removal cycle per second). The key should be withdrawn from the ignition key cylinder completely each time it is removed. NOTE: Do not rush the insertion/removal key cycling process. The side marker/tail/license lamps and interior illumination will flash twice when this step is accurately completed. C. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. The ignition key should remain in the "ACC" position throughout the remainder of the programming, including programming of additional remote controllers. D. Press any button on the remote controller one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The side marker/tail/license lamps and interior illumination will flash twice when this step is accurately completed and programming is successful. E. If you are programming only one remote, proceed to step 3A. If programming additional remotes, continue with step 2A, below. 2. Programming Additional Remote Controllers (Maximum of 4 Remotes): A. Remain inside the vehicle after programming the first remote. B. Use the driver's power door lock-unlock switch to unlock and then lock the doors. C. Press any button on one of the additional remote controllers one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The side marker/tail/license lamps and interior illumination will flash twice when this step is accurately completed and programming is successful. If there is more than one additional remote to be programmed, repeat steps 2A through 2C above for each additional remote. 3. End Programming: A. Remove the key from the ignition. B. Use the door lock-unlock switch on the driver's door to unlock the doors. Open the driver's door to complete the programming. C. Check the operation of each of the remote controllers by locking/unlocking the doors with each of the remote controllers you have programmed. Page 3598 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7274 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Off-Vehicle Inspection Output Rod Length Check Testing For Vacuum At Booster 1. Apply vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mm Hg, -19.69 in Hg) to brake booster with a hand vacuum pump. 2. Check output rod length. Specified length: 10.275 - 10.525 mm (0.4045 - 0.4144 inch) Page 1125 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 9263 Courtesy Lamp: Testing and Inspection MODELS WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS Trouble Diagnoses (For Models With Power Door Locks) SYMPTOM: Room lamp does not turn on when any door is opened, or timer does not operate properly. Page 8161 1. Visually inspect the metal tube portion of the A/C low hose between the compressor flange and the rubber hose for cracks or signs of leakage such as traces of oil or dirt deposits (see Figure 1). NOTE: Use a mirror and flashlight (as needed) to view the underside of the hose end. Low Hose Leak Detector Inspection 1. Use an approved electronic leak detector (Kent Moore model # J39400 or # J41995) to check the A/C low hose for leaks. Refer to pages HA-48 through HA-50 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the leak check procedure. NOTE: Make sure the electronic leak detector is properly calibrated and that the probe tip filter is clean before performing the leak check. Refer to the leak detector owner's manual to calibrate and/or change the probe tip filter as needed. A/C Low Hose Installation 1. Use appropriate equipment to discharge and recover all remaining refrigerant from the vehicle's A/C system. Refer to pages HA-51 and HA-52 of the 1998 Nissan Frontier Service manual for the discharge and recovery procedure. Page 5182 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3206 Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications Completely Closed Approx. 0.5 K ohms at 77 deg F Partially Open 0.5 - 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Comqletely Open Approx. 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Page 6966 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5196 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Specifications Compression Check: Specifications GENERAL ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS Page 5291 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1726 Power Supply Routing: Schematic (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1583 2. Disconnect the A/C low hose from the A/C compressor and from the A/C low pipe coming from the evaporator (see Figure 2). 3. Remove the clip from the support bracket (see Figure 2). 4. Remove the old hose from the vehicle. 5. Apply Nissan A/C system oil "Type R" (P/N: KLH00-PAGR0) to the 0-ring on the compressor end of the new hose and to the 0-ring on the existing A/C low pipe (coming from the evaporator). NOTE: If it is necessary to replace the 0-ring on either the new A/C low hose or the existing low pipe, use the correct 0-ring specified for "Captured 0-ring" type A/C connections (0-ring P/N: 92473-N8210). 6. Install the compressor end of the new A/C low hose to the compressor (see Figure 2) and tighten the mounting bolt to 14 - 18 N.m (1.4 - 1.8 kg-m, 10 - 13 ft-lb). 7. Install the other end of the A/C low hose to the existing A/C low pipe so that the hose is positioned between 0° and 5° relative to the horizontal plane (see Figure 3). Tighten the joint connection nut to 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb). CAUTION: Page 4707 Ground Distribution Page 6065 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. * Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 5402 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6863 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Diagrams Rear Propeller Shaft Page 4329 Ground Distribution Page 7781 12. Tighten sector shaft cover bolts. 13. Set worm gear turning torque by turning sector shaft adjusting screw and locking with lock nut. Refer to Pre-Disassembly Adjustment. NOTE: If set and adjusting turning torque is considerably different from the value before disassembly, replace the entire assembly. 14. Check sector shaft end play in neutral position. If not within specification, adjust it with adjusting screw. End play: less than 0.1 mm (0.004 inch) 15. Check worm gear preload. If not within specification, readjust it. Pre-Disassembly Adjustment STEERING GEAR MODEL PB59K 1. Measure turning torque at 360° position. Specifications Page 8196 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT TYPE REFRIGERANT TYPE HFC-134 (R134a) Page 5581 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 2068 3. Apply engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable tool. REAR OIL SEAL 1. Remove flywheel or drive plate. 2. Remove rear oil seal retainer. 3. Remove rear oil seal from retainer. - Be careful not to scratch rear oil seal retainer. 4. Apply engine oil to new oil seal and install it using suitable tool. - Install new oil seal in the direction shown. Page 3656 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 9201 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2663 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) 1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector. 2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: Approximately 166.5 - 203.5 ohms [at 20°C (68°F)] If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). Page 4232 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Diagrams EC-ECTS-01 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Circuit Diagrams Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 5411 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3083 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 5108 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3140 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 1919 Page 4701 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Specifications Page 4848 5. Install the new hose between the vent control valve and the metal breather tube (see Figure 5). 6. Reinstall the spare tire. 7. If equipped, reinstall the bedliner. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 7733 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3010 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 582 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Views Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 7067 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4356 Oxygen Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 4267 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7521 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 9261 Courtesy Lamp: Description and Operation MODELS WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS Power supply and ground Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 30 A fusible link (Letter [f], located in the fuse and fusible link box) ^ to circuit breaker terminal (1) ^ through circuit breaker terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (1). Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [28], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to key switch terminal (1). Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [26], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to room lamp terminal (+). When the key is inserted into ignition key cylinder, power is supplied: ^ from key switch terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (24). With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [5], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (11). Ground is supplied: ^ through body grounds (M14) and (M68) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (10). When the LH door is opened, ground is supplied: ^ from door switch LH terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (15). When the RH door is opened, ground is supplied: ^ from door switch RH terminal (1) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (35). When the LH door is unlocked, the smart entrance control unit receives a ground signal: ^ through body grounds (M14) and (M68) ^ to door unlock sensor terminal (4) ^ from door unlock sensor terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (12). When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the smart entrance control unit, ground is supplied: ^ through smart entrance control unit terminal (9) ^ to room lamp terminal (SW). With power and ground supplied, the interior room lamp illuminates. Switch operation When the room lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied: ^ through body grounds (M14) and (M68) ^ to room lamp terminal (-). With power and ground supplied, the room lamp turns ON and remains ON until the room lamp switch is turned to OFF or turned to the "DOOR" position and the doors are closed. Interior room lamp timer operation When the room lamp switch is in the "DOOR" position, the smart entrance control unit keeps the interior room lamp illuminated for about 30 seconds when: ^ LH door is unlocked ^ key is removed from ignition key cylinder while driver's door is closed ^ driver's door is opened and then closed while ignition switch is not in the ON position. Page 7743 Ground Distribution Page 6146 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 5353 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1362 Page 2782 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit EC-FRO2-01 Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Diagrams Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 1844 Page 3181 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 375 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 612 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1320 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3213 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4387 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Circuit Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Connectors Heater Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 9561 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4909 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 994 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-MAFS-01 Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Diagrams Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 8162 2. Disconnect the A/C low hose from the A/C compressor and from the A/C low pipe coming from the evaporator (see Figure 2). 3. Remove the clip from the support bracket (see Figure 2). 4. Remove the old hose from the vehicle. 5. Apply Nissan A/C system oil "Type R" (P/N: KLH00-PAGR0) to the 0-ring on the compressor end of the new hose and to the 0-ring on the existing A/C low pipe (coming from the evaporator). NOTE: If it is necessary to replace the 0-ring on either the new A/C low hose or the existing low pipe, use the correct 0-ring specified for "Captured 0-ring" type A/C connections (0-ring P/N: 92473-N8210). 6. Install the compressor end of the new A/C low hose to the compressor (see Figure 2) and tighten the mounting bolt to 14 - 18 N.m (1.4 - 1.8 kg-m, 10 - 13 ft-lb). 7. Install the other end of the A/C low hose to the existing A/C low pipe so that the hose is positioned between 0° and 5° relative to the horizontal plane (see Figure 3). Tighten the joint connection nut to 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb). CAUTION: Page 1099 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 822 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 6015 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2676 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 8448 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. A/C - System Changes As Result of R-134A Refrigerant Technical Service Bulletin # 92-001 Date: 920101 A/C - System Changes As Result of R-134A Refrigerant Classification: HA92-OO1 Reference: NTB92-OO1 Date: January 1992 A/C SYSTEM CHANGES FOR R-134A REFRIGERANT (ALL MODELS) APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Service Information Introduction Due to its harmful effect on the ozone layer, R-12 is being phased out and replaced by R-134a, which does not harm the ozone layer. While the R-134a A/C system is very similar to an R-12 A/C system, the differences in the refrigerant, lubricants, and service equipment are important. Nissan A/C systems will change from R-12 to R-134a at the time of new vehicle (full model change) introduction, or in some cases by model year update to an existing model line. This bulletin describes all of the general differences between the R-12 and R-134a systems. For details of an R-134a system for a specific model, refer to that model's service manual or new product information. Refrigerant Handling Precautions ^ R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ Use only specified lubricant for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ The specified R-134a lubricant absorbs moisture from the atmosphere at a rapid rate, therefore the following handling precautions must be observed: ^ When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. ^ When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Also, complete the connection of all refrigerant tubes and hoses without delay to minimize the entry of moisture into the system. ^ Use the specified lubricant from a sealed container only. Containers must be re-sealed immediately after dispensing the lubricant. Lubricant in containers which are not properly sealed will become moisture saturated. Such lubricant is no longer suitable for use and should be properly disposed. ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE standards to discharge R-134a Systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. ^ Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ^ Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 125° (52°C). ^ Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. ^ Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ^ Keep refrigerant away from open flames: hazardous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ^ Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. Page 6018 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1442 CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION Before checking camber, caster or kingpin inclination, move vehicle up and down on turning radius gauge to minimize friction. Ensure that the vehicle is in correct posture. - Measure camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust in accordance with the following procedures. Camber, Caster, and Kingpin inclination: Refer to Specification Table. - In the following two cases, temporarily tighten the adjusting bolts while aligning the matching marks with the slits as shown in the figure and measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination: (1) When replacing the upper link or other suspension parts with new ones (2) When matching marks were not painted on adjusting bolts before suspension disassembly procedures. - If matching marks were already painted during suspension disassembly, align the matching marks with the slits, then temporarily tighten the adjusting bolts. Measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination. ADJUSTMENT Page 2812 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Testing and Inspection Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Switch/Check Combination Switch Check Page 5713 Throttle Full Close Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Closed Throttle Position Switch 1. tart engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector. 4. Check continuity between terminals (5) and (6) while opening throttle valve manually. If NG, replace throttle position switch. Page 3555 Ground Distribution Page 1821 REPLACEMENT 1. Set auto-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove auto-lock free running hub. 3. Remove snap ring. 4. Remove spindle washer and thrust washer. 5. After installing auto-lock free running hub, check operation. NOTE: When installing it, apply recommended grease to the parts shown in the above illustration. Page 6379 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM controls torque converter clutch solenoid valve to cancel the lock-up condition of A/T. When the solenoid valve is turned on, lock-up is cancelled. When the solenoid valve is turned oft, A/T lock-up is operational. Conditions for lock-up cancel: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned "ON" when; Throttle valve is fully closed (during idling or deceleration) - Engine coolant temperature is below 40° C (104° F) - Engine is stopped Conditions for lock-up operation: Under 55 to 63 km/h (34 to 39 MPH) (2/8 throttle on flat road), lock-up does not operate even when the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is "OFF". - Over 58 to 66 km/h (36 to 41 MPH) (2/8 throttle on flat road), lock-up should operate because the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is "OFF". To confirm vehicle lock-up, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve must be in operation ("ON" during idle and deceleration, and "OFF" during acceleration) and engine speed should drop. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there will be no lock-up. CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. Page 2788 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Connectors Minimum Voltage Monitoring Page 4533 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7328 Battery: Service Precautions Methods of Preventing Over-Discharge CAUTION: If it becomes necessary to start engine with a booster battery and jumper cables: ^ Use a 12-Volt booster battery. ^ After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact. ^ Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity. The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery. ^ The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept clean and dry. ^ The terminal connections should be clean and tight. ^ At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level. ^ When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of time, disconnect the negative battery terminal. (If the vehicle has an extended storage switch, turn it off.) Methods Of Preventing Discharge ^ Check the charge condition of the battery. Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep the close check on charge condition to prevent overdischarge. Page 4601 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 401 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-AP/SEN-01 Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Diagrams Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 5152 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 9277 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3745 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2590 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Camshaft position sensor 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal (49) and ground, ECM terminal (44) or (48) and ground. If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sensor. Page 5766 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 815 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 365 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair - Each switch can be replaced without removing combination switch base. COMBINATION SWITCH BASE REMOVAL - To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching screws. - Before installing the steering wheel, align the turn signal cancel tab with the notch of combination switch. Page 9185 Backup Lamp: Electrical Diagrams EL-BACK/L-01 Back-up Lamp Circuit Diagrams Back-up Lamp Circuit Connectors Specifications Steering Wheel: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Nut ....................................................................................................................................... .................................. 29 - 39 Nm (22 - 29 ft. lbs.) Special Bolt ........................................................... ................................................................................................................. 15 - 25 Nm (11 - 18 ft. lbs.) SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Wheel Play .......................................................... ...................................................................................................................... 35 mm (1.38 inch) or less Page 3518 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4605 Control Units/Module F29 Control Units/Module Page 4423 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2060 Page 9195 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Idler Pulley: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Classification: HA99-006 Reference: NTB99-070 Date: October 5, 1999 A/C IDLER PULLEY WHINE NOISE AT 3000 ENGINE RPM (FOUR CYLINDER ENGINE ONLY) APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) - 2WD 2000 Xterra (WD22) - 2WD APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle exhibits a whine noise at or around 3,000 engine RPM, the cause may be the air conditioning (A/C) idler pulley. Use the service procedure listed below to diagnose and correct the incident. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Run the engine at or around 3,000 RPM with the A/C ON and OFF to determine when the whine noise occurs. NOTE: The A/C will operate with the A/C button turned off if the mode selector is in the foot/defrost or defrost position and the fan is turned on. To ensure the A/C is off, move the fan speed selector to the off position. A. If the whine noise occurs with the A/C off (A/C compressor not operating), look for other sources of the whine noise. B. If the whine noise only occurs when the A/C is on (A/C compressor operating) and the noise can be pin pointed to the idler pulley with a stethoscope or Chassis Ears(TM), proceed with step 2. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Loosen (but do not remove) the nut that secures the idler pulley (see Figure 1). 4. Remove the E-ring from the idler pulley adjusting bolt (see Figure 1). 5. Remove the idler pulley adjusting bolt. 6. Remove the A/C compressor drive belt from the idler pulley. Page 8291 Diagnosis Sensor Unit: Service and Repair Description CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - The special bolts are coated with bonding agent while the other bolt is for ground. Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new coated bolts. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation. Make sure that there are no deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If there are any visible signs of damage, replace with a new one. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure they are free of deformities and rust. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Removal Of Diagnosis Sensor Unit 1. Disconnect driver and passenger air bag module connectors. 2. Remove console box. 3. Disconnect air bag diagnosis sensor unit connector. 4. Remove bolts from air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Use TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T5O) to remove special bolts. 5. Remove the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. To install, reverse the removal procedure. After replacement, perform self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". CAUTION: Air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with forward mark "<=" pointing towards the front of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for cracks deformities and rust before installation and replace as required. Page 3786 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 871 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1795 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 5693 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5948 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CKPS-01 Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) (OBD) Circuit Diagrams Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 2604 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7942 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 2471 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5207 EGR Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EGR Temperature Sensor Check resistance change and resistance value. If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor. Page 1784 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 273 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4469 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Locations Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 3937 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3933 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 825 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2872 Throttle Full Close Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Closed Throttle Position Switch 1. tart engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector. 4. Check continuity between terminals (5) and (6) while opening throttle valve manually. If NG, replace throttle position switch. Page 8828 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 7668 2. Remove tie rod from knuckle arm with Tool. DISASSEMBLY Idler Arm Assembly - Apply coat of multi-purpose grease to bushing. - Press bushing into idler body, and insert shaft of idler bracket carefully until bushing protrudes. Relay Rod And Tie-Rod 1. When tie rod ball joints and tie rod bar are separated, adjust tie rod length correctly. NOTE: Adjustment should be done between ball stud centers. 2. Lock tie rod clamp nut so that ball joint on outer ball stud is as follows with respect to that on inner ball stud. Standard length "L" (2WD): 343.9 mm (13.54 inch) Page 6058 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4044 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4130 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 9413 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1401 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagrams Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 5544 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7563 The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. Page 1351 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. Page 6626 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5331 Page 3075 Ground Distribution Page 1025 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9464 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 995 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. it measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 5536 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3298 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7751 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 644 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6589 Without Scan Tools (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Perform test drive in "D" position (OD "ON") at least 20 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) (3) Stop the vehicle, turn ignition switch "OFF", wait at least 5 seconds and then turn "ON" (4) Perform "Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)" with ECM. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE COMPONENT INSPECTION Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve 1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3). Resistance: Approximately 25 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] 2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3) with battery voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be operated. 4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Service and Repair Parking Pawl: Service and Repair PARKING COMPONENTS INSPECTION 1. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. 2. Support A/T assembly with a jack. 3. Remove rear engine mounting member. 4. Remove rear extension from transmission case. 5. Replace parking components if necessary. 6. Reinstall any part removed. - Always use new sealing parts. Page 1105 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4637 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Specifications Page 5584 EC-AAC/V-01 Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve (DTC: P0505) Circuit Diagrams Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve (DTC: P0505) Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve Circuit Connectors Page 9253 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4505 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5415 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3025 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Specifications Power Steering Pressure Switch: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................................... .............................. 1.7 - 2.3 Nm (15 - 20 inch lbs.) Page 9257 Courtesy Lamp: Connector Views MODELS WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS Interior Room Lamp (Part 1 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp (Part 2 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp Circuit Connectors MODELS WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS Interior Room Lamp (Part 3 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp Circuit Connectors Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Page 1175 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 418 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 8599 Radio Voltages Radio Voltages Page 2377 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 9519 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4695 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2611 Ground Distribution Page 1574 5. Retighten the joint connection nut to 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb). CAUTION: Use a backup wrench on the low hose when tightening the joint connection nut. Low Hose Bracket Installation 1. Separate the two halves of the bracket by removing the screw. 2. Install the two halves of the bracket on the compressor end of the A/C low hose at the tube bend closest to the compressor flange (see Figure 6). NOTE: When installing the bracket, make sure the bracket half with the weld nut on the side points away from the engine. 3. Install and tighten the bracket screw to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb). Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Tires: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 3919 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications For FRONT or REAR Heated Oxygen Sensors. Resistance 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 77 deg F Page 8165 Page 5912 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Camshaft position sensor 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal (49) and ground, ECM terminal (44) or (48) and ground. If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sensor. Page 2387 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 1067 Throttle Full Close Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Closed Throttle Position Switch 1. tart engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector. 4. Check continuity between terminals (5) and (6) while opening throttle valve manually. If NG, replace throttle position switch. Page 3454 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7414 Fusible Link: Diagrams Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: ^ If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of problem. ^ Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 4515 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 5254 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2584 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4065 Ground Distribution Page 9183 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3358 Page 448 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3447 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9163 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 1156 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4615 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5425 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Testing and Inspection 1. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake manifold. 2. Plug intake manifold with a rubber cap. 3. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator. 4. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as vacuum is changed. Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator. Page 5600 Main Harness (Part 2 Of 2) Fuel Pump Relay Connector # M46 Page 3729 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 5903 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 160 Page 6017 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5613 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9457 Ground Distribution Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Universal Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 7376 Ignition Ballast Resistor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Resistor 1. Disconnect resistor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals (1) and (2). Resistance: Approximately 2.2 K Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] If NG, replace resistor. Page 7323 Slow Battery Charge CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the Nissan "Assurance Products Resource Manual" for battery claim procedures. Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ............................... 142 - 152 Nm (105 - 112 ft. lbs.) Page 8582 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3141 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6133 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3001 Ground Distribution Page 5027 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 9539 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Lights - Plastic Lens Isopropyl Alcohol Caution Body Emblem: Technical Service Bulletins Lights - Plastic Lens Isopropyl Alcohol Caution Classification: BF87-013 Reference: TS87-064 Date: April 20, 1987 ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL CAUTION ALL MODELS APPLIED VEHICLES(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Isopropyl alcohol solution used for general cleaning and for preparing the vehicle surface for graphics installation will cause the plastic lenses on turn signal lights, side marker lights, corning lights, tail lights, etc., to crack. Extreme care must be used to avoid all contact of isopropyl alcohol with any plastic lens (surface). ^ The isopropyl alcohol solution must not drip onto any plastic lens. ^ During cleaning of the vehicle, a wiping cloth soaked with alcohol solution must not contact any plastic lens. ^ During application of the urethane XE/SE Truck graphics, alcohol solution spray mist (used as the wetting solution) must not contact any plastic lens. Page 4918 Ground Distribution Page 2947 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PNP/SW-01 Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Circuit Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 3189 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Differential Carrier Gear Oil Rear: H190A ........................................................................................................................................ .............................................. 1.5 liters (3-1/8 pt) C200 .................................................................................................................................................... ................................... 1.3 liters (2-3/4 pt) Front (4WD):R180A ............................................................................................................................. ............................................. 1.3 liters (2-3/4 pt) Page 3354 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. 2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine side). 3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube. 4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. At idling: With vacuum hose connected Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm.sq, 34 psi) With vacuum hose disconnected Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm.sq, 43 psi) If results are unsatisfactory, perform "Fuel Pressure Regulator Check". Page 4687 11. Using CONSULT-II select ENGINE, DATA MONITOR (Manual trigger), Selections From Menu, CLSD THL/P SW, and Enter. 12. Stop engine (turn ignition switch "OFF"). 13. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least five seconds. 14. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least ten seconds. 15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for 1 to 16 times until CLSD THL/P SW in CONSULT-II changes to "ON". Page 708 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 3125 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-MAFS-01 Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Diagrams Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 6946 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3145 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7459 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4489 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 4626 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 9216 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5773 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1173 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4800 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications Mass Air Flow Table Mass Air Flow Table Supply Voltage 11 - 14 V Output Voltage 0.9 - 1.8 V At idle with engine warmed up and running under no load. Air Flow At Idle 0.9 - 5.8 g/sec Air Flow At 2,500 RPM 7.5 - 13.2 g/sec Page 4113 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3739 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4920 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 421 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7566 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Page 4599 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7892 Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Bearing Nut Torque SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload ................................................... ............................................................................................................ 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) Return Angle ................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 15 - 30° TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Lock Nut: Initial .................................................................................................................................................... ............................ 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Final ............................................................................ ............................................................................................ 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) Page 6413 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3000 Ground Distribution Page 3411 Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Gap Spark plug gap mm. 1.0-1.1 Spark plug gap in. 0.039-0.043 Page 8 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 2719 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4035 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 6649 1. Remove solenoids. a. Remove overdrive cancel solenoid valve and side plate from lower body. b. Remove O-ring from solenoid. c. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve from upper body. d. Remove O-ring from solenoid valve. 2. Disassemble upper and lower bodies. a. Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts, reamer bolts, side plate and support plates. b. Remove lower body and separator plate as a unit from upper body. - Be careful not to drop orifice check valve, spring and steel balls. c. Place lower body facedown, and remove separator plate. d. Remove orifice check valve and orifice check spring. e. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper body and side plate, then remove them from upper body. Page 3932 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3565 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 275 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 475 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Camshaft position sensor 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal (49) and ground, ECM terminal (44) or (48) and ground. If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sensor. Page 6134 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 280 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7582 Page 8085 To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under (not into) the pulley groove. - Remove the field coil harness clip using a screwdriver. - Remove the three field coil fixing screws and remove the field coil. INSTALLATION - Install the field coil. - Be sure to align the coil's pin with the hole in the compressor's front head. - Install the field coil harness clip using a screwdriver. - Install the pulley assembly using the installer and a hand press, and then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. - Install the drive plate on the drive shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the drive plate down by hand. Page 3914 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 8350 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 2754 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4340 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications Front SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload ................................................... ............................................................................................................ 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) Return Angle ................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 15 - 30° TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Lock Nut: Initial .................................................................................................................................................... ............................ 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Final ............................................................................ ............................................................................................ 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) Rear SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload [1] ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.9 - 48.1 Nm (1.5 - 10.8 lbs.) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Cage To Baffle Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 54 - 74 Nm (40 - 54 ft. lbs.) Bearing Lock Nut ........................................................................................................................................................... 245 - 294 Nm (181 - 217 ft. lbs.) [1]: At bearing cage bolt. Page 4398 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Connectors Page 5856 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4263 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1341 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 8081 Compressor Clutch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 2948 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4141 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3966 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The rear heated oxygen sensor (rear HO2S), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used for engine control operation. Page 9420 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4357 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Recall - Seat Back Handle Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 98-035 Date: 980416 Recall - Seat Back Handle Replacement Reference: NTB98-035 Date: April 16, 1998 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 1998 FRONTIER SEAT BACK HANDLE REPLACEMENT CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO: 98V-065 APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998 Frontier (D22) King Cab - Bucket Seat Only APPLIED VINs: 1NGDD2***WC300001 to WC341732 APPLIED DATES: SOP to January 28, 1998 INTRODUCTION In some 1998 Frontier King Cab trucks, certain types of frontal crashes may cause the front seat belt on either seat to slip between the seat bottom finisher and the seat back plastic recliner handle. If this occurs, the seat belt may be cut by the sharp edge of the metal portion of the recliner lever. If the seat belt is completely severed by this occurrence, it could increase the risk of injury to an occupant in a crash. Owners of affected Frontiers will be notified by mail to return to their Nissan dealer to have each seat back plastic recliner handle replaced with a new one with a different shape which prevents the seat belt from slipping between the seat bottom finisher and the seat back recliner handle. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number 98V-065 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this Campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED Approximately 23,500 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY The dealer is responsible for checking Service Comm for the Campaign status on every vehicle falling within the range of this campaign which enters the service department for any reason. This includes vehicles purchased from the dealer, vehicles purchased from another dealer, and vehicles purchased from private parties. Federal law requires that new vehicles in inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While this law only applies to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to also correct any used trucks in their inventory which fall within the range of this campaign prior to sale. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check Service Comm to verify that the procedure for this campaign has not already been performed. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface, turn OFF the ignition and set the parking brake. Page 81 Main Harness (Part 2 Of 2) Main Harness Layout Index Page 7397 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Diagram Information and Instructions Absolute Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 2988 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Checking Fluid Level Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Level Check fluid level engine off. Check fluid level referring to the scale on the dipstick. Use "HOT" range for fluid temperatures of 50 - 80° C (122 - 176° F). Use "COLD" range for fluid temperatures of 0 - 30° C (32 - 86° F). CAUTION: ^ Do not overfill. ^ Recommended fluid is Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) type Dexron III, or equivalent. Page 4301 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 5734 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Available Bearings, Clearance and ID Color Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 6967 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 5106 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 5816 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4795 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Specifications Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Switch Nut ........................................................................................................................................... ........................... 12 - 15 Nm (108 - 132 inch lbs.) Page 5648 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8411 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for this incident. Claims to Nissan for the repair of this incident may be denied if the repairs are not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. Service Procedure NOTE: DO NOT REPLACE the front driver's or passenger's seat belt assemblies before first using the Service Procedure in this bulletin to: ^ Replace the missing/broken retaining button(s), and ^ Clean the "D" rings and install the fluorine resin tape on both seat belt assemblies. Replace Missing/Broken Retaining Button 1. Make sure the seat belt is not 'twisted' by sitting in the seat and latching the seat belt. If the belt is twisted, correct this before beginning button replacement. 2. Determine the original retaining button position. CAUTION: It is important that the replacement button be positioned on the seat belt exactly where the original button was placed at the factory. Recall 98V065000: Seat Belt May Get Cut/Sliced Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 98V065000: Seat Belt May Get Cut/Sliced Year: 1998 Make: NISSAN TRUCK Model: FRONTIER Year of Recall: '98 Type of Report: Vehicle Potential Number of Units Affected: 20000 Summary: Vehicle Description: Light duty passenger trucks equipped with bucket seats. In certain frontal crashes, the front seat belt can slip between the seat bottom finisher and the seat back plastic recliner handle where it can be cut by the sharp edge of the metal portion of the recliner lever. If the seat belt is completely severed, it can increase the risk of serious injury to an occupant in a crash. Dealers will replace the plastic handle on the end of the seat back reclining lever with a different shape handle which will prevent the seat belt from slipping between the handle and the seat. Owner notification is expected to begin during April 1998. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Nissan at 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261). Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Page 5886 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 8228 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 4255 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9515 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 8347 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 863 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9204 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5830 Throttle Position Sensor: Connector Views Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 2391 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5651 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7023 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4187 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6082 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6613 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2296 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Diagrams EC-ECTS-01 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Circuit Diagrams Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 5765 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2543 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Testing and Inspection Control Assembly: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove A/C & Heat control. 2. Loosen illumination bulbs and wire and pull off. Page 5233 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5969 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4998 Page 1403 ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 425 Ground Distribution Page 4497 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4879 5. Install the new hose between the vent control valve and the metal breather tube (see Figure 5). 6. Reinstall the spare tire. 7. If equipped, reinstall the bedliner. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 8192 Comments regarding vacuum pump use: ^ The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the lubrication for R-134a A/C systems. ^ The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure, causing the vacuum pump lubricant to migrate out of the pump if the pump is switched oft after evacuation (vacuuming) and there is no shut off valve between the pump and the hose. ^ To prevent the migration of vacuum pump lubricant into service hoses, it is necessary to use a valve (which can be manually opened or closed) near the connection of the service hose to the pump. ^ On a vacuum pump which is equipped with an isolation valve (usually part of the vacuum pump), closing this valve will isolate the service hose from the pump. ^ For pumps without an isolation valve, be certain that the service hose is equipped with a manual shut off valve near the pump end of the hose. ^ Hoses which contain an automatic shut off valve at the end of the service hose must be disconnected from the vacuum pump to prevent the migration of lubricant; as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricant may migrate (with pump off). ^ One-way valves which open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition are not recommended, because this valve may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum. Page 2729 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 3813 Ground Distribution Page 4664 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2662 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transaxle housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis of misfire. Page 9428 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1793 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 3828 EC-AAC/V-01 Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve (DTC: P0505) Circuit Diagrams Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve (DTC: P0505) Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve Circuit Connectors Page 7394 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Specifications Page 4627 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Paint - Contamination Identification and Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 94-015 Date: 940208 Paint - Contamination Identification and Repair Classification: BF94-003 Reference: NTB94-O15 Date: February 8, 1994 PAINT CONTAMINATION IDENTIFICATION AND REPAIR This bulletin supersedes NTB93-058 / BF93-014 & NTB91-090 / BF91-023 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): ALL SERVICE INFORMATION The following procedures and materials have been found effective in removing iron particles, water or chemical spots, scratches and/or swirl marks which have not penetrated the clear coat/color coat of painted vehicle surfaces. NOTE: The updated repair procedures discussed in this Service Bulletin can be applied to all types of Nissan clear coat materials, including the new Cross Link clear coat (NCLC)/hard clear coat. *NOTE: Measure the paint thickness before and after abrasive cleaning. If abrasive repair is not successful on the first panel tested, it must be tried on each affected panel (hood, roof, trunk etc.,) to determine which panel(s) must be re-clear coated or re-color/clear coated and which may be repaired by abrasive means. Finish Kare Product Distributors: 1726 Floradale Ave., El Monte, CA 91733 (213) 686-0462 Page 1440 PROCEDURE Before checking front wheel alignment, make a preliminary unladen inspection. Unladed is fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION 1. Check tires for wear and proper inflation. Page 109 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 6405 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1907 Page 5252 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5234 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 9133 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4324 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7038 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 8952 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation MODELS WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS The warning chime is integral with the smart entrance control unit, which controls its operation. Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [28], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to key switch terminal (1). Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 10 A fuse (No. [39], located in the fuse and fusible link box) ^ to lighting switch terminal (11). Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 30 A fusible link (letter [f], located in the fuse and fusible link box) ^ to circuit breaker terminal (1) ^ through circuit breaker terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (1). With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [5], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (11). Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal (10) through body grounds (M14) and (M68). When a signal, or combination of signals, is received by the smart entrance control unit, the warning chime will sound. Ignition key warning chime With the key in the ignition key cylinder, the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position, and the driver's door open, the warning chime will sound. A battery positive voltage is supplied: ^ from key switch terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (24). Ground is supplied: ^ from door switch LH terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (15). Door switch LH terminal (3) is grounded through body grounds (M14) and (M68) Light warning chime With ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position, driver's door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, the warning chime will sound. A battery positive voltage is supplied: ^ from lighting switch terminal (12) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (25). Ground is supplied: ^ from door switch LH terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (15). Door switch LH terminal (3) is grounded through body grounds (M14) and (M68). Seat belt warning chime The warning chime sounds for about 6 seconds when ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON and seat belt is unfastened. Ground is supplied: ^ from seat belt buckle switch terminal (1) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (21). Seat belt buckle switch terminal (2) is grounded through body grounds (M14) and (M68). MODELS WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS The warning chime is integral with the warning chime unit, which controls its operation. Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [28], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to key switch terminal (1). Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 10 A fuse (No. [39], located in the fuse and fusible link box) ^ to lighting switch terminal (11). Page 2286 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5539 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3651 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 1259 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3826 Idle Up Control Valve: Electrical Diagrams Idle Air CTRL Valve (IACV)-FICD Solenoid Valve EC-FICD-01 IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve Circuit Diagrams IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Page 3105 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2985 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 6286 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1810 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT Adjust wheel bearing preload after wheel bearing has been replaced or front axle has been reassembled. Adjust wheel bearing preload as follows: 1. Before adjustment, thoroughly clean all parts to prevent dirt entry. 2. Apply multi-purpose grease sparingly to the following parts: - Threaded portion of spindle - Contact surface between wheel bearing washer and outer wheel bearing - Grease seal lip - Wheel hub 18 - 23 grams (0.63 - 0.81 ounce) 3. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.). 4. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions. 5. Loosen wheel bearing lock nut so that torque becomes 0 Nm (0 ft. lbs.). 6. Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.). 7. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions. 8. Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool to 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.). 9. Measure wheel bearing axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) Page 4819 customer should then replace with another set of platinum tip plugs rather than the standard plugs called out in the owners manual. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding table shown. Page 8298 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Lock Cylinder Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Lock Cylinder REMOVAL Passenger Air Bag Module Deactivation Switch Lock Cylinder CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 1. Detach instrument stay cover lower center from instrument panel. 2. Disconnect passenger air bag deactivation switch harness connector and cigarette lighter harness connector 3. Remove instrument stay cover lower center. 4. Remove four screws and housing from instrument stay cover lower center. 5. Remove clip from bottom of housing. 6. Remove passenger air bag deactivation switch lock cylinder from front of housing. INSTALLATION NOTE: Be sure that passenger air bag deactivation switch and lock cylinder are in the same position as during removal for proper engagement. To install, reverse removal procedure. After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 4702 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7869 Page 2544 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 834 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position switch is "ON". ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. Page 5121 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 8729 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5922 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3017 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM. Page 1722 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2677 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4962 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5817 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 1194 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 674 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Page 4614 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4714 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1029 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TFTS-01 Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Circuit Diagrams Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 774 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7064 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 637 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 506 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9171 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 7795 Standard length "L" (4WD): 297.6 mm (11.72 inch) CAUTION: Make sure that tie rod bars are screwed into tie rod tube more than 29 mm (1.14 inch) (2WD), 22 mm (0.87 inch) (4WD). INSPECTION Ball Joint And Swivel Joint 1. Check joints for play. If ball or swivel stud is worn and play in axial direction is excessive or joint is hard to swing, replace as a complete unit. Swinging force (Measure point: Cotter pin hole) "A": Ball joint: 15.7 - 147.1 N (3.5 - 33.1 lbs.) Rotating torque "B": Ball joint: 0.5 - 4.9 Nm (4.3 - 43.4 inch lbs.) Swivel joint: 1.0 - 5.9 Nm (8.7 - 52.1 inch lbs.) Axial end play "C": Ball joint: 0 mm (0 inch) Swivel joint: 0 mm (0 inch) 2. Check condition of dust cover. If it is cracked excessively replace dust cover. When replacing dust cover, be careful not to damage it. 3. Lubricate joint with multi-purpose grease, if necessary. 4. When installing boot band with commercial service tool, be careful not to overexpand it. CAUTION: Be careful not to apply grease or oil to taper of joint. Idler Arm Assembly - Check rubber bushing of idler arm for breakage, wear or play, and if necessary replace. - Lubricate idler arm assembly with multi-purpose grease, if necessary. Relay Rod And Tie-Rod - Check tie rod and relay rod for breakage, bends or cracks, and replace with a new one if necessary. Steering Damper - Check for oil leaking from damper, and replace if necessary. Fixing Location - Check fixing location (nuts and cotter pins) for looseness, play or breakage. - When looseness or play is found, check for wear on tapered portion of joints, gear arm of idler arm. - When reassembling each joint, use new cotter pins. Page 9151 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): Customer Interest Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 5159 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4924 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5399 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2416 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) General Procedures Steering Gear: Service and Repair General Procedures PRECAUTIONS FOR STEERING SYSTEM - Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit. - Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. - For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack. - Use nylon cloths or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might interfere with their operation. - Before inspection or reassembly, carefully clean all parts with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent. - Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) type Dexron III, or equivalent, to hydraulic parts. Petroleum jelly may be applied to O-rings and seals. Do not use any grease. - Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. Avoid damaging O-rings, seals and gaskets during installation. Perform functional tests whenever designated. Page 7690 2. Remove tie rod from knuckle arm with Tool. DISASSEMBLY Idler Arm Assembly - Apply coat of multi-purpose grease to bushing. - Press bushing into idler body, and insert shaft of idler bracket carefully until bushing protrudes. Relay Rod And Tie-Rod 1. When tie rod ball joints and tie rod bar are separated, adjust tie rod length correctly. NOTE: Adjustment should be done between ball stud centers. 2. Lock tie rod clamp nut so that ball joint on outer ball stud is as follows with respect to that on inner ball stud. Standard length "L" (2WD): 343.9 mm (13.54 inch) Page 6502 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 3183 Ground Distribution Page 647 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5862 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5578 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3257 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4332 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 6291 Ground Distribution Page 3507 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 157 Page 4327 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4247 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5360 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3716 Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7211 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 8560 ^ Customers must not use CDs that are warped, scratched, have abnormal edges or are otherwise damaged (see Figure 3). Damaged CDs may cause the internal CD mechanism to jam or have optical pick-up errors. ^ Customers must not use CDs if the label is loose or peeling as this can jam the audio CD system. ^ Instruct the customer to handle CDs carefully when inserting/removing them from the audio CD system. Hold them by the edges and do not bend them. Always place them in the storage case when they are not being used (played). This will ensure that CDs stay in top working order. ^ Inform the customer that additional CD care and cleaning instructions may be found in all Nissan Owner's Manuals. Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Resistance 166.5 - 302.5 ohms at 68 deg F Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair DISARMING AIR BAGS 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 2. Disconnect Air Bag Module connector. CAUTION: For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any air bag system connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. CAUTION: Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or on the complete harness, for easy identification. ARMING AIR BAGS 1. Connect Air Bag Module connector. 2. Connect both battery cables. 3. Conduct Self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to Testing and Inspection / Self-Diagnostic Procedures. Page 3988 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6323 Page 3450 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1908 Cylinder Block Components Page 6365 Ground Distribution Page 3226 Ground Distribution Page 4040 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 3348 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. * Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8867 3. Open the driver's side door and locate the Seat Back Recline Control Handle at the side of the driver's seat (see Figure 1) 4. Remove the screw that retains the handle and save it for reuse. 5. Remove the old handle. 6. Install the replacement handle and secure with the original screw. 7. Open the passenger's side door and locate the Seat back Recline Control Handle at the side of the passenger's seat. 8. Repeat steps 4 through 6 above. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table shown. Page 3464 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3852 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3841 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 1046 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4983 3. Directly above this 25 mm hole, drill one 8 mm (0.31 in.) hole in the inside edge of the vehicle bed rail (see Figure 3). 4. Deburr both drilled holes and coat the bare metal surfaces with an anti-corrosive paint. 5. Install the rubber grommet (from the kit) into the 25 mm drilled hole. 6. Install the metal breather tube into the grommet and fasten the upper plastic bracket to the bed rail through the 8 mm drilled hole with the bolt and nut from the kit (see Figure 4). Installation of the EVAP System 1. Install the EVAP canister. 2. Install the EVAP vent control valve. 3. Reconnect the two small diameter original hoses to the canister. 4. Reconnect the vent control valve electrical harness. Page 7336 Battery: Service and Repair Sulphation A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended for a long time and the specific gravity becomes less than 1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates. To determine if a battery has been "sulphated", note its voltage and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging sulphated batteries. A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test. Page 3540 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 7247 1. Place master cylinder onto brake booster and secure mounting nuts lightly. 2. Tighten mounting nuts to 12 - 15 Nm (9 - 11 ft. lbs.) 3. Fill up reservoir tank with new brake fluid. 4. Plug all ports on master cylinder with fingers to prevent air suction while releasing brake pedal. 5. Have driver depress brake pedal slowly several times until no air comes out of master cylinder. 6. Fit brake lines to master cylinder. 7. Tighten flare nuts to 12 - 15 Nm (9 - 11 ft. lbs.). 8. Bleed air from brake system. Page 1161 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7598 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 3267 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5972 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 9170 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5655 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3585 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3009 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 780 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7666 Page 6890 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Axle Bearing (Rear) - Removal Kit/Service Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 01-031 Date: 010618 Axle Bearing (Rear) - Removal Kit/Service Procedure Classification: TE01-008 Reference: NTB01-031 Date: June 18, 2001 ESSENTIAL TOOL: REAR AXLE BEARING REMOVAL KIT APPLIED VEHICLES: 1986.5-1995 Pathfinder (WD21) 1996-2001 Pathfinder (R50) 1986.5-1997 Truck (D21) 1998-2001 Frontier (D22) 2000-2001 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION Page 2710 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 70 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 3880 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 466 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2529 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Front Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed- end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. Page 3339 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4220 Ground Distribution Page 4027 Attachment General Procedure Page 3522 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 884 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4794 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3486 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 7669 Standard length "L" (4WD): 297.6 mm (11.72 inch) CAUTION: Make sure that tie rod bars are screwed into tie rod tube more than 29 mm (1.14 inch) (2WD), 22 mm (0.87 inch) (4WD). INSPECTION Ball Joint And Swivel Joint 1. Check joints for play. If ball or swivel stud is worn and play in axial direction is excessive or joint is hard to swing, replace as a complete unit. Swinging force (Measure point: Cotter pin hole) "A": Ball joint: 15.7 - 147.1 N (3.5 - 33.1 lbs.) Rotating torque "B": Ball joint: 0.5 - 4.9 Nm (4.3 - 43.4 inch lbs.) Swivel joint: 1.0 - 5.9 Nm (8.7 - 52.1 inch lbs.) Axial end play "C": Ball joint: 0 mm (0 inch) Swivel joint: 0 mm (0 inch) 2. Check condition of dust cover. If it is cracked excessively replace dust cover. When replacing dust cover, be careful not to damage it. 3. Lubricate joint with multi-purpose grease, if necessary. 4. When installing boot band with commercial service tool, be careful not to overexpand it. CAUTION: Be careful not to apply grease or oil to taper of joint. Idler Arm Assembly - Check rubber bushing of idler arm for breakage, wear or play, and if necessary replace. - Lubricate idler arm assembly with multi-purpose grease, if necessary. Relay Rod And Tie-Rod - Check tie rod and relay rod for breakage, bends or cracks, and replace with a new one if necessary. Steering Damper - Check for oil leaking from damper, and replace if necessary. Fixing Location - Check fixing location (nuts and cotter pins) for looseness, play or breakage. - When looseness or play is found, check for wear on tapered portion of joints, gear arm of idler arm. - When reassembling each joint, use new cotter pins. Page 1935 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Block. Page 3878 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4140 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2360 Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8082 Inspection Flow Page 794 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3640 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 2324 customer should then replace with another set of platinum tip plugs rather than the standard plugs called out in the owners manual. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding table shown. Page 969 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4197 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor is a basic component of the ECCS. it monitors engine speed and piston position. These input signals to the ECM are used to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other functions. The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-forming circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for a 1° (POS) signal and 4 slits for a 180° (REF) signal. The wave-forming circuit consists of Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes. The rotor plate is positioned between the LED and the photo diode. The LED transmits light to the photo diode. As the rotor plate turns, the slits cut the light to generate rough-shaped pulses. These pulses are converted into on-off signals by the wave-forming circuit and sent to the ECM. The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an assembly except distributor cap. Page 2808 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4198 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Camshaft position sensor 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal (49) and ground, ECM terminal (44) or (48) and ground. If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sensor. Page 8702 B. Insert and remove the ignition key more than 6 times within a 10 second period (at a rate of one insertion/removal cycle per second). The key should be withdrawn from the ignition key cylinder completely each time it is removed. NOTE: Do not rush the insertion/removal key cycling process. The side marker/tail/license lamps and interior illumination will flash twice when this step is accurately completed. C. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. The ignition key should remain in the "ACC" position throughout the remainder of the programming, including programming of additional remote controllers. D. Press any button on the remote controller one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The side marker/tail/license lamps and interior illumination will flash twice when this step is accurately completed and programming is successful. E. If you are programming only one remote, proceed to step 3A. If programming additional remotes, continue with step 2A, below. 2. Programming Additional Remote Controllers (Maximum of 4 Remotes): A. Remain inside the vehicle after programming the first remote. B. Use the driver's power door lock-unlock switch to unlock and then lock the doors. C. Press any button on one of the additional remote controllers one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The side marker/tail/license lamps and interior illumination will flash twice when this step is accurately completed and programming is successful. If there is more than one additional remote to be programmed, repeat steps 2A through 2C above for each additional remote. 3. End Programming: A. Remove the key from the ignition. B. Use the door lock-unlock switch on the driver's door to unlock the doors. Open the driver's door to complete the programming. C. Check the operation of each of the remote controllers by locking/unlocking the doors with each of the remote controllers you have programmed. Page 2689 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4639 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1458 Page 8749 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5900 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 8570 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications PRESSURE PRESSURE Fuel pressure with vacuum hose connected 235 kpa (34 psi) Fuel pressure with vacuum hose disconnected 294 kpa (43 psi) Page 7179 Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection - Contact surface should be finished with No. 120 to 150 emery sandpaper. - Maximum inner diameter: 296.5 mm (11.67 inch) - Using a brake lathe, machine brake drum if it shows score marks, partial wear or stepped wear. - After brake drum has been completely reconditioned or replaced, check drum and shoes for proper contact pattern. Page 2000 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 6957 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9373 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 8743 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4068 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6128 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5470 ^ Some 2002 models use a new type EVAP System Pressure Sensor with different operational characteristics. ^ Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual to determine which type sensor your vehicle is equipped with. ^ Models that use the new type EVAP System Pressure Sensor will have a voltage reading that varies with changes in the "barometric" pressure (atmospheric air pressure that changes with altitude and/or weather conditions). ^ The usual voltage range obtained in step 4 with the new type EVAP System Pressure Sensor is between 3.8 and 4.2 volts. Because this range will vary with barometric pressure, it is best to compare readings with a known good vehicle. ^ Some 2002 models use the earlier type EVAP System Pressure Sensor (same as used on 2001 and earlier models). The normal range for the earlier type is 3.32 to 3.40 volts and does not vary with barometric pressure. 5. Start the engine. Observe the EVAP System Pressure Sensor voltage. ^ If the value has reduced 0.04 volts or more from the reading obtained in step 4, the EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve may be leaking. ^ Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for inspection procedures of the EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve, DTC P1444. NOTE: The EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve is located in the engine compartment. 6. Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P1491. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for confirmation procedure steps and driving conditions. 7. If the DTC confirmation results are NG, do the following: a. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual to determine if the vehicle is equipped with On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR). ^ If the vehicle has ORVR, go to b. ^ If the vehicle does NOT have ORVR, go to step 8. b. Place a clamp on the Refueling EVAP Vapor Line near the fuel tank. The Refueling EVAP Vapor Line is the larger hose (see figure 2). Use hose clamp (3M P/N # 08556-1), found in Fuel Injector Cleaning Kit J-45701, or equivalent. c. Retry DTC Confirmation Procedure d. If the result is now OK, the Refueling Control Valve may be leaking and should be inspected. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Page 4288 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 8003 Axle Nut: Service and Repair Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Auto Lock Knob ................................................................................................................................... .................................. 25 - 34 Nm (18 - 25 ft. lbs.) Lock Washer Screw .................................................................................................................................................... 1.2 1.8 Nm (10.4 - 15.7 inch lbs.) Manual Lock Knob ............................................................................... ................................................................................. 25 - 34 Nm (18 - 25 ft. lbs.) Page 4963 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Fluid Type Nissan Brake Fluid or DOT 3 Page 4499 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 7547 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Page 2513 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5641 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. it measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 7458 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 282 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 9157 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger With Consult 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". OR Without Consult 1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and reconnect fuel pump fuse. Locations Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 701 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4350 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 156 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 2767 Ground Distribution EVAP Vent Control Valve - DTC'S Stored in Memory Canister Vent Valve: Technical Service Bulletins EVAP Vent Control Valve - DTC'S Stored in Memory Classification: EC00-015 Reference: NTB00-060 Date: July 17, 2000 EVAP VENT CONTROL VALVE DIAGNOSTICS APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - later Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle has one (or more) of the following DTCs stored in Self Diagnosis, use the Service Procedure below to check the operation of the EVAP vent control valve. IMPORTANT NOTES: ^ If DTC(s) other than the ones listed are found stored in Self Diagnosis, the EVAP vent control valve is NOT the cause of the incident. ^ If the EVAP vent control valve passes the tests outlined in the following Service Procedure, the cause of the incident is NOT the EVAP vent control valve. SERVICE PROCEDURE Perform the following checks (depending on the model year of the vehicle) to determine if the EVAP vent control valve needs to be replaced. ^ If the EVAP vent control valve asses all of the following checks, the cause of the incident is NOT the EVAP vent control valve. Refer to the appropriate section of the service manual for the diagnostic procedure to resolve the incident. ^ If the EVAP vent control valve does not pass all of the following checks, perform repairs as necessary. 1996-97 Vehicles 1. Check the operation of the EVAP vent control valve using a 12VDC battery source as follows: Page 5622 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6643 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position switch is "ON". ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. MIL ON - DTC P0420 Set/Exhaust Rattle Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins MIL ON - DTC P0420 Set/Exhaust Rattle Classification: EC00-017 Reference: NTB00-058 Date: July 12, 2000 1998 FRONTIER; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0420 STORED AND/OR EXHAUST RATTLE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998 Frontier (D22) Federal Emissions Specification ONLY APPLIED VIN: up to 1N6DD26Y9WC347717 APPLIED DATE: up to 2/13/98 APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a MIL "ON" with DTC P0420 (Three-Way Catalyst Function) stored in the ECM and/or exhaust rattle noise, the vehicle may have poor three-way catalyst function. This is usually the result of misfire. In severe cases, the catalyst structure may collapse resulting in an exhaust rattle. When proper diagnosis confirms that the three-way catalyst in an Applied Vehicle requires replacement, regardless of the root cause, also install platinum tip spark plugs specified in the Parts Information section. Platinum tip plugs provide enhanced misfire resistance under extreme driving conditions. Use the following service procedure to resolve the incident, should it occur. NOTE: If the three-way catalyst's honeycomb internal structure has collapsed, the debris will typically be trapped in the exhaust piping and muffler, causing an exhaust rattle. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Perform Self-Diagnosis using CONSULT-II. Print and attach the Freeze Frame data to the repair order. 2. If there is a DTC stored in addition to P0420, diagnose and repair the additional DTC(s) first, using the appropriate Service Manual procedure(s). 3. After diagnosing and repairing the vehicle for the non-P0420 DTC, or if P0420 is the only DTC, use the appropriate Service Manual to determine the incident cause, and repair it. NOTE: Always check the secondary ignition circuit. Check distributor cap for moisture, tracking or other indicators of insulator degradation that may cause a misfire under load. 4. If diagnosis has determined that replacement of the three-way catalyst is also necessary, replace it and install four new platinum tip spark plugs from the Parts Information section. NOTE: If the catalyst is being replaced, inspect its internal honeycomb structure by looking into each end of the converter. If the structure has collapsed or deteriorated severely, check the exhaust piping and muffler for debris. Remove all debris from the exhaust system. Replace the muffler as needed. 5. Make a note in the vehicle maintenance logs and notify the customer that platinum tip spark plugs have been installed, and that this is an upgrade from that listed in the owners manual. The maintenance interval for platinum tip spark plugs is 60,000 miles and Nissan recommends that the Page 3926 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1456 Page 4082 Page 6045 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4755 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PNP/SW-01 Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Circuit Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Specifications Page 7068 Ground Distribution Page 9518 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3742 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3940 Ground Distribution Page 4969 Canister Vent Valve: Connector Views Evaporation Emission Canister Vent Control Valve (EVAP) (Circuit) (DTC: P0446) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Control Valve (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 2088 Timing Chain: Diagrams PART 1 OF 2 Page 6615 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 9173 Ground Distribution Page 3511 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1120 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7028 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6539 13. Remove the shifter assembly by sliding it backward, then down slightly, then forward (see Figure 9). 14. Apply white grease to the end of the main tube and install the new shifter assembly by inserting the main tube over the knob at the top of the steering column bracket (see Figure 9). CAUTION: DO NOT get white grease on the interior upholstery. 15. Install the (2) grade 7 bolts (identified by the 7 on the head) to attach the A" control device to the steering column (refer to Figure 8). Bolt torque specification: 64 to 80 in/lb (0.86 to 1.10 kg/m). 16. Check to make sure no wires are pinched or trapped between the shifter assembly and the steering column. 17. Connect the All cable to the A/T shifter assembly (refer to Figure 7). 18. Connect the brake pedal interlock solenoid harness located under the steering column assembly (refer to Figure 6). 19. Connect the key lock rod from the All shifter assembly and insert the pin clip (refer to Figure 5). 20. Install the spring clip from the parts kit onto the A/T shifter assembly (see Figure 10). 21. Apply white grease to the pivot end and shaft of the shift lever and install it into the A/T shifter assembly. Insert the clevis pin from the steering column side to secure the lever and then install the pin clip. Secure the O/D switch wire to the main tube with the tie wrap from the parts kit and reposition the rubber boot over the lever connector. Ensure the O/D switch wire is routed through the notch on the boot (refer to Figures 4 & 5). CAUTION: DO NOT get white grease on the interior upholstery. 22. Connect the O/D switch wire connector (on the top of the steering column) and install it on the mounting bracket (refer to Figure 4). If the bracket was broken during removal, use a tie wrap (not provided) to secure the overdrive switch wire connector to the steering column. Ensure that it does not rattle. Page 1039 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3178 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5454 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 5867 Ignition Ballast Resistor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3532 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IATS-01 Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Circuit Diagrams Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 3707 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 6278 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 9512 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6189 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1127 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 3733 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 9172 Ground Distribution Page 2129 Page 2499 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4194 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5672 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Specifications Page 6629 Ground Distribution Page 9380 EL-DTRL-01 Headlamp Wiring Diagram (For Canada) (Part 1 Of 3) Page 6954 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6910 Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Carrier Gear Oil Standard differential gear .................................................................................................................... ............................................................. API GL-5 Limited-slip differential gear LSD) .......................... ...................................................................................................................................... *API GL-5 *Note: Use only LSD gear oil API GL-5 and SAE 80W-90 approved for Nissan LSD. SAE 90 is acceptable in ambient temperatures above -18°C (0° F). Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): Customer Interest Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 6980 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Specified Type: a)Nissan Matic "D" or equivalent Automatic Transmission Fluid [1] b)API GL-4 [2] [1]Dexron III/Mercon or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an Infiniti dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of Dexron III/Mercon Automatic Transmission Fluid. [2]Specified viscosity at ambient temperature ranges: Below 10°C (50°F) ............................................................................................................................... ................................................................. SAE 75W Below 30°C (86°F) ............................................ .................................................................................................................................................... SAE 80W Below 40°C 104°F) ..................................................................................................................... ............................................... SAE 75W-90/SAE 80W-90 Between 30°C (86°F) and -10°C (14°F) ... ............................................................................................................................................................. SAE 85W Between 40°C (104°F) and 0°C (32°F) ............................................................................... ...................................................................................... SAE 90 Above 10°C (50°F) .......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......... SAE 140 NOTE: 75W-90 is preferable for ambient temperatures below 40°C (104°F) Page 7134 1. Insert piston seal into groove on cylinder body. 2. With piston boot fitted to piston, insert piston boot into groove on cylinder body and install piston. 3. Properly secure piston boot. CAUTION: ^ Secure dust seal properly. ^ Lubricate with new brake fluid before installing plastic pistons into cylinder body. Page 202 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5033 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Ignition - Distributor Rotor Replacement Ignition Rotor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Distributor Rotor Replacement Classification: EC97-002a Reference: NTB97-004a Date: May 19, 1999 DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR REPLACEMENT This amended version of NTB97-004 adds B14, D21, WD22, and L30 information to the Applied Vehicles section. Please discard all paper copies of NTB97-004. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1995-1999 Sentra (B14) - GA16DE Engine only 1995-1998 200SX (B14) GA16DE Engine only 1990-97 Truck (D21) - KA24 Engines only 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) KA24DE Engine only 1998-2000 Altima (L30) - All 2000 Xterra (WD22) - KA24DE Engine only SERVICE INFORMATION Distributor rotors are now available as replacement parts for the vehicles listed in the Applied Vehicles section of this bulletin. Order them as P/N 22157-4B000. CAUTION: The rotor hold-down screw securing the distributor rotor to the distributor shaft must be torqued to 32 +/- 3 in-lb (37 +/- 3 kg-cm). If not secured to the proper torque the rotor may come loose causing the engine to stop without warning. PARTS INFORMATION Page 6097 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9241 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7571 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4444 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch 1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine. 2. Check continuity between terminal (1) and ground. If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch. Page 131 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2667 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 4315 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Audio - Front Door Speaker Buzz Noise Speaker: Customer Interest Audio - Front Door Speaker Buzz Noise Classification: EL98-002 Reference: NTB98-031 Date: April 15, 1998 1998 FRONTIER DOOR SPEAKER "BUZZ" NOISE REPAIR APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1998 Frontier (with factory installed audio system) SERVICE INFORMATION If a 1998 Frontier exhibits a "buzz" noise at the door speakers when the radio volume is increased, use the following service procedure to minimize or eliminate the "buzz" noise. Note: Apply the service procedure listed below to both doors. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front door finisher. 2. Remove the speaker assembly from the door (see Figure 1). Page 610 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4521 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: If both DTC P0120 (0403) and DTC P0510 (0203) are displayed, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510 first. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch", which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. Page 3629 Ground Distribution Page 6564 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1651 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage Check lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm. NOTE: Make sure temperature of fluid in reservoir tank rises to 60 - 80° C (140 - 176° F). 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel at lock position for more than 15 seconds. 4. If fluid leakage from any line is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten. CAUTION: Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from power steering pump is noticed, check power steering pump. 6. If fluid leakage from power steering gear is noticed, check power steering gear. Engine - Timing Chain/Front Cover Revised Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 98-094 Date: 981115 Engine - Timing Chain/Front Cover Revised Procedure Classification: EM98-006 Reference: NTB98-094 Date: November 15, 1998 FRONTIER TIMING CHAIN/FRONT COVER REVISED SERVICE PROCEDURE APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the "Revision B" pages of the Nissan "1992-1999 Warranty Flat Rate Information Manual", Section "AG", Op Codes AG14AA, AG143A, AG144A, AG22AA, and AG24AA. You will note that the descriptions and Flat Rate Times applicable to the D22 vehicle for these Op Codes have been revised to reflect this new procedure. Also note that Op Codes AG5OAA and AG504A have been deleted. Service Information A revised service procedure for the engine front cover/timing chain has been adopted for the KA24DE. It is no longer recommended to remove the cylinder head when removing the timing chain/front cover(s). Utilize the following steps when servicing the front cover, timing chain, guides or tensioner(s). Caution ^ After removing the timing chain, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately or the valves will strike the piston heads. ^ When installing chain tensioners or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. ^ Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing the camshaft sprockets and the crankshaft pulley. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belts. ^ Please refer to the Service Manual for the correct tightening torque. Removal of Upper Timing Chain 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly, 2. Remove the spark plug wires. 3. Set # 1 piston at TDC on its compression stroke. 4. Remove vacuum hoses, electrical harness, connectors, and harness clamps. 5. Remove the power steering belt. 6. Remove the power steering pump and position it to the side. Remove the idler pulley and bracket as well. 7. Remove the rocker cover. 8. Remove camshaft sprocket cover. Page 3049 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2457 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT INSPECTION Front heated oxygen sensor With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Select "MANU TRIG" and "HI SPEED" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT, and select "FR O2 SENSOR" and "FR O2 MNTR". (3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. (4) Touch "RECORD" on CONSULT screen. (5) Check the following. - "FR O2 MNTR" in "DATA MONITOR" mode changes from "RICH" to "LEAN" to "RICH" 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: cycle | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | FR O2 MNTR R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R R = "FR O2 MNTR", "RICH" L = "FR O2 MNTR", "LEAN" - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage goes below 0.35V at least once. - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage never exceeds 1.0V. OR Without CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals (50) (sensor signal) and (32) (ECM ground). (3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. - Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR). - The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. - The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time. - The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. Page 3942 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Disc Backing Plate Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Disc Backing Plate TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Baffle Plate To Knuckle ............................................................................................................................................. 3.4 - 5.9 Nm (30.4 - 52.2 inch lbs.) Page 8402 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 655 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 905 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4157 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 952 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 538 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2396 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Locations Neutral Start Relay (Inhibitor Relay): Locations Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 2554 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. it measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 8191 Comments regarding R-134a manifold gauge set: ^ Be certain that the gauge face indicates R134a or 134a. ^ Be certain that the manifold gauge set has the 1/2" - 16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses, ensuring that only R-134a service hoses are used. ^ Be certain that no refrigerants other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricants) are used with the manifold gauge set. Page 7368 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 7213 Page 2971 Page 5791 Throttle Full Close Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Closed Throttle Position Switch 1. tart engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector. 4. Check continuity between terminals (5) and (6) while opening throttle valve manually. If NG, replace throttle position switch. Page 946 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 4221 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9434 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams EL-TAIL/L-01 Parking, License, And Tail Lamps Wiring Diagram (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2150 Page 6641 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PNP/SW-01 Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Circuit Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 3054 EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passage way. When the EGR valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passage way changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. Page 4120 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 1723 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4608 Control Units/Module F29 Control Units/Module Page 9360 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2821 Ground Distribution Page 8413 3. Slide the seat belt latch plate to a position higher than the button position (i.e., between the button location and the shoulder anchor loop). See Figure 2. 4. Find the original button position (hole). Then insert the button half (with the center pin) into the belt. Go in from the plastic side of the latch plate (see Figure 2). 5. On the opposite side of the belt (on the metal side of the latch plate) fit the button half with the hole over the protruding pin (see Figure 2 & 3). 6. Use an adjustable wrench with smooth jaws. Place it as shown in Figure 4, then finger tighten the jaws. Page 9465 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5589 - Check plunger for seizing or sticking. - Check for broken spring. Page 6322 Page 4389 Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Connectors Page 2307 Water Pump: Service and Repair CAUTION: When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belts. - Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. - After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester. REMOVAL 1. Drain coolant from engine. 2. Remove fan coupling with fan. 3. Remove power steering pump drive belt, generator drive belt and A/C compressor drive belt. 4. Remove water pump. INSPECTION - Check body assembly for rust or corrosion. - Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. INSTALLATION 1. Use a scraper to remove liquid gasket from water pump. - Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block. Page 4180 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 8734 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 124 Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 6478 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5203 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5072 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Specifications Pitman Arm: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Nut: At Relay Rod ....................................................................................................................................... ............................. 54 - 98 Nm (40 - 72 ft. lbs.) At Steering Gear ....................................................................................................................................................... 235 - 265 Nm (174 - 195 ft. lbs.) Page 5342 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1079 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5333 Overall inspection sequence Page 7637 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5014 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 5067 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7744 Ground Distribution Page 192 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1349 Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander Page 5694 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5570 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7574 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. Page 2231 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2373 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 5634 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6198 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Speedometer Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 5215 EGR Valve: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EGR Valve - Apply vacuum to EGR vacuum port with a hand vacuum pump. EGR valve spring should lift. - Check for sticking. If NG, repair or replace EGR valve. Page 745 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 6298 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 599 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 8850 3. Install one-inch squares of 1/4-inch-thick, adhesive-backed foam tape (3M Scotch-foam" 4504 # 021200-03320 or equivalent) to the headliner panel near the sunroof opening. Place the one-inch squares every five inches around the sunroof opening, 1/8 inch from the edge of the headliner panel (see Figure 5). 4. Reinstall the sunroof weather strip. 5. Reinstall the sunroof panel and inner shade panel. 6. Road test the vehicle to confirm the incident noise is resolved. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 278 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): Customer Interest Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 5767 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6421 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-LKPU-01 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Circuit Diagrams Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Page 9556 Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5685 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2686 Ground Distribution Page 5936 Ground Distribution Page 415 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 6235 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6383 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve 1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3). Resistance: Approximately 25 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] 2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3) with battery voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be operated. 4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve 1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly. 2. Check torque converter clutch control valve. - Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. - Valve, and sleeve are tree from burrs, dents and scratches. - Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. - Hydraulic line is tree from obstacles. 3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve. Page 6304 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PNP/SW-01 Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Circuit Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 397 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4364 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 1286 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch 1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine. 2. Check continuity between terminal (1) and ground. If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch. Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7071 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 1143 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CMPS-01 Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Circuit Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 5144 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 7556 Page 7617 PROCEDURE Before checking front wheel alignment, make a preliminary unladen inspection. Unladed is fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION 1. Check tires for wear and proper inflation. Page 1852 - Remove bearing outer races with suitable brass bar. INSPECTION Thoroughly clean wheel bearings and wheel hub. Wheel Bearings Make sure wheel bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Wheel Hub Check wheel hub for cracks by using a magnetic exploration or dyeing test. ASSEMBLY 1. Install bearing outer race with Tool until it seats in hub. 2. On models with ABS, install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press. Always replace sensor rotor with new one. Pay attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown in figure. 3. Pack multi-purpose grease in wheel hub and hub cap. Page 7676 c. Remove ball joint tightening nuts. Support lower link with jack. d. Remove knuckle spindle from upper and lower links. INSPECTION Knuckle Spindle Check knuckle spindle for deformation, cracks and other damage by using a magnetic exploration or dyeing test. Bearing Spacer (2WD) Check bearing spacer for damage. Needle Bearing (4WD) Check needle bearing for wear, scratches, pitting, flaking and burn marks. INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease and install needle bearing into knuckle spindle. (4WD) CAUTION: Make sure that needle bearing is facing in the proper direction. 2. Install knuckle spindle to upper and lower ball joints with lower link jacked up. CAUTION: Make sure that oil and grease do not come into contact with tapered areas of ball joint, knuckle spindle and threads of ball joint. 3. Connect tie-rod to knuckle spindle. 4. After installing knuckle spindle, adjust wheel bearing preload. Refer to Wheel Bearing. Page 3731 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 1116 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3754 Page 7361 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4970 Canister Vent Valve: Electrical Diagrams EC-VENT/V-01 Evaporation Emission Canister Vent Control Valve (EVAP) (Circuit) (DTC: P0446) Circuit Diagrams Evaporation Emission Canister Vent Control Valve (EVAP) (Circuit) (DTC: P0446) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Control Valve (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 1298 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6769 Page 4621 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 2514 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5688 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 7758 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch 1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine. 2. Check continuity between terminal (1) and ground. If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch. Page 5146 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6998 Shift Linkage: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Transfer Case; Service and Repair; Transfer Case Overhaul. Page 1786 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Specifications Suspension Travel Bumper: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Bolts ..................................................................................................................................... ................................. 16 - 22 Nm (12 - 16 ft. lbs.) Page 6201 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1016 Ground Distribution Page 1274 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 270 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3871 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 880 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1206 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1241 Safing Sensor: Service and Repair SRS Component Parts Location Description Safing Sensor The Safing Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. It can not be serviced separately. Malfunction of the Safing Sensor requires replacement of the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Refer to Diagnosis Sensor Unit / Service and Repair. Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Switch: Testing and Inspection Check continuity between terminals at each position. Page 7020 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8986 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4430 Ground Distribution Page 1081 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6319 Page 5599 Fuel Pump Relay: Connector Locations Main Harness (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5665 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 9500 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair - Each switch can be replaced without removing combination switch base. COMBINATION SWITCH BASE REMOVAL - To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching screws. - Before installing the steering wheel, align the turn signal cancel tab with the notch of combination switch. Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5798 11. Using CONSULT-II select ENGINE, DATA MONITOR (Manual trigger), Selections From Menu, CLSD THL/P SW, and Enter. 12. Stop engine (turn ignition switch "OFF"). 13. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least five seconds. 14. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least ten seconds. 15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for 1 to 16 times until CLSD THL/P SW in CONSULT-II changes to "ON". Page 5739 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5530 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5775 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 154 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3807 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6622 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4450 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1412 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Page 446 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 158 Page 9161 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7589 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Page 4496 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2517 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The absolute pressure sensor is connected to the MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve by a hose. The sensor detects ambient barometric pressure and intake manifold pressure and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure increases, the voltage rises. Page 9336 Refer to the "Diagnosis/Repair Flow Chart" shown to diagnose and resolve this incident, should it occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE Headlight Wire Harness Connector Replacement Procedure 1. Disconnect the vehicle-side wire harness connector from the headlight bulb. 2. Cut the vehicle wire harness about an inch back from the headlight harness connector. 3. Cut the wires of the replacement connector to the appropriate length. 4. Strip the end of each wire (on the vehicle wire harness side and on the replacement connector wires). Page 7718 Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Before starting, check belt tension, drive pulley and tire pressure. 1. Set Tool. Open shut-off valve. Then bleed air. 2. Run engine at idle speed or 1,000 RPM. Make sure fluid temperature in reservoir tank reaches 60 - 80—C (140 - 176° F). WARNING: WARM UP ENGINE WITH SHUT-OFF VALVE FULLY OPENED. IF ENGINE IS STARTED WITH SHUT-OFF VALVE CLOSED, FLUID PRESSURE IN THE POWER STEERING PUMP WILL INCREASE TO MAXIMUM. THIS WILL RAISE THE FLUID TEMPERATURE ABNORMALLY. 3. Check pressure with steering wheel fully turned to left and right positions with engine idling at 1,000 RPM. Power steering pump maximum operating pressure: 7,649 - 8,238 kPa (1,109 - 1,194 psi) when idling CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. - If pressure reaches maximum operating pressure, system is OK. - If pressure increases above maximum operating pressure, check power steering pump flow control valve. 4. If power steering pressure is below the maximum operating pressure, slowly close shut-off valve and check pressure again. CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve for more than 15 seconds. - If pressure increases to maximum operating pressure gear is damaged. - If pressure remains below maximum operating pressure, pump is damaged. 5. After checking hydraulic system, remove Tool and add fluid as necessary. Then completely bleed air out of system. Page 1670 Page 2609 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 9553 Ground Distribution Page 2100 4. Use a suitable tool, such as a small pry bar or large screwdriver (approximately 12 inches long). Pry the cam bracket as shown in Figure 2, while applying approximately 3 pounds (1.4 kg.) of force to the end of the tool. This will produce approximately 30 pounds (13.6 kg) of force against the cam bracket (shown schematically in Figure 1). CAUTION: The amount of movement of the cam bracket is so small that no noticeable movement will be observed. Do not apply excessive force to the cam bracket. 5. While holding pressure (approximately 3 pounds, 1.4 kg) on the end of the pry bar, tighten the bolts sufficiently to ensure the bracket will not move when the pressure is released. 6. Tighten the bolts in two steps, first to 17 inch pounds (0.1 NM. 0.01 kg m) and finally to 104 inch pounds (0.7 NM, 0.07 kg m) of torque. 7. Repeat this procedure for each of the nine remaining cam brackets. 8. Install the new upper chain tensioner (P/N 13070-9E003) following the normal Service Manual procedure. 9. Remove the rag from the timing chain area and reassemble. 10. Start engine and check for oil leaks and unusual noises. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 6079 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4555 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PNP/SW-01 Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Circuit Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 1373 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications Mass Air Flow Table Mass Air Flow Table Supply Voltage 11 - 14 V Output Voltage 0.9 - 1.8 V At idle with engine warmed up and running under no load. Air Flow At Idle 0.9 - 5.8 g/sec Air Flow At 2,500 RPM 7.5 - 13.2 g/sec Locations Ignition Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4334 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2563 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 8996 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams EL-CIGAR-01 Cigarette Lighter Circuit Diagrams Cigarette Lighter Cigarette Lighter Circuit Connectors Page 4252 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 9200 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7896 REPLACEMENT 1. Set auto-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove auto-lock free running hub. 3. Remove snap ring. 4. Remove spindle washer and thrust washer. 5. After installing auto-lock free running hub, check operation. NOTE: When installing it, apply recommended grease to the parts shown in the above illustration. Page 9356 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1714 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Locations Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5695 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 7771 Page 3674 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1806 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications Use a Quality, Multi-purpose wheel bearing grease. Page 3991 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5620 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4623 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 5727 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3727 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1256 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2607 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4195 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 8208 Page 5587 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Page 9604 1. Remove the door finisher assembly. 2. Remove the sealing screen and the door speaker (if equipped). 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the glass mounting nuts can be seen. 4. Remove the glass mounting nuts. 5. Raise up the door glass and hold with a suction lifter. 6. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the regulator assembly. 7. Disassemble the power window motor from the regulator. NOTE: These procedures are typical way for each type. The procedures differ according to model, so refer to Service Manual for more detail. If you also remove door glass, refer to Service Manual for procedures. TYPE-D: DOOR SASHLESS + MODULE TYPE (FR) 1. Remove the door finisher assembly. 2. Remove the harness connector and the door speaker (if equipped). Page 3119 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Thermal Control Amp. Inspection Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Thermal Control Amp. Inspection 1. Run engine, and operate A/C system. 2. Connect the voltmeter from harness side. 3. Check thermo control amp. operation shown in the table. Page 5523 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5079 Leak Detection Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2532 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4747 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5947 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 2661 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CKPS-01 Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) (OBD) Circuit Diagrams Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 5676 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The tank fuel temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 646 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9594 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the glass mounting bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the glass mounting bolts. 5. Raise up the door glass and hold with a suction lifter. 6. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the module assembly. 7. Remove the door regulator assembly from the module assembly. 8. Remove the power window motor from the regulator. Disclaimer Page 1214 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5049 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 391 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2576 Ground Distribution Page 4246 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6778 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Axle Shaft Assembly, Constant Velocity Type REMOVAL 1. Remove free running hub or drive flange and snap ring. Refer to Locking Hub. 2. Remove torsion bar spring. Refer to Torsion Bar. 3. Remove shock absorber lower fixing bolt. 4. Remove lower link, fixing bolts. Support lower link with jack. 5. Remove bolts fixing drive shaft to final drive. Page 1017 Ground Distribution Page 6165 Ground Distribution Radio Antenna - Bent/Broken Antenna Mast: Customer Interest Radio Antenna - Bent/Broken Classification: EL98-001 Reference: NTB98-022 Date: March 15, 1998 BROKEN OR BENT RADIO ANTENNA (FIXED) DUE TO IMPROPER TORQUE APPLIED VEHICLES: All models with fixed (whip) radio antennae SERVICE INFORMATION The fixed antenna rod may bend or break during vehicle usage if it is not properly tightened during installation. Use this bulletin to ensure that every fixed antenna is correctly tightened during pre-delivery inspection. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Add a drop of Loc-Tite (Red) to the threaded portion of the antenna. 2. Use an inch-pound torque wrench and a crowfoot socket (or equivalent tools) to torque the fixed antenna rod. CAUTION: Do not use pliers or adjustable wrenches that might scratch the surface of the antenna rod. Torque Specification: 3.4 - 3.6 N.m (30 - 32 in-lb) Page 6132 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Adjustments Heater Control Valve Cable: Adjustments TEMPERATURE CONTROL CABLE - When adjusting ventilator door rod and defrost door rod, first disconnect mode control cable from side link. Reconnect and readjust mode control cable. - Move temperature control lever to max. COLD position. Set air mix door lever in full hot mode. Pull on outer cable in direction of arrow and then clamp it. - After positioning temperature control cable, check that it operates properly. Page 8814 When storing a vehicle unprotected, where the painted surface is repeatedly exposed to a combination of sunlight and light rain (or morning dew), the vehicle MUST be washed AND thoroughly dried at least every two weeks, or more frequently if there is light rain or dew followed by strong sunlight. When washing any vehicle, it must be out of direct sunlight and the painted surfaces should be cool to the touch. WATER SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE The method of repairing a water spotted finish varies with the severity (depth of spot in finish) of the spotting. After a thorough washing, perform the following: 1. Water spots on light colored vehicles and some vehicles which have had minimal exposure to the elements can be repaired by buffing. First, apply a fine cutting compound using an orbital buffer to remove a thin layer of the top coat or clear coat. After removal of the spots, buff with glazing compound to remove the fine scratches. 2. More severe spotting can be removed with a coarser cutting compound followed by finer compound and glazing compound to remove the scratches. 3. The most severe water spots on clear coated, dark vehicles can be repaired by wet sanding the affected areas with 1200 grit sandpaper to prepare the surface then spraying a fresh clear coat on those areas. Non-clear coated vehicles should be repairable with either step 1 or 2. * Available through Dyment Distribution Services. Technical Service Bulletin # 94-015 Date: 940208 Paint - Contamination Identification and Repair Classification: BF94-003 Reference: NTB94-O15 Date: February 8, 1994 PAINT CONTAMINATION IDENTIFICATION AND REPAIR This bulletin supersedes NTB93-058 / BF93-014 & NTB91-090 / BF91-023 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): ALL SERVICE INFORMATION The following procedures and materials have been found effective in removing iron particles, water or chemical spots, scratches and/or swirl marks which have not penetrated the clear coat/color coat of painted vehicle surfaces. NOTE: The updated repair procedures discussed in this Service Bulletin can be applied to all types of Nissan clear coat materials, including the new Cross Link clear coat (NCLC)/hard clear coat. *NOTE: Measure the paint thickness before and after abrasive cleaning. If abrasive repair is not successful on the first panel tested, it must be tried on each affected panel (hood, roof, trunk etc.,) to determine which panel(s) must be re-clear coated or re-color/clear coated and which may be repaired by abrasive means. Finish Kare Product Distributors: 1726 Floradale Ave., El Monte, CA 91733 (213) 686-0462 Page 7770 Steering Gear: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Normal Operating Temperature ..................................................................................................................................................... 60 80° C (140 - 176° F) Page 3222 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2411 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4694 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3534 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. Page 7728 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4945 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5244 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7099 Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Front: Sensor 13-17 ft.lb Cable 39.1-51.2 in.lb Rear Sensor (At Backing Plate) 13-17 ft.lb Page 8981 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Specifications Alternator: Specifications ALTERNATOR OUTPUT ALTERNATOR OUTPUT Rated output Test output @ 2500 eng. rpm. 70 amps 54 amps 13.5 volts Page 3872 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5153 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 7190 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair COMPONENTS REMOVAL WARNING: CLEAN BRAKE LINING WITH A VACUUM DUST COLLECTOR TO MINIMIZE THE HAZARD OF AIRBORNE MATERIALS. CAUTION: Make sure parking brake lever is completely released. 1. Release parking brake lever fully, then remove drum. If drum is hard to remove, the following procedure should be carried out. a. Remove plug. Then shorten adjuster to make clearance between brake shoe and drum. b. Install two bolts as shown. Tighten the two bolts gradually. Page 2644 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 709 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 7775 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Power Recirculating Ball Type Removal and Installation STEERING GEAR MODEL PB59K NOTE: Before removal, clean gear housing and oil pump exteriors using a steam cleaner. Then dry with compressed air. Refer to the illustrations when servicing. CAUTION: ^ Parts which can be disassembled are strictly limited. ^ Never disassemble parts other than those specified. ^ Disassemble in as clean a place as possible. ^ Clean your hands before disassembly. ^ Do not use rags; use nylon cloths or paper towels. Page 1299 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Testing and Inspection Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Switch/Check Combination Switch Check Page 4477 Throttle Full Close Switch: Connector Views Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 4914 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 9246 Ground Distribution Page 2459 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 830 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1537 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 6353 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7651 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2405 Ground Distribution Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 645 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3114 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1372 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 3934 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Paint - Contamination Identification and Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 94-015 Date: 940208 Paint - Contamination Identification and Repair Classification: BF94-003 Reference: NTB94-O15 Date: February 8, 1994 PAINT CONTAMINATION IDENTIFICATION AND REPAIR This bulletin supersedes NTB93-058 / BF93-014 & NTB91-090 / BF91-023 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): ALL SERVICE INFORMATION The following procedures and materials have been found effective in removing iron particles, water or chemical spots, scratches and/or swirl marks which have not penetrated the clear coat/color coat of painted vehicle surfaces. NOTE: The updated repair procedures discussed in this Service Bulletin can be applied to all types of Nissan clear coat materials, including the new Cross Link clear coat (NCLC)/hard clear coat. *NOTE: Measure the paint thickness before and after abrasive cleaning. If abrasive repair is not successful on the first panel tested, it must be tried on each affected panel (hood, roof, trunk etc.,) to determine which panel(s) must be re-clear coated or re-color/clear coated and which may be repaired by abrasive means. Finish Kare Product Distributors: 1726 Floradale Ave., El Monte, CA 91733 (213) 686-0462 Page 5534 Ground Distribution Page 8609 3. Remove and discard the perforated section of the door vapor barrier located behind the speaker (see Figure 2). 4. Apply 3 pieces of adhesive-backed foam tape (1\4" thick by 1" wide by 3" long - such as 3MTM Scotch-foam 4504 #021200-07262) to the backside of the speaker (see Figure 3). 5. Re-install the speaker. Make sure the vehicle wire harness is re-connected to the speaker. 6. Re-install the door finisher. 7. Test the speakers to ensure the noise is minimized or eliminated. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 4680 Throttle Full Close Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Closed Throttle Position Switch 1. tart engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector. 4. Check continuity between terminals (5) and (6) while opening throttle valve manually. If NG, replace throttle position switch. Page 4303 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 945 Ground Distribution Page 3270 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4042 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 6382 Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve 1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly. 2. Check torque converter clutch control valve. - Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. - Valve, and sleeve are tree from burrs, dents and scratches. - Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. - Hydraulic line is tree from obstacles. 3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve. Sunroof - Headliner Squeak Noises Headliner: Customer Interest Sunroof - Headliner Squeak Noises Classification: BT98-003 Reference: NTB98-040 Date: June 1, 1998 1998 FRONTIER SQUEAK NOISE IN HEADLINER NEAR SUNROOF APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1998 Frontier (D22) - sunroof models only SERVICE INFORMATION If a 1998 Frontier exhibits a "scratchy" type of squeak noise in the headliner around the edges of the sunroof, the cause may be the headliner panel rubbing on the vehicle body. Use the following procedure to resolve the incident: SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof panel as follows: A. Remove the sunroof shade panel by turning the securing knobs counterclockwise and pulling the panel down and towards the rear of the vehicle to release (see Figure 1). B. Disconnect the sunroof handle from the sunroof handle latch by depressing the two release buttons on the handle latch while pushing up on the sunroof panel (see Figure 2). Page 2551 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5162 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4955 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 8446 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 2306 2. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of water pump. - Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant Part No. 999 MP-A7007, Three Bond TB1207D or equivalent. Page 3626 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6833 Page 2858 Ground Distribution Front Differential Page 378 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Specifications EGR Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance 7.9 - 9.7 M ohms at 32 deg F 0.57 - 0.70 M ohms at 122 deg F 0.08 - 0.10 M ohms at 212 deg F Voltage 4.81 VDC at 32 deg F 2.81 VDC at 122 deg F 0.8 VDC at 212 deg F Page 3441 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 1176 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6064 Knock Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-KS-01 Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Circuit Diagrams Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 3959 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Connectors Maximum Voltage Monitoring Page 6836 Page 204 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 671 EC-RRO2/H-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Page 5989 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5698 Ground Distribution Page 8568 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 9073 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 4743 Ground Distribution Page 7317 Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Electronic Component Damage Prevention Classification: EL09-011 Reference: NTB09-030 Date: April 6, 2009 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE CAN RESULT FROM IMPROPER BATTERY CONNECTION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ The vehicle 12 volt battery is an important part of the vehicle electrical system and is required to stay connected when the engine is running. ^ To prevent damage to vehicle electronic components follow the instructions / cautions below. IMPORTANT: Damage to electronic components (ECM, TCM, BCM, etc.) due to improper battery connection will not be covered under warranty. CAUTION: ^ Make sure the ignition is OFF during battery service and replacement. ^ Do not disconnect or connect any battery cables while the ignition switch is turned ON. ^ When disconnecting a battery, always disconnect the negative cable first. ^ When connecting a battery, always connect the positive cable first. ^ Do not leave a battery cable loose. Tighten battery cables immediately after attachment. ^ If a battery cable is loose, do not operate any electrical loads. (This includes turning the ignition ON, starting the engine, operating accessories such as the A/C system, power seats, interior lights, exterior lights etc.). ^ When "jump starting" or "boosting" a battery - be careful. Don't accidentally reverse the polarity of the cables. Disclaimer Page 4583 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 1041 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2504 Ground Distribution Page 5319 Idle Speed: Specifications IDLE SPEED IDLE SPEED Idle speed M/T 800 +/- 50 RPM Idle speed A/T ( in N position) 800 +/- 50 RPM Refer to idle speed adjustments Page 8933 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 7750 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3999 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5348 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 6188 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 384 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3900 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Knock sensor - Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M ohms. 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminal (1) and ground. Resistance: 500 - 620 K Ohms [at 25°C (77°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 214 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Transistor 1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor & power transistor harness connector and ignition coil harness connector. 2. Check power transistor resistance between terminals (2) and (8). If NG, replace distributor assembly. Page 1209 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 970 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 6959 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2366 Service and Repair Axle Nut: Service and Repair Manual Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set knob of manual-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove manual-lock free running hub. 3. When installing manual-lock free running hub, make sure the hub is in the FREE position. NOTE: Apply multi-purpose grease to the parts shown in the illustration. 4. Check operation of manual-lock free running hub after installation. INSPECTION - Check that the knob moves smoothly and freely. - Check that the clutch moves smoothly in the body. Auto Lock Free Running Hub Page 7532 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 7077 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2012 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 1052 Ground Distribution Page 4792 Ground Distribution Locations Throttle Full Close Switch: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 2994 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3048 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 5507 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TFTS-01 Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Circuit Diagrams Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 540 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5368 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-MAFS-01 Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Diagrams Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 6254 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2545 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2695 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7498 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 4237 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 4485 ^ Refer to Figure 2 that applies to your model. ^ There should be continuity across the terminals with the throttle closed. NOTES: ^ An ohmmeter is used because CONSULT-II cannot display the CTPS status in all of the Applied Vehicles. ^ This adjustment procedure must be made with the TPS installed on the engine of the vehicle. ^ Do not touch the throttle drum when checking the CTPS signal or continuity. Doing so may cause an incorrect adjustment. ^ Nissan recommends using Kent-Moore TPS Connector Tool J-45178 for easy, accurate connection. See NTB01-023 for more information. 4. Refer to Chart 1 and select the correct thickness feeler gauges for your vehicle. 5. Check "A": Insert the thinner feeler gauge "A" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop. ^ The CTPS should have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "0 ohms"). Page 563 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 735 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 1669 Page 4459 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9338 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 8566 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 457 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 8205 Comments regarding liquid tanks: ^ For R-134a, the sight glass has been deleted. Refer to the service procedures section of this bulletin for additional information regarding the refrigerant charge determination. Pressure switches are not interchangeable between R-12 and R-134a systems. Page 4204 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4495 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3470 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 9214 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4910 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2727 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 935 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Recall 98V064000: A/T Shift Lever Can Come Loose Shifter A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 98V064000: A/T Shift Lever Can Come Loose Year: 1998 Make: NISSAN TRUCK Model: FRONTIER Year of Recall: '98 Type of Report: Vehicle Potential Number of Units Affected: 3000 Summary: Vehicle Description: Light duty passenger trucks equipped with automatic transmissions. A securing pin inside the automatic transmission control device assembly can come loose allowing the shift lever to be inadvertently moved out of the Park position with the key in the ignition. This could result in a crash if the parking brake is not engaged. Dealers will inspect the automatic transmission control device assembly and replace it if necessary. Owner notification is expected to begin during April 1998. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Nissan at 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261). Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Page 2818 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 7526 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 9384 EL-H/LAMP-01 Headlamp Wiring Diagram (For USA) Circuit Diagrams Headlamp (For USA) Circuit Connectors Page 6826 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 9240 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Specifications Main Shaft: Specifications AVAILABLE SNAP RING Mainshaft Front Bearing Main Gear Bearing Mainshaft Rear Bearing Page 1551 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 5621 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Classification: EC99-005b Reference: NTB99-053b Date: January 22, 2002 NISSAN REVISED TPS ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE This bulletin amends NTB99-053a. The Service Information and Service Procedure has been revised. In addition, TPS Connector tool (Kent-Moore # J45178) information has been included. Please discard all copies of NTB99-053a. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1995-1998 Maxima (A32) 1996-1998 Pathfinder (R50) 1995-1998 240SX (S14) 1995-1998 Sentra/200SX (B14) w/GA16 & SR20 engines 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998 Frontier (D22) 1995-1997 Altima (U13) 1998 Altima (L30) 1996-1998 Quest (V40) SERVICE INFORMATION The adjustment procedure for the throttle position sensor (TPS) has been revised and standardized for all the Applied Vehicles. ^ The TPS contains a closed throttle position switch (CTPS) and a variable output throttle position sensor. ^ This procedure uses the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) status (ON or OFF) instead of the throttle position sensor (variable output voltage) to adjust the TPS. ^ Incorrect adjustment of the CTPS may cause one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to be displayed: P1447, P0120, P0510, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P1705. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check fast idle cam (FIC) function, if equipped (refer to appropriate Service Manual). When finished, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and the fast idle cam (if equipped) has released. Then turn the engine "OFF". 2. Disconnect the harness connector (see Figure 1) from the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) position of the throttle position sensor (TPS). 3. Connect an ohmmeter across the terminals for the closed throttle position switch (CTPS). Page 9613 ^ These scratches are typically long and have several scratches concentrated together. ^ These scratches can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. 3) How to determine if glass has distortion or cracks due to manufacturing Issue. Disclaimer Page 2622 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Testing and Inspection System Relay: Testing and Inspection Check circuit continuity between terminals by supplying 12 Volts to coil side terminals of air conditioner relay. Page 7327 Battery: Service Precautions Charging the Battery CAUTION: ^ Do not "quick charge" a fully discharged battery. ^ Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged. ^ When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the charger first, as this may cause a spark. ^ If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 60° C (140° F), stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature below 60° C (140° F). Charging rates: Amps Time 50 1 hour 25 2 hours 10 5 hours 5 10 hours Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate. NOTE: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge Improves. The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate. ^ If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be replaced. ^ After the battery is charged, always perform a capacity test to assure that the battery is serviceable. Page 2399 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 8728 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1394 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 2871 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3449 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 9245 Ground Distribution Page 7430 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 6199 Ground Distribution Page 6088 Ground Distribution Page 9192 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1004 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 9509 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5392 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5662 Ground Distribution Page 5527 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3493 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 6642 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Resistance 166.5 - 302.5 ohms at 68 deg F Page 6774 NOTE: Do not reuse oil seal once it is removed. Always install new one. 6. Remove ABS sensor rotor. 7. Unbend lock washer with a screwdriver. 8. Remove bearing lock nut with Tool. 9. Remove wheel bearing together with bearing cage and baffle plate from axle shaft. 10. Remove grease seal in bearing cage with suitable bar. Page 5048 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2555 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Mass air flow sensor 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between terminal (54) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above check. 5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust. Page 9452 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4242 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4663 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3825 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 8696 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 7752 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Testing and Inspection Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Page 6138 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 931 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4177 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3708 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 3753 Page 6964 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9337 5. Slide a one-inch piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (3M(TM) P/N 054007-55917 or equivalent) onto each wire of the vehicle wire harness (see Figure 1a). 6. Connect each wire (of the replacement connector) to the vehicle wire harness making sure the wires are correctly connected (i.e., no mis-matched wires). See Figure lb. IMPORTANT: Only use lead-free solder when performing step 7 below. Also, step 7 must be performed as stated to avoid a "cold" solder joint (i.e., a joint that will not hold together). 7. Solder each wire connection joint as follows: A. Place the soldering iron tip against the bottom side of the wire strands and heat the wires (see Figure lb). B. Once the wires are hot, apply the solder to the top side of the wire strands until they are fully coated with melted solder (see Figure 1b). 8. After the soldered joint cools down, slide the heat shrink tubing over the soldered joint and heat the tubing with a heat gun until it seals the joint (see Figure 1c). IMPORTANT: Each wire connection joint MUST be soldered and sealed with the heat shrink tubing due to the high wire current and moisture in this location. DO NOT use Scotch-Loks (TM) or butt connectors for splicing at this location. Page 1727 Fuse Block-Fuse Arrangement Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Specified amount: With oil filter ......................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 4.125 qts. (3.9 Liters) Without oil filter .................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 3.875 qts. (3.7 Liters) Page 2540 Ground Distribution Page 1854 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Manual Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set knob of manual-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove manual-lock free running hub. 3. When installing manual-lock free running hub, make sure the hub is in the FREE position. NOTE: Apply multi-purpose grease to the parts shown in the illustration. 4. Check operation of manual-lock free running hub after installation. INSPECTION - Check that the knob moves smoothly and freely. - Check that the clutch moves smoothly in the body. Page 4114 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3630 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9463 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 8328 SRS Component Parts Location Page 1763 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 1698 Additionally the PAG lubricant type, part numbers and system recharge amounts are listed for each model. Page 9522 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Specifications Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Specifications DIMENSIONS Final Drive Side ................................................................................................................................... ............................... 95 - 97 mm (3.74 - 3.82 inch) Wheel Side ........................................................... ............................................................................................................... 96 - 98 mm (3.78 - 3.86 inch) Page 6320 Page 5151 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3361 Page 1924 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Main Bearing Cap Loosening/Tightening Sequence TORQUE VALUES Motor Mounts Outer Components Testing and Inspection PCV Valve Hose: Testing and Inspection VENTILATION HOSE 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. Page 2642 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4253 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2890 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3480 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Diagram Information and Instructions BARO / MAP Sensor Switching Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5966 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6009 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5624 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 8810 on the towel to avoid scratching the paint with any loosened iron particles. 3. Apply Finish Kare # 883 directly from the bottle using the applicator provided. Keep the affected areas wet for 5 minutes and allow the solution to lift the particles. Agitate gently, but do not rub as this will scratch the color coat or clear coat of paint. Reapply # 883 to spots which start to dry before rinsing CAUTION: Do not exceed the 5 minute soak time as this solution may damage the paint or trim. 4. Rinse thoroughly with tap water, dry and inspect the surface. 5. Reapply # 883 as often as needed to remove more difficult spots. 6. When all iron particles are removed, wash with Finish Kare # 118SC (Neutralizer and Shampoo) and rinse thoroughly. Gently dry with a fresh towel. Do not use towels used in the above steps, as they may have iron particles in the nap and could scratch the color coat or clear coat. F. Inspect For Damage Severity After washing and iron particle/chemical removal are performed on the test section, inspect the surface to determine the severity of damage. Levels 2 and 3 are determined using abrasive removal on test sections on each affected panel. Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and/or indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp and a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is easily done with an 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Level 1 No damage, the contamination did not penetrate the paint surface and washed off using the detergent and water and the iron particle remover. Level 2 Minor damage, the contamination did not penetrate more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Abrasive cleaning will resolve. Level 3 Substantial damage, the contamination penetrated more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Re-color and clear coat is necessary G. Abrasive Cleaning IMPORTANT: All iron particles and acids must be removed and the surface neutralized with the above procedure before proceeding. Iron particles and acids which remain will not be fully removed by abrasive cleaning. Small amounts of contamination will wick moisture into the clear coat or through a re-color/clear coat and cause blistering The goal of abrasive cleaning is to remove the damaged layer of color coat or clear coat (up to 0.5 mil in thickness) using the least abrasive process. The steps below demonstrate the sequence of operations to use on the test section to identify the severity of damage and the repair needed. 1. Measure paint film thickness. 2. Polish and evaluate. If OK Polish all affected surfaces. If NG go to step 3. Also determine film thickness removed. 3. Buff and evaluate. If OK Buff and then polish all If NG go to step 4. affected surfaces. Also determine film thickness removed 4. Wet sand and evaluate. If OK wet sand then buff and If NG go to step 5. polish affected surfaces Also determine film thickness removed. 5. Re-clear/color coat after neutralizing surfaces. 6. Apply color coat and clear coat if damage is completely through clear coat NOTE: Polishing to remove buffing or swirl marks requires a foam finishing pad on a dual action sander. Page 2293 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4628 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2908 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 1354 Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Page 7032 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 128 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1022 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4474 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9441 Optional Splice Example Diagrams A/C - Refrigerant Charging Equipment Maintenance Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Charging Equipment Maintenance Classification: HA00-001 Reference: NTB00-026 Date: March 13, 2000 ACR4 REFRIGERANT MACHINE MAINTENANCE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles with R-134a Air Conditioning SERVICE INFORMATION To ensure accurate air conditioning system diagnosis and repair, it is critical that periodic maintenance be performed on your refrigerant charging equipment (ACR4 machine) and that proper operating techniques be used. Additionally, as refrigerant charge amounts continue to become smaller, it is vital that your refrigerant charging equipment be as accurate as possible. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the information listed under the "Maintenance" section of this bulletin to "tune-up" your ACR4 machine to keep it operating at top performance. Refer to information listed under "Operational Tips" to ensure the highest level of charging accuracy when using the ACR4 machine. IMPORTANT: ACR4 maintenance should be conducted following the manufacture's instructions and recommended schedule. For details about performing ACR4 maintenance, refer to the ACR4 Operating Instruction Manual (Tech-Mate P/N J39500-7). Additional information related to ACR4 maintenance and operation is available in the May 1998 edition of Tech Talk and SIR video # 57. The ACR4 Operating Instruction Manual can be ordered from Tech-Mate by calling 800-662-2001. NOTE: A maintenance kit is available for the ACR4 machine through Tech-Mate (P/N J-39500-MAINT). The kit includes: vacuum pump oil, a desiccant/filter and two O-rings (for the desiccant/filter). The ACR4 Maintenance Kit can be ordered from Tech-Mate by calling 800-662-2001. Maintenance Vacuum Pump Oil Change the vacuum pump oil every 10 hours of operation (when display reads "OIL") or sooner if contamination is seen through the sight glass (see Figure 1). Filter/Dryer Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 4472 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5874 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 9285 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2437 Main Harness (Part 2 Of 2) Fuel Pump Relay Connector # M46 Page 7647 Ground Distribution Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 8415 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring, sliding it over all areas of the "D" ring where it contacts the seat belt (see Figure 7) until all residue is removed. NOTE: It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring before the following steps of the procedure are completed. Failure to remove all residue build up will result in poor adhesion of the special fluorine resin tape. 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the two fluorine resin tape sections provided in the kit (see Figure 8). 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 9A. NOTE: Page 8944 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 7192 - Pay attention to direction of adjuster. Left wheel: Lefthand thread Right wheel: Righthand thread 4. Connect parking brake cable to toggle lever. 5. Install all parts. NOTE: Be careful not to damage wheel cylinder piston boots. Parking Brake Cable To Toggle Lever 6. Check all parts are installed properly. After installation is completed, adjust shoe-to-drum clearance. NOTE: Always perform shoe clearance adjustment. 7. Install brake drum. 8. When installing new wheel cylinder or overhauling wheel cylinder, bleed air. 9. Adjust parking brake. Crank Lever Adjustment Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger With Consult 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". OR Without Consult 1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and reconnect fuel pump fuse. Page 3898 Knock Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-KS-01 Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Circuit Diagrams Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 2152 Page 3287 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 8615 3. Remove and discard the perforated section of the door vapor barrier located behind the speaker (see Figure 2). 4. Apply 3 pieces of adhesive-backed foam tape (1\4" thick by 1" wide by 3" long - such as 3MTM Scotch-foam 4504 #021200-07262) to the backside of the speaker (see Figure 3). 5. Re-install the speaker. Make sure the vehicle wire harness is re-connected to the speaker. 6. Re-install the door finisher. 7. Test the speakers to ensure the noise is minimized or eliminated. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 699 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 2923 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Specifications Page 2452 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 393 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4801 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Interior - Seat Belt Latch Plate Button Missing Technical Service Bulletin # 99-022C Date: 030805 Interior - Seat Belt Latch Plate Button Missing Classification: RS99-001C Reference; NTB99-022C Date: August 5, 2003 FRONT SEAT BELT LATCH PLATE RETAINING BUTTON MISSING The Applied Vehicles and Service Information sections of this bulletin have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of NTB99-022. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM: ^ The front seat belt latch plate of an applied vehicle slides to the end of the seat belt, sliding down the belt to the floor at the base of the B pillar. ^ This happens because the seat belt latch plate retaining button is lost or damaged. ^ The seat belt and retractor are in serviceable condition, ACTION: Use this bulletin to replace the retaining button and clean, and refurbish the driver's and passenger's front seat belt "D" rings. NOTE: This button is required to hold the seat belt latch plate at the shoulder location, preventing it from sliding to the floor when the belt is released. NOTE: The purpose of "ACTION" is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 2284 Ground Distribution Page 4949 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8626 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 3109 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6784 1.9 mm (0.075 inch) ............................................................................................................................. ..................................... 39253-88 G14 2.1 mm (0.083 inch) ............................................................... ................................................................................................... 39253-88 G15 2.3 mm (0.091 inch) . .............................................................................................................................................................. ... 39253-88 G16 Page 2785 EC-FRO2-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 4300 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 8939 Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 7123 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Canister Purge Control Valve: Customer Interest Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Classification: EC98-007B Reference: NTB98-058B Date: August 7, 2001 MIL "ON" WITH EVAP SYSTEM DTCs STORED DUE TO LAUNCHING A WATERCRAFT ATTENTION: This bulletin amends NTB98-058A. Applied Vehicle information has been expanded and Parts Information has been revised. Please discard all paper copies of NTB98-058A. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998-2001 Frontier (D22) SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle is used to launch watercraft and exhibits the following symptoms: 1. The EVAP canister is found to have water in it and 2. It has one or more of the following DTC codes stored in Self Diagnosis: ^ P0440 (EVAP-small leak) ^ P1440 (EVAP-small leak) D22 only ^ P0446 (EVAP canister vent control valve) ^ P1446 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck closed) D22 only ^ P1448 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck open) D22 only ^ P0450 (EVAP pressure sensor) ^ P0443 (EVAP purge control valve & solenoid valve) ^ P1445 (EVAP purge volume control valve) D21 only ^ P1444 (EVAP purge volume control solenoid valve) D22 only Use the Service Procedure provided in this bulletin to replace the EVAP canister and install the replacement EVAP breather tube kit to prevent water/mud/dirt entry into the EVAP system. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect CONSULT-II. 2. From the Engine menu, select Self Diag Results. 3. Touch PRINT. Then select FF Data and touch PRINT again. 4. Use the appropriate service manual to resolve the stored DTC. 5. To determine if there is damage to the EVAP system, proceed to Removal and Inspection Testing. 6. Then go to Installation of the Breather Tube Kit and Installation of the EVAP system. Removal and Inspection Testing Page 3544 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4953 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3223 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7363 Ground Distribution Page 521 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6493 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3237 Throttle Position Sensor: Connector Views Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 6047 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4153 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3247 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 488 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2490 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6057 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 6694 CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT - Check clutch cover, installed on vehicle, for uneven diaphragm spring toe height. Uneven limit: 0.7 mm (0.028 inch) - If out of limit, adjust the height using Tool. FLYWHEEL INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear teeth. - Inspect contact surface of flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. Clean flywheel using emery paper. - Check flywheel runout. Maximum allowable runout: Less than 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) INSTALLATION - Insert Tool into clutch disc hub while installing clutch cover and disc. - Be careful not to allow grease to contaminate clutch facing. - Tighten bolts in numerical order, in two steps. First step: R: 10 - 20 Nm (1.0 - 2.0 kg.m, 7 - 14 ft. lbs.) Final step: H: 22 - 29 Nm (2.2 - 3.0 kg.m, 16 - 22 ft. lbs.) Page 8153 5. Retighten the joint connection nut to 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb). CAUTION: Use a backup wrench on the low hose when tightening the joint connection nut. Low Hose Bracket Installation 1. Separate the two halves of the bracket by removing the screw. 2. Install the two halves of the bracket on the compressor end of the A/C low hose at the tube bend closest to the compressor flange (see Figure 6). NOTE: When installing the bracket, make sure the bracket half with the weld nut on the side points away from the engine. 3. Install and tighten the bracket screw to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb). Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing order Firing order Firing order 1-3-4-2 Locations Wiper Motor: Locations Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 1045 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 912 EGR Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3663 Ground Distribution Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front REPLACEMENT Refer to the illustration when servicing, noting the following: CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. When removing the front wheel hub or rear axle shaft assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly and move it away. Page 5691 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 9368 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6944 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 864 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5143 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5187 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4618 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 1174 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 9560 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 195 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5420 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. 2. Remove injector tube assembly with injectors from intake manifold. 3. Remove injectors from injector tube assembly. - Push injector tail piece. - Do not pull on the connector. 4. Install injector to fuel tube assembly. a. Clean exterior of injector tail piece. b. Use new O-rings. Always replace O-rings with new ones. Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil. 5. Install injectors with fuel tube assembly to intake manifold. Tighten in numerical order shown in the figure. a. First, tighten all bolts to 9.3 to 10.8 N.m (0.95 to 1.1 kg-m, 6.9 to 8.0 ft-lb). b. Then, tighten all bolts to 21 to 26 N.m (2.1 to 2.7 kg-m, 15 to 20 ft-lb). 6. Install fuel hoses to fuel tube assembly. 7. Reinstall any pants removed in reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After properly connecting injectors to fuel tube assembly, check connections for fuel leakage. Page 934 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2566 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 8775 The table provides a brief description of some types of paint contamination you may encounter. Select a 2' x 2' test section to perform the following Contamination Test Removal. C. RE-Wash C. Re-Wash with detergent and water solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Rinse with a spray of clean water. Repeat up to four times. D. Clean D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover using a clean terry cloth towel and gentle pressure. Repeat up to four times. E. Applying Finish Kare E. Apply Finish Kare to remove iron particles and acids. See procedure below: Caution: Attempting to buff iron particles will cause severe scratching. 1. Apply Finish Kare # 1119, solution, keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. 2. After the wash and rinse, gently dry the contaminated surfaces with the terry cloth towels to remove the majority of the water. Use gentle pressure Headlight Connector - Replacement Headlamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Headlight Connector - Replacement Classification: EL01-005 Reference: NTB01-028 Date: May 15, 2001 HEADLIGHT CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except vehicles equipped with Xenon(TM) headlights SERVICE INFORMATION Nissan has established replacement headlight connectors and service procedures to replace damaged connectors on the applied vehicles. If the headlight wire harness connector is damaged, causing intermittent or improper headlight operation, or the connector otherwise needs replacement, follow the procedures in this bulletin. Page 3562 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7837 Page 8777 3M materials: Meguiar's materials: Misc: 8" buffer (1500-1750 RPM) Dual action sander, variable speed Terry cloth towels (100% cloth) NOTE: Always use separate pads for each liquid (mark the backside of each pad with the type of liquid used) and clean the pads frequently. Use of a wool pad on clear coat is limited to the polishing type of pad and is always followed by a foam Dad on a dual action sander to remove swirl marks. Measuring Paint Film Thickness Before any abrasive removal, measure the initial film thickness at several places to establish an average figure. After each abrasive step measure several places again to determine how much paint film was removed. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the mil gauge you are using for measurement and calibration. If you do not have a thickness gauge use the following rule of thumb during abrasive removal; When the "orange peel" surface is removed, 0.5 mil has been removed. Polishing Polishing is done in two steps: The first step is with an 8" buffer and the second step with a dual action sander to remove buffing and swirl marks. Low speed (1500-1750 RPM) is necessary to prevent overheating the surface. CAUTION: Do not polish or buff a surface dry. More than the usual quantity of liquid must be used to keep the paint surface cool. Wipe the excess material off with a clean soft towel after each operation 1. Clean the surface of all residue before polishing. 2. Use an 8" buffer (at 1500 - 1750 RPM) with either a 3M wool polishing pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing compound over the work Page 2884 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4665 Ground Distribution Page 7009 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4427 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5260 EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passage way. When the EGR valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passage way changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. Page 3335 Ground Distribution Page 4922 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 8924 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3280 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 6600 Use the "Combination" Op Codes as indicated with the appropriate Section "JA", "JC", or "JD" coding that best represents the A/T R&R; and repair/replacement performed. Service Procedure Page 3326 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1093 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Classification: HA99-006 Reference: NTB99-070 Date: October 5, 1999 A/C IDLER PULLEY WHINE NOISE AT 3000 ENGINE RPM (FOUR CYLINDER ENGINE ONLY) APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) - 2WD 2000 Xterra (WD22) - 2WD APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle exhibits a whine noise at or around 3,000 engine RPM, the cause may be the air conditioning (A/C) idler pulley. Use the service procedure listed below to diagnose and correct the incident. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Run the engine at or around 3,000 RPM with the A/C ON and OFF to determine when the whine noise occurs. NOTE: The A/C will operate with the A/C button turned off if the mode selector is in the foot/defrost or defrost position and the fan is turned on. To ensure the A/C is off, move the fan speed selector to the off position. A. If the whine noise occurs with the A/C off (A/C compressor not operating), look for other sources of the whine noise. B. If the whine noise only occurs when the A/C is on (A/C compressor operating) and the noise can be pin pointed to the idler pulley with a stethoscope or Chassis Ears(TM), proceed with step 2. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Loosen (but do not remove) the nut that secures the idler pulley (see Figure 1). 4. Remove the E-ring from the idler pulley adjusting bolt (see Figure 1). 5. Remove the idler pulley adjusting bolt. 6. Remove the A/C compressor drive belt from the idler pulley. Page 4585 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4847 3. Directly above this 25 mm hole, drill one 8 mm (0.31 in.) hole in the inside edge of the vehicle bed rail (see Figure 3). 4. Deburr both drilled holes and coat the bare metal surfaces with an anti-corrosive paint. 5. Install the rubber grommet (from the kit) into the 25 mm drilled hole. 6. Install the metal breather tube into the grommet and fasten the upper plastic bracket to the bed rail through the 8 mm drilled hole with the bolt and nut from the kit (see Figure 4). Installation of the EVAP System 1. Install the EVAP canister. 2. Install the EVAP vent control valve. 3. Reconnect the two small diameter original hoses to the canister. 4. Reconnect the vent control valve electrical harness. Page 496 Ground Distribution Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Recall - Seat Back Handle Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 98-035 Date: 980416 Recall - Seat Back Handle Replacement Reference: NTB98-035 Date: April 16, 1998 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 1998 FRONTIER SEAT BACK HANDLE REPLACEMENT CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO: 98V-065 APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998 Frontier (D22) King Cab - Bucket Seat Only APPLIED VINs: 1NGDD2***WC300001 to WC341732 APPLIED DATES: SOP to January 28, 1998 INTRODUCTION In some 1998 Frontier King Cab trucks, certain types of frontal crashes may cause the front seat belt on either seat to slip between the seat bottom finisher and the seat back plastic recliner handle. If this occurs, the seat belt may be cut by the sharp edge of the metal portion of the recliner lever. If the seat belt is completely severed by this occurrence, it could increase the risk of injury to an occupant in a crash. Owners of affected Frontiers will be notified by mail to return to their Nissan dealer to have each seat back plastic recliner handle replaced with a new one with a different shape which prevents the seat belt from slipping between the seat bottom finisher and the seat back recliner handle. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number 98V-065 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this Campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED Approximately 23,500 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY The dealer is responsible for checking Service Comm for the Campaign status on every vehicle falling within the range of this campaign which enters the service department for any reason. This includes vehicles purchased from the dealer, vehicles purchased from another dealer, and vehicles purchased from private parties. Federal law requires that new vehicles in inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While this law only applies to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to also correct any used trucks in their inventory which fall within the range of this campaign prior to sale. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check Service Comm to verify that the procedure for this campaign has not already been performed. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface, turn OFF the ignition and set the parking brake. Page 4929 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Connector Views Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve (DTC: P0443) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 5889 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 9072 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 2912 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS-01 Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Circuit Diagrams Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 6606 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible. Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the air cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the air cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds (Point A, Figure 8). 5. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the air cooler Outlet hose (see Point B, Figure 9). 6. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the air cooler Outlet hose. 7. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the air cooler Outlet hose to force any remaining oil or cleaner through the air cooler and out of the air cooler Inlet hose (see Point A, Figure 9). 8. Proceed with Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles), below. Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles) You will be taking a sample of the debris to determine if the radiator/oil cooler must be replaced. CAUTION: You must refer to Charts A and B to determine the location of the Inlet and Outlet hoses for the oil cooler in the radiator of the vehicle you are working on. If you do not identify the Inlet and Outlet hoses correctly, debris may be left inside the "in radiator" cooler and transmission damage may occur. NOTE: Failure to clean the exterior of the Cooler Inlet hose properly may lead to inaccurate debris identification. 1. Place an oil drain pan under the automatic transmission "in radiator" cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses. 2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler Inlet hose. 3. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the Outlet hose of the oil cooler in the radiator (see Figure 4). CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath vapors or mist from spray. 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds. NOTE: For Quest vehicles (V40/V41 Models); Page 2845 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7554 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 4155 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6013 Ground Distribution Page 1391 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) Page 4493 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6380 NOTE: If "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform the test at a temperature of -10° C (14° F) or higher. With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 5 seconds. (3) Start engine. (4) Select "TCC S/V FNCTN P1776" of "A/T (TCC S/N)" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. (5) Touch "START". (6) When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take approximately 20 seconds.) Selector lever: D (OD "ON") Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) CMPS.RPM (REF): Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) B/FUEL SCHDL: 2.5 - 5 ms THRTL POS SEN: Less than 1.3V If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2). (7) Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELFDIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE". OR With Generic Scan Tool (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Perform test drive in "D" position (OD "ON") at least 20 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) (3) Select MODE 7 with GST. OR Page 7794 2. Remove tie rod from knuckle arm with Tool. DISASSEMBLY Idler Arm Assembly - Apply coat of multi-purpose grease to bushing. - Press bushing into idler body, and insert shaft of idler bracket carefully until bushing protrudes. Relay Rod And Tie-Rod 1. When tie rod ball joints and tie rod bar are separated, adjust tie rod length correctly. NOTE: Adjustment should be done between ball stud centers. 2. Lock tie rod clamp nut so that ball joint on outer ball stud is as follows with respect to that on inner ball stud. Standard length "L" (2WD): 343.9 mm (13.54 inch) Page 6847 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Auto Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set auto-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove auto-lock free running hub. 3. Remove snap ring. 4. Remove spindle washer and thrust washer. 5. After installing auto-lock free running hub, check operation. NOTE: When installing it, apply recommended grease to the parts shown in the above illustration. Page 8808 F. Inspect for damage using fluorescent light source and magnification. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. G. Use abrasive cleaning on test section to remove up to 0.5 mil of damaged top/clear coat.* If damage is less than 0.5 mil deep, clean affected panels with abrasive method. After polishing, inspect for swirl marks using halogen lights. If damage is more than 0.5 mil deep, the affected panels must be repaired either by re-clear, re-color/clear coat, or re-color coated (on vehicles with no final clear coat). A. Wash Procedure Wash Equipment and Materials: Spray wash system (a mobile or stationary unit with hand held spray similar to a coin operated car wash that provides soap solution, rinse water and de-ionized final rinse). Car wash detergent containing no phosphates, (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100). Clean 100% cotton terry cloth towels. De-ionized water for the final rinse. De-ionized water is highly recommended as it reduces water spotting. De-ionizing cylinders can be purchased or rented from water purification companies 1. During the summer months, the early morning hours are the best time to wash a car unless you can wash and dry it in the shade. Never wash a car under the hot sun. All paint is subject to water spot damage when washed under the sun due to high surface temperature. 2. Thoroughly rinse oft the surface dirt and foreign materials with a spray of clean tap water. 3. Gently apply detergent and water solution (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Caution: When washing a convertible rear window use gentle horizontal and vertical strokes, do not use a circular motion.Use a clean terry cloth towel. Also refer to NTB92-092 for additional information on convertible wash procedure. 4. Rinse with a spray of clean tap water. Make sure all detergent is flushed off the body. If soap dries on the convertible rear window or some moldings it may cause streaking. Use a spray of de-ionized water for the final rinse. 5. Use a clean damp terry cloth towel and gentle pressure to remove the majority of the rinse water allowing the remaining water film to air dry. Replace the towel frequently to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. 6. Always wash, rinse, and dry a vehicle beginning with the roof and glass. Then the hood and trunk followed by the vertical surfaces. Wash, rinse, and dry one section at a time if low humidity causes fast drying. Do not allow soap solution or rinse water to dry on the finish. B. Identifying Contamination Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp or a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is most easily done with a 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Page 3987 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7462 Power Supply Routing: Schematic (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9527 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing order Firing order Firing order 1-3-4-2 Page 6853 2. To confirm proper assembly after the replacement center bearing is installed, check the alignment of the front and middle u-joints (see Figure 2). If there is vibration after the propeller shaft is re-assembled, re-check the propeller shaft alignment (Figure 2, above). PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for this incident. A claim to Nissan for the repair of this incident may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. 1. Reference the "Parts Information" table above and use the indicated "Center Bearing Kit" P/N as the PFP. 2. As indicated by the customer complaint. 3. As indicated by the technician's diagnosis. A/C - System Receiver Drier Replacement Guidelines Receiver Dryer: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Receiver Drier Replacement Guidelines Classification: HA98-006 Reference: NTB98-106 Date: January 1, 1999 NEW A/C SYSTEM RECEIVER DRIER REPLACEMENT GUIDELINES APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models with R-134a refrigerant SERVICE INFORMATION The receiver drier (liquid tank) in the A/C system filters, dries and temporarily stores refrigerant received from the condenser. The receiver drier "tank" is equipped with a strainer that will retain most foreign material and prohibit it from circulating through the system. The receiver drier currently used in the Nissan R-134a A/C systems has an operating life of approximately ten years. It is not necessary to replace the drier in an R-134a system during routine service. In the older R-12 air conditioning systems, a small amount of moisture would enter the refrigerant system over time, requiring frequent receiver drier replacement. Improvements in the newer R-134a systems drastically reduce the amount of moisture that is able to enter the system, therefore extending the life of the receiver drier. The current R-134a systems incorporate improved drying agents, compressor lip seals, non-permeable hoses and captured O-rings on most system connections. The following service procedure provides recommendations and guidelines that support the extended life of the R-134a A/C systems. SERVICE PROCEDURE Whenever the receiver drier or any A/C hose is disconnected for servicing always cover the exposed ports to prevent debris and moisture from entering the unit (see Figure 1 for inlet and outlet port location). The A/C receiver drier in an R-134a system should be replaced only if: 1. The compressor is seized; 2. System oil contains metallic flakes; 3. Diagnosis indicates a major blockage. Page 3180 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5068 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 524 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4452 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5407 Fuel Injector: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4461 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4666 Ground Distribution Page 9252 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2612 Ground Distribution Page 5272 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6486 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1018 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4373 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3380 Page 5988 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4440 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Component Locations Page 6168 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1474 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 281 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2368 Attachment General Procedure Page 5888 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3728 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Driveshaft - Center Bearing Replacement Procedure Center Support: Technical Service Bulletins Driveshaft - Center Bearing Replacement Procedure Classification: PD99-002 Reference: TB00-025 Date: March 10, 2000 1998-2000 FRONTIER AND 2000 XTERRA PROPELLER SHAFT CENTER BEARING REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) 2000 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION If the propeller shaft center bearing must be replaced on a 1998-2000 Frontier or 2000 Xterra, center bearing kits are now available as shown in the PARTS INFORMATION Section of this bulletin. Use the appropriate Service Manual for details on disassembly and re-assembly of the propeller shaft, but be sure to align the shaft as shown in Propeller Shaft Alignment instructions below. NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for this incident. A claim to Nissan for the repair of this incident may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. Propeller Shaft Alignment: It is very important that alignment be marked when disassembling the two parts of the propeller shaft. Failure to ensure propeller shaft alignment throughout the service procedure may affect balance of the propeller shaft. 1. When disassembling the propeller shaft, place an alignment mark on the propeller shaft and yoke (see Figure 1). Page 8927 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6770 Axle Shaft: Application and ID AVAILABLE DRIVESHAFT SNAP RINGS Thickness And Part No. 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) ............................................................................................................................. ................................................. 39253-88 G10 1.3 mm (0.051 inch) ................................................... ........................................................................................................................... 39253-88 G11 1.5 mm (0.059 inch) ................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 39253-88 G12 1.7 mm (0.067 inch) ......................................................... ..................................................................................................................... 39253-88 G13 1.9 mm (0.075 inch) .......................................................................................................................................... .................................... 39253-88 G14 2.1 mm (0.083 inch) ................................................................ .............................................................................................................. 39253-88 G15 2.3 mm (0.091 inch) .......................................................................................................................................... .................................... 39253-88 G16 MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) BULLETIN NUMBER: NTB99-013 CLASSIFICATION: EC99-001 DATE: April 1, 1999 TITLE: 1998-99 MY FRONTIER TRUCK M/T MIL "ON" P0500 SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied 1998-99 Frontier Truck (manual transmission, KA24DE Engine only) shows the following conditions: 1. MIL "ON" with DTC P0500 stored, 2. CONSULT freeze frame data indicates an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less, 3. No abnormal speedometer indication during test drive, then use this bulletin to repair the incident This incident may be due to a clutch slip condition for more than 10 seconds with a vehicle forward speed of less than 3 mph. This situation could occur during hill holding using clutch slip. Correct this incident by installing the ECM listed in the Parts Information using the following service procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTC stored is P0500 2. Verify the CONSULT freeze frame data stored has an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less (see Figure 1). 3. Conduct test drive to confirm there is no abnormal speedometer indication: a) Connect CONSULT and select Start, Engine, Data Monitor and Main Signals b) Test drive vehicle and ensure the speedometer and the vehicle speed sensor value displayed in Data Monitor provide consistent speed Page 5884 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4581 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7019 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2996 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 8373 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 5044 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 753 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8901 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 5013 Page 3783 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5619 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Engine - Rattle Noise After Overnight Cold Soak Timing Chain Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Rattle Noise After Overnight Cold Soak Classification: EM99-001 Reference: NTB99-079 Date: October 28, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER RATTLE NOISE AFTER OVERNIGHT COLD SOAK APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-1999 Frontier (D22) With KA24DE Engine APPLIED ENGINE #: Prior to KA24-816611 SERVICE INFORMATION Use this bulletin to perform repairs if an applied 1998 or 1999 Frontier equipped with a KA24DE engine exhibits a rattle noise after sitting overnight (cold soak). The noise this bulletin addresses would be evident in the valve cover area, and would last about three seconds. The noise would not occur again until another overnight cold soak. SERVICE PROCEDURE Diagnose This incident, if it occurs, would only be heard after an overnight soak. If a rattle noise can be duplicated while the engine is warm, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to engine noise diagnoses. Repair Use the following procedure to replace the cam bracket bolts and upper chain tensioner: 1. Remove the valve cover and place a rag under the cam sprocket to prevent parts from falling down into the timing cover. 2. Starting at the front cam bracket on the intake cam, remove the two bolts securing the cam bracket to the head (see Figure 1). It is not necessary to remove the cam bracket. 3. Install two new (Counter Measure) bolts (P/N 13058-2J203) finger tight. Page 3642 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transaxle housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis of misfire. TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Classification: EC99-005b Reference: NTB99-053b Date: January 22, 2002 NISSAN REVISED TPS ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE This bulletin amends NTB99-053a. The Service Information and Service Procedure has been revised. In addition, TPS Connector tool (Kent-Moore # J45178) information has been included. Please discard all copies of NTB99-053a. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1995-1998 Maxima (A32) 1996-1998 Pathfinder (R50) 1995-1998 240SX (S14) 1995-1998 Sentra/200SX (B14) w/GA16 & SR20 engines 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998 Frontier (D22) 1995-1997 Altima (U13) 1998 Altima (L30) 1996-1998 Quest (V40) SERVICE INFORMATION The adjustment procedure for the throttle position sensor (TPS) has been revised and standardized for all the Applied Vehicles. ^ The TPS contains a closed throttle position switch (CTPS) and a variable output throttle position sensor. ^ This procedure uses the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) status (ON or OFF) instead of the throttle position sensor (variable output voltage) to adjust the TPS. ^ Incorrect adjustment of the CTPS may cause one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to be displayed: P1447, P0120, P0510, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P1705. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check fast idle cam (FIC) function, if equipped (refer to appropriate Service Manual). When finished, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and the fast idle cam (if equipped) has released. Then turn the engine "OFF". 2. Disconnect the harness connector (see Figure 1) from the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) position of the throttle position sensor (TPS). 3. Connect an ohmmeter across the terminals for the closed throttle position switch (CTPS). Page 8575 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4739 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2224 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1265 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Specifications Page 6250 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Front Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed- end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. Page 4557 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position switch is "ON". ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. Page 119 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 8931 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Checking Electrolyte Level Battery: Testing and Inspection Checking Electrolyte Level WARNING: Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with the skin, eyes, fabrics. or painted surfaces. after touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Normally the battery does not require additional water. However, when battery is used under severe conditions, adding distilled water may be necessary during battery life. ^ Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool. ^ Add distilled water up to the MAX level. Page 6424 NOTE: If "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform the test at a temperature of -10° C (14° F) or higher. With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 5 seconds. (3) Start engine. (4) Select "TCC S/V FNCTN P1776" of "A/T (TCC S/N)" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. (5) Touch "START". (6) When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take approximately 20 seconds.) Selector lever: D (OD "ON") Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) CMPS.RPM (REF): Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) B/FUEL SCHDL: 2.5 - 5 ms THRTL POS SEN: Less than 1.3V If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2). (7) Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELFDIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE". OR With Generic Scan Tool (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Perform test drive in "D" position (OD "ON") at least 20 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) (3) Select MODE 7 with GST. OR Page 4058 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2425 Page 5854 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 667 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit EC-FRO2-01 Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Diagrams Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 5916 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 7189 Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection Measuring Brake Lining - Check lining thickness. Standard lining thickness: 6.1 mm (0.240 inch) Lining wear limit: 1.5 mm (0.059 inch) Page 5053 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4205 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2901 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5890 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4222 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4662 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Locations Brake Warning Indicator: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 7611 Alignment: Specifications Caster GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 1°40' (1.67°) Nominal ...................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. 2°10' (2.17°) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 2°40' (2.67°) Left And Right Difference ............................................................................................................................................................ 0°45' (0.75°) or less Page 9276 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4248 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4097 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8021 Page 147 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6394 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2634 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7528 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 3797 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1997 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 8937 Ground Distribution Page 9450 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 5483 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5563 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6536 Rental Vehicle Expense Assistance: If the customer is unable to wait for the vehicle to be repaired or if the dealer does not have the replacement A/T shifter assembly in inventory, rental vehicle assistance may be submitted using expense code 502. The maximum dollar reimbursement is $30 per day for up to two (2) days ($60.00 total). Replacement parts must be ordered through the Customer Care process. Service Procedure 1. Record the radio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers by removing the (5) screws from the underside and the garnish around the key switch. Carefully snap apart the covers and lift them out. 4. Remove the screw located above the hood release lever and the screw located under the parking brake lever. Carefully unsnap the panel underneath the instrument cluster and remove the driver's side lower instrument panel by lifting and pulling it forward (See Figure 2). 5. Remove the driver's side lower knee protector bar by removing the (2) 6mm bolts and then removing the bar (see Figure 3). Page 4510 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3334 Ground Distribution Page 1580 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION For Bracket Installation Only: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. For Bracket Installation and Hose Angle Adjustment Only: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. For Evacuate Replace A/C Low Hose and Recharge System: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. Additional Expenses for P81633 ONLY. Information Page 2897 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 120 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 3100 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3305 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1398 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. Page 1115 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Specifications EGR Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance 7.9 - 9.7 M ohms at 32 deg F 0.57 - 0.70 M ohms at 122 deg F 0.08 - 0.10 M ohms at 212 deg F Voltage 4.81 VDC at 32 deg F 2.81 VDC at 122 deg F 0.8 VDC at 212 deg F Page 2828 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Testing and Inspection System Relay: Testing and Inspection Check circuit continuity between terminals by supplying 12 Volts to coil side terminals of air conditioner relay. Page 6870 Part 3 of 4 Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Specified amount [1] ............................................................................................................................ .................................................... 9.5 qts. (9.0 Liters) [1] with reservoir Page 4500 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 1596 Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection - Check fluid level in reservoir tank. It should be between Max and Min lines on reservoir tank. - If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks. - If the brake warning lamp comes on, check brake fluid level switch and parking brake switch. Page 8571 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7838 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair REMOVAL Page 116 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 4144 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5186 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6209 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5375 When the resistance of engine coolant temperature sensor is 0.26 to 0.39 k ohms, make sure that the center of mark (A) is aligned with mark (B) as shown in the figure. - If NG, adjust by turning adjusting screw. Adjusting screw tightening torque: 0.98 - 1.96 N.m (10 - 20 kg-cm, 8.7 - 17.4 in-lb) With Consult 4. Stop engine. 5. Turn ignition switch "ON" and see "COOLAN TEMP/S" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT. 6. When engine coolant temperature is 25±5°C (77±9°F), make sure that the center of mark (A) is aligned with mark (C) as shown in the figure. OR Without Consult 5. When the resistance of engine coolant temperature sensor is 1.65 to 2.40 k ohms, make sure that the center of mark (A) is aligned with mark (C) as shown in the figure. If NG, replace thermo-element and perform the above inspection and adjustment again. Page 2501 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7435 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 2939 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3692 Page 9541 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 556 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4991 3. Directly above this 25 mm hole, drill one 8 mm (0.31 in.) hole in the inside edge of the vehicle bed rail (see Figure 3). 4. Deburr both drilled holes and coat the bare metal surfaces with an anti-corrosive paint. 5. Install the rubber grommet (from the kit) into the 25 mm drilled hole. 6. Install the metal breather tube into the grommet and fasten the upper plastic bracket to the bed rail through the 8 mm drilled hole with the bolt and nut from the kit (see Figure 4). Installation of the EVAP System 1. Install the EVAP canister. 2. Install the EVAP vent control valve. 3. Reconnect the two small diameter original hoses to the canister. 4. Reconnect the vent control valve electrical harness. Page 1685 ^ The graph on the following page shows that PAG oil left open to air (e.g. in an unsealed container) will absorb 2% moisture (by weight) in 120 hours (5 days). ^ PAG containers, and any A/C component which contains PAG oil (such as the compressor) should remain tightly capped and sealed until ready for use. ^ If you believe that a container of PAG oil may not have been adequately re-sealed after opening, dispose of the oil properly and use oil from a new sealed container. ^ When installing or servicing an A/C system, the refrigerant tube and hose connections should be sealed (all connections made and tightened to specification) without delay. ^ The above precautions will keep the absorption of moisture into the system to a minimum. Using moisture saturated PAG oil in R-134a systems may lead to the formation of acids and related system damage or failure. ^ Do not allow refrigerant oil (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S) to contact styrofoam, as the lubricant will damage this material. Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Speedometer Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 6196 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3527 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2498 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2418 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 257 Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Front: Sensor 13-17 ft.lb Cable 39.1-51.2 in.lb Rear Sensor (At Backing Plate) 13-17 ft.lb Page 5101 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Connecting Rod Cap Torque Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Cap Torque TORQUE VALUES Motor Mounts Outer Components Page 9167 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7030 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7840 NOTE: Tighten U-bolts so that the lengths of all U-bolts under spring pad are the same. 5. Install shock absorber, and finger tighten the nuts. 6. Remove stands and bounce the vehicle to stabilize suspension to an unladen state. 7. Tighten spring shackle nuts, front pin nuts and shock absorber nuts. NOTE: When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition with tires on the ground. Unladed is fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Page 3171 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2784 EC-FRO2-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Page 4541 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3037 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 194 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7527 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 1684 Comments regarding PAG refrigerant oils: ^ PAG oil absorbs moisture from the air at an exceptionally fast rate, and moisture can damage the A/C system. Page 2847 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3384 Overall inspection sequence Page 3776 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2638 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1002 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 542 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5499 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1769 Locations Multiple Junction Connector: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2769 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4111 Ground Distribution Page 2402 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 494 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4798 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 9066 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Air Bag - Harness Replacement, Not Repair Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag - Harness Replacement, Not Repair Classification: RS97-002 Reference: NTB97-017 AIR BAG HARNESS REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLE(S) ALL SERVICE INFORMATION The next update to the Warranty Flat Rate Manual will include the following correction to the RQ section regarding the air bag harness: WAS:Repair the Air Bag Harness RQ30AA IS: Replace the Air Bag Harness RQ30AA DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR, SPLICE OR MODIFY ANY AIR BAG HARNESS UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. Refer to the RS section of the appropriate service manual for SRS diagnostic/inspection information. Page 4115 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3989 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7967 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 8176 Make sure the tank is properly positioned/seated (especially after moving the ACR4 machine) on the scale platform and that it does not touch surrounding components (such as the back bar, hoses, etc.). Also, make sure the weight scale platform securing screw is properly tightened. Residual Refrigerant Recover all residual refrigerant from the hoses before connection to the vehicle. Residual Refrigerant Oil Drain all refrigerant oil from the oil separator (see Figure 4) before recovering refrigerant. This prepares the oil separator to measure the amount of oil removed during the recovery process. Disturbing the ACR4 Machine Do not disturb or touch the ACR4 machine when it is recovering or recharging as this will upset the weight scale and cause the machine to record an inaccurate recovery amount and/or dispence an incorrect charge. Transfer All Refrigerant to Vehicle Use the following steps to ensure all of the refrigerant charge is transferred to the vehicle's A/C system. 1. When the display shows "CPL" (charge is complete), close the control panel high side valve (both control panel high and low side valves should now be closed). 2. Start the vehicle and let the A/C run until the gauge readings stabilize. Check for cold air at the vents. 3. With the compressor running, close the high side (red) coupler valve (on the end of the high side hose) and disconnect it from the vehicle. 4. Open the control panel high and low side valves. This will allow the residual refrigerant to be drawn into the vehicle's A/C system through the low (blue) hose. 5. Close the low side (blue) coupler valve (on the end of the low side hose) and disconnect it from the vehicle. NOTE: If your dealership purchases R134a in small, disposable (12 oz) cans, do not charge the vehicle's A/C system with the can directly. Transfer the refrigerant from the small can to the ACR4 refrigerant tank (see page 17 of the ACR4 Operating Instruction Manual). Charging the A/C system directly from the 12 oz refrigerant can (using a "can tap" gauge set) will not properly control the weight of refrigerant being transferred. This will result in an overcharge or undercharge condition and improper A/C performance. Page 641 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 9179 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6363 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 7826 5. After installing drive shaft, check drive shaft axial end play. (4WD) Do not reuse snap ring once it has been removed. Refer to Axle Shaft Assembly, Constant Velocity Type / Service and Repair. Page 1648 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid ...................................................................................................................................................... Dexron III, Or Equivalent Page 694 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3360 Page 4502 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3014 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-VSS-01 Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Circuit Diagrams Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit (VSS) Connectors Page 3939 Ground Distribution Page 8515 ^ Re-programming of additional remote controllers is not covered by warranty. ^ Remote controller replacement due to customer abuse, purse/pocket damage, and/or loss is not covered by warranty. ^ The replacement of the remote controller battery is not covered by warranty. Service Procedure For 1998-2000 Maxima, Pathfinder, Sentra, Altima, and Frontier Vehicles 2000 Quest and Xterra Vehicles: 1. Programming Procedure: A. Get in the vehicle. Close and lock all doors using the driver's power door lock-unlock switch. B. Insert and remove the ignition key more than 6 times within a 10 second period (at a rate of one insertion/removal cycle per second). The key should be withdrawn from the ignition key cylinder completely each time it is removed. NOTE: Do not rush the insertion/removal key cycling process. C. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. The ignition key should remain in the "ACC" position throughout the remainder of the programming, including programming of additional remote controllers. D. Press any button on the remote controller one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The hazard warning lights will flash twice when this step is accurately completed and programming is successful. For 2000 Quest vehicles, the side marker/tail/license lamps will flash twice when programming is successful. E. If you are programming only one remote, proceed to step 3A. If programming additional remotes, continue with step 2A, below. 2. Programming Additional Remote Controllers (Maximum of 4 Remotes): A. Remain inside the vehicle after programming the first remote. B. Use the driver's power door lock-unlock switch to unlock and then lock the doors. C. Press any button on one of the additional remote controllers one time. NOTE: Do not press the button more than one time in the above step. If the button is pressed more than one time, the programming procedure will not be successful. The hazard warning lights will flash twice when programming is successful. For 2000 Quest vehicles, the side marker/tail/license lamps will flash twice when programming is successful. If there is more than one additional remote to be programmed, repeat steps 2A through 2C above for each additional remote. 3. End Programming: A. Remove the key from the ignition. B. Use the door lock-unlock switch on the driver's door to unlock the doors. Open the driver's door to complete the programming C. Check the operation of each of the remote controllers by locking/unlocking the doors with each remote controller you have programmed. For 1999 Quest Vehicles: 1. Programming Procedure: A. Get in the vehicle. Close and lock all doors using the driver's power door lock-unlock switch. Page 4674 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5542 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9362 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4214 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3984 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 8692 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 398 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5493 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3954 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit EC-FRO2-01 Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Diagrams Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 5491 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6300 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7964 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 3444 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Drive Belt: Customer Interest A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Classification: HA99-006 Reference: NTB99-070 Date: October 5, 1999 A/C IDLER PULLEY WHINE NOISE AT 3000 ENGINE RPM (FOUR CYLINDER ENGINE ONLY) APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) - 2WD 2000 Xterra (WD22) - 2WD APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle exhibits a whine noise at or around 3,000 engine RPM, the cause may be the air conditioning (A/C) idler pulley. Use the service procedure listed below to diagnose and correct the incident. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Run the engine at or around 3,000 RPM with the A/C ON and OFF to determine when the whine noise occurs. NOTE: The A/C will operate with the A/C button turned off if the mode selector is in the foot/defrost or defrost position and the fan is turned on. To ensure the A/C is off, move the fan speed selector to the off position. A. If the whine noise occurs with the A/C off (A/C compressor not operating), look for other sources of the whine noise. B. If the whine noise only occurs when the A/C is on (A/C compressor operating) and the noise can be pin pointed to the idler pulley with a stethoscope or Chassis Ears(TM), proceed with step 2. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Loosen (but do not remove) the nut that secures the idler pulley (see Figure 1). 4. Remove the E-ring from the idler pulley adjusting bolt (see Figure 1). 5. Remove the idler pulley adjusting bolt. 6. Remove the A/C compressor drive belt from the idler pulley. Page 4586 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, A/T - Fluid Application Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Application Classification: AT96-001 Reference: NTB98-042 Date: May 15, 1998 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID This amended version of NTB95-055 updates information regarding the Recommendation ATF usage. Please disregard previous NTB95-055 and NTB93-065. SERVICE INFORMATION IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Matic "D" ATF must be used in performing repairs paid by Nissan, such as warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for repairs when non-genuine Nissan Matic "D" is used. For current and prior production Nissan vehicles, front wheel and/or rear wheel drive, only Nissan Matic "D", or other ashless petroleum based ATF, is formulated to meet the requirements of Nissan automatic transmissions and automatic transaxles. Nissan Matic "D", or other ashless petroleum based ATF, assists in ensuring transmission durability, smooth driveability, low exhaust emissions and customer satisfaction. Only an ashless type petroleum based ATF should be used to repair Nissan vehicles because other types of ATF may contain compounds which adversely affect transmission performance. Specifically, ash will impact friction response. In addition, ATF with ash is likely to have a higher Zinc (Zn) content. Zinc will adhere to clutch linings and cause slippage, resulting in transmission damage. For ordering procedures, please refer to the "Dealer Confidential Parts Price List". Page 5975 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 6597 Page 3669 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4868 7. Remove the idler pulley assembly from the A/C compressor bracket. 8. Install the new idler pulley assembly making sure the E-ring is installed on the adjusting bolt. 9. Adjust the A/C drive belt deflection to specification. Refer to the "A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification" chart below. A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification 10. Tighten the nut that secures idler pulley to 16 - 22 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb). 11. Re-install the engine under cover. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 5418 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. Page 8889 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 4732 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 7353 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 6044 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2618 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3015 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Paint - Refinish Paint Codes/Cross Reference Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Refinish Paint Codes/Cross Reference Classification: BT97-004 Reference: NTB97-052 Date: July 30, 1997 1998 MODEL REFINISH PAINT CODES APPLIED VEHICLES: All SERVICE INFORMATION Page 7583 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. Page 5115 Leak Detection Valve: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 9125 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3649 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Testing and Inspection Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Check continuity between terminals at each switch position. Page 3773 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7412 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6969 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 7191 Brake Shoe Removal 2. After removing retainer, remove spring by rotating shoes. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to damage wheel cylinder piston boots. ^ Be careful not to damage parking brake cable when separating it. 3. Remove adjuster 4. Disconnect parking brake cable from toggle lever. Toggle Lever Pin Removal 5. Remove retainer clip with a suitable tool. Then separate toggle lever and brake shoe. INSTALLATION 1. Fit toggle lever to brake shoe with retainer clip. Grease Contact Areas 2. Apply brake grease to the contact areas shown. 3. Shorten adjuster by rotating it. Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 2992 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1832 Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger With Consult 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". OR Without Consult 1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and reconnect fuel pump fuse. Page 6608 1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris (see Figure 12). A. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 inch) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal debris is found, the radiator/oil cooler can be re-used. B. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter (see Figure 13), the oil-cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/oil cooler must be replaced. Final Inspection: After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components. Page 5413 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Ignition - Distributor Rotor Replacement Ignition Rotor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Distributor Rotor Replacement Classification: EC97-002a Reference: NTB97-004a Date: May 19, 1999 DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR REPLACEMENT This amended version of NTB97-004 adds B14, D21, WD22, and L30 information to the Applied Vehicles section. Please discard all paper copies of NTB97-004. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1995-1999 Sentra (B14) - GA16DE Engine only 1995-1998 200SX (B14) GA16DE Engine only 1990-97 Truck (D21) - KA24 Engines only 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) KA24DE Engine only 1998-2000 Altima (L30) - All 2000 Xterra (WD22) - KA24DE Engine only SERVICE INFORMATION Distributor rotors are now available as replacement parts for the vehicles listed in the Applied Vehicles section of this bulletin. Order them as P/N 22157-4B000. CAUTION: The rotor hold-down screw securing the distributor rotor to the distributor shaft must be torqued to 32 +/- 3 in-lb (37 +/- 3 kg-cm). If not secured to the proper torque the rotor may come loose causing the engine to stop without warning. PARTS INFORMATION Suspension - Steering Pull Diagnosis Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Steering Pull Diagnosis Classification: ST01-003 Reference: NTB01-083 Date: November 28, 2001 1998-2002 FRONTIER AND 2000-2002 XTERRA STEERING PULL DURING BRAKING APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2002 Frontier (D22) 2000-2002 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied Frontier or Xterra exhibits a slight steering pull (left or right) during: ^ Moderate application of the brakes to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from a speed of between 20 and 30 mph. The following steps should be performed in order given; 1. The vehicle suspension should be inspected. 2. Vehicle ride height should be checked. 3. Alignment should be checked to ensure that all measurements are within factory specifications. When performing an alignment, refer to the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for specifications and adjustment procedures. Page 6755 The Rear Axle Bearing Removal Kit (P/N J-45073) shown is an essential tool and will be automatically sent to all Nissan dealers. The Service Procedure provides instructions for using the new "Rear Axle Bearing Removal Kit" P/N J-45073 for removing the pressed-on components mentioned above. Service Procedure ABS Rotor Ring Removal (if equipped) 1. Remove the rear axle from the vehicle using the procedure listed in the applicable service manual. Stand the axle up on its wheel studs (splined end of the axle is facing upward). 2. Remove the ABS Rotor Ring (using the components in the J-45073 kit) as follows: A. Slide the sleeve P/N J-25852-4 over the extension tube P/N J-45073-12 (see Figure 1a). B. Slide the extension tube P/N J-45073-12 (with sleeve P/N J-25852-4) over the vehicle's axle shaft (see Figure lb). Page 197 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5660 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Axle Shaft Assembly, Constant Velocity Type Page 7740 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3259 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 904 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6212 Knock Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-KS-01 Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Circuit Diagrams Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 5031 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 6239 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2180 Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Gap Spark plug gap mm. 1.0-1.1 Spark plug gap in. 0.039-0.043 Page 7445 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2508 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 8580 Ground Distribution Page 1204 Ground Distribution Page 6766 Axle Shaft: Fluid Type Specifications Quality ................................................................................................................................................. ..................... Nissan Genuine Grease, Or Equivalent Page 1037 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2294 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8469 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Indicator Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Indicator REMOVAL Passenger Air Bag Module Deactivation Switch Indicator CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes 1. Remove meter cover. 2. Release passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator tabs from back side of meter cover. 3. Remove passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator from front side of meter cover. INSTALLATION To install, reverse removal procedure. After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 1371 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 5430 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. 2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine side). 3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube. 4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. At idling: With vacuum hose connected Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm.sq, 34 psi) With vacuum hose disconnected Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm.sq, 43 psi) If results are unsatisfactory, perform "Fuel Pressure Regulator Check". Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8188 Specifications Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing: Specifications MAIN DRIVE GEAR BEARING OD MAINSHAFT BEARING (2WD MODEL) Page 9525 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4757 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position switch is "ON". ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. Page 8940 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 9289 Ground Distribution Page 6054 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 2598 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5355 Ground Distribution Page 7736 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4081 Page 5635 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2928 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 869 Ground Distribution Page 529 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 199 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9359 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1585 5. Retighten the joint connection nut to 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb). CAUTION: Use a backup wrench on the low hose when tightening the joint connection nut. Low Hose Bracket Installation 1. Separate the two halves of the bracket by removing the screw. 2. Install the two halves of the bracket on the compressor end of the A/C low hose at the tube bend closest to the compressor flange (see Figure 6). NOTE: When installing the bracket, make sure the bracket half with the weld nut on the side points away from the engine. 3. Install and tighten the bracket screw to 3.8 - 4.5 N.m (0.4 - 0.5 kg-m, 33 - 40 in-lb). Page 5141 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3819 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1591 Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications Model PB59K Power Steering Line Flare Nut ............................................................................................................................................... 39 - 51 Nm (29 - 38 ft. lbs.) Page 3060 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4805 Control Units/Module F29 Control Units/Module Page 95 Page 272 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1140 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5700 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4494 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5185 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3251 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5063 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6334 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 2397 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5393 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3528 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2753 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 748 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3985 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8708 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4028 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Spark Plug Torque Values Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Torque Spark plug torque 14-22 ft. lb Page 8159 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION For Bracket Installation Only: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. For Bracket Installation and Hose Angle Adjustment Only: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. For Evacuate Replace A/C Low Hose and Recharge System: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. Additional Expenses for P81633 ONLY. Information Page 4744 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3664 Ground Distribution Page 2219 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 7754 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Pump: Mechanical Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Connector ............................................................................................................................................ ................................... 69 - 78 Nm (51 - 58 ft. lbs.) Connector Bolt ..................................................... .................................................................................................................. 49 - 69 Nm (36 - 51 ft. lbs.) Mounting Bracket To Engine ................................................................................................................................................. 22 - 29 Nm (16 - 22 ft. lbs.) Pulley Bolt ............................................................................................................ ................................................................. 54 - 68 Nm (40 - 50 ft. lbs.) Pump To Mounting Bracket: Horizontal Bolt ............................................................................................................................................................. 16 - 21 Nm (11.6 - 15 ft. lbs.) Vertical Bolt .......................................................................................... ........................................................................... 27 - 37 Nm (20 - 27 ft. lbs.) Rear Housing Bolts ......................................................................................................................................................... 14 - 18 Nm (120 - 156 inch lbs.) Suction Pipe .......................................................................................... .......................................................................... 14 - 18 Nm (120 - 156 inch lbs.) Page 6361 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1739 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9234 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3978 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3995 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4254 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5340 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4467 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2894 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 922 EGR Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-EGR/TS-01 EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) Circuit Diagrams EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) EGR Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 7742 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2495 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Testing and Inspection Fuel Filler Cap: Testing and Inspection FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (Built into fuel filler cap) 1. Wipe clean valve housing. 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: 16.0 - 20.0 kPa (0.163 - 0.204 kg/sq.cm, 2.32 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: -6.0 to -3.5 kPa (-0.061 to -0.036 kg/sq.cm, -0.87 to -0.51 psi) 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. Page 3705 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 3690 Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 5852 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5237 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3916 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 6371 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4704 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3033 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 6261 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4337 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Locations EGR Tube: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 2273 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4543 Ground Distribution Locations Keyless Entry Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3814 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 6963 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4788 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2283 Ground Distribution Locations Multiple Junction Connector: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1818 Axle Nut: Specifications Axle / Bearing Lock Nut TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Screws ................................................................................................................................. .................................. 49 - 69 Nm (36 - 51 ft. lbs.) Page 1106 Throttle Position Sensor: Connector Views Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 8254 Thermal Limiting Fuse: Testing and Inspection Inspection - When servicing, do not allow foreign matter to get into compressor. - Check continuity between two terminals. Page 4052 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8290 SRS Component Parts Location Page 6485 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3476 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 8589 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4421 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6561 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 8060 Page 3533 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4528 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8742 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1939 Crankshaft: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Block. Page 1438 Lower Arm Pivot Height "H" [1]: 45.5 - 49.5 mm (1.791 - 1.949 inch) NOTE: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. - "H" is the distance from the center of lower link spindle to the bottom of tension rod attaching bolt. Page 5280 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3944 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 756 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 6503 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position switch is "ON". ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. Page 3893 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1847 Page 1407 The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center Page 8417 12. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to make sure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 12). 13. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 14. Confirm that the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring by latching and unlatching it and allowing it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 15. Repeat steps 1 through 14 of this procedure on the remaining front seat belt. Page 2846 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Service Specifications Page 4650 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2489 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 392 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1361 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5807 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7405 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications Specified type [1] ................................................................................................................................................. Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid or equivalent [1] DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Page 4099 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Specifications EGR Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance 7.9 - 9.7 M ohms at 32 deg F 0.57 - 0.70 M ohms at 122 deg F 0.08 - 0.10 M ohms at 212 deg F Voltage 4.81 VDC at 32 deg F 2.81 VDC at 122 deg F 0.8 VDC at 212 deg F Page 2585 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 121 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 4501 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 1737 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Replacement Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Replacement COMPONENTS WARNING: CLEAN BRAKE PADS WITH A VACUUM DUST COLLECTOR TO MINIMIZE THE HAZARD OF AIRBORNE MATERIALS. REMOVAL 1. Remove torque member fixing bolts and connecting bolt. 2. Remove brake hose retaining bolt. INSTALLATION 1. Install caliper assembly. 2. Install brake hose to caliper securely. Page 559 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 450 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 718 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 7154 B. For best accuracy, "stabilize" (firmly support) the vehicle with a jack or jack stand as shown in Figure 1. ^ On some hoists, the vehicle may "wobble" a little while using the on-car brake lathe. Not good. CAUTION: Any rocking motion (wobble) of the vehicle during the ProCut(TM) "Automatic compensation" procedure will reduce the accuracy of the resurfacing. ^ If wobble occurs during the rotor resurfacing process/procedure, the finished rotor runout may be more than factory specification and should be checked before using the rotor. C. Prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS speed sensors. ^ Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS speed sensor's magnet. It is best to clean the ABS sensor with the rotor removed. D. After a rotor has been resurfaced with the ProCut(TM) brake lathe: ^ If the rotor must be removed for any reason, mark the exact location (rotor to axle hub) before removing the rotor (see Figure 2). ^ The rotor must be reinstalled back to the same location. E. Do not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact driver. ^ Use a torque wrench to tighten the lug nuts to the proper torque specification. ^ Uneven or high torque applied to the lug nuts may "distort" (warp) the brake rotor and hub. This may increase rotor runout and cause excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Page 3815 Idle Up Control Valve: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 9416 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 2742 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 1188 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications Specified type [1] ................................................................................................................................................. Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid or equivalent [1] DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Page 471 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 874 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4961 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 9294 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 6480 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2624 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Diagrams EC-ECTS-01 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Circuit Diagrams Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 3321 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3333 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5154 Ground Distribution Page 8436 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 3955 EC-FRO2/H-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1656 Change the filter/dryer (see Figure 2) when 3OOlbs of refrigerant (approximately 150 cars) has been recovered (display reads "CH-F") or sooner if the moisture indicator does not turn green during recycling. ACR4 Leak Check Check the ACR4 for leaks every 3 months or as specified by state or local laws. Weight Scale Platform Securing Screw Make sure the weight scale platform securing screw is properly tightened. Weight Scale Accuracy Check the weight scale accuracy at a minimum of every 3 months (or sooner if the scale is suspected to be inaccurate). Use the following procedure to check the scale accuracy. 1. Simultaneously press the "SHIFT/RESET" and "ENTER" buttons to get into the diagnostic mode (see Figure 3). 2. Press "6" on the key pad to display the approximate scale platform weight Page 3471 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Specifications Fuel Injector: Specifications OHMS OHMS Resistance at temperature 10-14 ohms at 77 deg. F Page 3628 Ground Distribution Page 4142 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9407 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1316 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2825 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5520 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5855 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6280 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5925 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 8946 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7174 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 5781 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5076 Ground Distribution Page 1740 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 4384 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2633 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 663 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9145 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 9545 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5240 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9254 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Steering - Pull/Drift Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 7033 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 6427 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve 1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3). Resistance: Approximately 25 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] 2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3) with battery voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be operated. 4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve 1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly. 2. Check torque converter clutch control valve. - Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. - Valve, and sleeve are tree from burrs, dents and scratches. - Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. - Hydraulic line is tree from obstacles. 3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve. Page 4228 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5487 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4105 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2281 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 859 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 8977 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 148 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3158 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 527 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4137 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3194 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7881 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications Use a Quality, Multi-purpose wheel bearing grease. Page 5365 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Engine Compartment Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7316 Page 2567 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Steering - Pull/Drift Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 7776 Disassembly STEERING GEAR MODEL PB59K CAUTION: Oil sealing parts, dust cover, copper washer and snap ring must not be used again after removal. NOTE: Before disassembly, measure turning torque. If not within specifications, replace steering gear assembly. 1. Place steering gear in a vise with Tool. 2. Set worm gear in a straight ahead position. 3. Loosen (do not remove) sector shaft cover bolt. 4. Knock out end of sector shaft with a plastic hammer. 5. Remove sector shaft by hand. Page 4349 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 9251 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3957 EC-FRO2-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 6010 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Locations Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3434 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 468 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 9611 ^ A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify impact marks that may be less than 1 mm in diameter. NOTE: A lead, or crack from an impact point can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Compound crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass This type of crack is always caused by impact to the glass. The point of impact is located where the crack "branches out". Cracks that are only in the middle of the glass This type of crack does not begin or end at the edge of the glass. ^ These cracks are always caused by an impact to the glass and are not covered under warranty. 2) How to determine if glass damage is due to a scratch in the glass surface. Cracks from a scratch in the glass surface Glass is produced by fusing together various raw materials such as silica, soda ash, and limestone, and has a hardness of 5 to 6 on the Mohs scale (for reference, a diamond has a hardness of 10 on the same scale). Since earth and sand can contain substances harder than that of glass, glass can be easily scratched by: ^ Fine sand particles ^ Hard metal ^ Rubbing action of contaminated wiper rubbers, or sand partials caught between the wiper and the glass, especially when operating the wipers in a dry Page 8213 Comments regarding vacuum pump use: ^ The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the lubrication for R-134a A/C systems. ^ The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure, causing the vacuum pump lubricant to migrate out of the pump if the pump is switched oft after evacuation (vacuuming) and there is no shut off valve between the pump and the hose. ^ To prevent the migration of vacuum pump lubricant into service hoses, it is necessary to use a valve (which can be manually opened or closed) near the connection of the service hose to the pump. ^ On a vacuum pump which is equipped with an isolation valve (usually part of the vacuum pump), closing this valve will isolate the service hose from the pump. ^ For pumps without an isolation valve, be certain that the service hose is equipped with a manual shut off valve near the pump end of the hose. ^ Hoses which contain an automatic shut off valve at the end of the service hose must be disconnected from the vacuum pump to prevent the migration of lubricant; as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricant may migrate (with pump off). ^ One-way valves which open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition are not recommended, because this valve may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum. Page 1834 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 2902 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5099 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6083 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5374 Fast Idle Cam: Adjustments COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The FIC is installed on the throttle body to maintain adequate engine speed while the engine is cold. It is operated by a volumetric change in wax located inside the thermo-element. The thermoelement is operated by engine coolant temperature. COMPONENT INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT With Consult 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. See "COOLAN TEMP/S" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT. 3. Start engine and warm it up. When engine temperature is 80±5°C (176±9°F), make sure that the center of mark (A) is aligned with mark (B) as shown in the figure. OR Without Consult 1. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector and check resistance as shown in the figure. 3. Start engine and warm it up. Page 7746 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3734 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9344 Refer to the "Diagnosis/Repair Flow Chart" shown to diagnose and resolve this incident, should it occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE Headlight Wire Harness Connector Replacement Procedure 1. Disconnect the vehicle-side wire harness connector from the headlight bulb. 2. Cut the vehicle wire harness about an inch back from the headlight harness connector. 3. Cut the wires of the replacement connector to the appropriate length. 4. Strip the end of each wire (on the vehicle wire harness side and on the replacement connector wires). Page 4283 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 6605 4. Use hose clamps and temporarily connect a length of suitable hose between the bypass valve fittings that go to the oil cooler (see Figure 6). 5. Pinch/clamp the temporary hose to prevent flow through the loop (see Figure 6). 6. Cover the end of the bypass inlet line with a shop rag to catch any oil spray. 7. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) into the outlet for 10 second intervals, three times (see Figure 6). 8. Re-connect the transmission lines and remove the temporary hose loop (see Figure 7). 9. Go to Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles). 1996-98 Pathfinder (R50) Cleaning the Optional Air Cooled Oil-Cooler (Air Cooler) 1. Place an oil drain pan under the A/T air cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses (see Points A and B, Figure 8). 2. Disconnect the Inlet and Outlet hoses from the air cooler (see Points A and B, Figure 8). 3. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the air cooler Outlet hose (see Point B, Figure 8). CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath the vapors or the spray mist. Locations Door Switch: Locations BR-ABS-01 Anti-lock Brake System (Part 1 Of 5) SRS Component Parts Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 2806 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1108 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: If both DTC P0120 (0403) and DTC P0510 (0203) are displayed, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510 first. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch", which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. Page 2743 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4772 indications with no drop-outs or spikes. Note: A 2-3 mph (3-5 kph) difference between the CONSULT display and the speedometer is normal. 4. a) If the speedometer and speed sensor values are 0K, proceed to # 5. b) If the speedometer and speed sensor data are erratic, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to service manual for Diagnosis information. 5. Check the existing ECM part number in the vehicle that is listed either on the CONSULT freeze frame data or checked by CONSULT ECM Part Number function (see Figure 1). 6. If existing Part Number is one of those listed in Table 1, install the appropriate P/N listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair DISARMING AIR BAGS 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 2. Disconnect Air Bag Module connector. CAUTION: For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any air bag system connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. CAUTION: Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or on the complete harness, for easy identification. ARMING AIR BAGS 1. Connect Air Bag Module connector. 2. Connect both battery cables. 3. Conduct Self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to Testing and Inspection / Self-Diagnostic Procedures. Page 6920 Synchronizer Ring: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Page 9471 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 6072 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5071 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4070 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Specified amount ................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 2.375 qts. (2.2 Liters) Page 9205 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3074 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5750 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4352 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 3833 - Check plunger for seizing or sticking. - Check for broken spring. Page 4633 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1275 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4790 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3820 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2925 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2708 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5580 Idle Up Control Valve: Connector Views Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve (DTC: P0505) Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve Circuit Connectors Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-FICD Solenoid Valve IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Page 747 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2291 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 613 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7276 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair COMPONENTS REMOVAL CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ^ Be careful not to deform or bend brake pipes during removal of booster. INSTALLATION CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to deform or bend brake pipes during installation of booster. ^ Replace clevis pin if damaged. ^ Refill with new brake fluid DOT 3. ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Take care not to damage brake booster mounting bolt thread when installing. Due to the narrow angle of installation, the threads can be damaged by the dash 1. Before fitting booster, temporarily adjust clevis to dimension shown. A: 165 mm (6.50 inch) 2. Fit booster, then secure mounting nuts (brake pedal bracket to brake booster) lightly. 3. Connect brake pedal and booster input rod with clevis pin. 4. Secure mounting nuts. Tightening torque: 13 - 16 Nm (9 - 12 ft. lbs.). 5. Install master cylinder. 6. Adjust brake pedal height and free play. 7. Secure lock nut for clevis. Tightening torque: 16 - 22 Nm (12 - 16 ft. lbs.). 8. Bleed air. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 114 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 2833 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 4667 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Locations Fusible Link: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1117 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2621 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2757 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5810 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 532 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 174 Fuel Pump Relay: Connector Locations Main Harness (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2288 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Specified amount ................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 10.375 pts. (4.9 Liters) Page 206 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7620 1. Both camber and caster angles are adjusted by adjusting bolts. - If the kingpin inclination is outside specifications, check the front suspension parts for wear or damage. Replace faulty parts with new ones. 2. From the measured value, read the coordinate (or: graduation) at the intersecting point in the graph. a. If the coordinate (or graduation) at the intersecting point is positive, move the pin outward by turning the corresponding adjusting bolt by the indicated graduation. b. If the coordinate (or graduation) at the intersecting point is negative, move the pin inward by turning the corresponding adjusting bolt by the indicated graduation. After properly moving the pin(s), tighten the front and rear adjusting bolts to specifications. 3. Re-measure to ensure that the camber and caster are within specified tolerances. [Example] a. Measured values corresponding with the two values indicated below: (See Chart for 4WD models.) Camber angle: -0° 06' (-0.10°) Caster angle: 2°10' (2.17°) Page 3064 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 684 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT INSPECTION Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "RR O2 SENSOR" as the monitor item with CONSULT. (3) Check "RR O2 SENSOR" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%. "RR O2 SENSOR" should be above 0.56V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" is +25%. "RR O2 SENSOR" should be below 0.54V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" Is -25%. OR Without CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals (56) (sensor signal) and (32) (ECM ground). (3) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once. If the voltage is above 0.56V at step 3, step 4 is not necessary. (4) Check the voltage when racing up to 5,000 rpm under no load. Or keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with "OD" OFF (A/T). The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once. Page 3740 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4073 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Air Outlet Air Door: Testing and Inspection Air Outlet SYMPTOM: Air outlet does not change. AIR OUTLET CONTROL DOORS OPERATION CHECK 1. Start engine. 2. Slide fan control lever to max speed. 3. Check discharge air. a. Turn mode control switch to FACE position b. Confirm that all discharge air comes out of face vents. c. Turn mode control switch to BI-LEVEL position. d. Confirm that discharge air comes out of face vents and foot vents. e. Turn mode control switch to FOOT position. f. Confirm that discharge air comes out of foot vents, with some air from defrost vents. g. Turn mode control switch to FOOT and DEFROST (F/D) position. h. Confirm that discharge air comes out of foot vents with some air from defrost vents. i. Turn mode control switch to DEFROST (DEF) position. j. Confirm that all discharge air comes out of defrost vents. NOTE: Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Page 2181 Spark Plug: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 2421 Page 8444 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 469 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3281 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3701 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 5805 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6366 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2700 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. Page 9284 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4518 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4418 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 8801 The charts identify 1998 Nissan paint codes, New Cross Link Clear Coat (NCLC) usage, color names and refinish paint codes for major automotive paint manufacturers. For approved NCLC clear coat products and procedures, refer to Nissan Bulletin PI95-004, dated March 8, 1995 Page 4749 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5565 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 262 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear REPLACEMENT Refer to the illustration when servicing Page 7747 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 7673 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Page 2811 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 9506 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 203 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5725 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 9455 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9065 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 5085 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 1660 Additionally the PAG lubricant type, part numbers and system recharge amounts are listed for each model. Page 6604 CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only in areas with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath vapors or mist from spray. 6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds. NOTE: For Quest vehicles (V40/V41 Models), before removing the extension adapter hose from the cooler Outlet hose, turn the can over and spray only propellant (gas) for a few seconds. This will avoid fluid spill back out of the cooler hose. 7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 5). 8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the cooler Outlet hose 9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the cooler Outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. 11. Place an oil drain pan under the banjo bolts that connect the oil cooler steel lines to the transmission. 12. Remove the "banjo" bolts at the transmission, and pull the line fittings away from the transmission. 13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Go to the Workflow chart for next step. Frontier (D22) Cooler Bypass Cleaning 1. Place an oil drain pan under oil cooler hoses or lines before removing them. 2. Remove the lines from the transmission and allow the oil to drain from the lines (See Figure 6). 3. Remove the lines from the bypass valve (see Figure 6). Page 7406 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 4544 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 142 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6076 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4592 Ground Distribution Specifications Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Specifications Resistance Approx. 10 ohms at 77 deg F Page 6245 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Locations Door Switch: Locations BR-ABS-01 Anti-lock Brake System (Part 1 Of 5) SRS Component Parts Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Fluid Type Nissan Brake Fluid or DOT 3 Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch REMOVAL Passenger Air Bag Module Deactivation Switch CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 1. Detach instrument stay cover lower center from instrument panel. 2. Disconnect passenger air bag deactivation switch harness connector and cigarette lighter harness connector. 3. Remove instrument stay cover lower center. 4. Remove two screws and remove passenger air bag deactivation switch. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Passenger air bag deactivation switch is keyed for proper installation. Improper positioning of the switch will result in damage to the switch. NOTE: Be sure that passenger air bag deactivation switch and lock cylinder are in the same position as during removal for proper engagement. To install, reverse removal procedure. After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 2657 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7638 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 785 Ground Distribution Page 5395 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7613 Alignment: Specifications Camber GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 0°06' (0.10°) Nominal ...................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. 0°36' (0.60°) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 1°06' (1.10°) Left And Right Difference ............................................................................................................................................................ 0°45' (0.75°) or less Caster GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 1°40' (1.67°) Nominal ...................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. 2°10' (2.17°) Page 1439 Alignment: Service and Repair Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 413 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 8736 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 459 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5446 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 9376 Headlamp: Connector Views For Canada Headlamp (For Canada) (Part 1 Of 3) Headlamp (For Canada) (Part 2 Of 3) Headlamp (For Canada) (Part 3 Of 3) Circuit Connectors Specifications Power Steering Pressure Switch: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................................... .............................. 1.7 - 2.3 Nm (15 - 20 inch lbs.) Page 9176 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1376 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 3570 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Camshaft position sensor 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal (49) and ground, ECM terminal (44) or (48) and ground. If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sensor. Page 5585 Idle Up Control Valve: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the air conditioner is on, the IACV-FICD solenoid valve supplies additional air to adjust to the increased load. MIL ON - DTC P0420 Set/Exhaust Rattle Catalytic Converter: Customer Interest MIL ON - DTC P0420 Set/Exhaust Rattle Classification: EC00-017 Reference: NTB00-058 Date: July 12, 2000 1998 FRONTIER; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0420 STORED AND/OR EXHAUST RATTLE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998 Frontier (D22) Federal Emissions Specification ONLY APPLIED VIN: up to 1N6DD26Y9WC347717 APPLIED DATE: up to 2/13/98 APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a MIL "ON" with DTC P0420 (Three-Way Catalyst Function) stored in the ECM and/or exhaust rattle noise, the vehicle may have poor three-way catalyst function. This is usually the result of misfire. In severe cases, the catalyst structure may collapse resulting in an exhaust rattle. When proper diagnosis confirms that the three-way catalyst in an Applied Vehicle requires replacement, regardless of the root cause, also install platinum tip spark plugs specified in the Parts Information section. Platinum tip plugs provide enhanced misfire resistance under extreme driving conditions. Use the following service procedure to resolve the incident, should it occur. NOTE: If the three-way catalyst's honeycomb internal structure has collapsed, the debris will typically be trapped in the exhaust piping and muffler, causing an exhaust rattle. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Perform Self-Diagnosis using CONSULT-II. Print and attach the Freeze Frame data to the repair order. 2. If there is a DTC stored in addition to P0420, diagnose and repair the additional DTC(s) first, using the appropriate Service Manual procedure(s). 3. After diagnosing and repairing the vehicle for the non-P0420 DTC, or if P0420 is the only DTC, use the appropriate Service Manual to determine the incident cause, and repair it. NOTE: Always check the secondary ignition circuit. Check distributor cap for moisture, tracking or other indicators of insulator degradation that may cause a misfire under load. 4. If diagnosis has determined that replacement of the three-way catalyst is also necessary, replace it and install four new platinum tip spark plugs from the Parts Information section. NOTE: If the catalyst is being replaced, inspect its internal honeycomb structure by looking into each end of the converter. If the structure has collapsed or deteriorated severely, check the exhaust piping and muffler for debris. Remove all debris from the exhaust system. Replace the muffler as needed. 5. Make a note in the vehicle maintenance logs and notify the customer that platinum tip spark plugs have been installed, and that this is an upgrade from that listed in the owners manual. The maintenance interval for platinum tip spark plugs is 60,000 miles and Nissan recommends that the Page 6364 Ground Distribution Page 4948 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2864 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 597 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4375 Ground Distribution Page 1322 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8993 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2583 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Description and Operation Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation CONTROL UNIT (Built-In ABS Actuator And Electric Unit) The control unit computes the wheel rotating speed by the signal current sent from the sensor. Then it supplies a DC current to the actuator solenoid valve. It also controls ON-OFF operation of the valve relay and motor relay. If any electrical malfunction should be detected in the system, the control unit causes the warning lamp to light up. In this condition, the ABS will be deactivated by the control unit, and the vehicle's brake system reverts to normal operation. Locations Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 989 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2371 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 1925 Page 5667 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3256 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6038 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 872 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2044 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Specified type ........................................................................................................................................................ API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II Alternate type ...................................................................... .............................................................................................................. API Certification Mark Specified viscosity: All temperatures ................................................................................................... ............................................................................ SAE 5W-30 (preferred) Ambient temp above -18°C (0°F) .................................................................................................................................................... ................. SAE 10W-30 Page 5166 EGR Control Solenoid: Connector Views EGRC-solenoid Valve (DTC: P1400) EGRC Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 8888 Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2578 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1197 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6024 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 865 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4076 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ECM consists of a microcomputer, diagnostic test mode selector, and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine. Page 7055 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Diagram Information and Instructions EGR Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6487 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 632 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications For FRONT or REAR Heated Oxygen Sensors. Resistance 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 77 deg F Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Grounding Point: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 5396 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 400 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Connector Views Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 6631 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 7375 Ignition Ballast Resistor: Electrical Diagrams WIRING DIAGRAM Page 3862 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 8148 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION For Bracket Installation Only: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. For Bracket Installation and Hose Angle Adjustment Only: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. For Evacuate Replace A/C Low Hose and Recharge System: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. Additional Expenses for P81633 ONLY. Information Page 3725 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2920 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8532 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 710 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Front Differential Page 4434 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1657 3. Remove the tank from the weight scale platform (see Figure 4). 4. With the weight scale platform empty, the display should read close to zero + - 0.2 lbs. If the reading is too low or too high, perform the scale calibration procedure listed below. Weight Scale Calibration Check the weight scale calibration at a minimum of every 3 months (or sooner if the scale is suspected to be inaccurate). Use the following procedure to calibrate the weight scale. 1. Simultaneously press the "SHIFT/RESET" and "ENTER" buttons to get into the diagnostic mode. 2. Press "8787". The display will read "A1". 3. Remove all weight from the scale. 4. Press "0", then press "ENTER". The display will show "0.00" and then changes to "A2". 5. Place a certified known weight (between 10 to 80 lbs) in the center of the scale platform. NOTE: A certified 10 lb weight is available from Tech-Mate (P/N J-42363). This item can be ordered from Tech-Mate by calling 800-662-2001. 6. Enter the weight using four digits (i.e., 10.00 for 10.00 lbs). 7. Press "ENTER". The display will return to vacuum mode. 8. Simultaneously press the "SHIFT/RESET" and "ENTER" buttons. 9. Press "6". The display will show the weight on the scale platform. 10. Remove the weight from the scale platform. The display will return to "0.00". 11. Press the "SHIFT/RESET" button only (not "ENTER") to return to the program mode. NOTE: If the scale cannot be calibrated or another malfunction exists, call the SPX Robinair ACR4 Help Line at 800-822-5561 or contact another qualified facility for repair. Tank Certification The tank must be certified on the "First Retest Date" (stamped into the top of the tank handle) and every 5 years after the "First Retest Date". This is according to DOT-4BA-400. NOTE: A qualified welding supply, fire extinguisher maintenance or refrigerant company can perform the certification. Operational Tips Tank Position Page 5161 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 8751 Mirrors: Electrical Diagrams EL-MIRROR-01 Mirror Circuit Diagrams Mirror Power Door Mirror Circuit Connectors Specifications Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Specifications PRESSURE Split Point ............................................................................................................................................ .............................. 3432 kPa x 0.2 (498 psi x 0.2) Page 2900 Ground Distribution Page 3086 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3884 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6882 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 5266 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5436 Main Harness (Part 2 Of 2) Fuel Pump Relay Connector # M46 Page 2536 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3881 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7203 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair CAUTION: ^ Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during bleeding operation. ^ If master cylinder is suspected to have air inside, bleed air from master cylinder first. ^ Fill reservoir with new brake fluid DOT 3. Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding air out of system. ^ Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage of brake fluid. ^ Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector or battery cable. ^ Bleed air in the following order: a. Load Sensing Valve (LSV) air bleeder (Models equipped with LSV) b. Left rear brake c. Right rear brake d. Left front brake e. Right front brake f. ABS actuator and electric unit 1. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to air bleeder valve. 2. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 3. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. 4. Close air bleeder valve. 5. Release brake pedal slowly. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 until clear brake fluid comes out of air bleeder valve. 7. Tighten air bleeder to 7 - 9 Nm (61 - 78 inch lbs.) Page 2027 7. Remove the idler pulley assembly from the A/C compressor bracket. 8. Install the new idler pulley assembly making sure the E-ring is installed on the adjusting bolt. 9. Adjust the A/C drive belt deflection to specification. Refer to the "A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification" chart below. A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification 10. Tighten the nut that secures idler pulley to 16 - 22 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb). 11. Re-install the engine under cover. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 1881 - After installation remove the pin to release piston. 3. Install camshaft sprocket cover - Use a scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from mating surface - Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block - Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to camshaft sprocket cover - Use Nissan Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant, Part No. 999 MP-A7007, Three Bond TB1207D or equivalent. - Be careful not to damage cylinder head gasket. - Be careful upper timing chain does not slip or jump when installing camshaft sprocket cover. 4. Tighten cylinder head bolts in numerical order - Tightening procedure a. Tighten all bolts to 29 Nm (3.0 kg-m, 22 ft. lbs.). b. Tighten all bolts to 79 Nm (8.1 kg-m, 59 ft. lbs.). c. Loosen all bolts completely d. Tighten all bolts to 25 to 34 Nm (2.5 to 3.5 kg-m, 18 to 25 ft. lbs.). e. Turn all bolts 86 +5/-0 degrees clockwise, or if an angle wrench is not available, tighten bolts to 75 to 84 Nm (7.6 to 8.6 kg-m, 55 to 62 ft. lbs.). 5. Install camshafts and camshaft brackets - Tightening procedure. Page 9225 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 5940 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 921 EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Views EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) EGR Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Specifications Page 561 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7703 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage Check lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm. NOTE: Make sure temperature of fluid in reservoir tank rises to 60 - 80° C (140 - 176° F). 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel at lock position for more than 15 seconds. 4. If fluid leakage from any line is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten. CAUTION: Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from power steering pump is noticed, check power steering pump. 6. If fluid leakage from power steering gear is noticed, check power steering gear. Component Locations Page 5968 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5704 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5864 Ground Distribution Page 5920 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5039 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 8567 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6975 Counter Gear: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Transfer Case; Service and Repair; Transfer Case Overhaul. Page 7915 Page 7208 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 8941 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 6501 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PNP/SW-01 Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Circuit Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 2147 Idle Speed: Specifications IDLE SPEED IDLE SPEED Idle speed M/T 800 +/- 50 RPM Idle speed A/T ( in N position) 800 +/- 50 RPM Refer to idle speed adjustments Page 8113 CAUTION: When installing high pressure tubes (with flange connections) to their mating parts, make sure the flange is fully seated onto the mating part before the securing bolt is installed and tightened (see Figure 4). If the securing bolt is installed and tightened before the tube flange is seated onto its mating part, 0-ring damage and leaks can result. Page 1200 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 996 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Mass air flow sensor 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between terminal (54) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above check. 5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust. Page 9532 Spot Lamp: Connector Views Spot Lamps Circuit Connectors Page 3215 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3005 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 7631 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 806 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 8991 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 113 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 2525 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Testing and Inspection Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Switch/Check Combination Switch Check Page 6889 Page 3643 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) 1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector. 2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: Approximately 166.5 - 203.5 ohms [at 20°C (68°F)] If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). Page 3510 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 609 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 6025 Ignition Control Module: Electrical Diagrams WIRING DIAGRAM Page 9423 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3485 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2930 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5479 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2115 NOTE: Make sure the flat side of the distributor drive shaft is facing the engine (see Figure 6). Failure to do so will result in the distributor being out of time. 8. Install the following parts: a. Crankshaft pulley. b. A/C compressor and idler pulley bracket. c. Radiator shroud and cooling fan with coupling. d. A/C compressor, alternator and power steering pump drive belts. e. Air duct. Installation of Upper Timing Chain 1. Install the lower timing chain (refer to "Installation of Lower Timing Chain" in this bulletin). 2. Install upper timing chain and sprockets, using the painted reference marks made during removal. 3. Install chain tensioner. Remove the pin holding the tensioner piston in the bore of the tensioner. 4. Install camshaft sprocket cover: a. Use a scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from the mating surfaces of the engine block and camshaft sprocket cover. b. Apply a continuous bead of RTV sealant to the cover as shown in Figure 7. NOTE: Page 5657 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Model PB48S Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications Model PB48S Power Steering Line Flare Nut: Low Pressure ....................................................................................................................................... ............................. 39 - 49 Nm (29 - 36 ft. lbs.) High Pressure ............................................................ ....................................................................................................... 29 - 39 Nm (20 - 29 ft. lbs.) Page 9412 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5250 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 189 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4475 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7362 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5896 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2510 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3285 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6244 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4338 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Specified amount [1] ............................................................................................................................ .................................................... 9.5 qts. (9.0 Liters) [1] with reservoir Page 6777 9. Press ABS sensor rotor onto axle shaft until it contacts wheel bearing lock nut. 10. Position axle shafts in rear axle housing with Tool as a guide. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil seal. 11. Check axial end play. a. Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. b. Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) Page 2277 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Specifications Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications DIMENSIONS Depressed Height [1] ........................................................................................................................... ......................................... 120.0 mm (4.72 inches) Free Height [2]: Automatic Transmission ........................................................................................................................................ 212 - 222 mm (8.35 - 8.74 inches) Manual Transmission ............................................................................................................................................. 209 - 219 mm (8.23 - 8.62 inches) Free Play: At Clevis .............................................................................................................................................................. 1.0 - 3.0 mm (0.039 - 0.118 inches) At Pedal Pad .............................................................................. ...................................................................................... 4 - 12 mm (0.16 - 0.47 inch) Pedal Stopper Clearance ........................................................................................................................................... 0.3 - 1.0 mm (0.012 - 0.039 inches) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Pedal Assembly: To Booster ........................................................................................................................................... ..................... 13 - 16 Nm (108 - 144 inch lbs.) To Under-dash ........................................................... ..................................................................................................... 8 - 11 Nm (69 - 95 inch lbs.) [1]: With 490 N (110 lbs.) applied with engine running [2]: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel. Page 2086 Use Genuine Nissan RTV silicone sealant P/N 999MP-A7007, Three Bond P/N TB1207D or equivalent. c. Also place RTV sealant on the head gasket surface. CAUTION: Be careful not to tear or damage the cylinder head gasket. CAUTION: Be careful upper timing chain does not slip or jump when installing the camshaft sprocket cover. d. Install camshaft sprocket cover. 5. Install rubber plugs into cylinder head after applying RTV sealant (see Figure 8). 6. Install rocker cover, tightening the bolts as shown in Figure 9. Page 8412 ^ Find the "witness mark" (the old hole) for the old button, using the information contained in Figure 1 and Table 1. Page 3269 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1054 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3787 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2761 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2537 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1280 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 956 Leak Detection Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PRE/SE-01 Evaporation Emission Control System Pressure Sensor (EVAP) (DTC: P0450) WIRING DIAGRAM Page 7248 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Overhaul COMPONENTS DISASSEMBLY 1. Bend claws of stopper cap outward. 2. Remove piston assemblies. - If it is difficult to remove secondary piston assembly, gradually apply compressed air through fluid outlet. 3. Draw out reservoir tank. Page 2794 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The rear heated oxygen sensor (rear HO2S), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used for engine control operation. Page 3960 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Connectors Minimum Voltage Monitoring Page 595 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4607 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 5052 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3302 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4281 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7219 1. Insert piston seal into groove on cylinder body. 2. With piston boot fitted to piston, insert piston boot into groove on cylinder body and install piston. 3. Properly secure piston boot. CAUTION: ^ Secure dust seal properly. ^ Lubricate with new brake fluid before installing plastic pistons into cylinder body. Page 7921 Page 5223 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Testing and Inspection PCV VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from breather separator. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over the valve inlet. Page 7399 Power Supply Routing: Schematic (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9232 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6602 Chart A & B Cooler Inlet And Outlet Locations Cooler Cleaning (in radiator) CAUTION: You must refer to Charts A and B to determine the location of the oil cooler inlet and outlet hoses for the vehicle your working on. If these hoses are not identified correctly, debris may be left in the cooler and transmission damage may occur. 1. Place an oil drain pan under the automatic transmission cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses. Page 4745 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 7700 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid ...................................................................................................................................................... Dexron III, Or Equivalent Page 1360 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 6078 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4307 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 6672 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY - Use a screwdriver to remove stopper ring while pushing push rod into cylinder. - When installing stopper ring, tap in lightly while pushing push rod into cylinder. INSPECTION Check the following items, and replace as necessary. Rubbing surface of cylinder and piston, for uneven wear, rust and damage - Piston with piston cup, for wear and damage - Return spring, for wear and damage - Dust cover, for cracks, deformation and damage - Reservoir, for deformation and damage Page 6191 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5321 Page 3531 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Views Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 9461 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Suspension - Steering Pull Diagnosis Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Steering Pull Diagnosis Classification: ST01-003 Reference: NTB01-083 Date: November 28, 2001 1998-2002 FRONTIER AND 2000-2002 XTERRA STEERING PULL DURING BRAKING APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2002 Frontier (D22) 2000-2002 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied Frontier or Xterra exhibits a slight steering pull (left or right) during: ^ Moderate application of the brakes to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from a speed of between 20 and 30 mph. The following steps should be performed in order given; 1. The vehicle suspension should be inspected. 2. Vehicle ride height should be checked. 3. Alignment should be checked to ensure that all measurements are within factory specifications. When performing an alignment, refer to the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for specifications and adjustment procedures. Page 2831 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 134 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 9425 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2276 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2851 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 896 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1159 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5561 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3686 Page 4230 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9182 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6968 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PNP/SW-01 Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Circuit Diagrams Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8820 3M materials: Meguiar's materials: Misc: 8" buffer (1500-1750 RPM) Dual action sander, variable speed Terry cloth towels (100% cloth) NOTE: Always use separate pads for each liquid (mark the backside of each pad with the type of liquid used) and clean the pads frequently. Use of a wool pad on clear coat is limited to the polishing type of pad and is always followed by a foam Dad on a dual action sander to remove swirl marks. Measuring Paint Film Thickness Before any abrasive removal, measure the initial film thickness at several places to establish an average figure. After each abrasive step measure several places again to determine how much paint film was removed. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the mil gauge you are using for measurement and calibration. If you do not have a thickness gauge use the following rule of thumb during abrasive removal; When the "orange peel" surface is removed, 0.5 mil has been removed. Polishing Polishing is done in two steps: The first step is with an 8" buffer and the second step with a dual action sander to remove buffing and swirl marks. Low speed (1500-1750 RPM) is necessary to prevent overheating the surface. CAUTION: Do not polish or buff a surface dry. More than the usual quantity of liquid must be used to keep the paint surface cool. Wipe the excess material off with a clean soft towel after each operation 1. Clean the surface of all residue before polishing. 2. Use an 8" buffer (at 1500 - 1750 RPM) with either a 3M wool polishing pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing compound over the work Page 4209 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Component Locations Page 3921 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 1437 Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 2°40' (2.67°) Left And Right Difference ............................................................................................................................................................ 0°45' (0.75°) or less King Pin Inclination GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................... 10°18' (10.30°) Nominal ...................................................................... ......................................................................................................................... 10°48' (10.80°) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 11°18' (11.30°) Toe-In GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit (With Radial Tire): Angle (Left + Right) Minimum: 15' (0.25°) Nominal: 20' (0.33°) Maximum: 25' (0.42°) Distance (A - B) Minimum: 3 mm (0.12 inch) Nominal: 4 mm (0.16 inch) Maximum: 5 mm (0.20 inch) Turning Angle Specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS P235/70R14: Inside: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................ 31° 00' (31.00°) Nominal ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................ 33° 00' (33.00°) Maximum ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................. 33° 00' (33.00°) Outside (Full Turn) [1]: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................ 29° 00' (29.00°) Nominal ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................ 31° 00' (31.00°) Maximum ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................. 31° 00' (31.00°) Except P235/70R14: Inside: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................ 33° 06' (33.10°) Nominal ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................ 35° 06' (35.10°) Maximum ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................. 35° 06' (35.10°) Outside (Full Turn) [1]: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................ 31° 12' (31.20°) Nominal ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................ 33° 12' (33.20°) Maximum ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................. 33° 12' (33.20°) [1]:On power steering models, wheel turning force, (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 - 147 N (22 - 33 lbs.) with engine at idle. Vehicle Ride Height DIMENSIONS Page 7978 Disclaimer Page 2815 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2905 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5116 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4520 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS-01 Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Circuit Diagrams Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 6842 WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC REPLACEMENT 1. Remove free running hub assembly. (4WD) Refer to Locking Hub / Service and Repair. Page 1846 Page 982 Ground Distribution Page 5828 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8356 ^ Find the "witness mark" (the old hole) for the old button, using the information contained in Figure 1 and Table 1. Page 3170 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 1262 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3876 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 536 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments PREPARATION - Make sure that the following parts are in good order. (1) Battery (2) Ignition system (3) Engine oil and coolant levels (4) Fuses (5) ECM harness connector (6) Vacuum hoses (7) Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) (8) Fuel pressure (9) Engine compression (10) EGR valve operation (11) Throttle valve (12) EVAP system - On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". - On models equipped with automatic transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. - When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. - Turn off head lamps, heater blower. - Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 2826 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2645 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1118 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5831 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS-01 Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Circuit Diagrams Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 6495 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1999 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Lower, Front Control Arm: Service and Repair Lower, Front Page 731 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Specifications Diagnosis Sensor Unit: Specifications Diagnosis Sensor Unit Diagnosis Sensor Unit Special Bolt 15 - 25 Nm Page 900 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3600 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 6114 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 552 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 9558 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5160 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 6578 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5028 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6136 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2241 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 8422 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt CAUTION: - Do not disassemble buckle or seat belt assembly. - Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out. - Never oil tongue and buckle. - If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the seat belt assembly. - If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly. - When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly. After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached hardware. Rear Seat Belt REMOVAL 1. Remove underseat storage. 2. Remove buckle. 3. Remove seat belt anchor bolt. Page 3829 Idle Up Control Valve: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the air conditioner is on, the IACV-FICD solenoid valve supplies additional air to adjust to the increased load. Adjustments Neutral Safety Switch: Adjustments 1. Remove control linkage and manual lever from manual shaft. 2. Set manual shaft in "N" position. 3. Loosen inhibitor switch fixing bolts. 4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both inhibitor switch and manual as near vertical as possible. 5. Tighten inhibitor switch fixing bolts. 6. Remove pin. 7. Reinstall any part removed. 8. Adjust control linkage. Refer to Transmission and Drivetrain. 9. Check continuity of inhibitor switch. Page 5349 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3576 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4779 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2367 Page 6062 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 2259 Radiator: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Remove under cover. 2. Drain coolant from radiator. 3. Disconnect upper and lower radiator hoses. 4. Remove air cleaner and air duct assembly. 5. Remove lower radiator shroud. 6. Remove radiator shroud. 7. Remove A/T oil cooler hoses (A/T models only). 8. Disconnect coolant reservoir hose. 9. Remove radiator. 10. After replacing radiator, install all parts in reverse order of removal. 11. Refill engine coolant. - After installation, run engine for a few minutes, and check for leaks. INSPECTION RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE) 1. Apply pressure with Tool. Specified pressure value: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) WARNING: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF THE HOSE COMING UNDONE WHILE UNDER PRESSURE, SECURELY FASTEN IT DOWN WITH A HOSE CLAMP ATTACH A HOSE TO THE OIL COOLER AS WELL. (A/T MODEL ONLY) Page 4735 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4397 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Page 937 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4655 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 6022 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7054 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Locations Page 4468 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3103 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 9410 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 9149 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Connector Views Wiring Diagram A/T Indicator Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 3851 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6581 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4175 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5689 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 86 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4085 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). Page 2982 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1760 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Compressor Clutch: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Clutch disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation. Coil Check coil for loose connection or cracked insulation. Page 5482 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 1237 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - The special bolts are coated with bonding agent while the other bolt is for ground. Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new coated bolts. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation. Make sure that there are no deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If there are any visible signs of damage, replace with a new one. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure they are free of deformities and rust. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Check crash zone sensor for proper installation. Make sure that there are no deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If there are any visible signs of damage, replace the crash zone sensor. - Check crash zone sensor bracket to ensure that it is free of deformities and rust. Removal Of Crash Zone Sensor 1. Disconnect driver and passenger air bag module connectors. 2. Remove front grille. 3. Disconnect crash zone sensor connector. 4. Using the TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T50), remove the three special bolts. The crash zone sensor can then be removed. NOTE: - To install, reverse removal procedure. - After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 3658 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Classification: EC98-007B Reference: NTB98-058B Date: August 7, 2001 MIL "ON" WITH EVAP SYSTEM DTCs STORED DUE TO LAUNCHING A WATERCRAFT ATTENTION: This bulletin amends NTB98-058A. Applied Vehicle information has been expanded and Parts Information has been revised. Please discard all paper copies of NTB98-058A. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998-2001 Frontier (D22) SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle is used to launch watercraft and exhibits the following symptoms: 1. The EVAP canister is found to have water in it and 2. It has one or more of the following DTC codes stored in Self Diagnosis: ^ P0440 (EVAP-small leak) ^ P1440 (EVAP-small leak) D22 only ^ P0446 (EVAP canister vent control valve) ^ P1446 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck closed) D22 only ^ P1448 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck open) D22 only ^ P0450 (EVAP pressure sensor) ^ P0443 (EVAP purge control valve & solenoid valve) ^ P1445 (EVAP purge volume control valve) D21 only ^ P1444 (EVAP purge volume control solenoid valve) D22 only Use the Service Procedure provided in this bulletin to replace the EVAP canister and install the replacement EVAP breather tube kit to prevent water/mud/dirt entry into the EVAP system. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect CONSULT-II. 2. From the Engine menu, select Self Diag Results. 3. Touch PRINT. Then select FF Data and touch PRINT again. 4. Use the appropriate service manual to resolve the stored DTC. 5. To determine if there is damage to the EVAP system, proceed to Removal and Inspection Testing. 6. Then go to Installation of the Breather Tube Kit and Installation of the EVAP system. Removal and Inspection Testing Hub, Rotor and Wheel Bearing Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Hub, Rotor and Wheel Bearing Page 6815 Axle Nut: Service and Repair Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Auto Lock Knob ................................................................................................................................... .................................. 25 - 34 Nm (18 - 25 ft. lbs.) Lock Washer Screw .................................................................................................................................................... 1.2 1.8 Nm (10.4 - 15.7 inch lbs.) Manual Lock Knob ............................................................................... ................................................................................. 25 - 34 Nm (18 - 25 ft. lbs.) Page 6256 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 1024 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1149 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3603 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Views Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 8971 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2683 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4034 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 6012 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3026 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8685 C. Remove the sunroof panel by lifting the panel so that it stands straight up, then slide it toward the drivers side to release it from the hinge brackets (see Figure 3). Place the sunroof panel in a safe place until it is reinstalled. 2. Remove the sunroof weather strip from the vehicle body (see Figure 4). Page 3041 Ground Distribution Page 7977 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Page 2733 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 4168 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3304 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3845 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Evaporative Emissions Hose: Customer Interest Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Classification: EC98-007B Reference: NTB98-058B Date: August 7, 2001 MIL "ON" WITH EVAP SYSTEM DTCs STORED DUE TO LAUNCHING A WATERCRAFT ATTENTION: This bulletin amends NTB98-058A. Applied Vehicle information has been expanded and Parts Information has been revised. Please discard all paper copies of NTB98-058A. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998-2001 Frontier (D22) SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle is used to launch watercraft and exhibits the following symptoms: 1. The EVAP canister is found to have water in it and 2. It has one or more of the following DTC codes stored in Self Diagnosis: ^ P0440 (EVAP-small leak) ^ P1440 (EVAP-small leak) D22 only ^ P0446 (EVAP canister vent control valve) ^ P1446 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck closed) D22 only ^ P1448 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck open) D22 only ^ P0450 (EVAP pressure sensor) ^ P0443 (EVAP purge control valve & solenoid valve) ^ P1445 (EVAP purge volume control valve) D21 only ^ P1444 (EVAP purge volume control solenoid valve) D22 only Use the Service Procedure provided in this bulletin to replace the EVAP canister and install the replacement EVAP breather tube kit to prevent water/mud/dirt entry into the EVAP system. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect CONSULT-II. 2. From the Engine menu, select Self Diag Results. 3. Touch PRINT. Then select FF Data and touch PRINT again. 4. Use the appropriate service manual to resolve the stored DTC. 5. To determine if there is damage to the EVAP system, proceed to Removal and Inspection Testing. 6. Then go to Installation of the Breather Tube Kit and Installation of the EVAP system. Removal and Inspection Testing Page 3811 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3615 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3313 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transaxle housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis of misfire. Page 6299 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 8181 Comments regarding PAG refrigerant oils: ^ PAG oil absorbs moisture from the air at an exceptionally fast rate, and moisture can damage the A/C system. Page 1011 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5669 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5933 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5788 Throttle Full Close Switch: Connector Views Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 1867 Disclaimer Page 3566 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor: Customer Interest MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) BULLETIN NUMBER: NTB99-013 CLASSIFICATION: EC99-001 DATE: April 1, 1999 TITLE: 1998-99 MY FRONTIER TRUCK M/T MIL "ON" P0500 SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied 1998-99 Frontier Truck (manual transmission, KA24DE Engine only) shows the following conditions: 1. MIL "ON" with DTC P0500 stored, 2. CONSULT freeze frame data indicates an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less, 3. No abnormal speedometer indication during test drive, then use this bulletin to repair the incident This incident may be due to a clutch slip condition for more than 10 seconds with a vehicle forward speed of less than 3 mph. This situation could occur during hill holding using clutch slip. Correct this incident by installing the ECM listed in the Parts Information using the following service procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTC stored is P0500 2. Verify the CONSULT freeze frame data stored has an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less (see Figure 1). 3. Conduct test drive to confirm there is no abnormal speedometer indication: a) Connect CONSULT and select Start, Engine, Data Monitor and Main Signals b) Test drive vehicle and ensure the speedometer and the vehicle speed sensor value displayed in Data Monitor provide consistent speed Page 4016 Page 3713 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Locations Antitheft Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 818 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9385 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 419 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 8817 F. Inspect for damage using fluorescent light source and magnification. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. G. Use abrasive cleaning on test section to remove up to 0.5 mil of damaged top/clear coat.* If damage is less than 0.5 mil deep, clean affected panels with abrasive method. After polishing, inspect for swirl marks using halogen lights. If damage is more than 0.5 mil deep, the affected panels must be repaired either by re-clear, re-color/clear coat, or re-color coated (on vehicles with no final clear coat). A. Wash Procedure Wash Equipment and Materials: Spray wash system (a mobile or stationary unit with hand held spray similar to a coin operated car wash that provides soap solution, rinse water and de-ionized final rinse). Car wash detergent containing no phosphates, (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100). Clean 100% cotton terry cloth towels. De-ionized water for the final rinse. De-ionized water is highly recommended as it reduces water spotting. De-ionizing cylinders can be purchased or rented from water purification companies 1. During the summer months, the early morning hours are the best time to wash a car unless you can wash and dry it in the shade. Never wash a car under the hot sun. All paint is subject to water spot damage when washed under the sun due to high surface temperature. 2. Thoroughly rinse oft the surface dirt and foreign materials with a spray of clean tap water. 3. Gently apply detergent and water solution (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), keeping it wet for 4-5 minutes. To avoid scratching the finish, do not rub, gently move the solution around with light pressure. Do not allow the solution to dry before rinsing. Use, clean warm water and a clean terry cloth towel. Frequently rinse off the terry cloth towel to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. Replace the towel with a clean one once it becomes soiled. Caution: When washing a convertible rear window use gentle horizontal and vertical strokes, do not use a circular motion.Use a clean terry cloth towel. Also refer to NTB92-092 for additional information on convertible wash procedure. 4. Rinse with a spray of clean tap water. Make sure all detergent is flushed off the body. If soap dries on the convertible rear window or some moldings it may cause streaking. Use a spray of de-ionized water for the final rinse. 5. Use a clean damp terry cloth towel and gentle pressure to remove the majority of the rinse water allowing the remaining water film to air dry. Replace the towel frequently to avoid scratches from entrapped dirt. 6. Always wash, rinse, and dry a vehicle beginning with the roof and glass. Then the hood and trunk followed by the vertical surfaces. Wash, rinse, and dry one section at a time if low humidity causes fast drying. Do not allow soap solution or rinse water to dry on the finish. B. Identifying Contamination Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp or a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is most easily done with a 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Page 9429 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2684 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3162 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Tank fuel temperature sensor Check resistance by heating with hot water as shown in the figure or a heat gun. If NG, replace tank fuel temperature sensor. Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Resistance 166.5 - 302.5 ohms at 68 deg F Page 5540 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2358 Page 6402 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2888 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 9487 Brake Light Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Service and Repair Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Page 2370 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 1141 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4336 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Universal Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 7793 Tie Rod: Service and Repair STEERING LINKAGE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Refer to the illustrations when servicing. 1. Remove pitman arm with Tool. Page 4388 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Connectors Maximum Voltage Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Connectors Minimum Voltage Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Page 1880 - Be careful not to damage cylinder head gasket. - Be sure to install new front oil seal. 7. Install the following parts: - Crankshaft pulley Oil strainer and oil pan. - Component parts below the engine. - A/C compressor idler pulley. - New cylinder head gasket. - Idler shaft. 8. Install the oil pump. - Make sure the flat side of the distributor drive shaft is facing the engine. 9. Install cylinder head and temporarily tighten cylinder head bolts when installing front cover. - Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces. - Temporarily tighten cylinder head bolts. This is necessary to avoid damaging cylinder head gasket. - Be sure to install washers between bolts and cylinder head. UPPER TIMING CHAIN 1. Install lower timing chain. 2. Install upper timing chain, chain tensioner. - Set upper timing chain on the idler sprockets, aligning mating marks. - When installing chain tensioner, insert a suitable pin into pin hole to stop piston. Page 3422 - Use the same procedure as mentioned in step 4. 7. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following parts. - Rocker cover - All spark plugs ADJUSTING Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. 1. Turn crankshaft to position cam lobe on camshaft of valve that must be adjusted upward. 2. Place Tool (A) around camshaft as shown in figure. 3. Rotate Tool (A) so that lifter is pushed down. Before placing Tool (A), rotate notch toward center of cylinder head (See image), to simplify shim removal later. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (A). 4. Place Tool (B) between camshaft and the edge of the valve lifter to retain valve lifter. CAUTION: Tool (B) must be placed as close to camshaft bracket as possible. - Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (B). 5. Remove Tool (A). 6. Remove adjusting shim using a small screwdriver and a magnetic finger. Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 8987 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2849 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8995 Cigarette Lighter: Connector Views Cigarette Lighter Cigarette Lighter Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 763 ^ Refer to Figure 3 for the specific vehicle you are working on CAUTION: Never adjust the throttle slop screw. It is pre-set at the factory. 6. Check "B"; Insert the thicker feeler gauge "B" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop (see Figure 3). The CTPS should NOT have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "OL"). 7. If the results of steps 5 and/or 6 are not OK, loosen the TPS retaining bolts and adjust the CTPS to achieve the correct results. 8. Tighten the TPS retaining bolts, then repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times to check the new adjustment. 9. Re-connect the harness connector to the CTPS portion of the (TPS). Reset throttle position sensor idle position memory. NOTE: Failure to reset the TPS idle position memory may result in the idle speed staying higher than specification. 10. Start engine and warm it to operating temperature. NOTE: Always warm up engine to normal operation temperature, If the engine is cool, the throttle position memory will not be reset correctly. Page 5827 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 1305 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4107 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Specifications Water Pump: Specifications CAUTION: When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belts. - Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. - After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester. REMOVAL 1. Drain coolant from engine. 2. Remove fan coupling with fan. 3. Remove power steering pump drive belt, generator drive belt and A/C compressor drive belt. 4. Remove water pump. INSPECTION - Check body assembly for rust or corrosion. - Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. INSTALLATION 1. Use a scraper to remove liquid gasket from water pump. - Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block. Page 5868 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 7112 Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection COMPONENTS INSPECTION Check brake pedal for following items: Brake pedal bend - Clevis pin deformation - Crack of any welded portion - Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 9593 1. Remove the door finisher assembly. 2. Remove the sealing screen and the door speaker (if equipped). 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the glass mounting nuts can be seen. 4. Remove the glass mounting nuts. 5. Raise up the door glass and hold with a suction lifter. 6. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the regulator assembly. 7. Disassemble the power window motor from the regulator. NOTE: These procedures are typical way for each type. The procedures differ according to model, so refer to Service Manual for more detail. If you also remove door glass, refer to Service Manual for procedures. TYPE-D: DOOR SASHLESS + MODULE TYPE (FR) 1. Remove the door finisher assembly. 2. Remove the harness connector and the door speaker (if equipped). Page 9291 Dome Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5324 Page 5034 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3885 Ground Distribution Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload [1] ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.9 - 48.1 Nm (1.5 - 10.8 lbs.) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Cage To Baffle Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 54 - 74 Nm (40 - 54 ft. lbs.) Bearing Lock Nut ........................................................................................................................................................... 245 - 294 Nm (181 - 217 ft. lbs.) [1]: At bearing cage bolt. Page 4926 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5772 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4217 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7197 Wheel Cylinder: Testing and Inspection - Check wheel cylinder for leakage. - Check for wear, damage and loose conditions. Replace if any such conditions exists. Page 8020 Page 3228 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 7039 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM controls torque converter clutch solenoid valve to cancel the lock-up condition of A/T. When the solenoid valve is turned on, lock-up is cancelled. When the solenoid valve is turned oft, A/T lock-up is operational. Conditions for lock-up cancel: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned "ON" when; Throttle valve is fully closed (during idling or deceleration) - Engine coolant temperature is below 40° C (104° F) - Engine is stopped Conditions for lock-up operation: Under 55 to 63 km/h (34 to 39 MPH) (2/8 throttle on flat road), lock-up does not operate even when the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is "OFF". - Over 58 to 66 km/h (36 to 41 MPH) (2/8 throttle on flat road), lock-up should operate because the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is "OFF". To confirm vehicle lock-up, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve must be in operation ("ON" during idle and deceleration, and "OFF" during acceleration) and engine speed should drop. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there will be no lock-up. CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. Page 8375 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 9508 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 1733 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 4218 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4513 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Specifications Impact Sensor: Specifications Crash Zone Sensor Crash Zone Sensor Special Bolt(s) 15 - 25 Nm Page 8800 Page 783 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3004 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6538 9. Disconnect the key lock rod from the A/T shifter assembly by removing the pin clip. Retain this pin clip for reuse (see Figure 6). 10. Disconnect the brake pedal interlock solenoid harness located under the steering column assembly (see Figure 6). 11. Disconnect the A/T cable from the rear of the A/T shifter assembly by prying the connector straight back with a door trim removal tool (see Figure 7). 12. Remove the (2) 6mm bolts securing the assembly (see Figure 8). Page 562 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5410 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1138 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 878 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Brakes - ABS Sensor Precaution Using On Car Brake Lathe Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Sensor Precaution Using On Car Brake Lathe Classification: BR99-006 Reference: NTB99-040 Date: June 16, 1999 NISSAN ABS SENSOR CAUTION WHEN USING ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles With ABS SERVICE INFORMATION When using an on-car brake lathe to resurface rotors, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Metal shavings that collect on the ABS wheel speed sensor may cause the ABS warning light to come on, or, may cause intermittent activation of the ABS under normal braking conditions. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use the following procedure to prevent accumulation of metallic shavings on the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet when using an on-car brake lathe: 1. When the vehicle is on the service lift, make sure the ignition key is in the "off" position. NOTE: Rotating a wheel, monitored by an ABS wheel speed sensor, while the ignition key is in the "on" position, may trigger a wheel speed sensor error code. The warning light may remain on even after the self diagnoses memory is cleared with CONSULT. If this occurs, the warning light will turn off when driving over 9 mph (20 Km/h) after clearing the self diagnoses memory. 2. Prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet during rotor resurfacing. 3. Clean and remove all metallic particles from the surface of the rotor and the ABS wheel speed sensor magnet after rotor resurfacing. The ABS wheel speed sensor can be cleaned with compressed air. CAUTION: Always wear safety goggles when applying compressed air. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. Page 7734 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 110 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 9178 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5892 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 9180 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 8585 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5566 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 354 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Speedometer Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 5295 Leak Detection Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. 4. Check output voltage between ECM terminal (62) and engine ground. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply vacuum below -20 kPa (-150 mmHg, -5.91 inHg) or pressure over 20.0 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg). 5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Page 8374 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Locations Throttle Full Close Switch: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 4406 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater COMPONENT INSPECTION Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater Check resistance between terminals (3) and (1). Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 25°C (77°F) Check continuity between terminals (2) and (1), (3) and (2). Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the front heated oxygen sensor. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Suspension - Steering Pull Diagnosis Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Steering Pull Diagnosis Classification: ST01-003 Reference: NTB01-083 Date: November 28, 2001 1998-2002 FRONTIER AND 2000-2002 XTERRA STEERING PULL DURING BRAKING APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2002 Frontier (D22) 2000-2002 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied Frontier or Xterra exhibits a slight steering pull (left or right) during: ^ Moderate application of the brakes to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from a speed of between 20 and 30 mph. The following steps should be performed in order given; 1. The vehicle suspension should be inspected. 2. Vehicle ride height should be checked. 3. Alignment should be checked to ensure that all measurements are within factory specifications. When performing an alignment, refer to the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for specifications and adjustment procedures. Page 7575 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. Page 6150 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4038 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 3481 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9210 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5815 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3858 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 6725 Carrier Side Gears: Specifications Rear Differential Page 870 Ground Distribution Page 5752 Throttle Position Sensor: Connector Views Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 2414 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4192 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4594 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3943 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 382 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Locations Fusible Link: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 976 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6131 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 379 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4122 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Body - Window Regulator/Motor Service Update Power Window Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Window Regulator/Motor Service Update Classification: BT04-021 Reference: NTB04-064 Date: May 25, 2004 NISSAN; WINDOW REGULATOR/MOTOR SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan APPLIED DATES: 1995 to current date SERVICE INFORMATION If you should need to service the window regulator or motor on an Applied model, removing the door window is no longer needed. See the chart to find out which revised service procedure in this bulletin applies to the vehicle you are working on. Removal and Installation of Regulator Assembly NOTE: These procedures are typical way for each type. The procedures differ according to model, so refer to Service Manual for more detail. Page 5812 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3992 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3122 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2573 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3258 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 913 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2780 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Connectors Maximum Voltage Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Max. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0138) Circuit Connectors Minimum Voltage Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Min. Voltage Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0137) Page 4712 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Specifications Wheel Cylinder: Specifications Cylinder Bore Diameter 0.8125 in Bleeder Screw 61 - 78 in.lb Crank Lever Bolt 14 - 18 ft.lb Crank Lever Nut 20.8 - 39.1 in.lb Mounting Bolts 52 - 95 in.lb Pulley Bolt 40 - 54 ft.lb Page 5481 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 923 EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passage way. When the EGR valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passage way changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. Page 2746 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5632 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2244 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 8761 ^ An industrial fallout remover (i.e. oxalic acid) such as Zep Industrial Fallout Remover(TM) X-20472 by Zep Manufacturing Company or equivalent; or ^ A chemical neutralization system such as ValuGard(TM) 3-Step Neutralization/Decontamination System by Automotive International, Inc., or equivalent. WARNING: Read and follow the manufacturer's procedure before using. C. Heavy Damage (deep into the clear and/or color coat) This step will require wet sanding and/or repainting. Contact your local paint refinish supplier for recommended procedures such as BASF Corporation Rail Dust repair procedure, Sherwin-Williams Ultra 7000 Basecoat System or equivalent. CAUTION: Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with proper refinishing techniques should perform the above repair. For more information on identifying and diagnosing iron particles and other paint issues, refer to the Nissan/Infiniti Paint Incident Identification Manual, P/N 5PII00. Call DYMENT: 1-800-247-5321 for a copy of the Nissan/Infiniti Paint Incident Identification Manual, P/N 5PII00. CLAIMS INFORMATION Section 1 of the Assurance Products Resource Manual (under "Environmental Damage") states, Since Environmental Damage is generally excluded from the Nissan's New Vehicle Limited Warranty, repairs for such damage do not generally qualify for reimbursement as warranty expense. However, if damage is noted at the time of delivery, the dealer may submit a transportation claim. Upon vehicle delivery, note environmental damage on the carrier's delivery receipt. The carrier's delivery receipt must be signed by both the carrier driver and dealership personnel. Environmental damage must be noted at the time of vehicle delivery. The Claims Call Center, Transportation Department, must also be contacted for pre-approval of repairs on all environmental damage claims. Failure to comply with either of the above will result in transportation claim denial If environmental damage occurs while the vehicle is in the customer's possession, like any non-warranty repair, it may be considered as a goodwill matter on strictly a case-by-case basis. If you have such a repair which you believe may merit such a consideration, but it exceeds the dealer's self-authorization authority, you may contact the Claims Call Center (1-800-258-7008). Page 9383 Headlamp (For Canada) (Part 3 Of 3) Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement USA Page 696 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 6399 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4158 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4519 Throttle Position Sensor: Connector Views Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 906 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 721 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch 1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine. 2. Check continuity between terminal (1) and ground. If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch. Page 5183 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 9559 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Locations Horn Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 4022 Page 6019 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 8957 Diagnostic Procedure 2 (Without Power Door Locks) Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Seat Belt Buckle Switch Input Signal Check) Models With Power Door Locks Diagnostic Procedure 3 (With Power Door Locks) Models Without Power Door Locks Page 5740 Ground Distribution Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 1061 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 943 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6297 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7783 STEERING GEAR MODEL PB59K Before disassembling power steering gear component parts, make sure there is no oil leakage around sealing portion and check steering turning torque as follows: Check sealing portion. ^ Sector shaft cover O-ring ^ Sector shaft U-packing ^ Sector shaft oil seal ^ Rear housing O-ring ^ Gear housing O-ring NOTE: ^ Discard any oil seal and O-ring which have been removed. ^ Replace oil seal and O-ring if sealing surface is deformed or cracked. Page 4836 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1904 Page 6496 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4938 A. Apply battery voltage (see Figure 1) and look into the hose end of the valve to confirm the air passage closes (and seals). NOTE: The valve must function (click) on the first application of battery voltage. B. While looking into the hose end of the valve, disconnect the battery voltage and confirm the air passage re-opens fully and immediately (the valve should not stick closed). C. Repeat steps A and B above to confirm the valve closes and re-opens consistently. 2. Confirm the sealing O-ring (for the valve) is: ^ Correctly positioned and is not damaged (see Figure 1) ^ Adequately lubricated with Texaco Canopus 13 mineral oil (P/N 999MP-AJ000) 3. Make sure the water separator and related hoses are not blocked by debris or insects. NOTE: If a Maxima, Truck or 240SX is not equipped with a water separator, refer to the listed TSB(s) to install one. 1998 and Later CONSULT Compatible Vehicles 1. Check the operation of the EVAP vent control valve using CONSULT or CONSULT-II as follows: A. Connect CONSULT (or CONSULT-II) and turn the ignition key to the ON position. Do not start the engine. B. Touch "Start". C. Touch "Engine". D. Touch "Active Test". E. Touch "Vent Control/V". F. Touch "ON" and look into the hose end of the valve to confirm the air passage closes (and seals). NOTE: The valve must function (click) on the first application of the "ON" selection. Page 6122 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 395 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7063 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3581 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 539 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3188 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 7108 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair CAUTION: ^ Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during bleeding operation. ^ If master cylinder is suspected to have air inside, bleed air from master cylinder first. ^ Fill reservoir with new brake fluid DOT 3. Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding air out of system. ^ Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage of brake fluid. ^ Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector or battery cable. ^ Bleed air in the following order: a. Load Sensing Valve (LSV) air bleeder (Models equipped with LSV) b. Left rear brake c. Right rear brake d. Left front brake e. Right front brake f. ABS actuator and electric unit 1. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to air bleeder valve. 2. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 3. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. 4. Close air bleeder valve. 5. Release brake pedal slowly. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 until clear brake fluid comes out of air bleeder valve. 7. Tighten air bleeder to 7 - 9 Nm (61 - 78 inch lbs.) Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Classification: BF87-030 Reference: TS87-145 Date: September 28, 1987 PAINT SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Paint spotting incidents occurring in the U.S. market are not unique to Nissan, but are being experienced by all manufacturers. To date, two separate types of paint spotting incidents have been identified as follows: 1. Particulate Fallout - Tiny solid particles which collect on horizontal panels, causing a dark stain which will penetrate into the paint if not cleaned. 2. Water Spotting - A ringlet or multiple water-drop-shaped light discoloration on dark painted horizontal panels. THESE TYPES OF SPOTTING ARE NOT DUE TO PAINT DEFICIENCY, AND CAN BE PREVENTED THROUGH PROPER CARE. SERVICE PROCEDURE Particulate Fallout Ash, dust, soot and other tiny solid particulate matter from industrial and other sources can be carried many miles. Particulate fallout is most noticeable on the horizontal surfaces (hood, luggage compartment lid, and roof) of the vehicle. If left on a moist, painted surface, the particles will slowly dissolve and bond to the paint, frequently leaving a red stain. This stain can be present even on plastic surfaces such as bumpers if the fallout has an iron content. These spots may be visible on both solid and metallic paints (especially light colors). The particulate can be felt as a sharp point on the paint surface. When viewed through a magnifying lens, the staining may be evident. VEHICLE CARE Every 10 days, or more frequently depending upon local conditions, particulate fallout must be washed off with mild detergent and water to prevent its bonding and staining action. A good carnuba wax coating can help protect against damage from particulate fallout. PARTICULATE FALLOUT REPAIR PROCEDURE In most cases, thoroughly washing the affected area with a water and mild detergent solution (to avoid scratching the finish with dislodged particles) will remove the particulates. After washing the vehicle, a stain, generally orange or red, may still be visible on white or other light colored vehicles. This stain can be removed with a fine compound material. DO NOT APPLY THE COMPOUNDING MATERIAL BEFORE ALL PARTICLES IN THE AFFECTED AREA ARE REMOVED BY THOROUGH WASHING. Water Spotting A photograph of typical water spotting is shown on page 26 of the Nissan Paint Refinishing Guide* (PIN 5REFGD). The spots are most visible when viewed at an angle, usually under fluorescent light. The paint surface is usually smooth to the touch because the spotting is a change in the top surface itself. This is not hard-water residue which will wash off with soap and water. These spots are visible on both solid and metallic paints with dark colors. VEHICLE CARE When a vehicle is stored outside and unprotected, dust patterns develop on the painted surfaces. These patterns guide moisture droplets from a light rain or morning dew to the same location each time. The strong sunlight, repeatedly concentrated on these water droplets, greatly contributes to the spotting. When storing a vehicle unprotected, where the painted surface is repeatedly exposed to a combination of sunlight and light rain (or morning dew), the vehicle MUST be washed AND thoroughly dried at least every two weeks, or more frequently if there is light rain or dew followed by strong sunlight. Page 1136 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3219 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4457 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 7151 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 1444 b. Apply the above two values to the chart and determine point "A". c. The coordinate (or graduation) indicates that both the front and rear adjusting bolts must be turned outward by 3 graduations. d. Turn the adjusting bolts by the amount corresponding with the 3 graduations. TOE IN WARNING: ALWAYS PERFORM THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE ON A FLAT SURFACE. MAKE SURE THAT NO ONE IS IN FRONT OF THE VEHICLE BEFORE PUSHING IT. Measure toe-in using the following procedure. 1. Bounce front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft.). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point. 4. Measure distance "A" (rear side). 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° (1/2 turn). If the wheels have rotated more than 180° (1/2 turn), try the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push vehicle backward. 6. Measure distance "B" (front side). Total toe-in: Refer to Specification Table. 7. Adjust toe-in by varying the length of both steering tie rods. a. Loosen clamp bolts or lock nuts. b. Adjust toe-in by turning both the left and right tie rod tubes equal amounts. Page 2417 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ECM consists of a microcomputer, diagnostic test mode selector, and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine. Locations Circuit Breaker: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8033 4. Apply multi-purpose grease to each bearing cone. 5. Pack grease seal lip with multi-purpose grease, then install it into wheel hub with suitable drift. Page 1317 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5231 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 518 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3605 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 7072 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 9169 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2480 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 8201 ^ Do not introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component, because contamination will occur. ^ R-134a in the presence of oxygen and under pressure may form a combustible mixture. Therefore, never introduce compressed air into any R-134a container, cylinder, A/C component, recover/recycle equipment, or other service equipment. This includes "empty" containers. Refrigerant Terminology Please use the correct name or names when specifying refrigerants. The guidelines are listed below: ^ Freon --> is a registered trademark of DuPont, and should only be used if referring to DuPont R-12. ^ DuPont's trade name for R-134a (automotive use) is Suva-->Trans A/C. ^ When referring to refrigerants, the terms Freon-->and Suva--> should not be used as a general reference. The proper terms are R-12 and R-134a Comments regarding refrigerants: ^ R-12 and R-134a are not compatible with each other and should never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. ^ R-134a for automotive use has a special tank fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME) which is compatible with automotive service equipment ^ When purchasing R-134a, be certain that the fitting size on the tank is 1/2" - 16 ACME. This thread size is easy to recognize by the square thread, as shown. ^ Although R-134a has no ozone depletion potential (ODP), it does have a slight global warming potential (GWP). Due to this slight GWP, as well as its high cost, venting of R-134a into the air is not recommended. ^ Recovery/recycling of R-134a will be required by U.S. Federal Law, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990. Page 988 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4803 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4804 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Connector Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 1393 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Page 886 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM. Page 7753 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1059 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7508 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5973 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7349 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2893 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 5821 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2546 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 8027 Page 924 EGR Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EGR Temperature Sensor Check resistance change and resistance value. If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor. Page 1012 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 1695 Comments regarding vacuum pump use: ^ The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the lubrication for R-134a A/C systems. ^ The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure, causing the vacuum pump lubricant to migrate out of the pump if the pump is switched oft after evacuation (vacuuming) and there is no shut off valve between the pump and the hose. ^ To prevent the migration of vacuum pump lubricant into service hoses, it is necessary to use a valve (which can be manually opened or closed) near the connection of the service hose to the pump. ^ On a vacuum pump which is equipped with an isolation valve (usually part of the vacuum pump), closing this valve will isolate the service hose from the pump. ^ For pumps without an isolation valve, be certain that the service hose is equipped with a manual shut off valve near the pump end of the hose. ^ Hoses which contain an automatic shut off valve at the end of the service hose must be disconnected from the vacuum pump to prevent the migration of lubricant; as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricant may migrate (with pump off). ^ One-way valves which open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition are not recommended, because this valve may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum. Page 7010 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Up Control Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 915 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7457 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3994 Ground Distribution Page 1098 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 607 Ground Distribution Page 6002 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5245 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4697 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 6139 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CMPS-01 Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Circuit Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 1539 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 4556 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4719 Throttle Position Sensor: Connector Views Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 4582 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Specifications Diagnosis Sensor Unit: Specifications Diagnosis Sensor Unit Diagnosis Sensor Unit Special Bolt 15 - 25 Nm Page 5400 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4353 Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 903 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair DISARMING AIR BAGS 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 2. Disconnect Air Bag Module connector. CAUTION: For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any air bag system connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. CAUTION: Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or on the complete harness, for easy identification. ARMING AIR BAGS 1. Connect Air Bag Module connector. 2. Connect both battery cables. 3. Conduct Self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to Testing and Inspection / Self-Diagnostic Procedures. Page 2448 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4322 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5500 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 9444 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7131 3. Install all parts and secure all bolts. CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid DOT 3. ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. 4. Bleed air. Page 581 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2904 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 1659 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - R134a Charge Amount/Lubricant Chart Classification: HA95-013 Reference: NTB95-068 Date: July 5, 1995 R134a CHARGE AMOUNTS/PAG LUBRICANT CHART APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All equipped with R134a A/C systems SERVICE INFORMATION For reference, the chart in this bulletin has been prepared. It contains information by vehicle model and year regarding A/C systems conversion dates to R-134a type systems. Please note, the dates shown indicate the conversion date at the manufacturing level, not on dealer installed units. Page 8055 Air Door: Adjustments Intake Door Recirculation control cable ^ Move recirculation lever to REC position. Set recirculation lever in REC mode. Pull on outer cable in direction of arrow and then clamp it. ^ After positioning recirculation control cable, check that it operates properly. Page 2640 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6124 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 2507 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 146 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3599 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 8178 Additionally the PAG lubricant type, part numbers and system recharge amounts are listed for each model. Page 1977 Valve Spring: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Head. Page 9526 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 412 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2744 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Air-Tight Check Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Air-Tight Check Testing Brake Booster - Start engine, and stop it after one or two minutes. Depress brake pedal several times slowly. Booster is airtight if pedal stroke is less each time. - Depress brake pedal while engine is running, and stop engine with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds. Page 2580 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1614 Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Carrier Gear Oil Standard differential gear .................................................................................................................... ............................................................. API GL-5 Limited-slip differential gear LSD) .......................... ...................................................................................................................................... *API GL-5 *Note: Use only LSD gear oil API GL-5 and SAE 80W-90 approved for Nissan LSD. SAE 90 is acceptable in ambient temperatures above -18°C (0° F). Page 2451 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 463 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3341 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 8594 Radio/Stereo: Electrical Diagrams EL-AUDIO-01 Audio (Part 1 Of 2) With Base Audio System Circuit Diagrams Page 3046 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7958 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 1663 Comments regarding PAG refrigerant oils: ^ PAG oil absorbs moisture from the air at an exceptionally fast rate, and moisture can damage the A/C system. Page 4316 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5934 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5776 Ground Distribution Page 2285 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7739 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4700 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7037 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-LKPU-01 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Circuit Diagrams Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Page 3153 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7644 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5190 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 8061 Page 3079 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4462 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5243 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1087 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4652 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5497 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4343 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. * Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 6521 6. Disconnect the overdrive (O/D) switch connector located on the top of the steering column and remove it from the mounting bracket using a door trim removal tool. (see Figure 4). CAUTION: Be careful not to break the connector or the bracket. If the bracket is unavoidably broken, see Step 22 of this procedure. 7. Expose the clevis pin by sliding back the rubber boot from the base of the shifter lever (see Figure 5). Remove and retain the pin clip and the clevis pin. 8. Out the tie wrap that secures the overdrive switch wire to the main shifter pivot rod and remove the shift lever from the A/T shifter assembly (see Figure 5). NOTE: The shift lever, pin and clip will be reused. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 8881 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1569 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION For Bracket Installation Only: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. For Bracket Installation and Hose Angle Adjustment Only: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. For Evacuate Replace A/C Low Hose and Recharge System: Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. Additional Expenses for P81633 ONLY. Information Diagram Information and Instructions Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4289 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7315 ^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in Japan have a JIS number embossed in the plastic on top of the battery. ^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with the letter "J". Batteries with CCA (Cold Cranking Amps) Number ^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in North America have a CCA number displayed on the label attached to the top of the battery. ^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with a number: 1, 3, or 5. Selecting CCA or JIS in the GR-8 Battery Tester Vehicles with JIS Battery ^ Select JIS, then choose the option that matches the first five (5) characters of the JIS number on the battery. NOTE: DO NOT select CCA when testing a JIS battery. Vehicles with CCA Battery ^ Select CCA, then choose the option that matches the number following "Cold Cranking Amps" on the battery. Reference Material The following information can be printed and attached to the GR-8, if needed. Page 4269 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CKPS-01 Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) (OBD) Circuit Diagrams Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 8968 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 7569 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Page 6258 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9301 Dome Lamp: Electrical Diagrams MODELS WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS EL-ROOM/L-01 Interior Room Lamp (Part 1 Of 3) Page 2748 Oxygen Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 1281 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4075 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2989 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7348 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 603 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1445 NOTE: - Make sure that the tie rod bars are screwed into the tie rod tube more than 35 mm (1.38 inch). - Make sure that the tie rods are the same length. Standard length (A = B): 2WD = 343.9 mm (13.54 inch) 4WD = 297.6 mm (11.72 inch) c. Tighten clamp bolts or lock nuts, then torque them. WHEEL TURNING ANGLE 1. Set wheels in straight-ahead position. Then move vehicle forward until front wheels rest properly on turning radius gauge. 2. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning angle. On power steering models, turn steering wheel to full lock and apply force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 - 147 N (22 - 33 lbs.) with engine at idle. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel at full lock for more than 15 seconds. Wheel turning angle (Full turn): Refer to Specification Table. Page 7351 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4486 ^ Refer to Figure 3 for the specific vehicle you are working on CAUTION: Never adjust the throttle slop screw. It is pre-set at the factory. 6. Check "B"; Insert the thicker feeler gauge "B" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop (see Figure 3). The CTPS should NOT have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "OL"). 7. If the results of steps 5 and/or 6 are not OK, loosen the TPS retaining bolts and adjust the CTPS to achieve the correct results. 8. Tighten the TPS retaining bolts, then repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times to check the new adjustment. 9. Re-connect the harness connector to the CTPS portion of the (TPS). Reset throttle position sensor idle position memory. NOTE: Failure to reset the TPS idle position memory may result in the idle speed staying higher than specification. 10. Start engine and warm it to operating temperature. NOTE: Always warm up engine to normal operation temperature, If the engine is cool, the throttle position memory will not be reset correctly. Page 4640 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4912 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 284 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 8975 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3177 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Output Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 762 ^ Refer to Figure 2 that applies to your model. ^ There should be continuity across the terminals with the throttle closed. NOTES: ^ An ohmmeter is used because CONSULT-II cannot display the CTPS status in all of the Applied Vehicles. ^ This adjustment procedure must be made with the TPS installed on the engine of the vehicle. ^ Do not touch the throttle drum when checking the CTPS signal or continuity. Doing so may cause an incorrect adjustment. ^ Nissan recommends using Kent-Moore TPS Connector Tool J-45178 for easy, accurate connection. See NTB01-023 for more information. 4. Refer to Chart 1 and select the correct thickness feeler gauges for your vehicle. 5. Check "A": Insert the thinner feeler gauge "A" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop. ^ The CTPS should have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "0 ohms"). Page 4617 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 1421 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 5871 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 9394 Daytime Light Control Unit Inspection Table (Part 2 Of 2) Daytime Light Control Unit Inspection Table Page 8385 The top section of the tape (from which the backing sheet was peeled off in step 5) should be placed so that it is pointing down toward the floor of the vehicle. The "unexposed" bottom section of the tape should be pointing up toward the ceiling of the vehicle (see Figure 9A). 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 9B). ^ The unexposed bottom section of the tape will be pulled through and hang over the top of the "D" ring (see Figure 9B). Stop pulling when you see this. 8. As the top section of the adhesive-exposed tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring (see Figure 9B above and Figure 10). NOTE: Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface in these procedural steps so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. IMPORTANT: Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. Replace the tape with a new piece if this should occur. 9. Run your finger over the surface of the newly applied tape to firmly apply it to the back side of the "D" ring. Press down the edges of the tape, and smooth out any air bubbles or wrinkles (see Figure 10). 10. Peel off the remaining, unexposed bottom section of the tape backing (see Figure 11A). 11. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Take care to apply the tape so that no wrinkles are present. Press down the edges of the tape (see Figure 11B). Page 8126 CAUTION: When installing high pressure tubes (with flange connections) to their mating parts, make sure the flange is fully seated onto the mating part before the securing bolt is installed and tightened (see Figure 4). If the securing bolt is installed and tightened before the tube flange is seated onto its mating part, 0-ring damage and leaks can result. Page 8926 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3344 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5569 Ground Distribution Page 5214 EGR Valve: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve The EGR valve controls the amount of exhaust gas routed to the intake manifold. Vacuum is applied to the EGR valve in response to throttle valve opening. The vacuum controls the movement of a taper valve connected to the vacuum diaphragm in the EGR valve. Page 4669 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7218 - Check pistons for uneven surface, chips or cracks. Replace if any of these conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with emery sand paper even if rust or foreign objects are stuck to sliding surface. Slide Pin, Pin Bolt And Pin Boot Check for wear, cracks or other damage. Replace if any of these conditions are observed. Rotor Runout 1. Check runout using a dial indicator. Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring. 2. If the runout is out of specification, machine rotor with on-car brake lathe ("MAD, DL-8700", "AMMCO 700 and 705" or equivalent. Thickness If thickness variation exceeds the specification, machine rotor with on-car brake lathe. Thickness variation (at least 8 positions): Maximum 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) ASSEMBLY Page 8348 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 341 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 9165 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Locations Absolute Pressure Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 1667 Page 6952 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 1267 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3094 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 5861 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4079 Page 4191 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6634 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5463 ^ Some 2002 models use a new type EVAP System Pressure Sensor with different operational characteristics. ^ Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual to determine which type sensor your vehicle is equipped with. ^ Models that use the new type EVAP System Pressure Sensor will have a voltage reading that varies with changes in the "barometric" pressure (atmospheric air pressure that changes with altitude and/or weather conditions). ^ The usual voltage range obtained in step 4 with the new type EVAP System Pressure Sensor is between 3.8 and 4.2 volts. Because this range will vary with barometric pressure, it is best to compare readings with a known good vehicle. ^ Some 2002 models use the earlier type EVAP System Pressure Sensor (same as used on 2001 and earlier models). The normal range for the earlier type is 3.32 to 3.40 volts and does not vary with barometric pressure. 5. Start the engine. Observe the EVAP System Pressure Sensor voltage. ^ If the value has reduced 0.04 volts or more from the reading obtained in step 4, the EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve may be leaking. ^ Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for inspection procedures of the EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve, DTC P1444. NOTE: The EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve is located in the engine compartment. 6. Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P1491. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for confirmation procedure steps and driving conditions. 7. If the DTC confirmation results are NG, do the following: a. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual to determine if the vehicle is equipped with On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR). ^ If the vehicle has ORVR, go to b. ^ If the vehicle does NOT have ORVR, go to step 8. b. Place a clamp on the Refueling EVAP Vapor Line near the fuel tank. The Refueling EVAP Vapor Line is the larger hose (see figure 2). Use hose clamp (3M P/N # 08556-1), found in Fuel Injector Cleaning Kit J-45701, or equivalent. c. Retry DTC Confirmation Procedure d. If the result is now OK, the Refueling Control Valve may be leaking and should be inspected. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Page 7243 Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications Master Cylinder, ABS DIMENSIONS Bore Diameter ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 25.40 mm (1.0 inches) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Nuts ..................................................................................................................................... ........................... 12 - 15 Nm (108 - 132 inch lbs.) Flare Nuts ............................................................ ................................................................................................................... 15 - 18 Nm (11 - 13 ft. lbs.) Valve Stopper ............................................................................................................................................................. 2.0 - 3.4 Nm (17.4 - 30.4 inch lbs.) Page 3301 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4479 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 7636 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3771 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9158 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5891 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 1028 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Connector Views Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 3331 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7623 3. Adjust stopper bolt if necessary. Standard length "L1" (2WD): 20 mm (0.79 inch) (Length before cap is mounted.) Standard length "L2" (4WD): 26.5 mm (1.043 inch) (Length before cap is mounted.) Page 2862 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4420 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Locations Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Locations BR-ABS-01 Anti-lock Brake System (Part 1 Of 5) Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch SRS Component Parts Location Page 5318 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 4432 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5255 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 1019 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3577 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7464 Fuse: Diagrams Fuse a. If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. b. Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. c. Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. d. Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 3927 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2865 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 3751 Page 2653 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 6051 Ground Distribution Page 6484 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7359 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3672 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5560 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8945 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9116 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 4183 Ground Distribution Page 5783 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4750 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 9038 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 5787 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2946 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4706 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2932 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 9127 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1664 ^ The graph on the following page shows that PAG oil left open to air (e.g. in an unsealed container) will absorb 2% moisture (by weight) in 120 hours (5 days). ^ PAG containers, and any A/C component which contains PAG oil (such as the compressor) should remain tightly capped and sealed until ready for use. ^ If you believe that a container of PAG oil may not have been adequately re-sealed after opening, dispose of the oil properly and use oil from a new sealed container. ^ When installing or servicing an A/C system, the refrigerant tube and hose connections should be sealed (all connections made and tightened to specification) without delay. ^ The above precautions will keep the absorption of moisture into the system to a minimum. Using moisture saturated PAG oil in R-134a systems may lead to the formation of acids and related system damage or failure. ^ Do not allow refrigerant oil (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S) to contact styrofoam, as the lubricant will damage this material. Page 6583 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 461 Ground Distribution Page 2413 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1164 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5354 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 4275 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3855 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1278 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 751 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2674 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 2470 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4512 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2123 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. 2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine side). 3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube. 4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. At idling: With vacuum hose connected Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm.sq, 34 psi) With vacuum hose disconnected Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm.sq, 43 psi) If results are unsatisfactory, perform "Fuel Pressure Regulator Check". Page 4773 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Audio - Speaker Noise, Cellular Phone Interference Cellular Phone: Customer Interest Audio - Speaker Noise, Cellular Phone Interference Classification: EL99-005 Reference: NTB99-017 Date: April 1, 1999 NISSAN SPEAKER NOISE DUE TO CELLULAR PHONE INTERFERENCE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Cellular phone charging may cause a popping or crackling noise in the audio speakers of Nissan vehicles. If this condition exists, it is most likely to occur when the customer's cellular phone is turned off, plugged into the 12 volt cigarette lighter socket nearest the audio head unit, and placed within one foot of the audio head unit. The condition may occur more frequently in vehicles with audio systems with amplified speakers. Refer to the appropriate owner's manual for cautions regarding the use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for other accessories. Use the procedure below to verify that the condition exists as described above and provide instruction for the customer to reduce the possibility of future cellular phone interference. SERVICE PROCEDURE Perform the following test procedure to verify the condition exists as described: 1. Ask the customer for the cellular phone and charging adapter. 2. Confirm the cellular phone has been turned off for at least 30 minutes before proceeding. NOTE: Do not turn the cellular phone on at any time during the procedure. If the phone has to be turned from on to off, you will have to wait 30 minutes for the phone to reset to proceed with the test. 3. Plug the phone into the 12 volt cigarette lighter socket nearest the audio head unit. 4. Turn the ignition to the "ON" position (do not turn the cellular phone on). 5. Turn the audio unit on. 6. Place the cellular phone close to the front of the audio head unit. 7. Listen for a popping or crackling noise from the audio speakers. 8. If the noise is heard, move the cellular phone back from the audio unit. The noise should be reduced as the cellular phone is moved further away from the audio unit. 9. If the condition is confirmed through the above procedure, advise the customer to keep the cellular phone at least one foot away from the audio head unit to reduce the possibility of future cellular phone interference. Page 819 Ground Distribution Page 9567 EL-TAIL/L-02 Parking, License, And Tail Lamps Wiring Diagram (Part 2 Of 2) Circuit Diagrams Parking, License And Tail Lamps (Part 1 Of 2) Parking, License, And Tail Lamps (Part 2 Of 2) Parking, License and Tail Lamps Circuit Connectors Page 2472 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5526 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3723 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3383 Page 9375 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8948 Audible Warning Device: Connector Views Warning Chime (Part 1 Of 2) Models With Power Door Locks Circuit Connectors Warning Chime (Part 2 Of 2) Models Without Power Door Locks Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 693 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3847 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 6607 ^ before removing the extension adapter hose from the cooler Outlet hose, ^ turn the can over and spray only propellant for a few seconds to avoid fluid spilling back out of the cooler hose. 5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler Inlet hose (see Figure 10). 6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 11). 7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 11). 8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the cooler Outlet hose to force any remaining cleaner or fluid into the coffee filter (see Figure 11). 9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler Inlet hose. 10. Proceed with Inspection Procedure. Inspection Procedure Page 7689 Pitman Arm: Service and Repair STEERING LINKAGE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Refer to the illustrations when servicing. 1. Remove pitman arm with Tool. Page 7657 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2943 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 104 Page 373 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Body - Warnings for Aftermarket Rust Proofing Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Warnings for Aftermarket Rust Proofing Classification: BF88-005 Reference: TS88-015 Date: February 15, 1988 CAUTIONS FOR AFTERMARKET RUST PROOFING APPLICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan Models SERVICE INFORMATION The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has conducted an investigation into potential failure of the front safety belt systems of certain vehicles due to the unintentional application of rust-proofing material to the belt retractors in the "B" pillar area. Their information suggests that the movement of the pendulum inside the belt retractor mechanism can be restricted if rust-proofing material is inadvertently applied in the pendulum area. Restricting the pendulum movement can result in the belts failing to protect occupants in an accident. Nissan's current models have extensive anti-corrosion treatment applied at the factories and we do not endorse "rust-proofing" at the dealer or aftermarket level. The only instance in which Nissan recommends rust-proofing be applied is in the case of body panel replacement (Please refer to Service Bulletin TS82-066, BF82-007 for instructions about rust-proofing replacement body panels). If additional rust-proofing is applied to Nissan vehicles, DO NOT apply rust-proofing to the "B" pillar area near the seat belt retractor, or any other location near the seat belt retractors of any vehicle. Of course, the usual precautions in applying rust-proofing material still apply. For example, it is important that rust-proofing material not be inadvertently applied to door lock assemblies, drain holes, the exhaust system or driveshaft. IMPROPER RETRACTOR OPERATION CAUSED BY THE INSTALLATION OF RUST-PROOFING MATERIAL WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLING AGENCY. Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 4302 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 6400 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4259 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3003 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3948 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Specifications Brake Hose/Line: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Brake Hose .......................................................................................................................................... ................................... 15 - 18 Nm (11 - 13 ft. lbs.) Connecting Bolt ................................................... .................................................................................................................. 17 - 19 Nm (12 - 14 ft. lbs.) Flare Nut .............................................................................................................................................. .................................. 15 - 18 Nm (11 - 13 ft. lbs.) Two-Way Connector .................................................................................................................................................. 5.1 8.8 Nm (45.1 - 78.1 inch lbs.) Three-Way Connector: Front (Near Booster) ............................................................................................................................................. 5.1 - 8.8 Nm (45.1 - 78.1 inch lbs.) Rear (Near Differential ................................................................................................................................................... 8 - 11 Nm (69 - 95 inch lbs.) Page 1451 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. 2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine side). 3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube. 4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. At idling: With vacuum hose connected Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm.sq, 34 psi) With vacuum hose disconnected Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm.sq, 43 psi) If results are unsatisfactory, perform "Fuel Pressure Regulator Check". Front Page 1799 Wheels: Specifications DIMENSIONS Aluminum Wheel: Maximum Radial Runout ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) Maximum Lateral Runout ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) Steel Wheel: 14 Inch: Painted: Maximum Radial Runout ................................................................................................................................................. 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) Maximum Lateral Runout ................................................................................................................................................ 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) Plated: Maximum Radial Runout ................................................................................................................................................. 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) Maximum Lateral Runout ................................................................................................................................................ 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) 15 Inch: Maximum Radial Runout ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) Maximum Lateral Runout ...................................................................................................................................................... 0.8 mm (0.031 inch) NOTE: Runout average = (Outside runout value + inside runout value) x 0.5 Page 2835 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 4782 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2844 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 8597 Radio/Stereo: Description and Operation BASE AUDIO SYSTEM Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 10 A fuse (No. [41], located in the fuse and fusible link box) ^ to radio terminal (6). With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied: ^ through 10 A fuse [No. [18], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to radio terminal (10). Ground is supplied through the case of the radio. When the radio power knob is pushed to the ON position, radio signals are supplied: ^ through radio terminals (13), (14), (15), and (16) ^ to the door speakers. PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 10 A fuse (No. [41], located in the fuse and fusible link box) ^ to radio terminal (6). With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied: ^ through 10 A fuse [No. [18], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to radio terminal (10). Ground is supplied through the case of the radio. When the radio power knob is pushed to the ON position, radio signals are supplied: ^ through radio terminals (1), (2), (3), (4), (13), (14), (15) and (16) ^ to the door speakers or tweeters. Page 4453 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3846 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5616 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Move the selector lever from the "P" position to "1" position. You should be able to feel the detents in each position. If the detents cannot be felt, the linkage needs adjustment. 1. Place selector lever in "P" position. 2. Loosen control cable lock nut and place manual shaft in "P" position. 3. Push control cable in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration by specified force. Specified force: 19.6 N (2.0 kg, 4.4 1b) 4. Return control cable in the opposite direction of the arrow for 1.0 mm (0.039 inch). 5. Tighten control cable lock nut. 6. Move selector lever from "P" to "1" position again. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly. 7. Apply grease to contacting areas of selector lever and control cable. Install any part removed. - Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the "N" or "P" position. - Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the "P" position. Locations Brake Warning Indicator: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 9117 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 1536 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 6637 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 294 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3377 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 7060 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6123 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 704 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair DISARMING AIR BAGS 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 2. Disconnect Air Bag Module connector. CAUTION: For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any air bag system connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. CAUTION: Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or on the complete harness, for easy identification. ARMING AIR BAGS 1. Connect Air Bag Module connector. 2. Connect both battery cables. 3. Conduct Self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to Testing and Inspection / Self-Diagnostic Procedures. Page 2691 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4625 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2759 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2182 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug ID Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. FR5AP-10 Cold .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. FR6AP-10 Optional ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................... FR7AP-10 Page 3221 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5509 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Tank fuel temperature sensor Check resistance by heating with hot water as shown in the figure or a heat gun. If NG, replace tank fuel temperature sensor. Page 3983 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4552 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 940 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Specifications Page 2764 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1226 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Lock Cylinder Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Lock Cylinder REMOVAL Passenger Air Bag Module Deactivation Switch Lock Cylinder CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes. 1. Detach instrument stay cover lower center from instrument panel. 2. Disconnect passenger air bag deactivation switch harness connector and cigarette lighter harness connector 3. Remove instrument stay cover lower center. 4. Remove four screws and housing from instrument stay cover lower center. 5. Remove clip from bottom of housing. 6. Remove passenger air bag deactivation switch lock cylinder from front of housing. INSTALLATION NOTE: Be sure that passenger air bag deactivation switch and lock cylinder are in the same position as during removal for proper engagement. To install, reverse removal procedure. After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 678 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the front heated oxygen sensor heater corresponding to the engine speed. OPERATION Page 9346 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 159 Page 3521 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2363 Page 4653 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6603 2. Identify which hose is the Inlet and which hose is the Outlet to the oil cooler (refer to Charts A and B). 3. Disconnect the oil cooler Inlet and Outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes (see Figure 3). ^ For Frontier (D22) w/bypass valve, remove the oil cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the bypass valve fittings (see Figure 6 shown) NOTE: If rubber material from a cooler hose remains on the steel tube or fitting, replace the rubber hose. 4. Allow any transmission fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the oil pan. 5. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-A0006) into the cooler Outlet hose (see Figure 4). Page 1263 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 9370 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 515 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Locations Page 6197 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 2372 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 2274 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2282 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2506 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1409 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. Page 6155 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3433 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Fuel Gauge: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 3412 Spark Plug: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 4992 5. Install the new hose between the vent control valve and the metal breather tube (see Figure 5). 6. Reinstall the spare tire. 7. If equipped, reinstall the bedliner. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 5885 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions System - MIL ON/DTC's Stored (EVAP) Classification: EC98-007B Reference: NTB98-058B Date: August 7, 2001 MIL "ON" WITH EVAP SYSTEM DTCs STORED DUE TO LAUNCHING A WATERCRAFT ATTENTION: This bulletin amends NTB98-058A. Applied Vehicle information has been expanded and Parts Information has been revised. Please discard all paper copies of NTB98-058A. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998-2001 Frontier (D22) SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle is used to launch watercraft and exhibits the following symptoms: 1. The EVAP canister is found to have water in it and 2. It has one or more of the following DTC codes stored in Self Diagnosis: ^ P0440 (EVAP-small leak) ^ P1440 (EVAP-small leak) D22 only ^ P0446 (EVAP canister vent control valve) ^ P1446 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck closed) D22 only ^ P1448 (EVAP canister vent control valve-stuck open) D22 only ^ P0450 (EVAP pressure sensor) ^ P0443 (EVAP purge control valve & solenoid valve) ^ P1445 (EVAP purge volume control valve) D21 only ^ P1444 (EVAP purge volume control solenoid valve) D22 only Use the Service Procedure provided in this bulletin to replace the EVAP canister and install the replacement EVAP breather tube kit to prevent water/mud/dirt entry into the EVAP system. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect CONSULT-II. 2. From the Engine menu, select Self Diag Results. 3. Touch PRINT. Then select FF Data and touch PRINT again. 4. Use the appropriate service manual to resolve the stored DTC. 5. To determine if there is damage to the EVAP system, proceed to Removal and Inspection Testing. 6. Then go to Installation of the Breather Tube Kit and Installation of the EVAP system. Removal and Inspection Testing Page 2945 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8807 CLAIMS INFORMATION Repairs of environmental contamination discovered and reported at the time of vehicle delivery to the dealership can be claimed utilizing procedures outlined in Warranty Bulletin WB92-003 dated January 24, 1992. Outline of Procedures A. Wash with detergent such as (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), then dry. B. Identify the type of contamination using fluorescent lights and magnification. If paint over-spray is found, a specialized repair process is needed. If paint contamination other than paint over spray is suspected, test a 2' x 2' section on each affected panel as follows to determine the severity of damage and repair effort needed: C. Re-wash several times to remove detergent and water soluble spots. If spots are removed, wash affected panels. D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover for solvent soluble spots. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. E. To remove iron particles and acid rain residue, use Finish Kare # 1119 followed by # 883 (apply # 883 several times if necessary) and always neutralize with # 118SC. Page 2447 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5184 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5583 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve Page 897 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4487 11. Using CONSULT-II select ENGINE, DATA MONITOR (Manual trigger), Selections From Menu, CLSD THL/P SW, and Enter. 12. Stop engine (turn ignition switch "OFF"). 13. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least five seconds. 14. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least ten seconds. 15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for 1 to 16 times until CLSD THL/P SW in CONSULT-II changes to "ON". Testing and Inspection Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Switch/Check Combination Switch Check Page 3478 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5097 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4266 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2196 2. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of water pump. - Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant Part No. 999 MP-A7007, Three Bond TB1207D or equivalent. Page 6129 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Sensors and Switches - Engine. Page 3311 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Front Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Front TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Top Nut ................................................................................................................................................ .................................. 16 - 22 Nm (12 - 16 ft. lbs.) Bottom Bolt ........................................................... ........................................................................................................... 118 - 147 Nm (87 - 108 ft. lbs.) Page 6473 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 9239 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7816 REMOVAL Page 5145 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2033 7. Remove the idler pulley assembly from the A/C compressor bracket. 8. Install the new idler pulley assembly making sure the E-ring is installed on the adjusting bolt. 9. Adjust the A/C drive belt deflection to specification. Refer to the "A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification" chart below. A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification 10. Tighten the nut that secures idler pulley to 16 - 22 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb). 11. Re-install the engine under cover. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 7772 Steering Gear: Application and ID Model ................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................... PB59K Page 2287 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 738 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 6055 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5949 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transaxle housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis of misfire. Page 2717 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3897 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 7580 ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 2220 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3123 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 38 Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5082 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2237 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Locations Horn Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 8795 ^ An industrial fallout remover (i.e. oxalic acid) such as Zep Industrial Fallout Remover(TM) X-20472 by Zep Manufacturing Company or equivalent; or ^ A chemical neutralization system such as ValuGard(TM) 3-Step Neutralization/Decontamination System by Automotive International, Inc., or equivalent. WARNING: Read and follow the manufacturer's procedure before using. C. Heavy Damage (deep into the clear and/or color coat) This step will require wet sanding and/or repainting. Contact your local paint refinish supplier for recommended procedures such as BASF Corporation Rail Dust repair procedure, Sherwin-Williams Ultra 7000 Basecoat System or equivalent. CAUTION: Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with proper refinishing techniques should perform the above repair. For more information on identifying and diagnosing iron particles and other paint issues, refer to the Nissan/Infiniti Paint Incident Identification Manual, P/N 5PII00. Call DYMENT: 1-800-247-5321 for a copy of the Nissan/Infiniti Paint Incident Identification Manual, P/N 5PII00. CLAIMS INFORMATION Section 1 of the Assurance Products Resource Manual (under "Environmental Damage") states, Since Environmental Damage is generally excluded from the Nissan's New Vehicle Limited Warranty, repairs for such damage do not generally qualify for reimbursement as warranty expense. However, if damage is noted at the time of delivery, the dealer may submit a transportation claim. Upon vehicle delivery, note environmental damage on the carrier's delivery receipt. The carrier's delivery receipt must be signed by both the carrier driver and dealership personnel. Environmental damage must be noted at the time of vehicle delivery. The Claims Call Center, Transportation Department, must also be contacted for pre-approval of repairs on all environmental damage claims. Failure to comply with either of the above will result in transportation claim denial If environmental damage occurs while the vehicle is in the customer's possession, like any non-warranty repair, it may be considered as a goodwill matter on strictly a case-by-case basis. If you have such a repair which you believe may merit such a consideration, but it exceeds the dealer's self-authorization authority, you may contact the Claims Call Center (1-800-258-7008). Page 3947 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4595 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 2395 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5508 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The tank fuel temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 8573 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7329 Battery: Service Precautions Sulphation Sulphation A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended for a long time and the specific gravity becomes less than 1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates. To determine if a battery has been "sulphated", note its voltage and current when charging it. As shown in the diagram, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging sulphated batteries. A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more. followed by a battery capacity test. Page 2934 Ground Distribution Page 2398 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4333 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 7581 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 2113 7. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 8. Remove the oil pan (Refer to "Removal" under "Oil Pan" in the Service Manual). 9. Remove the oil pump and distributor drive shaft, then the oil pickup strainer. 10. Remove the front cover. CAUTION: Be careful not to tear or damage the cylinder head gasket. 11. Remove the following parts: ^ Lower timing chain tensioner (push tensioner piston in and insert a suitable pin into the hole to retain the tensioner piston in the tensioner body). ^ Chain tension arm. ^ Lower timing chain guide. 12. Remove the upper timing chain (refer to "Removal of Upper Timing Chain" in this bulletin). 13. Wipe off the links of the timing chain next to the timing marks on the sprockets. Put paint marks on the timing chain, matching them with the timing marks on the crankshaft sprocket and idler sprocket (see Figure 3). 14. Remove the lower timing chain and sprocket. Installation of Lower Timing Chain 1. Install the crankshaft sprocket, making sure the mating marks face the front of the engine. 2. Install the idler sprocket and lower timing chain using the mating marks and the paint marks made during the removal process. CAUTION: Be careful not to tear or damage the cylinder head gasket. 3. Install chain guide and chain tension arm. 4. Install lower chain tensioner and remove the pin securing the piston into the tensioner body. 5. Front cover installation: a. Using a scraper or other suitable tool remove all traces of liquid gasket from the cylinder block and front cover mating surfaces. Page 7577 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). Page 1331 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Combination Switch/Replacement - Each switch can be replaced without removing combination switch base. Combination Switch/Replacement COMBINATION SWITCH BASE REMOVAL - To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching screws. Combination Switch/Replacement - Before installing the steering wheel, align the turn signal cancel tab with the notch of combination switch. Page 1514 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine. 2. Turn ignition switch off. 3. Release fuel pressure. 4. Remove all spark plugs 5. Disconnect distributor center cable 6. Attach a compression tester to No 1 cylinder 7. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep throttle valve wide open 8. Crank engine and record highest gauge indication. 9. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above. - Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. Compression pressure: kPa (kg/cm2, psi) /rpm Standard: 1,226 (12.5, 178) /300 Minimum: 1,030 (10.5, 149) /300 Difference limit between cylinders: 98 (1.0,14) /300 10. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through spark plug holes. b. Retest compression. - If adding oil improves cylinder compression, piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. - If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace it. - If compression stays low in two cylinders that are next to each other: a. The cylinder head gasket may be leaking, or b. Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Switch: Testing and Inspection Check continuity between terminals at each position. Page 2234 Ground Distribution Page 9351 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5109 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1392 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Page 7579 Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. Page 629 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 8359 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring, sliding it over all areas of the "D" ring where it contacts the seat belt (see Figure 7) until all residue is removed. NOTE: It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring before the following steps of the procedure are completed. Failure to remove all residue build up will result in poor adhesion of the special fluorine resin tape. 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the two fluorine resin tape sections provided in the kit (see Figure 8). 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 9A. NOTE: Page 3077 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor: Customer Interest MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) BULLETIN NUMBER: NTB99-013 CLASSIFICATION: EC99-001 DATE: April 1, 1999 TITLE: 1998-99 MY FRONTIER TRUCK M/T MIL "ON" P0500 SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied 1998-99 Frontier Truck (manual transmission, KA24DE Engine only) shows the following conditions: 1. MIL "ON" with DTC P0500 stored, 2. CONSULT freeze frame data indicates an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less, 3. No abnormal speedometer indication during test drive, then use this bulletin to repair the incident This incident may be due to a clutch slip condition for more than 10 seconds with a vehicle forward speed of less than 3 mph. This situation could occur during hill holding using clutch slip. Correct this incident by installing the ECM listed in the Parts Information using the following service procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTC stored is P0500 2. Verify the CONSULT freeze frame data stored has an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less (see Figure 1). 3. Conduct test drive to confirm there is no abnormal speedometer indication: a) Connect CONSULT and select Start, Engine, Data Monitor and Main Signals b) Test drive vehicle and ensure the speedometer and the vehicle speed sensor value displayed in Data Monitor provide consistent speed Page 1732 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4921 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Testing and Inspection Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Switch/Check Combination Switch Check Page 3650 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3578 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 8947 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2765 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 772 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 211 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8569 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 8381 ^ Find the "witness mark" (the old hole) for the old button, using the information contained in Figure 1 and Table 1. Page 6705 Workflow Page 5909 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 3137 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2763 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3706 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 8211 which will result in contamination, and damage to recovery/recycle equipment. ^ Use equipment designed to meet Society of Automotive engineers (SAE) standards, which specify R-134a service equipment fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME), and service hose identification (black stripe on hose). ^ Adapters to convert from one size fitting to the other must never be used; refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and system failure may result. ^ The use of incorrect equipment will result in refrigerant and/or lubricant contamination, which may cause A/C system or equipment failure. ^ ACR(4) machine will perform all required service functions (recovery, evacuation, recycle, recharge). ^ High volume A/C service facilities may benefit from "component" A/C service equipment (vacuum pump, weight scale, manifold gauge set) to supplement the ACR(4). Comments regarding recovery/recycling equipment: ^ Be certain to follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. ^ Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ^ Only R-134a containers with a 1/2"-16 ACME can be used to add R-134a to the ACR4 recovery/recycle machine. ^ Periodic maintenance of this equipment is required; follow the manufacturer's recommendations as described in the equipment instruction manual. Page 9159 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3546 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6378 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4101 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 9290 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4258 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5931 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 9443 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1218 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Knock sensor - Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M ohms. 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminal (1) and ground. Resistance: 500 - 620 K Ohms [at 25°C (77°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 4074 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Locations Circuit Breaker: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5238 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4728 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6281 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 9415 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 8052 Air Door: Testing and Inspection Intake Door SYMPTOM: Intake door position does not change. INTAKE DOOR OPERATION CHECK 1. Start engine. 2. Slide fan control switch to max speed. 3. Check recirculation. a. Slide recirculation control lever to the REC position. b. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower sound change slightly). Page 340 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 3111 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6574 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 69 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Crash Zone Sensor SRS Component Parts Location Page 449 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3838 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 764 11. Using CONSULT-II select ENGINE, DATA MONITOR (Manual trigger), Selections From Menu, CLSD THL/P SW, and Enter. 12. Stop engine (turn ignition switch "OFF"). 13. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least five seconds. 14. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least ten seconds. 15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for 1 to 16 times until CLSD THL/P SW in CONSULT-II changes to "ON". Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications Mass Air Flow Table Mass Air Flow Table Supply Voltage 11 - 14 V Output Voltage 0.9 - 1.8 V At idle with engine warmed up and running under no load. Air Flow At Idle 0.9 - 5.8 g/sec Air Flow At 2,500 RPM 7.5 - 13.2 g/sec Page 6569 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1189 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications PRESSURE PRESSURE Fuel pressure with vacuum hose connected 235 kpa (34 psi) Fuel pressure with vacuum hose disconnected 294 kpa (43 psi) Page 283 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7356 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2603 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Classification: HA99-006 Reference: NTB99-070 Date: October 5, 1999 A/C IDLER PULLEY WHINE NOISE AT 3000 ENGINE RPM (FOUR CYLINDER ENGINE ONLY) APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) - 2WD 2000 Xterra (WD22) - 2WD APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle exhibits a whine noise at or around 3,000 engine RPM, the cause may be the air conditioning (A/C) idler pulley. Use the service procedure listed below to diagnose and correct the incident. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Run the engine at or around 3,000 RPM with the A/C ON and OFF to determine when the whine noise occurs. NOTE: The A/C will operate with the A/C button turned off if the mode selector is in the foot/defrost or defrost position and the fan is turned on. To ensure the A/C is off, move the fan speed selector to the off position. A. If the whine noise occurs with the A/C off (A/C compressor not operating), look for other sources of the whine noise. B. If the whine noise only occurs when the A/C is on (A/C compressor operating) and the noise can be pin pointed to the idler pulley with a stethoscope or Chassis Ears(TM), proceed with step 2. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Loosen (but do not remove) the nut that secures the idler pulley (see Figure 1). 4. Remove the E-ring from the idler pulley adjusting bolt (see Figure 1). 5. Remove the idler pulley adjusting bolt. 6. Remove the A/C compressor drive belt from the idler pulley. Page 6958 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4807 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 8001 REPLACEMENT 1. Set auto-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove auto-lock free running hub. 3. Remove snap ring. 4. Remove spindle washer and thrust washer. 5. After installing auto-lock free running hub, check operation. NOTE: When installing it, apply recommended grease to the parts shown in the above illustration. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5283 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 8042 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Tightening Sequence Lug Nut Torque Patterns IMPORTANT Check all parts, including rims, lug studs, lug nuts, and mating surfaces of hubs and tire rims for rust, damage, or dirt. Clean mating surfaces with a wire brush to remove any foreign material. Replace any damaged parts as needed. Careless installation of tire/rim assemblies in a vehicle is a major cause of tire installation problems. Proper installation, including fastener torque, is essential to economical, safe and trouble free service. Use only the proper sizes and types of fasteners for safe and proper service. Tighten the fasteners a quarter turn at a time using the tightening sequence diagram as a guide. This is very important to prevent misalignment of the wheel. Continue tightening the fasteners in sequence until the fasteners are tightened to the proper torque (See WHEEL FASTENER TORQUE). CAUTION: Improper torque or tightening sequence can cause distortion, fatigue cracks, or alignment problems. After driving the vehicle for a short distance, recheck the wheel fastener torque. Parts will usually seat naturally, reducing the torque on the fasteners. Retorque all fasteners to the proper torque. Page 3789 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Electrical Diagrams EC-AAC/V-01 Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air Control (AAC) Valve (DTC: P0505) WIRING DIAGRAM Page 866 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 2393 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Specifications Idler Arm: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Nut: At Relay Rod ....................................................................................................................................... ............................. 54 - 98 Nm (40 - 72 ft. lbs.) At Frame Pivot ........................................................... ...................................................................................................... 54 - 69 Nm (40 - 51 ft. lbs.) Idler Mounting To Frame ....................................................................................................................................................... 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Locations Safing Sensor: Locations SRS Component Parts Location Description Safing Sensor The Safing Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Page 2407 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2986 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4999 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 2222 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Locations Safing Sensor: Locations SRS Component Parts Location Description Safing Sensor The Safing Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Page 9496 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Combination Switch/Replacement ^ Each switch can be replaced without removing combination switch base. Combination Switch/Replacement ^ To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching screws. Combination Switch/Replacement ^ Before installing the steering wheel, align the turn signal cancel tab with the notch of combination switch. Page 3252 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6915 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Specified type ...................................................................................................................................... .................................... API GL-4 SAE 75W-90 only Page 7940 Page 4050 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3660 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1692 Comments regarding tubes and hoses: ^ Some R-134a tubes and hoses have reversed male/female connections to prevent interchangeability with R-12 components. R134A Service Tools & Equipment ^ R-12 and R-134a require separate and non-interchangeable sets of recovery, recycle, and recharge equipment, because the refrigerants and lubricants are not compatible and cannot be mixed even in the smallest amounts. ^ DO NOT attempt to use one set of equipment for both R-12 and R-134a, as all equipment contains residual amounts of refrigerant and/or lubricant, Page 4279 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9295 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5066 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2464 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2990 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1851 2. Remove brake caliper assembly without disconnecting hydraulic line. CAUTION: Be careful not to depress brake pedal, or piston will pop out. - Make sure brake hose is not twisted. 3. Remove lock washer. (4WD) 4. Remove wheel bearing lock nut. 2WD: With suitable tool 4WD: With Tool 5. Remove wheel hub and wheel bearing. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop outer bearing. 6. After installing wheel hub and wheel bearing, adjust wheel bearing preload. DISASSEMBLY Page 4597 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4226 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7916 Page 7660 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 9592 1. Remove the door finisher assembly. 2. Remove the door speaker (front door). 3. Remove the frame assembly (rear door). 4. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the glass mounting bolts can be seen. 5. Remove the glass mounting bolts. 6. Raise up the door glass and hold with a suction lifter. 7. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the module assembly (front door). 8. Remove the door regulator assembly. 9. Disassemble the power window motor from the regulator. NOTE: These procedures are typical way for each type. The procedures differ according to model, so refer to Service Manual for more detail. If you also remove door glass, refer to Service Manual for procedures. TYPE-C: DOOR SASHLESS + SEALING SCREEN TYPE (FR/RR) Specifications Tie Rod: Specifications DIMENSIONS Standard Length: 297.6 mm (11.72 inch) SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play "C": Ball Joint: 0 mm (0 inch) Swivel Joint: 0 mm (0 inch) Rotating Torque "B": Ball Joint: 0.5 - 4.9 Nm (4.3 - 43.4 inch lbs.) Swivel Joint: 1.0 - 5.9 Nm (8.7 - 52.1 inch lbs.) Swinging Force "A" [1]: Ball Joint: 15.7 - 147.1 N (3.5 - 33.1 lbs.) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Castle Nuts: 54 - 98 Nm (40 - 72 ft. lbs.) Lock Nuts: 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) [1]: Measure point at the cotter pin hole. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6403 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 9303 MODELS WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS EL-ROOM/L-03 Interior Room Lamp (Part 3 Of 3) Circuit Diagrams Interior Room Lamp (Part 3 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp Circuit Connectors Page 6316 Page 4784 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5178 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6520 Rental Vehicle Expense Assistance: If the customer is unable to wait for the vehicle to be repaired or if the dealer does not have the replacement A/T shifter assembly in inventory, rental vehicle assistance may be submitted using expense code 502. The maximum dollar reimbursement is $30 per day for up to two (2) days ($60.00 total). Replacement parts must be ordered through the Customer Care process. Service Procedure 1. Record the radio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers by removing the (5) screws from the underside and the garnish around the key switch. Carefully snap apart the covers and lift them out. 4. Remove the screw located above the hood release lever and the screw located under the parking brake lever. Carefully unsnap the panel underneath the instrument cluster and remove the driver's side lower instrument panel by lifting and pulling it forward (See Figure 2). 5. Remove the driver's side lower knee protector bar by removing the (2) 6mm bolts and then removing the bar (see Figure 3). Page 5149 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1167 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 1661 Technical Service Bulletin # 92-001 Date: 920101 A/C - System Changes As Result of R-134A Refrigerant Classification: HA92-OO1 Reference: NTB92-OO1 Date: January 1992 A/C SYSTEM CHANGES FOR R-134A REFRIGERANT (ALL MODELS) APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models Service Information Introduction Due to its harmful effect on the ozone layer, R-12 is being phased out and replaced by R-134a, which does not harm the ozone layer. While the R-134a A/C system is very similar to an R-12 A/C system, the differences in the refrigerant, lubricants, and service equipment are important. Nissan A/C systems will change from R-12 to R-134a at the time of new vehicle (full model change) introduction, or in some cases by model year update to an existing model line. This bulletin describes all of the general differences between the R-12 and R-134a systems. For details of an R-134a system for a specific model, refer to that model's service manual or new product information. Refrigerant Handling Precautions ^ R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ Use only specified lubricant for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ^ The specified R-134a lubricant absorbs moisture from the atmosphere at a rapid rate, therefore the following handling precautions must be observed: ^ When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. ^ When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Also, complete the connection of all refrigerant tubes and hoses without delay to minimize the entry of moisture into the system. ^ Use the specified lubricant from a sealed container only. Containers must be re-sealed immediately after dispensing the lubricant. Lubricant in containers which are not properly sealed will become moisture saturated. Such lubricant is no longer suitable for use and should be properly disposed. ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE standards to discharge R-134a Systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. ^ Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ^ Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 125° (52°C). ^ Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. ^ Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ^ Keep refrigerant away from open flames: hazardous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ^ Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. Page 8577 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1065 Throttle Full Close Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-TP/SW-01 Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Circuit Diagrams Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Locations Door Switch: Locations BR-ABS-01 Anti-lock Brake System (Part 1 Of 5) SRS Component Parts Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9193 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 987 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3139 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 487 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Electrical Component Inspection Thermal Limiting Fuse: Testing and Inspection Electrical Component Inspection If NG, replace thermal protector. Page 7141 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 1571 1. Visually inspect the metal tube portion of the A/C low hose between the compressor flange and the rubber hose for cracks or signs of leakage such as traces of oil or dirt deposits (see Figure 1). NOTE: Use a mirror and flashlight (as needed) to view the underside of the hose end. Low Hose Leak Detector Inspection 1. Use an approved electronic leak detector (Kent Moore model # J39400 or # J41995) to check the A/C low hose for leaks. Refer to pages HA-48 through HA-50 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the leak check procedure. NOTE: Make sure the electronic leak detector is properly calibrated and that the probe tip filter is clean before performing the leak check. Refer to the leak detector owner's manual to calibrate and/or change the probe tip filter as needed. A/C Low Hose Installation 1. Use appropriate equipment to discharge and recover all remaining refrigerant from the vehicle's A/C system. Refer to pages HA-51 and HA-52 of the 1998 Nissan Frontier Service manual for the discharge and recovery procedure. Page 1042 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5294 Leak Detection Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board diagnosis. Page 1776 Page 936 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8821 area (2' x 2' or less). Spread the liquid around with the pad before turning the buffer "ON". Use an overlapping pattern to assure even polishing effort on all areas. 3. Second use a dual action sander with either a 3M foam pad or a Meguiar's foam pad, apply polishing liquid over the work area (2' x 2' or less). Polish with the same technique as above. Do not polish dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. If build up occurs, cool the surface with clean water and dry with a clean terry cloth towel and clean the foam pad. Use a slower speed to prevent heating the surface and ground the vehicle to a metal water pipe to reduce static electricity. INSPECTION Gently clean a small section with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Inspect the surface for swirl marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. CAUTION: If you clean with an alcohol and water cleaning solution it will cause damage to plastic lenses. The damage is not immediately visible, but develops later Buffing Buffing is done with a 8" buffer at 1500-1750 RPM to remove sanding scratches. 1. Clean the surface of all residue before buffing. 2. Apply a buffing liquid and spread it over the work area (2' x 2' or less) with the buffing pad before turning the buffer "ON". Keep the pad nearly flat and move it slowly but continuously over the area. Use an overlapping pattern to assure even buffing effort on all areas. Do not buff dry, wipe off excess material with a clean terry cloth towel. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for sanding marks under full sunlight or with a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away. If necessary, gently clean a small section of the surface with PPG DX330 Wax and Grease remover or similar wax remover, using a clean towel to remove any polish/filler. Wipe in one direction to aid in distinguishing between buffing scratches and towel scratches. Sanding 1. Soak the sand paper in water with lubricant such as Meguiar's # 0016, for at least 15 minutes before use. Mask the fenders and doors to reduce cleanup time. Wet sanding with a lubricant prevents buildup on the paper and consequent gouging of the finish. 2. Sand with 2000 grit sand paper using a sanding pad, never by hand alone. Apply plenty of water while sanding in one direction only, no more than 12-15 strokes. Do not sand in a circular pattern. Do not sand over body lines and panel edges. Rinse the paper frequently to prevent gouging. NOTE: Wet sanding vehicles with the New Cross Link Clear Coat (NCLC) hard clear coat requires a more aggressive sanding stroke. Vehicles with a conventional clear coat require a normal sanding stroke. 3. Rinse with water and squeegee gently. As the squeegee clears the water, inspect for damage. INSPECTION Inspect the surface for damage under both strong fluorescent lights and full sunlight (a 500 watt halogen work lamp held at an angle about an arms length away is necessary on cloudy days). A smooth dull sanded surface is expected at this time. Bright spots or other irregularities indicate the damage needs more sanding, up to the 0.5 mil standard. 4. After the damage is removed, measure the paint thickness in several places to determine if less than 0.5 mil has been removed. 5. If the damage was deeper than 0.5 mil, the surface must be re-clear coated, or re-color coated on vehicles with no clear coat. Refer to the Warranty Paint and Body Self-Study Course, or the Warranty Flat Rate Manual for assistance. 6. If the damage has been removed with less than 0.5 mil of the color/clear coat removed, buff and polish to remove the sanding marks. Technical Service Bulletin # 87-145 Date: 870928 Paint - Spotting Prevention & Repair Classification: BF87-030 Page 619 Knock Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-KS-01 Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Circuit Diagrams Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 1135 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1171 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5276 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 702 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3548 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3121 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4139 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5904 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Resistance 166.5 - 302.5 ohms at 68 deg F Page 2856 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3553 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 9442 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5992 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ignition Coil & Power Transistor The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to the power transistor. The power transistor switches on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. As the primary circuit is turned on and off, the proper high voltage is induced in the coil secondary circuit. Page 784 Ground Distribution Testing and Inspection Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Switch/Check Combination Switch Check Page 5541 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 752 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4261 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4032 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 2408 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1913 Main Bearing Cap Bolts Tightening Sequence Connecting Rod (1) Tighten to 14 to 16 Nm (1.4 to 1.6 kg-m, 10 to 12 ft. lbs.). (2) Tighten bolts 60 +5/-0 degrees clockwise with an angle wrench. GIf an angle wrench is not available, tighten them to 38 to 44 Nm (3.9 to 4.5 kg-m, 28 to 33 ft. lbs.) Oil Pan Page 7178 Brake Drum: Specifications Drum (New) 11.61 in Drum Repair Limit: Maximum Inner Diameter 11.67 in Maximum Out Of Round 0.0012 in Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications Mass Air Flow Table Mass Air Flow Table Supply Voltage 11 - 14 V Output Voltage 0.9 - 1.8 V At idle with engine warmed up and running under no load. Air Flow At Idle 0.9 - 5.8 g/sec Air Flow At 2,500 RPM 7.5 - 13.2 g/sec Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Speedometer Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Locations Horn Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 9139 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 6688 - Apply recommended grease to contact surface and rubbing surface. - Too much lubricant might damage clutch disc facing. WATERPROOF - FOR 4WD MODEL - Apply recommended sealant to contact surface of transmission case dust cover and withdrawal lever, then install dust cover clip. Recommended sealant: Nissan genuine part (KP115-00100) or equivalent. Page 6060 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 828 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2424 Page 5278 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 187 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3482 Ground Distribution Page 7460 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 4084 Page 3965 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the front heated oxygen sensor heater corresponding to the engine speed. OPERATION Page 3709 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 6303 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 3775 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 9250 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 6252 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 604 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 2238 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1374 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 2820 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2083 7. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 8. Remove the oil pan (Refer to "Removal" under "Oil Pan" in the Service Manual). 9. Remove the oil pump and distributor drive shaft, then the oil pickup strainer. 10. Remove the front cover. CAUTION: Be careful not to tear or damage the cylinder head gasket. 11. Remove the following parts: ^ Lower timing chain tensioner (push tensioner piston in and insert a suitable pin into the hole to retain the tensioner piston in the tensioner body). ^ Chain tension arm. ^ Lower timing chain guide. 12. Remove the upper timing chain (refer to "Removal of Upper Timing Chain" in this bulletin). 13. Wipe off the links of the timing chain next to the timing marks on the sprockets. Put paint marks on the timing chain, matching them with the timing marks on the crankshaft sprocket and idler sprocket (see Figure 3). 14. Remove the lower timing chain and sprocket. Installation of Lower Timing Chain 1. Install the crankshaft sprocket, making sure the mating marks face the front of the engine. 2. Install the idler sprocket and lower timing chain using the mating marks and the paint marks made during the removal process. CAUTION: Be careful not to tear or damage the cylinder head gasket. 3. Install chain guide and chain tension arm. 4. Install lower chain tensioner and remove the pin securing the piston into the tensioner body. 5. Front cover installation: a. Using a scraper or other suitable tool remove all traces of liquid gasket from the cylinder block and front cover mating surfaces. Headlamp (Plastic) - Cloudy/Hazy Appearance Headlamp: Customer Interest Headlamp (Plastic) - Cloudy/Hazy Appearance Classification: ELO2-005 Reference: NTB02-053 Date: May 3, 2002 PLASTIC HEADLAMP LENS CLEANER APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with plastic headlamp lenses SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin introduces 3M Plastic Polish(TM) # 39010, which should be used to clean and polish headlamps with cloudy, hazy, or other poor appearance. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use 3M Plastic Polish(TM) (# 39010) to polish the headlamp lens(es) as follows: 1. Remove any dust, dirt, or debris from the headlamp lens using a soft damp cloth. 2. Dispense a quarter-size drop of 3M Plastic Polish(TM) onto a clean, dry, soft, cotton terry cloth towel (see Figure 1a). 3. Apply the polish to the lens using a firm, circular motion (see Figure 1b). 4. Rub until dry. 5. Use a clean, dry section of cloth to remove the haze. 6. Repeat as necessary. NOTES: ^ Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for 3M Plastic Polish(TM) # 39010 are available via fax or email by calling 3M's 24-hour "3M Helps" Customer Service line at 1-800-364-3577 OR (651) 737-6501. ^ This 3M product can be locally sourced through the following distributors: R.S. Hughes - 1-877-774-8443 Granger Industrial Supplies - 1-800-323-0620 Page 5813 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 9538 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 4429 Ground Distribution Page 9446 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4891 3. Directly above this 25 mm hole, drill one 8 mm (0.31 in.) hole in the inside edge of the vehicle bed rail (see Figure 3). 4. Deburr both drilled holes and coat the bare metal surfaces with an anti-corrosive paint. 5. Install the rubber grommet (from the kit) into the 25 mm drilled hole. 6. Install the metal breather tube into the grommet and fasten the upper plastic bracket to the bed rail through the 8 mm drilled hole with the bolt and nut from the kit (see Figure 4). Installation of the EVAP System 1. Install the EVAP canister. 2. Install the EVAP vent control valve. 3. Reconnect the two small diameter original hoses to the canister. 4. Reconnect the vent control valve electrical harness. Body - Warnings for Aftermarket Rust Proofing Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Warnings for Aftermarket Rust Proofing Classification: BF88-005 Reference: TS88-015 Date: February 15, 1988 CAUTIONS FOR AFTERMARKET RUST PROOFING APPLICATION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan Models SERVICE INFORMATION The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has conducted an investigation into potential failure of the front safety belt systems of certain vehicles due to the unintentional application of rust-proofing material to the belt retractors in the "B" pillar area. Their information suggests that the movement of the pendulum inside the belt retractor mechanism can be restricted if rust-proofing material is inadvertently applied in the pendulum area. Restricting the pendulum movement can result in the belts failing to protect occupants in an accident. Nissan's current models have extensive anti-corrosion treatment applied at the factories and we do not endorse "rust-proofing" at the dealer or aftermarket level. The only instance in which Nissan recommends rust-proofing be applied is in the case of body panel replacement (Please refer to Service Bulletin TS82-066, BF82-007 for instructions about rust-proofing replacement body panels). If additional rust-proofing is applied to Nissan vehicles, DO NOT apply rust-proofing to the "B" pillar area near the seat belt retractor, or any other location near the seat belt retractors of any vehicle. Of course, the usual precautions in applying rust-proofing material still apply. For example, it is important that rust-proofing material not be inadvertently applied to door lock assemblies, drain holes, the exhaust system or driveshaft. IMPROPER RETRACTOR OPERATION CAUSED BY THE INSTALLATION OF RUST-PROOFING MATERIAL WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLING AGENCY. Page 7777 6. Remove oil seal. 7. Remove U-packing. CAUTION: When removing oil seal and U-packing, be careful not to scratch gear housing. 8. Remove lock nut, then loosen adjusting screw using a screwdriver. Separate sector cover and sector shaft. 9. Remove O-ring. 10. Remove U-packing. CAUTION: ^ When removing U-packing, be careful not to scratch sector cover, needle bearing, etc. ^ Needle bearing cannot be disassembled. If it is damaged, remove sector cover assembly. 11. Remove dust seal. Page 1905 Cylinder Head Components Page 5503 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Specifications Compression Check: Specifications GENERAL ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS Page 3915 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity [1] ................................................................................................................................. 1000 - 1100 ml (35.2 - 38.7 Imperial Fluid Ounces) [1] At the normal operating temperature of 60 - 80° C (140 - 176° F). Page 1311 Ground Distribution Page 2386 Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3504 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4077 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 2475 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ignition Coil & Power Transistor The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to the power transistor. The power transistor switches on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. As the primary circuit is turned on and off, the proper high voltage is induced in the coil secondary circuit. Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Up Control Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 9174 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Specifications Page 4588 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2467 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 692 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6101 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Transistor 1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor & power transistor harness connector and ignition coil harness connector. 2. Check power transistor resistance between terminals (2) and (8). If NG, replace distributor assembly. Page 953 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9031 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 3265 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5292 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2069 5. Install rear oil seal retainer. a. Before installing rear oil seal retainer, remove all traces of liquid gasket from mating surface using a scraper. - Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of rear oil seal retainer. - Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant, Part No. 999 MP-A7007, Three Bond TB1207D or equivalent. - Apply around inner side of bolt holes. Page 4362 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5609 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Front Differential Page 5623 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3108 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 1833 Page 4408 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater COMPONENT INSPECTION Rear heated oxygen sensor heater Check the following. 1. Check resistance between terminals (2) and (3). Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 25°C (77°F) 2. Check continuity. If NG, replace the rear heated oxygen sensor. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram A/T - Fluid Application Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Application Classification: AT96-001 Reference: NTB98-042 Date: May 15, 1998 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID This amended version of NTB95-055 updates information regarding the Recommendation ATF usage. Please disregard previous NTB95-055 and NTB93-065. SERVICE INFORMATION IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Matic "D" ATF must be used in performing repairs paid by Nissan, such as warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for repairs when non-genuine Nissan Matic "D" is used. For current and prior production Nissan vehicles, front wheel and/or rear wheel drive, only Nissan Matic "D", or other ashless petroleum based ATF, is formulated to meet the requirements of Nissan automatic transmissions and automatic transaxles. Nissan Matic "D", or other ashless petroleum based ATF, assists in ensuring transmission durability, smooth driveability, low exhaust emissions and customer satisfaction. Only an ashless type petroleum based ATF should be used to repair Nissan vehicles because other types of ATF may contain compounds which adversely affect transmission performance. Specifically, ash will impact friction response. In addition, ATF with ash is likely to have a higher Zinc (Zn) content. Zinc will adhere to clutch linings and cause slippage, resulting in transmission damage. For ordering procedures, please refer to the "Dealer Confidential Parts Price List". Page 118 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 3857 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 481 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2130 Page 2534 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4550 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 155 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ECM consists of a microcomputer, diagnostic test mode selector, and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 545 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 4668 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3830 Idle Up Control Valve: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the air conditioner is on, the IACV-FICD solenoid valve supplies additional air to adjust to the increased load. ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). Page 743 Ground Distribution Page 9459 Parking Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1581 Use the Diagnosis/Repair Flow Chart shown to determine the diagnosis and repair of the vehicle. Low Hose Visual and Leak Detector Inspection Low Hose Visual Inspection Page 3889 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 7584 The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center Page 7014 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2793 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the front heated oxygen sensor heater corresponding to the engine speed. OPERATION Page 2885 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6834 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 5557 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3791 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION IACV-AAC Valve Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector. - Check IACV-AAC valve resistance. Resistance: Approximately 10 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] - Check plunger for seizing or sticking. - Check for broken spring. Page 4379 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5312 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. Page 5150 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3665 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7058 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2741 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 4216 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3950 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 5398 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Specifications Page 2465 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 8960 Key Switch (Insert) Key Switch (Insert) Check continuity between terminals when key is inserted in ignition key cylinder and key is removed from ignition key cylinder. Driver Side Door Switch Driver Side Door Switch Check continuity between terminals when door switch is pushed. Seat Belt Buckle Switch Seat Belt Buckle Switch Check continuity between terminals when seat belt is fastened and unfastened. Page 3543 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7735 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 5726 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4367 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2745 Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 2843 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1508 Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Gap Spark plug gap mm. 1.0-1.1 Spark plug gap in. 0.039-0.043 Page 577 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Service and Repair Axle Nut: Service and Repair Manual Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set knob of manual-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove manual-lock free running hub. 3. When installing manual-lock free running hub, make sure the hub is in the FREE position. NOTE: Apply multi-purpose grease to the parts shown in the illustration. 4. Check operation of manual-lock free running hub after installation. INSPECTION - Check that the knob moves smoothly and freely. - Check that the clutch moves smoothly in the body. Auto Lock Free Running Hub Page 9128 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7655 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4455 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 7691 Standard length "L" (4WD): 297.6 mm (11.72 inch) CAUTION: Make sure that tie rod bars are screwed into tie rod tube more than 29 mm (1.14 inch) (2WD), 22 mm (0.87 inch) (4WD). INSPECTION Ball Joint And Swivel Joint 1. Check joints for play. If ball or swivel stud is worn and play in axial direction is excessive or joint is hard to swing, replace as a complete unit. Swinging force (Measure point: Cotter pin hole) "A": Ball joint: 15.7 - 147.1 N (3.5 - 33.1 lbs.) Rotating torque "B": Ball joint: 0.5 - 4.9 Nm (4.3 - 43.4 inch lbs.) Swivel joint: 1.0 - 5.9 Nm (8.7 - 52.1 inch lbs.) Axial end play "C": Ball joint: 0 mm (0 inch) Swivel joint: 0 mm (0 inch) 2. Check condition of dust cover. If it is cracked excessively replace dust cover. When replacing dust cover, be careful not to damage it. 3. Lubricate joint with multi-purpose grease, if necessary. 4. When installing boot band with commercial service tool, be careful not to overexpand it. CAUTION: Be careful not to apply grease or oil to taper of joint. Idler Arm Assembly - Check rubber bushing of idler arm for breakage, wear or play, and if necessary replace. - Lubricate idler arm assembly with multi-purpose grease, if necessary. Relay Rod And Tie-Rod - Check tie rod and relay rod for breakage, bends or cracks, and replace with a new one if necessary. Steering Damper - Check for oil leaking from damper, and replace if necessary. Fixing Location - Check fixing location (nuts and cotter pins) for looseness, play or breakage. - When looseness or play is found, check for wear on tapered portion of joints, gear arm of idler arm. - When reassembling each joint, use new cotter pins. Page 3204 ^ Refer to Figure 3 for the specific vehicle you are working on CAUTION: Never adjust the throttle slop screw. It is pre-set at the factory. 6. Check "B"; Insert the thicker feeler gauge "B" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop (see Figure 3). The CTPS should NOT have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "OL"). 7. If the results of steps 5 and/or 6 are not OK, loosen the TPS retaining bolts and adjust the CTPS to achieve the correct results. 8. Tighten the TPS retaining bolts, then repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times to check the new adjustment. 9. Re-connect the harness connector to the CTPS portion of the (TPS). Reset throttle position sensor idle position memory. NOTE: Failure to reset the TPS idle position memory may result in the idle speed staying higher than specification. 10. Start engine and warm it to operating temperature. NOTE: Always warm up engine to normal operation temperature, If the engine is cool, the throttle position memory will not be reset correctly. Page 1947 Piston: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Block. Page 2221 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 8748 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 436 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9141 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2149 Page 2049 3. Install oil pan - Tighten oil pan bolts in numerical order: 5.9 - 6.9 Nm (0.6 - 0.7 kg.m, 52 - 61 inch lbs.) - Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil. 4. Install parts in reverse order of removal. Page 8204 Comments regarding condensers: ^ The parallel flow condenser can be identified by the refrigerant end tanks, and smaller, more closely spaced center section tubes. Page 6854 Center Support: Service and Repair DISASSEMBLY CENTER BEARING 1. Place matching marks on flanges, then separate 2nd tube from 1st tube. 2. Place matching marks on the flange and shaft. 3. Remove locking nut using Tool. Tool number: ST38060002 (J34311) 4. Remove companion flange using puller. 5. Remove center bearing using Tool and press. Tool number: ST30031000 (J22912-01) JOURNAL Page 4754 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 5505 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 6869 Part 2 of 4 Page 4330 Ground Distribution Page 1234 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Description 4WD Models The diagnosis sensor unit will deploy the air bags if the G-sensor and/or the crash zone sensor activates simultaneously with the safing sensor while the ignition switch is ON. The passenger air bag does not deploy when the passenger air bag deactivation switch is turned to the OFF position. Page 5102 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3147 Ground Distribution Page 642 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5007 7. Remove the idler pulley assembly from the A/C compressor bracket. 8. Install the new idler pulley assembly making sure the E-ring is installed on the adjusting bolt. 9. Adjust the A/C drive belt deflection to specification. Refer to the "A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification" chart below. A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification 10. Tighten the nut that secures idler pulley to 16 - 22 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb). 11. Re-install the engine under cover. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 9231 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 993 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 5675 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TFTS-01 Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Circuit Diagrams Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 3176 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4174 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Testing and Inspection Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Ignition wires 1. Inspect wires for cracks, damage, burned terminals and for improper fit. 2. Measure the resistance of wires to their distributor cap terminal. Move each wire while testing to check for intermittent breaks. Resistance: 13.6 - 18.4 K Ohms (4.15 - 5.61 K Ohms/ft) at 25°C (77°F) If the resistance exceeds the above specification, inspect ignition wire to distributor cap connection. Clean connection or replace the ignition wire with a new one. G Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair G Sensor SRS Component Parts Location Description G Sensor The G Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. It can not be serviced separately. Malfunction of the G Sensor requires replacement of the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Refer to Diagnosis Sensor Unit / Service and Repair. Page 5853 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 974 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 6720 Carrier Bearings: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Differential; Service and Repair. Page 879 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3980 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5851 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 7667 Center Link: Service and Repair STEERING LINKAGE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Refer to the illustrations when servicing. 1. Remove pitman arm with Tool. Page 4830 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5084 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6525 Page 5748 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Diagram Information and Instructions EGR Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. 2. Remove rear oil seal. 3. Install rear oil seal. - Apply ATF before installing. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Page 5558 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 719 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-PST/SW-01 Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Diagrams Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 5778 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9591 If you also remove door glass, refer to Service Manual for procedures. TYPE-A: DOOR SASH + SEALING SCREEN TYPE (FR/RR) 1. Remove the door finisher assembly. 2. Remove the sealing screen and the door speaker (if equipped). 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the glass mounting bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the glass mounting bolts. 5. Raise up the door glass and hold with a suction lifter. 6. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove regulator assembly. 7. Disassemble the power window motor from the regulator. NOTE: These procedures are typical way for each type. The procedures differ according to model, so refer to Service Manual for more detail. If you also remove door glass, refer to Service Manual for procedures. TYPE-B: DOOR SASH + MODULE (FR)/FRAME (RR) TYPE Page 6208 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4416 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6205 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Specifications Brake Light Switch: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Switch Nut ........................................................................................................................................... ........................... 12 - 15 Nm (108 - 132 inch lbs.) Page 2290 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 9414 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3635 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5986 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5577 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3774 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5251 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5180 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3437 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 381 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3693 Page 6535 2. From the driver's side floor area, looking up behind the driver lower instrument panel, the lower portion of the steering column should be visible. On the bottom side of the steering column just in front of the driver lower instrument panel should be a white paper label with a four digit date code (see Figure 1). NOTE: Vehicles within the campaign range that were repaired prior to this campaign (i.e. as a Port Modification) will have an orange label over or adjacent to the white paper label. These vehicles do not require additional repair. 3. If the A/T shifter assembly replacement is required, proceed to the Service Procedure section of this bulletin. PARTS INFORMATION Parts for this voluntary safety recall must be ordered through Nissan's Customer Care Parts Ordering Program. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table as shown. Towing Expense: If required, towing expenses to the nearest Nissan dealer should be submitted using expense code 501. Page 6839 Page 3346 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 1091 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 8083 SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch and fan switch are ON. MAGNET CLUTCH OPERATION CHECK 1. Start engine. 2. Slide fan control lever to operate blower motor. 3. Push A/C switch to ON. Make sure that magnet clutch is engaged. (You can hear magnet clutch engage sound.) 4. Push A/C switch to OFF. Make sure that magnet clutch is disengaged. NOTE: If magnet clutch sticks, check magnet clutch. Page 3714 Engine Control Module: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3443 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 7275 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Operation Check - Depress brake pedal several times with engine off. After exhausting vacuum, make sure there is no change in pedal stroke. - Depress brake pedal, then start engine. If pedal goes down slightly, operation is normal. Page 7041 Without Scan Tools (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Perform test drive in "D" position (OD "ON") at least 20 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) (3) Stop the vehicle, turn ignition switch "OFF", wait at least 5 seconds and then turn "ON" (4) Perform "Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)" with ECM. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE COMPONENT INSPECTION Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve 1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3). Resistance: Approximately 25 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] 2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3) with battery voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be operated. 4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Page 1792 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 546 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CKPS-01 Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) (OBD) Circuit Diagrams Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 5050 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 566 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3371 8. If the vehicle is not CONSULT compatible, monitor the idle speed using the tachometer connected in step 1. If using CONSULT, perform the following procedure: Monitor the idle speed (CMPS^RPM) on the CONSULT screen. 9. Check the idle rpm and adjust to specification (if necessary) using the screw on the IACV-AAC valve. The table shows ignition timing and base idle speed for some models. If the model or model year you are working on is not listed, refer to the appropriate service manual (EF &) EC section, and perform the "IDLE SPEED/IGNITION TIMING/IDLE MIXTURE RATIO INSPECTION" procedure. 10. Turn the engine off, and re-connect the TPS. CD Changer - CD Care and Usage Guidelines Compact Disc Player (CD): Technical Service Bulletins CD Changer - CD Care and Usage Guidelines Classification: EL00-007 Reference: NTB00-064 Date: July 24, 2000 AUDIO CD CARE AND USAGE GUIDELINES APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles with an Audio Compact Disc (CD) System SERVICE INFORMATION If an audio CD system incident is noted, a possible cause may be improper CD care or usage. This bulletin provides updated CD operation instructions to avoid potential audio CD incidents/customer concerns caused by improper care and usage of compact discs. To aid in solving customer concerns, use the following guidelines when speaking to customers or inspecting incident vehicles. ^ Ensure that the customer only uses CDs that have the "Compact Disc Digital Audio" insignia on them (see Figure 1). The audio CD system was designed to use CDs that meet this design standard. Lower quality CDs may not function properly in the audio CD system. ^ Customers must not use special shaped CDs (see Figure 2). The Audio CD system was designed to use standard 12 cm (4.7 in) round CDs. Other shapes and sizes may cause the internal CD mechanism to jam or have optical pick-up errors. Page 1217 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. * Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 4308 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6337 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 1386 The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. Page 6758 2. Install the two halves of the bearing puller jaw PIN J-45073-7 around the outer axle bearing making sure the lower lip of each jaw is slid under the bearing (see Figure 6a). 3. Slide the sleeve P/N J-25852-4 over the bearing puller jaws (see Figure 6b). 4. Tighten the forcing screw of the extension tube until the axle bearing is pulled free (see Figure 6c). IMPORTANT: Do not use an impact wrench to tighten the forcing screw. 5. Remove the sleeve, bearing puller jaws, extension tube, and outer bearing from the axle shaft. NOTE: The inner axle bearing race (that remains in the brake backing plate) can be removed using the conventional press removal method. 6. Re-assemble the axle shaft assembly according to the applicable service manual procedures. Use bearing lock nut wrench P/N J-45073-1 to tighten the axle lock nut to the specification listed in the applicable service manual. NOTE: When tightening the axle shaft lock nut, make sure the lock nut wrench (P/N J45073-1) is installed on the torque wrench at 90 degrees (see Figure 7) to achieve the most accurate torque application. 7. Re-install the axle shaft assembly in the vehicle according to the applicable service manual procedures. Page 8022 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 3590 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Front Wheel Bearing Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Wheel Bearing - Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. - Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) - Adjust wheel bearing preload if there is any axial end play or wheel bearing does not turn smoothly. MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins MIL ON - DTC P0500 (VSS) BULLETIN NUMBER: NTB99-013 CLASSIFICATION: EC99-001 DATE: April 1, 1999 TITLE: 1998-99 MY FRONTIER TRUCK M/T MIL "ON" P0500 SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied 1998-99 Frontier Truck (manual transmission, KA24DE Engine only) shows the following conditions: 1. MIL "ON" with DTC P0500 stored, 2. CONSULT freeze frame data indicates an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less, 3. No abnormal speedometer indication during test drive, then use this bulletin to repair the incident This incident may be due to a clutch slip condition for more than 10 seconds with a vehicle forward speed of less than 3 mph. This situation could occur during hill holding using clutch slip. Correct this incident by installing the ECM listed in the Parts Information using the following service procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTC stored is P0500 2. Verify the CONSULT freeze frame data stored has an engine speed value of 2000 rpm or less (see Figure 1). 3. Conduct test drive to confirm there is no abnormal speedometer indication: a) Connect CONSULT and select Start, Engine, Data Monitor and Main Signals b) Test drive vehicle and ensure the speedometer and the vehicle speed sensor value displayed in Data Monitor provide consistent speed Page 6735 Pinion Gear: Specifications Rear Differential With H190A Final Drive DRIVE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT DRIVE PINION PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT With C200 Final Drive DRIVE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT Page 3930 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4542 Ground Distribution TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Classification: EC99-005b Reference: NTB99-053b Date: January 22, 2002 NISSAN REVISED TPS ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE This bulletin amends NTB99-053a. The Service Information and Service Procedure has been revised. In addition, TPS Connector tool (Kent-Moore # J45178) information has been included. Please discard all copies of NTB99-053a. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1995-1998 Maxima (A32) 1996-1998 Pathfinder (R50) 1995-1998 240SX (S14) 1995-1998 Sentra/200SX (B14) w/GA16 & SR20 engines 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998 Frontier (D22) 1995-1997 Altima (U13) 1998 Altima (L30) 1996-1998 Quest (V40) SERVICE INFORMATION The adjustment procedure for the throttle position sensor (TPS) has been revised and standardized for all the Applied Vehicles. ^ The TPS contains a closed throttle position switch (CTPS) and a variable output throttle position sensor. ^ This procedure uses the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) status (ON or OFF) instead of the throttle position sensor (variable output voltage) to adjust the TPS. ^ Incorrect adjustment of the CTPS may cause one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to be displayed: P1447, P0120, P0510, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P1705. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check fast idle cam (FIC) function, if equipped (refer to appropriate Service Manual). When finished, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and the fast idle cam (if equipped) has released. Then turn the engine "OFF". 2. Disconnect the harness connector (see Figure 1) from the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) position of the throttle position sensor (TPS). 3. Connect an ohmmeter across the terminals for the closed throttle position switch (CTPS). Page 7738 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 877 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6248 Ground Distribution Page 407 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 2637 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2497 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Recall 98V065000: Seat Belt May Get Cut/Sliced Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 98V065000: Seat Belt May Get Cut/Sliced Year: 1998 Make: NISSAN TRUCK Model: FRONTIER Year of Recall: '98 Type of Report: Vehicle Potential Number of Units Affected: 20000 Summary: Vehicle Description: Light duty passenger trucks equipped with bucket seats. In certain frontal crashes, the front seat belt can slip between the seat bottom finisher and the seat back plastic recliner handle where it can be cut by the sharp edge of the metal portion of the recliner lever. If the seat belt is completely severed, it can increase the risk of serious injury to an occupant in a crash. Dealers will replace the plastic handle on the end of the seat back reclining lever with a different shape handle which will prevent the seat belt from slipping between the handle and the seat. Owner notification is expected to begin during April 1998. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Nissan at 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261). Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Page 3467 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 6317 Page 5747 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1794 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 6052 Ground Distribution Page 6137 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 3509 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 8024 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT INSPECTION Front heated oxygen sensor With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Select "MANU TRIG" and "HI SPEED" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT, and select "FR O2 SENSOR" and "FR O2 MNTR". (3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps. (4) Touch "RECORD" on CONSULT screen. (5) Check the following. - "FR O2 MNTR" in "DATA MONITOR" mode changes from "RICH" to "LEAN" to "RICH" 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below: cycle | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | FR O2 MNTR R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R R = "FR O2 MNTR", "RICH" L = "FR O2 MNTR", "LEAN" - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage goes below 0.35V at least once. - "FR O2 SENSOR" voltage never exceeds 1.0V. OR Without CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals (50) (sensor signal) and (32) (ECM ground). (3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load. - Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II (FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR). - The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. - The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time. - The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. Page 2362 Page 2970 Page 8730 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2800 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater COMPONENT INSPECTION Rear heated oxygen sensor heater Check the following. 1. Check resistance between terminals (2) and (3). Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 25°C (77°F) 2. Check continuity. If NG, replace the rear heated oxygen sensor. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Page 1307 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7451 Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker Inspection For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. Circuit breakers are used in the following systems. ^ Power Window & Power door lock ^ Multi-remote Control System ^ Theft Warning System ^ Warning Chime (with power door locks) ^ Room lamp (with power door locks) Engine Coolant - Special Refilling Tool Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Special Refilling Tool Classification: TE02-001a Reference: NTB02-011a Date: March 11, 2002 ESSENTIAL TOOL: ENGINE COOLANT REFILL TOOL This bulletin amends NTB02-011. This version has the addition of a Service Procedure. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION If for any reason the vehicle's cooling system needs to be filled with coolant due to a service repair or maintenance, use the Coolant Refill Tool # J-45695. ^ Using this tool properly will ensure complete filling without trapped air bubbles in the cooling system. ^ Air pockets in the cooling system can cause: A) Overheating B) Poor heater performance C) Gurgling noise from the heater core To ensure the tool is used correctly, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the tool and the Service Procedure in this Bulletin. Page 1906 Timing Components Page 4244 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3489 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2810 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5697 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5935 Ground Distribution Page 4054 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Removal Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Removal - Air Bag Module And Spiral Cable CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect battery ground cable and wait for at least 3 minutes. Always work from the side of air bag module. Air Bag Module Connector 1. Remove side lid LH from steering wheel, and disconnect air bag module connector. Special Bolts 2. Remove side lid. Using the TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T50), remove left and right special bolts. Air bag module can then be removed. Page 6625 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5258 EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Views EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) EGR Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 984 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3207 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 8479 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - The special bolts are coated with bonding agent while the other bolt is for ground. Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new coated bolts. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation. Make sure that there are no deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If there are any visible signs of damage, replace with a new one. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure they are free of deformities and rust. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Check crash zone sensor for proper installation. Make sure that there are no deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If there are any visible signs of damage, replace the crash zone sensor. - Check crash zone sensor bracket to ensure that it is free of deformities and rust. Removal Of Crash Zone Sensor 1. Disconnect driver and passenger air bag module connectors. 2. Remove front grille. 3. Disconnect crash zone sensor connector. 4. Using the TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T50), remove the three special bolts. The crash zone sensor can then be removed. NOTE: - To install, reverse removal procedure. - After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 2015 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 3235 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5361 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4321 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4193 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6021 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 8679 3. Install one-inch squares of 1/4-inch-thick, adhesive-backed foam tape (3M Scotch-foam" 4504 # 021200-03320 or equivalent) to the headliner panel near the sunroof opening. Place the one-inch squares every five inches around the sunroof opening, 1/8 inch from the edge of the headliner panel (see Figure 5). 4. Reinstall the sunroof weather strip. 5. Reinstall the sunroof panel and inner shade panel. 6. Road test the vehicle to confirm the incident noise is resolved. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 6020 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7530 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 1006 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 8773 CLAIMS INFORMATION Repairs of environmental contamination discovered and reported at the time of vehicle delivery to the dealership can be claimed utilizing procedures outlined in Warranty Bulletin WB92-003 dated January 24, 1992. Outline of Procedures A. Wash with detergent such as (Nissan P/N 999MP-A3100), then dry. B. Identify the type of contamination using fluorescent lights and magnification. If paint over-spray is found, a specialized repair process is needed. If paint contamination other than paint over spray is suspected, test a 2' x 2' section on each affected panel as follows to determine the severity of damage and repair effort needed: C. Re-wash several times to remove detergent and water soluble spots. If spots are removed, wash affected panels. D. Clean with Nissan Bug and Tar remover for solvent soluble spots. If spots are removed, clean affected panels. E. To remove iron particles and acid rain residue, use Finish Kare # 1119 followed by # 883 (apply # 883 several times if necessary) and always neutralize with # 118SC. Page 4210 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 207 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7922 Page 5978 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3809 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 5895 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5495 Ground Distribution Page 4689 Throttle Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 653 Ground Distribution Page 9395 Headlamp: Adjustments Aiming Adjustment When performing headlamp aiming adjustment, use an aiming machine, aiming wall screen or headlamp tester. Aimers should be in good repair, calibrated and operated in accordance with respective operation manuals. If any aimer is not available, aiming adjustment can be done as follows: For details, refer to the regulations in your own country. a. Keep all tires inflated to correct pressures. b. Place vehicle and tester on one and same flat surface. c. See that there is no-load in vehicle (coolant, engine oil, filled up to correct level and full fuel tank) other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position) Aiming Adjustment AIMING ADJUSTMENT MARK When using a mechanical aimer, adjust adapter legs to the data marked on the headlamps. Adjustment value for mechanical aimer Low Beam LOW BEAM 1. Turn Headlamp low beam on 2. Use a #2 cross-recessed screwdriver to adjust the aim of the lamp. ^ Cover the opposite lamp. Page 4309 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake air temperature sensor Check resistance as shown in the figure. If NG, replace intake air temperature sensor. Page 7296 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4213 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4593 Ground Distribution Page 7040 NOTE: If "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform the test at a temperature of -10° C (14° F) or higher. With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 5 seconds. (3) Start engine. (4) Select "TCC S/V FNCTN P1776" of "A/T (TCC S/N)" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. (5) Touch "START". (6) When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take approximately 20 seconds.) Selector lever: D (OD "ON") Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) CMPS.RPM (REF): Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) B/FUEL SCHDL: 2.5 - 5 ms THRTL POS SEN: Less than 1.3V If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2). (7) Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELFDIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE". OR With Generic Scan Tool (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Perform test drive in "D" position (OD "ON") at least 20 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) (3) Select MODE 7 with GST. OR Page 6237 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 7518 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 2005 7. Remove the idler pulley assembly from the A/C compressor bracket. 8. Install the new idler pulley assembly making sure the E-ring is installed on the adjusting bolt. 9. Adjust the A/C drive belt deflection to specification. Refer to the "A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification" chart below. A/C Compressor Drive Belt Deflection Specification 10. Tighten the nut that secures idler pulley to 16 - 22 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb). 11. Re-install the engine under cover. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 3779 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7926 2. Remove brake caliper assembly without disconnecting hydraulic line. CAUTION: Be careful not to depress brake pedal, or piston will pop out. - Make sure brake hose is not twisted. 3. Remove lock washer. (4WD) 4. Remove wheel bearing lock nut. 2WD: With suitable tool 4WD: With Tool 5. Remove wheel hub and wheel bearing. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop outer bearing. 6. After installing wheel hub and wheel bearing, adjust wheel bearing preload. DISASSEMBLY Page 2615 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 8733 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 5055 Leak Detection Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board diagnosis. Page 1306 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 5571 Idle Up Control Valve: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5236 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Speedometer Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Campaign - A/C Hose Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 98-064 Date: 980908 Campaign - A/C Hose Replacement Reference: NTB98-064 Date: September 8, 1998 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN 1998 FRONTIER POOR OR NO A/C COOLING DUE TO A/C LOW HOSE CRACKING CAMPAIGN I.D. # P8163 APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1998 Frontier (D22) built before VIN # 1N6DD2***WC387655 INTRODUCTION Some 1998 Frontiers may develop refrigerant leaks in the vehicle's air conditioner lower return hose due to vibration. To ensure customer satisfaction and prevent any future inconvenience, Nissan has initiated a Voluntary Service Campaign to install a bracket on the lower return hose of the air conditioning system to minimize this vibration. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P8163 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this Campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 90,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is a dealer responsibility to check (with SERVICE-COMM) each vehicle falling within the range of this service campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from your dealership, other Nissan dealerships, private parties, or vehicles presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. A list of affected customers in your area will be sent to Nissan regional offices for distribution to Nissan dealers once all of the customer notification letters have been sent. This list will assist you in identifying those vehicles involved in this service campaign. Each dealership service department is encouraged to contact these vehicle owners to have the required inspections and repairs completed on their vehicle. CUSTOMER FOCUS Maintaining a strong customer relationship throughout the Frontier Air Conditioner Lower Return Hose Campaign is one of the key goals of NMC. Each and every action taken by Nissan and the servicing dealer will have a significant impact in retaining current Frontier owners as future customers. Page 8013 Page 5730 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5785 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9377 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement For USA Headlamp (For USA) Circuit Connectors Page 793 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 8306 Proper Handling Of Air Bag Module CAUTION: Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. - Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module. - The special bolts are coated with bonding agent. Discard old ones after removal; replace with new ones. Improper Handling Of Air Bag Module - Replace air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). - Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. Steering Wheel Puller 3. Set steering wheel in the neutral position. 4. Disconnect horn connector and remove steering wheel nuts. 5. Using steering wheel puller, remove steering wheel. Be careful not to over-tighten puller bolt on steering wheel. CAUTION: Do not tap or bump the steering wheel. 6. Remove steering column covers. 7. Disconnect spiral cable air bag harness. Spiral Cable Retaining Screws 8. Remove the tour spiral cable retaining screws. The spiral cable can then be removed. Page 5702 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2809 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 8383 CAUTION: Do not use pliers to squeeze or compress the button halves together. This can scratch and/or damage the button. 7. Using water pump pliers, tighten the adjustable wrench. Compress the button to approximately 0.2 in. (5.4-5.8 mm) thickness (see Figure 4). 8. Make sure the center pin of the button is securely crimped to hold the other half of the button in place (see Figure 2). 9. Confirm that the seat belt latch plate cannot slide past the button and it is held at shoulder height when the seatbelt is retracted. NOTE: When this incident occurs, both front driver's and passenger's seat belt "D" rings must be cleaned and "refurbished" (renewed) using the following procedural steps. Clean "D" Ring, Install Fluorine Resin Tape NOTE: For 1996-99 Pathfinders built before December, 1998, see bulletin NTB00-003 for additional front seat belt retractor assembly information. 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 5). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 5). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire (provided in the kit listed in the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin) under the seat belt, between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 6). Page 3327 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 608 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 6927 Mainshaft: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Page 4609 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM. Page 9194 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 8175 3. Remove the tank from the weight scale platform (see Figure 4). 4. With the weight scale platform empty, the display should read close to zero + - 0.2 lbs. If the reading is too low or too high, perform the scale calibration procedure listed below. Weight Scale Calibration Check the weight scale calibration at a minimum of every 3 months (or sooner if the scale is suspected to be inaccurate). Use the following procedure to calibrate the weight scale. 1. Simultaneously press the "SHIFT/RESET" and "ENTER" buttons to get into the diagnostic mode. 2. Press "8787". The display will read "A1". 3. Remove all weight from the scale. 4. Press "0", then press "ENTER". The display will show "0.00" and then changes to "A2". 5. Place a certified known weight (between 10 to 80 lbs) in the center of the scale platform. NOTE: A certified 10 lb weight is available from Tech-Mate (P/N J-42363). This item can be ordered from Tech-Mate by calling 800-662-2001. 6. Enter the weight using four digits (i.e., 10.00 for 10.00 lbs). 7. Press "ENTER". The display will return to vacuum mode. 8. Simultaneously press the "SHIFT/RESET" and "ENTER" buttons. 9. Press "6". The display will show the weight on the scale platform. 10. Remove the weight from the scale platform. The display will return to "0.00". 11. Press the "SHIFT/RESET" button only (not "ENTER") to return to the program mode. NOTE: If the scale cannot be calibrated or another malfunction exists, call the SPX Robinair ACR4 Help Line at 800-822-5561 or contact another qualified facility for repair. Tank Certification The tank must be certified on the "First Retest Date" (stamped into the top of the tank handle) and every 5 years after the "First Retest Date". This is according to DOT-4BA-400. NOTE: A qualified welding supply, fire extinguisher maintenance or refrigerant company can perform the certification. Operational Tips Tank Position Page 5928 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 8475 Impact Sensor: Locations G Sensor SRS Component Parts Location Description G Sensor The G Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Page 2492 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 8723 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 6243 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3920 Oxygen Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 1134 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5707 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7930 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Auto Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set auto-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove auto-lock free running hub. 3. Remove snap ring. 4. Remove spindle washer and thrust washer. 5. After installing auto-lock free running hub, check operation. NOTE: When installing it, apply recommended grease to the parts shown in the above illustration. Page 6232 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3052 EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Views EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) EGR Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 4503 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4024 Page 1702 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair The lubricant used to lubricate the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Whenever any A/C component is replaced or gas leakage occurs, lubricant must be added. If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: ^ Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor ^ Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) LUBRICANT Name: Nissan A/C System Lubricant Type R Part No.: KLH00-PAGR0 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the flowchart shown. Page 8588 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 973 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8595 EL-AUDIO-02 Audio (Part 2 Of 2) With Premium Audio System Circuit Diagrams Audio (Part 1 Of 2) Base Audio System Circuit Connectors Page 7025 Ground Distribution Page 4415 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4211 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 1666 Comments regarding liquid tanks: ^ For R-134a, the sight glass has been deleted. Refer to the service procedures section of this bulletin for additional information regarding the refrigerant charge determination. Pressure switches are not interchangeable between R-12 and R-134a systems. Page 7813 REPLACEMENT 1. Remove torsion bar spring. Refer to Torsion Bar. Page 1914 Page 1205 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4990 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Remove the EVAP canister. 3. Remove the hose between the EVAP vent control valve and the crossframe member (the largest diameter hose in the rearward position). 4. Check the EVAP control valve. Air should pass through the valve passage when voltage is not applied. A. Apply battery voltage to the valve and make sure the air passage closes (see Figure 1). B. Disconnect the battery voltage and make sure the air passage opens again and does not stick closed. C. Look inside the valve air passage and make sure there is no corrosion/rust on the metal shaft. 5. Check the EVAP canister. A. Check that no liquid will drain from the EVAP canister. B. Weigh the canister (with the vent control valve). The weight should be less than 4 lbs. 6. If either the EVAP vent control valve or the EVAP canister fail one or more of these checks, replace both the vent control valve and the canister (see Parts Information). Installation of the Breather Tube Kit 1. Remove the bedliner (if so equipped) 2. Drill one 25 mm (1 inch) hole in the floor of the vehicle bed at the location shown (see Figure 2). Page 3812 Ground Distribution Page 2944 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9349 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 7564 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. Page 8861 Page 1123 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2693 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4096 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5546 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the amount of air which bypasses the throttle valve via IACV-AAC valve. The IACV-AAC valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The camshaft position sensor detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the ON/OFF time of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warm up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner and power steering). COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IACV-AAC valve The IACV-AAC valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of air that will flow through the valve. The more air that flows through the valve, the higher the idle speed. Page 3217 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4498 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4004 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 94 Page 8360 The top section of the tape (from which the backing sheet was peeled off in step 5) should be placed so that it is pointing down toward the floor of the vehicle. The "unexposed" bottom section of the tape should be pointing up toward the ceiling of the vehicle (see Figure 9A). 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 9B). ^ The unexposed bottom section of the tape will be pulled through and hang over the top of the "D" ring (see Figure 9B). Stop pulling when you see this. 8. As the top section of the adhesive-exposed tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring (see Figure 9B above and Figure 10). NOTE: Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface in these procedural steps so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. IMPORTANT: Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. Replace the tape with a new piece if this should occur. 9. Run your finger over the surface of the newly applied tape to firmly apply it to the back side of the "D" ring. Press down the edges of the tape, and smooth out any air bubbles or wrinkles (see Figure 10). 10. Peel off the remaining, unexposed bottom section of the tape backing (see Figure 11A). 11. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Take care to apply the tape so that no wrinkles are present. Press down the edges of the tape (see Figure 11B). Page 4466 Ground Distribution Page 4078 Page 3143 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Diagrams Page 6087 Ground Distribution Page 9517 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Description and Operation Page 4138 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5555 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6655 b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring. c. Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal parts. - If a valve is hard to remove, lightly tap valve body with a soft hammer. - Be careful not to drop or damage valves, sleeves, etc. Valve Springs Inspection - Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring. Also check for damage or deformation. Page 5362 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4971 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 2153 Overall inspection sequence Page 796 Throttle Position Sensor: Connector Views Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3703 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 6412 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1643 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Specified type ........................................................................................................................................................ API SG or SH and Energy Conserving II Alternate type ...................................................................... .............................................................................................................. API Certification Mark Specified viscosity: All temperatures ................................................................................................... ............................................................................ SAE 5W-30 (preferred) Ambient temp above -18°C (0°F) .................................................................................................................................................... ................. SAE 10W-30 Page 7318 Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Battery - Maintenance and Servicing Classification: EL01-009 Reference: NTB01-019 Date: March 21,2001 ALL NISSAN VEHICLES BATTERY MAINTENANCE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Low-maintenance batteries used in Nissan vehicles are not maintenance free and do require periodic inspection and servicing. This is particularly true in areas with hot climates or for vehicles with extended or extreme usage. It is important to maintain proper electrolyte levels for optimum battery life. In many situations, the electrolyte level in a battery may already be up to the appropriate mark. However, Nissan recommends that a check of the electrolyte level be done at every scheduled maintenance interval (oil changes, etc.) to verify that the level is correct. If the electrolyte level is low, it is necessary to add distilled water to the battery to bring the level up to the correct height. It is also important that the top of the battery is clean and terminal connections are clean and tight. Nissan recommends that the top of the battery and case cover be cleaned and terminal connections cleaned and tightened at each maintenance interval. This bulletin provides important tips for Genuine Nissan Original Equipment (OEM) and replacement battery maintenance. A procedure for checking battery electrolyte levels is provided for batteries with black cases and batteries with white cases. NOTE: Although this bulletin specifically addresses procedures and tips for use on Genuine Nissan batteries, the procedures provided can and should be applied to low-maintenance batteries of all makes. SERVICE PROCEDURE WARNING: Always wear eye protection and gloves when working with batteries. Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabric, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If the battery acid contacts your clothing or a painted surface, thoroughly wash the area immediately. If the battery acid contacts your eyes or skin, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and promptly seek medical attention. 1. To minimize self-discharging and prevent contamination of the electrolyte when removing the cell plugs, use a disposable towel to clean any dirt or oil from the top and cover of the battery. The surface of the battery should be clean and bright. 2. Check the battery electrolyte levels: A. Batteries With Black Cases: 1) Remove the cell plugs using a suitable tool (a coin or screwdriver). Page 1363 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 2526 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 805 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 691 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5406 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5833 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 9206 Ground Distribution Page 299 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 6238 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3229 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4029 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 600 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 8686 3. Install one-inch squares of 1/4-inch-thick, adhesive-backed foam tape (3M Scotch-foam" 4504 # 021200-03320 or equivalent) to the headliner panel near the sunroof opening. Place the one-inch squares every five inches around the sunroof opening, 1/8 inch from the edge of the headliner panel (see Figure 5). 4. Reinstall the sunroof weather strip. 5. Reinstall the sunroof panel and inner shade panel. 6. Road test the vehicle to confirm the incident noise is resolved. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 6117 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3816 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3159 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Connector Views Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 2538 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5235 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4509 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7941 Page 8988 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1552 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 7043 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve 1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3). Resistance: Approximately 25 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] 2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3) with battery voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be operated. 4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve 1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly. 2. Check torque converter clutch control valve. - Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. - Valve, and sleeve are tree from burrs, dents and scratches. - Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. - Hydraulic line is tree from obstacles. 3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve. Page 3928 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 6203 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 580 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4733 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3782 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3253 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 978 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 8843 3. Install one-inch squares of 1/4-inch-thick, adhesive-backed foam tape (3M Scotch-foam" 4504 # 021200-03320 or equivalent) to the headliner panel near the sunroof opening. Place the one-inch squares every five inches around the sunroof opening, 1/8 inch from the edge of the headliner panel (see Figure 5). 4. Reinstall the sunroof weather strip. 5. Reinstall the sunroof panel and inner shade panel. 6. Road test the vehicle to confirm the incident noise is resolved. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 4766 indications with no drop-outs or spikes. Note: A 2-3 mph (3-5 kph) difference between the CONSULT display and the speedometer is normal. 4. a) If the speedometer and speed sensor values are 0K, proceed to # 5. b) If the speedometer and speed sensor data are erratic, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to service manual for Diagnosis information. 5. Check the existing ECM part number in the vehicle that is listed either on the CONSULT freeze frame data or checked by CONSULT ECM Part Number function (see Figure 1). 6. If existing Part Number is one of those listed in Table 1, install the appropriate P/N listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 3632 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1683 ^ Do not introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component, because contamination will occur. ^ R-134a in the presence of oxygen and under pressure may form a combustible mixture. Therefore, never introduce compressed air into any R-134a container, cylinder, A/C component, recover/recycle equipment, or other service equipment. This includes "empty" containers. Refrigerant Terminology Please use the correct name or names when specifying refrigerants. The guidelines are listed below: ^ Freon --> is a registered trademark of DuPont, and should only be used if referring to DuPont R-12. ^ DuPont's trade name for R-134a (automotive use) is Suva-->Trans A/C. ^ When referring to refrigerants, the terms Freon-->and Suva--> should not be used as a general reference. The proper terms are R-12 and R-134a Comments regarding refrigerants: ^ R-12 and R-134a are not compatible with each other and should never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. ^ R-134a for automotive use has a special tank fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME) which is compatible with automotive service equipment ^ When purchasing R-134a, be certain that the fitting size on the tank is 1/2" - 16 ACME. This thread size is easy to recognize by the square thread, as shown. ^ Although R-134a has no ozone depletion potential (ODP), it does have a slight global warming potential (GWP). Due to this slight GWP, as well as its high cost, venting of R-134a into the air is not recommended. ^ Recovery/recycling of R-134a will be required by U.S. Federal Law, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990. Page 5453 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 3722 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6636 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 851 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1960 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CHECKING Check valve clearance while engine is warm but not running. 1. Remove rocker cover and all spark plugs 2. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke - Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. - Check that valve lifters on No 1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No 4 are tight. If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as above. 3. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 4. Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement adjusting shim. Valve clearance (Hot): Intake: 0.31 - 0.39 mm (0.012 - 0.015 inch) Exhaust: 0.33 - 0.41 mm (0.013 - 0.016 inch) 5. Turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align mark on crankshaft pulley with pointer. 6. Check those valves shown in the figure. Page 5504 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8403 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 6782 7. Install new plug seal to slide joint housing by lightly tapping it. Apply sealant to mating surface of plug seal. Wheel Side (ZF100) 1. Install new small boot band and boot on drive shaft. Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damaging boot during installation. 2. Set joint assembly onto drive shaft by lightly tapping it. Install joint assembly securely, ensuring that marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned. 3. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease. Specified amount of grease: 135 - 145 grams (4.76 - 5.11 ounce) 4. Make sure that the boot improperly installed on the drive shaft groove. Set the boot so that it does not swell or deform when its length is "L2". Length "L2": 96 - 98 mm (3.78 - 3.86 inch) 5. Lock new large boot band securely with a suitable tool. 6. Lock new small boot band. INSTALLATION Specifications Page 9603 1. Remove the door finisher assembly. 2. Remove the door speaker (front door). 3. Remove the frame assembly (rear door). 4. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the glass mounting bolts can be seen. 5. Remove the glass mounting bolts. 6. Raise up the door glass and hold with a suction lifter. 7. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the module assembly (front door). 8. Remove the door regulator assembly. 9. Disassemble the power window motor from the regulator. NOTE: These procedures are typical way for each type. The procedures differ according to model, so refer to Service Manual for more detail. If you also remove door glass, refer to Service Manual for procedures. TYPE-C: DOOR SASHLESS + SEALING SCREEN TYPE (FR/RR) Page 8492 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 2773 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3203 ^ Refer to Figure 2 that applies to your model. ^ There should be continuity across the terminals with the throttle closed. NOTES: ^ An ohmmeter is used because CONSULT-II cannot display the CTPS status in all of the Applied Vehicles. ^ This adjustment procedure must be made with the TPS installed on the engine of the vehicle. ^ Do not touch the throttle drum when checking the CTPS signal or continuity. Doing so may cause an incorrect adjustment. ^ Nissan recommends using Kent-Moore TPS Connector Tool J-45178 for easy, accurate connection. See NTB01-023 for more information. 4. Refer to Chart 1 and select the correct thickness feeler gauges for your vehicle. 5. Check "A": Insert the thinner feeler gauge "A" (from Chart 1) between the throttle adjustment screw and the throttle drum stop. ^ The CTPS should have continuity. (ohmmeter reads "0 ohms"). Page 297 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Views Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 6576 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2089 PART 2 OF 2 Page 9208 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 615 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7127 Brake Caliper: Specifications Piston Cylinder Bore Diameter 1.685 in No. Of Cylinders 2 Connecting Bolt 12 - 14 ft.lb Bleeder Screw 61 - 78 in.lb Main Pin Bolts 16 - 23 ft.lb Torque Member Fixing Bolt 53 - 72 ft.lb Page 2651 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 4476 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7076 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4579 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Locations Ignition Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5943 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4797 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5763 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2493 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Front Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed- end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V. Page 6333 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 6157 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 9456 Ground Distribution Page 8576 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 5201 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5148 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 9345 5. Slide a one-inch piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (3M(TM) P/N 054007-55917 or equivalent) onto each wire of the vehicle wire harness (see Figure 1a). 6. Connect each wire (of the replacement connector) to the vehicle wire harness making sure the wires are correctly connected (i.e., no mis-matched wires). See Figure lb. IMPORTANT: Only use lead-free solder when performing step 7 below. Also, step 7 must be performed as stated to avoid a "cold" solder joint (i.e., a joint that will not hold together). 7. Solder each wire connection joint as follows: A. Place the soldering iron tip against the bottom side of the wire strands and heat the wires (see Figure lb). B. Once the wires are hot, apply the solder to the top side of the wire strands until they are fully coated with melted solder (see Figure 1b). 8. After the soldered joint cools down, slide the heat shrink tubing over the soldered joint and heat the tubing with a heat gun until it seals the joint (see Figure 1c). IMPORTANT: Each wire connection joint MUST be soldered and sealed with the heat shrink tubing due to the high wire current and moisture in this location. DO NOT use Scotch-Loks (TM) or butt connectors for splicing at this location. Page 6187 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6940 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4299 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3325 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 8435 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 5070 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7124 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 5119 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4643 BARO / MAP Sensor Switching Valve: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve With CONSULT 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Perform "MAP/BARO SWN" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT. 3. Check the following. - Condition: At idle under no-load - CONSULT display - Time for voltage to change 4. If NG, Check solenoid valve as shown below. OR Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3788 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4946 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7957 Page 7193 - Install all the parts by referring to the figures. After installing crank lever on back plate, make sure that there is no play between crank lever and back plate. If play exists, adjust bolt (A) and lock nut (B). Page 1715 Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker Inspection For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. Circuit breakers are used in the following systems. ^ Power Window & Power door lock ^ Multi-remote Control System ^ Theft Warning System ^ Warning Chime (with power door locks) ^ Room lamp (with power door locks) Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8591 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3899 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. * Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 951 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1260 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4402 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The rear heated oxygen sensor (rear HO2S), after three way catalyst, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used for engine control operation. Page 6743 Ring Gear: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Differential; Service and Repair. Page 7244 Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 3263 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 3432 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1060 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4661 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 1397 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. Page 2799 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT INSPECTION Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "RR O2 SENSOR" as the monitor item with CONSULT. (3) Check "RR O2 SENSOR" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%. "RR O2 SENSOR" should be above 0.56V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" is +25%. "RR O2 SENSOR" should be below 0.54V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" Is -25%. OR Without CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals (56) (sensor signal) and (32) (ECM ground). (3) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once. If the voltage is above 0.56V at step 3, step 4 is not necessary. (4) Check the voltage when racing up to 5,000 rpm under no load. Or keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with "OD" OFF (A/T). The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once. Page 7989 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Wheel Bearing - Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. - Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) Page 781 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6653 Disassembly 1. Remove valves at parallel pins. - Do not use a magnetic pick-up tool. Page 3008 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Air Bag Module - Air Bag Warning Lamp ON Air Bag Harness: Customer Interest Air Bag Module - Air Bag Warning Lamp ON Classification: RS99-007A Reference: NTB99-065A Date: December 5, 2000 FRONTIER AND XTERRA ASSIST AIR BAG MODULE OPEN CIRCUIT ATTENTION: This bulletin amends NTB99-065. Information has been added to the Service Information and Claims Information sections. Please discard all paper copies of NTB99-065. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) - Including Crew Cab 2000 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION If the air bag indicator light on a 1998-2000 Frontier or 2000 Xterra remains illuminated during normal driving conditions and the CONSULT screen indicates "Assist A/B Module [Open]," use the following Service Procedure to verify and repair the condition. NOTE: This is the only authorized repair for this incident. DO NOT REPLACE the passenger air bag module. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the air bag light is on. 2. Connect CONSULT to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch "ON". 4. Select "START" and "AIR BAG". 5. Check the Current and Past SELF-DIAG. Modes for trouble codes: A. If "Assist A/B Module [Open]" is displayed, perform the procedure provided in Steps 6 through 18, below. B. If any other diagnostic trouble code is displayed, diagnose and repair as outlined in the appropriate Service Manual. 6. Record the radio presets. 7. Disconnect both cables of the vehicle battery. Allow the vehicle to sit with the battery disconnected for at least 3 minutes before performing any further steps in the procedure. WARNING: For approximately 3 minutes after the battery cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag to deploy. Do not work on any air bag system connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. 8. Remove the glove box assembly. 9. Remove the air bag connector clip from the housing on top of the glove box lid. Page 4641 BARO / MAP Sensor Switching Valve: Electrical Diagrams EC-SW/V-01 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/Barometric Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1105) WIRING DIAGRAM Page 2650 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1208 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Locations Door Switch: Locations BR-ABS-01 Anti-lock Brake System (Part 1 Of 5) SRS Component Parts Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 3044 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Service and Repair Axle Nut: Service and Repair Manual Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set knob of manual-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove manual-lock free running hub. 3. When installing manual-lock free running hub, make sure the hub is in the FREE position. NOTE: Apply multi-purpose grease to the parts shown in the illustration. 4. Check operation of manual-lock free running hub after installation. INSPECTION - Check that the knob moves smoothly and freely. - Check that the clutch moves smoothly in the body. Auto Lock Free Running Hub Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance 2.1 - 2.9 K ohms at 68 deg F 0.27 - 0.38 K ohms at 176 deg F Page 3848 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 950 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4320 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 1089 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6719 Carrier Bearings: Specifications Rear Differential Page 1182 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transaxle housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis of misfire. Page 3430 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2243 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7731 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6066 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Knock sensor - Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M ohms. 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminal (1) and ground. Resistance: 500 - 620 K Ohms [at 25°C (77°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 4566 indications with no drop-outs or spikes. Note: A 2-3 mph (3-5 kph) difference between the CONSULT display and the speedometer is normal. 4. a) If the speedometer and speed sensor values are 0K, proceed to # 5. b) If the speedometer and speed sensor data are erratic, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to service manual for Diagnosis information. 5. Check the existing ECM part number in the vehicle that is listed either on the CONSULT freeze frame data or checked by CONSULT ECM Part Number function (see Figure 1). 6. If existing Part Number is one of those listed in Table 1, install the appropriate P/N listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 666 Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Connectors Ignition - Distributor Rotor Replacement Ignition Rotor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Distributor Rotor Replacement Classification: EC97-002a Reference: NTB97-004a Date: May 19, 1999 DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR REPLACEMENT This amended version of NTB97-004 adds B14, D21, WD22, and L30 information to the Applied Vehicles section. Please discard all paper copies of NTB97-004. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1995-1999 Sentra (B14) - GA16DE Engine only 1995-1998 200SX (B14) GA16DE Engine only 1990-97 Truck (D21) - KA24 Engines only 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) KA24DE Engine only 1998-2000 Altima (L30) - All 2000 Xterra (WD22) - KA24DE Engine only SERVICE INFORMATION Distributor rotors are now available as replacement parts for the vehicles listed in the Applied Vehicles section of this bulletin. Order them as P/N 22157-4B000. CAUTION: The rotor hold-down screw securing the distributor rotor to the distributor shaft must be torqued to 32 +/- 3 in-lb (37 +/- 3 kg-cm). If not secured to the proper torque the rotor may come loose causing the engine to stop without warning. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2938 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 8323 Safing Sensor: Service and Repair SRS Component Parts Location Description Safing Sensor The Safing Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. It can not be serviced separately. Malfunction of the Safing Sensor requires replacement of the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Refer to Diagnosis Sensor Unit / Service and Repair. Page 5612 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Air Outlet Air Door: Adjustments Air Outlet Mode control cable ^ Turn mode control switch to DEF position. Set side link in DEF mode. Pull on outer cable in direction of arrow and then clamp it. ^ After positioning mode control cable, check that it operates properly. Page 4786 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4951 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 1128 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5164 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8206 Specifications Page 585 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. Page 1285 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 4100 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7029 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3736 Ground Distribution Page 3541 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5506 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Connector Views Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0180) Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 3435 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4884 4. Inspect the inside diameter of the solenoid bracket metal pipe (from EVAP canister) for contamination or rust (see Figure 1). A. If contamination or rust is present, replace the solenoid valve bracket and reconnect the vacuum hoses. B. If contamination or rust is not present, reconnect the vacuum hose and use the appropriate section of the applicable service manual to diagnose and repair the vehicle. 5. Ensure the wire harness connector and all hoses are properly connected to the purge volume control valve. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the following claims coding: For DTC P1440 OR For DTC P1444 OR For DTC P1491 Page 5271 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 6406 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 6260 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-LKPU-01 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Circuit Diagrams Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Page 8185 Page 4554 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4939 G. While looking into the hose end of the valve, touch "OFF" and confirm the air passage re-opens fully and immediately (the valve should not stick closed). H. Repeat steps F and G above to confirm the valve closes and re-opens consistently. 2. Confirm the sealing O-ring (for the valve) is: ^ Correctly positioned and is not damaged (see Figure 1) ^ Adequately lubricated with Texaco Canopus 13 mineral oil (P/N 999MP-AJ000) 3. Make sure the water separator and related hoses are not blocked by debris or insects. NOTE: If a Maxima, Truck or 240SX is not equipped with a water separator, refer to the TSB(s) in the table above to install one. CLAIMS INFORMATION If applicable, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding: For 1996-97 vehicles: For 1998-later vehicles: Page 8951 Warning Chime (Part 2 Of 2) Models Without Power Door Locks Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 605 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 1934 Main Bearing Cap Bolts Tightening Sequence Connecting Rod (1) Tighten to 14 to 16 Nm (1.4 to 1.6 kg-m, 10 to 12 ft. lbs.). (2) Tighten bolts 60 +5/-0 degrees clockwise with an angle wrench. GIf an angle wrench is not available, tighten them to 38 to 44 Nm (3.9 to 4.5 kg-m, 28 to 33 ft. lbs.) Oil Pan Page 7640 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 1074 11. Using CONSULT-II select ENGINE, DATA MONITOR (Manual trigger), Selections From Menu, CLSD THL/P SW, and Enter. 12. Stop engine (turn ignition switch "OFF"). 13. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least five seconds. 14. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least ten seconds. 15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for 1 to 16 times until CLSD THL/P SW in CONSULT-II changes to "ON". Page 7066 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 2870 Throttle Full Close Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-TP/SW-01 Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Circuit Diagrams Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 2539 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 1518 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CHECKING Check valve clearance while engine is warm but not running. 1. Remove rocker cover and all spark plugs 2. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke - Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. - Check that valve lifters on No 1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No 4 are tight. If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as above. 3. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 4. Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement adjusting shim. Valve clearance (Hot): Intake: 0.31 - 0.39 mm (0.012 - 0.015 inch) Exhaust: 0.33 - 0.41 mm (0.013 - 0.016 inch) 5. Turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align mark on crankshaft pulley with pointer. 6. Check those valves shown in the figure. Locations Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1005 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3211 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6620 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 7729 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2654 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 669 EC-FRO2-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Page 2931 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2608 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4008 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch 1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine. 2. Check continuity between terminal (1) and ground. If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch. Page 6591 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve 1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3). Resistance: Approximately 25 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] 2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3) with battery voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be operated. 4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve 1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly. 2. Check torque converter clutch control valve. - Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. - Valve, and sleeve are tree from burrs, dents and scratches. - Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. - Hydraulic line is tree from obstacles. 3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve. Page 4133 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3179 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 1770 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 5820 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2777 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 470 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2468 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3549 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, MIL - Icon Changed to Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins MIL - Icon Changed to Service Engine Soon Classification: EC96-011 Reference: NTB96-094 Date: October 2, 1996 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) CHANGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1997 Vehicles (except 1997.5 Altima) APPLIED DATES: Various SERVICE INFORMATION Beginning with 1997 model year vehicles, the MIL icon in the instrument panel will be changed. The new icon will read "SERVICE ENGINE SOON". Page 3484 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 820 Ground Distribution Page 8125 When servicing the A/C refrigeration loop, refer to the charts (Figure 2 and 3) to identify the correct 0-ring type. The charts list both NEW and FORMER 0-ring types and illustrates the 0-rings in full-scale size. IMPORTANT POINTS ^ There is NO interchangeability between NEW and FORMER connection type 0-rings. Improper use will cause refrigerant leaks. Therefore, the correct type 0-ring must be used with each application. ^ Nissan vehicles requiring A/C 0-ring replacement should be checked for proper 0-ring part numbers through the applicable parts microfiche. ^ Insure correct 0-ring installation onto tube (see Figure 1). Page 5732 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 7150 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 4629 Ground Distribution Page 3850 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 3805 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2861 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5902 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Mechanical Specifications Steering Gear: Mechanical Specifications SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Backlash [3] ......................................................................................................................................... ................................... 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 inch) End Play [1] .......................................................... .............................................................................................................. less than 0.1 mm (0.004 inch) Turning Torque: 360° From Straight Ahead .................................................................................................................................... 0.15 - 0.78 Nm (1.3 - 6.9 inch lbs.) As Compared To Above ..................................................................................................................................... 0.25 - 1.32 Nm (2.2 - 11.7 inch lbs.) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................................ 1.03 - 1.47 Nm (9.1 - 13.0 inch lbs.) Turns Of Steering Wheel (Lock-To-Lock) ............................................................................................ ........................................................................ 3.4 Steering Gear Ratio .............................................. ....................................................................................................................................................... 15:1 Steering Wheel Turning Force [2] ...................................................................................................................................................... 39 N (9 lbs.) or less TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Gear Housing to Frame .......................................................................................................................................................... 84 - 96 Nm (62 - 71 ft. lbs.) Rear Housing Bolts .................................................................................. .............................................................................. 56 - 64 Nm (41 - 47 ft. lbs.) Sector Shaft Cover Bolts ........................................................................................................................................................ 56 - 64 Nm (41 - 47 ft. lbs.) Sector Shaft Cover Lock Nut ................................................................................................................................................. 29 - 44 Nm (22 - 33 ft. lbs.) Sector Shaft to Pitman Arm Nut ..................................................................................................................................... 235 - 265 Nm (174 - 195 ft. lbs.) Lower Joint to Stub Shaft ....................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 29 Nm (17 - 22 ft. lbs.) [1]: At sector shaft end in neutral position. [2]: At 360° from neutral position and circumference of steering wheel. [3]: At pitman arm top end (in straight ahead position). Page 2239 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1044 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8783 When washing any vehicle, it must be out of direct sunlight and the painted surfaces should be cool to the touch. WATER SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE The method of repairing a water spotted finish varies with the severity (depth of spot in finish) of the spotting. After a thorough washing, perform the following: 1. Water spots on light colored vehicles and some vehicles which have had minimal exposure to the elements can be repaired by buffing. First, apply a fine cutting compound using an orbital buffer to remove a thin layer of the top coat or clear coat. After removal of the spots, buff with glazing compound to remove the fine scratches. 2. More severe spotting can be removed with a coarser cutting compound followed by finer compound and glazing compound to remove the scratches. 3. The most severe water spots on clear coated, dark vehicles can be repaired by wet sanding the affected areas with 1200 grit sandpaper to prepare the surface then spraying a fresh clear coat on those areas. Non-clear coated vehicles should be repairable with either step 1 or 2. * Available through Dyment Distribution Services. Page 5287 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1520 7. Determine replacement adjusting shim size as follows. a. Using a micrometer determine thickness of removed shim. b. Calculate thickness of new adjusting shim so valve clearance comes within specified values. R = Thickness of removed shim N = Thickness of new shim M = Measured valve clearance Intake & Exhaust: N = R + [M - 0.37 mm (0.0146 inch)] Shims are available in thicknesses from 1.96 mm (0.0772 inch) to 2.68 mm (0.1055 in), in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch). c. Select new shim with thickness as close as possible to calculated value. 8. Install new shim using a suitable tool. - Install with the surface on which the thickness is stamped facing down. 9. Place Tool (A) as mentioned in steps 2 and 3. 10. Remove Tool (B). 11. Remove Tool (A). 12. Recheck valve clearance. Page 3169 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8062 Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection Electrical Components Inspection Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor. - Check that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit. Page 4365 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2758 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Locations Throttle Full Close Switch: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3529 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7871 REMOVAL Page 6614 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8772 Finish Kare products are marketed by mobile distributors which will deliver the product directly to your dealership. If a Finish Kare distributor is not located in your area, Finish Kare can be contacted at the number above for direct shipment from their national office. Page 111 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 1426 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 8985 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3817 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5572 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 9462 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 535 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 6401 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 2949 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position switch is "ON". ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. Page 8406 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 1300 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 9274 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments PREPARATION - Make sure that the following parts are in good order. (1) Battery (2) Ignition system (3) Engine oil and coolant levels (4) Fuses (5) ECM harness connector (6) Vacuum hoses (7) Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) (8) Fuel pressure (9) Engine compression (10) EGR valve operation (11) Throttle valve (12) EVAP system - On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". - On models equipped with automatic transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. - When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. - Turn off head lamps, heater blower. - Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 7065 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1570 Use the Diagnosis/Repair Flow Chart shown to determine the diagnosis and repair of the vehicle. Low Hose Visual and Leak Detector Inspection Low Hose Visual Inspection Page 4590 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3289 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5652 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 9388 Headlamp: Description and Operation System Description (For USA) The headlamps are controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch. Power is supplied at all times: ^ to lighting switch terminal (5) ^ through 15 A fuse (No. [37], located in the fuse and fusible link box), and ^ to lighting switch terminal (8) ^ through 15 A fuse (No. [38], located in the fuse and fusible link box). Low beam operation When the lighting switch is turned to headlamp "ON" (2ND) position, "LOW BEAM" (B), power is supplied: ^ from lighting switch terminal (10) ^ to terminal (D) of the LH headlamp, and ^ from lighting switch terminal (7) ^ to terminal (D) of the RH headlamp. Terminal (E) of each headlamp supplies ground through body grounds (E12) and (E54). With power and ground supplied, the headlamp(s) will illuminate. High beam operation/flash-to-pass operation When the lighting switch is turned to headlamp "ON" (2ND) position, "HIGH BEAM" (A) or "FLASH TO PASS" (C) position, power is supplied: ^ from lighting switch terminal (6) ^ to terminal (M) of RH headlamp, and ^ from lighting switch terminal (9) ^ to terminal (M) of LH headlamp, and ^ to combination meter terminal (17) for the high beam indicator. Ground is supplied to terminal (16) of the combination meter through body grounds (M14) and (M68). Terminal (E) of each headlamp supplies ground through body grounds (E12) and (E54). With power and ground supplied, the high beams and the high beam indicator illuminate. Theft warning system The theft warning system will flash the high beams if the system is triggered. Page 707 Ground Distribution Page 6657 - Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body. - Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the valves into proper position. Accumulator Control Plug - Align protrusion of accumulator control sleeve with notch in plug. - Align parallel pin groove in plug with parallel pin, and install accumulator control valve. 2. Install parallel pins and retainer plates. - While pushing plug, install parallel pin. - Insert retainer plate while pushing spring. Control Valve Lower Body Page 6295 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 711 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 6633 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 908 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3981 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6053 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1932 Rocker Cover Camshaft Brackets Page 9355 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5259 EGR Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-EGR/TS-01 EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) Circuit Diagrams EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) EGR Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 3011 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 660 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1404 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 8936 Ground Distribution Page 4243 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6759 Page 2987 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6174 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4435 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 6186 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Specifications Synchronizer Ring: Specifications CLEARANCE BETWEEN BAULK RING AND GEAR 2nd BAULK RING (4WD MODEL) Page 402 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The absolute pressure sensor is connected to the MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve by a hose. The sensor detects ambient barometric pressure and intake manifold pressure and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure increases, the voltage rises. Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ............................... 142 - 152 Nm (105 - 112 ft. lbs.) Page 1183 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) 1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector. 2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: Approximately 166.5 - 203.5 ohms [at 20°C (68°F)] If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). Page 1777 Page 6048 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4651 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 811 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8678 C. Remove the sunroof panel by lifting the panel so that it stands straight up, then slide it toward the drivers side to release it from the hinge brackets (see Figure 3). Place the sunroof panel in a safe place until it is reinstalled. 2. Remove the sunroof weather strip from the vehicle body (see Figure 4). Page 3446 Ground Distribution Page 4143 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3328 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6426 Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve 1. Disassemble torque converter clutch control valve assembly. 2. Check torque converter clutch control valve. - Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. - Valve, and sleeve are tree from burrs, dents and scratches. - Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. - Hydraulic line is tree from obstacles. 3. If NG, replace torque converter clutch control valve. Page 5762 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9547 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6100 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ignition Coil & Power Transistor The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to the power transistor. The power transistor switches on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. As the primary circuit is turned on and off, the proper high voltage is induced in the coil secondary circuit. Page 4619 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 9094 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 6264 Without Scan Tools (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Perform test drive in "D" position (OD "ON") at least 20 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) (3) Stop the vehicle, turn ignition switch "OFF", wait at least 5 seconds and then turn "ON" (4) Perform "Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)" with ECM. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE COMPONENT INSPECTION Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve 1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3). Resistance: Approximately 25 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] 2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3) with battery voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be operated. 4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Page 3445 Ground Distribution Page 5484 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1272 Ground Distribution Page 4546 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5104 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8319 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - The special bolts are coated with bonding agent while the other bolt is for ground. Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new coated bolts. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation. Make sure that there are no deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If there are any visible signs of damage, replace with a new one. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure they are free of deformities and rust. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Check crash zone sensor for proper installation. Make sure that there are no deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If there are any visible signs of damage, replace the crash zone sensor. - Check crash zone sensor bracket to ensure that it is free of deformities and rust. Removal Of Crash Zone Sensor 1. Disconnect driver and passenger air bag module connectors. 2. Remove front grille. 3. Disconnect crash zone sensor connector. 4. Using the TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T50), remove the three special bolts. The crash zone sensor can then be removed. NOTE: - To install, reverse removal procedure. - After replacement, perform Self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". Page 6172 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 3491 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 2606 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Testing and Inspection System Relay: Testing and Inspection Check circuit continuity between terminals by supplying 12 Volts to coil side terminals of air conditioner relay. Page 4984 5. Install the new hose between the vent control valve and the metal breather tube (see Figure 5). 6. Reinstall the spare tire. 7. If equipped, reinstall the bedliner. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2937 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 827 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 5703 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2127 Page 7858 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Rear TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Bolts ..................................................................................................................................... ................................. 40 - 50 Nm (30 - 37 ft. lbs.) Page 8832 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 1064 Throttle Full Close Switch: Connector Views Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 571 Ground Distribution Page 826 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3513 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6867 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Place matching marks on flanges, then separate propeller shaft from final drive. 2. Remove propeller shaft. - Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller shaft. INSPECTION - Inspect propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace propeller shaft assembly. Runout limit: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) - Inspect journal axial play. If play exceeds the limit, replace propeller shaft assembly. Journal axial play: 0.02 mm (0-0008 inch) or less Page 6575 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 424 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5822 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5029 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 9191 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 9378 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 458 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5080 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Thermal Control Amp. Inspection Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Thermal Control Amp. Inspection 1. Run engine, and operate A/C system. 2. Connect the voltmeter from harness side. 3. Check thermo control amp. operation shown in the table. Page 6993 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal CENTER CASE OIL SEAL 1. Remove front propeller shaft. 2. Remove companion flange nut. 3. Remove companion flange. 4. Remove center case oil seal. 5. Install center case oil seal. - Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip. 6. Install companion flange. 7. Tighten companion flange nut. 226 - 324 Nm (23 - 33 kg.m, 166 - 239 ft. lbs.) 8. Install front propeller shaft. Page 1597 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid DOT 3. ^ Always keep fluid level higher than minimum line on reservoir tank. ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. CHANGING BRAKE FLUID 1. Clean inside of reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to each air bleeder valve. 3. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. 4. Refill until brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to refill brake fluid. Refer to Bleeding Brake System. Page 659 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5246 Ground Distribution Page 2235 Ground Distribution Page 5615 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5906 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 6367 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1796 Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Page 7721 ^ Pay attention to the direction of rotor. ^ When assembling vanes to rotor, rounded surfaces of vanes must face cam ring side. ^ Insert pin (2) into pin groove (1) of front housing and front side plate. Then install cam ring (3) as shown. Cam ring: D1, is less than D2 Page 4000 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6164 Ground Distribution Diagram Information and Instructions Backup Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3112 Ground Distribution Page 2461 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 1172 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 3685 Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT CAUTION: When installing vacuum hoses, pay attention to the following points. ^ Do not apply any oil or lubricants to vacuum hose and check valve. ^ Insert vacuum tube into vacuum hose as shown. ^ Install check valve, paying attention to its direction. INSPECTION Hoses And Connectors Check vacuum lines, connections and check valve for airtightness improper attachment chafing and deterioration. Check Valve - Check vacuum with a vacuum pump. Connect to booster side: Vacuum should exist. - Connect to engine side: Vacuum should not exist. Page 1270 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 7588 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). Page 5168 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 3726 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3029 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7645 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6328 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 6630 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 433 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 916 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5586 Idle Up Control Valve: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the air conditioner is on, the IACV-FICD solenoid valve supplies additional air to adjust to the increased load. ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). Page 2781 Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Connectors Page 6775 11. Remove wheel bearing assembly. INSPECTION Axle Shaft Check axle shaft for straightness, cracks, damage, wear and distortion. Replace if necessary. Wheel Bearing Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Axle Case Check axle case for yield, deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION 1. Press new wheel bearing until it bottoms end face of bearing cage. Maximum load P: 78 kN (8.8 US ton) NOTE: Always press outer race of wheel bearing during installation. 2. Press new grease seal until it bottoms end face of bearing cage. NOTE: After installing new grease seal, coat sealing lip with multipurpose grease. Page 1840 Page 3273 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 7128 Page 3382 Page 1309 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7779 2. Install new teflon ring on worm gear assembly. Make sure that teflon ring is seated in correct position. 3. Install new O-ring into rear housing. 4. Install worm gear assembly with rear housing into the gear housing. CAUTION: ^ Apply a thin coat of ATF inside gear housing and piston before insertion. ^ Be careful not to damage teflon ring at piston end when inserting worm gear assembly into gear housing. 5. Gradually tighten rear housing bolts in a cries-cross fashion. Page 7529 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 1418 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 8579 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 7216 3. Install all parts and secure all bolts. CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid DOT 3. ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. 4. Bleed air. Paint - Removal of Environmental Particles Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Removal of Environmental Particles Classification: BT01-048a Reference: NTB01-087a Date: December 17, 2001 ALL NISSAN; REMOVAL OF ENVIRONMENTAL IRON PARTICLES FROM PAINT This bulletin has been revised. The Claims Information was updated. Please discard paper copies NTB01-087. APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Environmental iron particles can be identified as follows: ^ Small rust/orange dots with black centers on light colored surfaces, ^ Small white or silver dots with a "rainbow hue" around the edge on dark colored surfaces. In both cases, the surface will feel rough or gritty to the touch. The steps in the Service Procedure have been found effective in most cases for removing environmental iron particles (sometimes called "rail dust") from a vehicle's painted surfaces. Refer to the Service Procedure of this bulletin for instructions on repairing this type of environmental damage if it should occur. However, refer to the Claims Information section at the end of this bulletin for important claims information concerning environmental claims. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: In most cases these environmental iron particles can be easily removed. However, the longer they are left untreated, the more damage they can create, and the harder they are to remove. In rare, more severe cases, spots of paint blistering can occur. 1. Use a magnifying glass to check if iron particles are present. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and warm water. Completely dry the vehicle. Note: There are 3 Steps of damage repair possible that should be completed in the order given. ^ Start with Step A first. Complete Step B if necessary. ^ Proceed to Step C only if iron particles are not removed in the preceding steps. 3. Repair the paint damage. A. Light/Medium Damage (surface level only) Remove the iron particles using a clay bar such as Clay Magic(TM) by Auto Wax Company, Inc., SPC40 Overspray Clay by PPG, a "clay like" surface cleaning material such as Erazer(TM) by K.E.L. Mfg., or equivalent. WARNING: Read and follow the manufacturer's procedure before using. B. Medium Damage (surface level only) Remove the iron particles using a chemical cleaning product such as: Page 2561 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Recall 98V064000: A/T Shift Lever Can Come Loose Shifter A/T: Recalls Recall 98V064000: A/T Shift Lever Can Come Loose Year: 1998 Make: NISSAN TRUCK Model: FRONTIER Year of Recall: '98 Type of Report: Vehicle Potential Number of Units Affected: 3000 Summary: Vehicle Description: Light duty passenger trucks equipped with automatic transmissions. A securing pin inside the automatic transmission control device assembly can come loose allowing the shift lever to be inadvertently moved out of the Park position with the key in the ignition. This could result in a crash if the parking brake is not engaged. Dealers will inspect the automatic transmission control device assembly and replace it if necessary. Owner notification is expected to begin during April 1998. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Nissan at 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261). Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7352 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7976 Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Specifications Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Horizontal Mounting Nuts .......................................................................................................................................... 10.8 - 14.7 Nm (96 - 132 inch lbs.) Vertical Mounting Bolts ................................................................................................................................................ 17.7 23.5 Nm (13 - 17.4 ft. lbs.) Locations Absolute Pressure Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 5087 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4451 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3712 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 8819 on the towel to avoid scratching the paint with any loosened iron particles. 3. Apply Finish Kare # 883 directly from the bottle using the applicator provided. Keep the affected areas wet for 5 minutes and allow the solution to lift the particles. Agitate gently, but do not rub as this will scratch the color coat or clear coat of paint. Reapply # 883 to spots which start to dry before rinsing CAUTION: Do not exceed the 5 minute soak time as this solution may damage the paint or trim. 4. Rinse thoroughly with tap water, dry and inspect the surface. 5. Reapply # 883 as often as needed to remove more difficult spots. 6. When all iron particles are removed, wash with Finish Kare # 118SC (Neutralizer and Shampoo) and rinse thoroughly. Gently dry with a fresh towel. Do not use towels used in the above steps, as they may have iron particles in the nap and could scratch the color coat or clear coat. F. Inspect For Damage Severity After washing and iron particle/chemical removal are performed on the test section, inspect the surface to determine the severity of damage. Levels 2 and 3 are determined using abrasive removal on test sections on each affected panel. Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and/or indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp and a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is easily done with an 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Level 1 No damage, the contamination did not penetrate the paint surface and washed off using the detergent and water and the iron particle remover. Level 2 Minor damage, the contamination did not penetrate more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Abrasive cleaning will resolve. Level 3 Substantial damage, the contamination penetrated more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Re-color and clear coat is necessary G. Abrasive Cleaning IMPORTANT: All iron particles and acids must be removed and the surface neutralized with the above procedure before proceeding. Iron particles and acids which remain will not be fully removed by abrasive cleaning. Small amounts of contamination will wick moisture into the clear coat or through a re-color/clear coat and cause blistering The goal of abrasive cleaning is to remove the damaged layer of color coat or clear coat (up to 0.5 mil in thickness) using the least abrasive process. The steps below demonstrate the sequence of operations to use on the test section to identify the severity of damage and the repair needed. 1. Measure paint film thickness. 2. Polish and evaluate. If OK Polish all affected surfaces. If NG go to step 3. Also determine film thickness removed. 3. Buff and evaluate. If OK Buff and then polish all If NG go to step 4. affected surfaces. Also determine film thickness removed 4. Wet sand and evaluate. If OK wet sand then buff and If NG go to step 5. polish affected surfaces Also determine film thickness removed. 5. Re-clear/color coat after neutralizing surfaces. 6. Apply color coat and clear coat if damage is completely through clear coat NOTE: Polishing to remove buffing or swirl marks requires a foam finishing pad on a dual action sander. Page 4806 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-VSS-01 Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Circuit Diagrams Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit (VSS) Connectors Page 8097 Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Thermo Control Amp. Check POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK Check power supply circuit for thermo control amp. with ignition switch ON. 1. Disconnect thermo control amp. harness connector. 2. Connect voltmeter from harness side. 3. Measure voltage across terminal (1) and body ground. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Check body ground circuit for thermo control amp. with ignition switch ON, air conditioner switch ON and fan switch ON. 1. Disconnect thermo control amp. harness connector. 2. Connect ohmmeter from harness side. 3. Check for continuity between terminal No. (2) and body ground. If the ground circuit is NG, check the following. - A/C switch - Fan switch - Harness for open or short between thermo control amp. and A/C switch - Harness for open or short between A/C switch and fan switch - Fan switch ground circuit. Page 2204 Refer to the "Essential Tool Shipment" flyer shown for additional information. This special tool is "Essential" and was automatically sent to all Nissan dealers. Additional tools can be ordered from Tech-Mate (1-800-662-2001) for $196.43 each. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the tool for complete refill procedure. Key points to ensure the cooling system is purged of air bubbles are as follows; Always start with an Empty Radiator For step 2 of the Operating Instructions: ^ To hold the coolant mixture supply, use a clean bucket or other suitable container that is larger than the cooling system's total capacity. ^ The amount of coolant mixture in the refill supply must be more than needed to fill the system completely. Page 8084 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair REMOVAL - When removing center bolt, hold clutch disc with clutch disc wrench. - Remove the drive plate using the clutch disc puller. Insert holder's three pins into the drive plate. Rotate the holder clockwise to hook it onto the plate. Then, tighten the center bolt to remove the drive plate. While tightening the center bolt, insert a round bar (screwdriver, etc.) between two of the pins (as shown in the figure) to prevent drive plate rotation. After removing the drive plate, remove the shims from either the drive shaft or the drive plate. - Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. - For pulley removal use pulley puller. Use a commercially available pulley puller. Position the center of the puller on the end of the drive shaft. Remove the pulley assembly with the puller. For Pressed Pulleys: Page 4064 Ground Distribution Page 7369 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2107 Page 576 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1063 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 700 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2697 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Views Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 7548 Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Page 6099 Ignition Control Module: Electrical Diagrams WIRING DIAGRAM Page 4355 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications For FRONT or REAR Heated Oxygen Sensors. Resistance 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 77 deg F Page 8739 Ground Distribution Page 5471 Service Manual for Refueling Control Valve inspection procedures. 8. If the DTC confirmation is still NG after step 7, or the vehicle is not equipped with ORVR, do the following: a. Disconnect two (2) lines from the Vacuum Cut Valve. One that goes to the fuel tank and one that goes to the EVAP Canister (see figure 1). b. Use a hand vacuum pump to check each of the two (2) disconnected hoses for free flow. Make sure they are clear into the fuel tank (vent line) and into the EVAP Canister (see figure 2). NOTE: ^ Figure 2 includes ORVR system. Refer to the appropriate service manual to determine if your vehicle has ORVR or not. ^ The lines between the Vacuum Cut Valve and Fuel Tank, and between the Vacuum Cut Valve and EVAP Canister may go through a metal line. Make sure the lines are clear between the Vacuum Cut Valve and Fuel Tank, and between the Vacuum Cut Valve and EVAP Canister, including any metal lines. c. If any blockage is found, determine the cause and repair as necessary. Blockage in either of these lines will cause a DTC. 9. If all of the above checks do not locate the source of the incident, refer to the appropriate Service Manual for further DTC P1491 diagnosis. Page 7614 Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 2°40' (2.67°) Left And Right Difference ............................................................................................................................................................ 0°45' (0.75°) or less King Pin Inclination GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................... 10°18' (10.30°) Nominal ...................................................................... ......................................................................................................................... 10°48' (10.80°) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 11°18' (11.30°) Toe-In GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit (With Radial Tire): Angle (Left + Right) Minimum: 15' (0.25°) Nominal: 20' (0.33°) Maximum: 25' (0.42°) Distance (A - B) Minimum: 3 mm (0.12 inch) Nominal: 4 mm (0.16 inch) Maximum: 5 mm (0.20 inch) Turning Angle Specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS P235/70R14: Inside: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................ 31° 00' (31.00°) Nominal ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................ 33° 00' (33.00°) Maximum ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................. 33° 00' (33.00°) Outside (Full Turn) [1]: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................ 29° 00' (29.00°) Nominal ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................ 31° 00' (31.00°) Maximum ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................. 31° 00' (31.00°) Except P235/70R14: Inside: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................ 33° 06' (33.10°) Nominal ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................ 35° 06' (35.10°) Maximum ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................. 35° 06' (35.10°) Outside (Full Turn) [1]: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................ 31° 12' (31.20°) Nominal ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................ 33° 12' (33.20°) Maximum ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................. 33° 12' (33.20°) [1]:On power steering models, wheel turning force, (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 - 147 N (22 - 33 lbs.) with engine at idle. Vehicle Ride Height DIMENSIONS Page 2084 b. Install new crankshaft seal in front cover (see Figure 4). c. Apply a continuous bead of RTV sealant to the front cover (see Figure 5). NOTE: Use Genuine Nissan RTV silicone sealant P/N 999MP-A7007, Three Bond P/N TB1207D or equivalent. c. Also place RTV sealant on the head gasket surface. d. Install the front cover to the engine. 6. Install oil strainer and oil pan, referring to "Installation" in the "OIL PAN" section of the Service Manual. 7. Install the oil pump and distributor drive shaft. Page 9424 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3088 Leak Detection Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board diagnosis. Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6376 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 6086 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2297 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 1216 Knock Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-KS-01 Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Circuit Diagrams Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 385 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4958 Ground Distribution Page 2208 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Specified type: [1] .................................................................................................................................................. Ethylene glycol base anti-freeze/coolant [1] 50% mix of anti-freeze/coolant and soft water. Page 440 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Mass air flow sensor 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between terminal (54) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above check. 5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust. Page 5971 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 7534 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Locations Headlamp (Plastic) - Cloudy/Hazy Appearance Headlamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Headlamp (Plastic) - Cloudy/Hazy Appearance Classification: ELO2-005 Reference: NTB02-053 Date: May 3, 2002 PLASTIC HEADLAMP LENS CLEANER APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with plastic headlamp lenses SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin introduces 3M Plastic Polish(TM) # 39010, which should be used to clean and polish headlamps with cloudy, hazy, or other poor appearance. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use 3M Plastic Polish(TM) (# 39010) to polish the headlamp lens(es) as follows: 1. Remove any dust, dirt, or debris from the headlamp lens using a soft damp cloth. 2. Dispense a quarter-size drop of 3M Plastic Polish(TM) onto a clean, dry, soft, cotton terry cloth towel (see Figure 1a). 3. Apply the polish to the lens using a firm, circular motion (see Figure 1b). 4. Rub until dry. 5. Use a clean, dry section of cloth to remove the haze. 6. Repeat as necessary. NOTES: ^ Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for 3M Plastic Polish(TM) # 39010 are available via fax or email by calling 3M's 24-hour "3M Helps" Customer Service line at 1-800-364-3577 OR (651) 737-6501. ^ This 3M product can be locally sourced through the following distributors: R.S. Hughes - 1-877-774-8443 Granger Industrial Supplies - 1-800-323-0620 Page 544 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8189 Comments regarding tubes and hoses: ^ Some R-134a tubes and hoses have reversed male/female connections to prevent interchangeability with R-12 components. R134A Service Tools & Equipment ^ R-12 and R-134a require separate and non-interchangeable sets of recovery, recycle, and recharge equipment, because the refrigerants and lubricants are not compatible and cannot be mixed even in the smallest amounts. ^ DO NOT attempt to use one set of equipment for both R-12 and R-134a, as all equipment contains residual amounts of refrigerant and/or lubricant, Page 7157 1. Before using the rotor driving unit ensure that all lug nuts are installed on the lugs (including the lugs not used for the lug adaptor). All lug nuts should be evenly torqued, to at least 40 ft/lbs. Do not over-tighten the lug nuts as damage may occur to the lug adaptor legs. 2. To prevent chatter and ensure a smooth rotor finish, install the largest and heaviest silencer band possible around the outside diameter of the rotor. ROTOR CUTTING Before engaging the cutting tool, ensure the following: 1. Using the dial indicator, measure rotor/hub run-out prior to resurfacing rotor and adjust cutting depth to eliminate this run-out. Each cut may be between 0.05 mm and 0.25 mm (0.002" and 0.010"). Additional cuts may be necessary to eliminate all the run-out. 2. Using a micrometer, measure rotor thickness in at least 8 even locations around the rotor. Do not cut below the minimum rotor thickness specification. Replace rotor if the run-out cannot be eliminated without exceeding the minimum rotor thickness specification. 3. After rotor resurfacing is completed, measure the rotor/hub run-out using a dial indicator. Ensure that the run-out is below the specification for the vehicle. If run-out is not within specifications, turn the rotors again. Properly machined rotors will have almost zero run-out (.001" or less) with no measurable thickness variation. CAUTION: When using an on the car brake lathe, be sure to prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS wheel speed sensor. Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS wheel speed sensor's magnet. NOTE: If the rotor must be removed for cleaning and/or other purposes after resurfacing with an on the car brake lathe is complete, mark its exact location on the axle prior to removal. Incorrect alignment during reinstallation will cause the run-out to change, possibly exceeding specifications. This could require the rotor to be turned again. 4. Do not smooth the rotor surface with sand paper or other abrasive material. Page 4928 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7474 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4326 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 7616 Alignment: Service and Repair Page 7920 Wheel Hub (Locking): Diagrams Page 4580 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 899 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2630 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 1721 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Keyless Entry Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 7656 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9546 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7413 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 9520 Ground Distribution Page 3210 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2991 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 1319 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 7576 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. Page 4727 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 9137 Ground Distribution Page 4696 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 5774 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5480 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8776 on the towel to avoid scratching the paint with any loosened iron particles. 3. Apply Finish Kare # 883 directly from the bottle using the applicator provided. Keep the affected areas wet for 5 minutes and allow the solution to lift the particles. Agitate gently, but do not rub as this will scratch the color coat or clear coat of paint. Reapply # 883 to spots which start to dry before rinsing CAUTION: Do not exceed the 5 minute soak time as this solution may damage the paint or trim. 4. Rinse thoroughly with tap water, dry and inspect the surface. 5. Reapply # 883 as often as needed to remove more difficult spots. 6. When all iron particles are removed, wash with Finish Kare # 118SC (Neutralizer and Shampoo) and rinse thoroughly. Gently dry with a fresh towel. Do not use towels used in the above steps, as they may have iron particles in the nap and could scratch the color coat or clear coat. F. Inspect For Damage Severity After washing and iron particle/chemical removal are performed on the test section, inspect the surface to determine the severity of damage. Levels 2 and 3 are determined using abrasive removal on test sections on each affected panel. Examine the vehicle in both strong sunlight and/or indoor fluorescent lighting (inspection is easier with a hand held 500 watt halogen lamp and a hand held fluorescent lamp) to identify which type of contamination may be affecting the vehicle. Magnified viewing of spots is easily done with an 8X and 30X illuminated magnifier from Radio Shack (catalog no. 63-851). Level 1 No damage, the contamination did not penetrate the paint surface and washed off using the detergent and water and the iron particle remover. Level 2 Minor damage, the contamination did not penetrate more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Abrasive cleaning will resolve. Level 3 Substantial damage, the contamination penetrated more than 0.5 mil of the color coat or clear coat. Re-color and clear coat is necessary G. Abrasive Cleaning IMPORTANT: All iron particles and acids must be removed and the surface neutralized with the above procedure before proceeding. Iron particles and acids which remain will not be fully removed by abrasive cleaning. Small amounts of contamination will wick moisture into the clear coat or through a re-color/clear coat and cause blistering The goal of abrasive cleaning is to remove the damaged layer of color coat or clear coat (up to 0.5 mil in thickness) using the least abrasive process. The steps below demonstrate the sequence of operations to use on the test section to identify the severity of damage and the repair needed. 1. Measure paint film thickness. 2. Polish and evaluate. If OK Polish all affected surfaces. If NG go to step 3. Also determine film thickness removed. 3. Buff and evaluate. If OK Buff and then polish all If NG go to step 4. affected surfaces. Also determine film thickness removed 4. Wet sand and evaluate. If OK wet sand then buff and If NG go to step 5. polish affected surfaces Also determine film thickness removed. 5. Re-clear/color coat after neutralizing surfaces. 6. Apply color coat and clear coat if damage is completely through clear coat NOTE: Polishing to remove buffing or swirl marks requires a foam finishing pad on a dual action sander. Page 2384 Engine Control Module: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 5588 EC-FICD-01 IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve WIRING DIAGRAM COMPONENT INSPECTION IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve Disconnect IACV-FICD solenoid valve harness connector. - Check for clicking sound when applying 12V direct current to terminals. Page 98 Page 6881 Page 8437 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 1343 Page 1572 2. Disconnect the A/C low hose from the A/C compressor and from the A/C low pipe coming from the evaporator (see Figure 2). 3. Remove the clip from the support bracket (see Figure 2). 4. Remove the old hose from the vehicle. 5. Apply Nissan A/C system oil "Type R" (P/N: KLH00-PAGR0) to the 0-ring on the compressor end of the new hose and to the 0-ring on the existing A/C low pipe (coming from the evaporator). NOTE: If it is necessary to replace the 0-ring on either the new A/C low hose or the existing low pipe, use the correct 0-ring specified for "Captured 0-ring" type A/C connections (0-ring P/N: 92473-N8210). 6. Install the compressor end of the new A/C low hose to the compressor (see Figure 2) and tighten the mounting bolt to 14 - 18 N.m (1.4 - 1.8 kg-m, 10 - 13 ft-lb). 7. Install the other end of the A/C low hose to the existing A/C low pipe so that the hose is positioned between 0° and 5° relative to the horizontal plane (see Figure 3). Tighten the joint connection nut to 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb). CAUTION: Page 5683 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1701 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications TYPE TYPE PAG TYPE PAG PART NUMBER R KLH00-PAGR1 or R2 Page 224 Diagnosis Sensor Unit: Service and Repair Description CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - The special bolts are coated with bonding agent while the other bolt is for ground. Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new coated bolts. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation. Make sure that there are no deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If there are any visible signs of damage, replace with a new one. - Check air bag diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure they are free of deformities and rust. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Removal Of Diagnosis Sensor Unit 1. Disconnect driver and passenger air bag module connectors. 2. Remove console box. 3. Disconnect air bag diagnosis sensor unit connector. 4. Remove bolts from air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Use TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T5O) to remove special bolts. 5. Remove the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. To install, reverse the removal procedure. After replacement, perform self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". CAUTION: Air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with forward mark "<=" pointing towards the front of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for cracks deformities and rust before installation and replace as required. Page 3343 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Campaign - A/C Hose Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 98-064 Date: 980908 Campaign - A/C Hose Replacement Reference: NTB98-064 Date: September 8, 1998 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN 1998 FRONTIER POOR OR NO A/C COOLING DUE TO A/C LOW HOSE CRACKING CAMPAIGN I.D. # P8163 APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1998 Frontier (D22) built before VIN # 1N6DD2***WC387655 INTRODUCTION Some 1998 Frontiers may develop refrigerant leaks in the vehicle's air conditioner lower return hose due to vibration. To ensure customer satisfaction and prevent any future inconvenience, Nissan has initiated a Voluntary Service Campaign to install a bracket on the lower return hose of the air conditioning system to minimize this vibration. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P8163 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this Campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 90,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is a dealer responsibility to check (with SERVICE-COMM) each vehicle falling within the range of this service campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from your dealership, other Nissan dealerships, private parties, or vehicles presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. A list of affected customers in your area will be sent to Nissan regional offices for distribution to Nissan dealers once all of the customer notification letters have been sent. This list will assist you in identifying those vehicles involved in this service campaign. Each dealership service department is encouraged to contact these vehicle owners to have the required inspections and repairs completed on their vehicle. CUSTOMER FOCUS Maintaining a strong customer relationship throughout the Frontier Air Conditioner Lower Return Hose Campaign is one of the key goals of NMC. Each and every action taken by Nissan and the servicing dealer will have a significant impact in retaining current Frontier owners as future customers. Page 1157 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4369 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6566 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the two heater hoses from inside the engine compartment. 3. Remove the cooling unit. a. Evacuate the A/C system using refrigerant recovery equipment. b. Disconnect the two refrigerant lines from the engine compartment. - Cap the A/C lines to prevent moisture from entering the system. c. Remove the glove box and mating trim d. Disconnect the thermal amplifier connector. e. Remove the cooling unit. 4. Remove the steering member assembly. 5. Remove the heater unit. 6. Remove the heater core. INSTALLATION Installation is basically the reverse order of removal. Refill the cooling system. - Recharge the A/C system. Page 7649 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5894 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4717 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3657 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Specifications Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Nuts: Front .................................................................................................................................................... ....................... 118 - 147 Nm (87 - 108 ft. lbs.) Rear ........................................................................... ....................................................................................................... 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Spring Pad ........................................................................................................................................... ................................. 98 - 108 Nm (72 - 80 ft. lbs.) Torque Arrester Bolts ............................................................................................................................................................ 16 - 22 Nm (12 - 16 ft. lbs.) Page 3737 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 7849 A strut which is leaking and needs to be replaced will exhibit a substantial amount of oil around the exterior body of the strut. The oil layer will extend below the spring seat (dish), will be thick, contain large pieces of dust and debris, and will saturate the strut rod (see Figure 1). 2. Strut Seepage (Considered Normal/Does Not Affect Operation and Performance) - Strut Does Not Need to be Replaced: A strut which is seeping will exhibit a thin layer of oil stain on the exterior body of the strut. The oil stain will not usually extend beyond the spring seat (dish) but may extend past the spring seat under conditions such as changes in ambient temperature or driving conditions. The oil stain will not be thick nor will it contain dust or debris (see Figure 1). Page 3924 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3062 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5047 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 990 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3891 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7658 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 5139 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 617 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 193 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7886 10. Measure starting force "A" at wheel hub bolt. 11. Install lock washer by tightening the lock nut within 15 to 30 degrees. 12. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions to seat wheel bearing correctly. 13. Measure starting force "B" at wheel hub bolt. Refer to step 10. 14. Wheel bearing preload "C" can be calculated as shown below. C = B - A Wheel bearing preload "C": 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) 15. Repeat steps 3 through 14 until correct axial end play and wheel bearing preload are obtained. 16. Tighten screws to 1.2 - 1.8 Nm (10.4 - 15.6 inch lbs.). 17. Install free running hub. Page 1368 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 1706 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair CAUTION: ^ Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during bleeding operation. ^ If master cylinder is suspected to have air inside, bleed air from master cylinder first. ^ Fill reservoir with new brake fluid DOT 3. Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding air out of system. ^ Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage of brake fluid. ^ Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector or battery cable. ^ Bleed air in the following order: a. Load Sensing Valve (LSV) air bleeder (Models equipped with LSV) b. Left rear brake c. Right rear brake d. Left front brake e. Right front brake f. ABS actuator and electric unit 1. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to air bleeder valve. 2. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 3. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. 4. Close air bleeder valve. 5. Release brake pedal slowly. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 until clear brake fluid comes out of air bleeder valve. 7. Tighten air bleeder to 7 - 9 Nm (61 - 78 inch lbs.) Page 8358 CAUTION: Do not use pliers to squeeze or compress the button halves together. This can scratch and/or damage the button. 7. Using water pump pliers, tighten the adjustable wrench. Compress the button to approximately 0.2 in. (5.4-5.8 mm) thickness (see Figure 4). 8. Make sure the center pin of the button is securely crimped to hold the other half of the button in place (see Figure 2). 9. Confirm that the seat belt latch plate cannot slide past the button and it is held at shoulder height when the seatbelt is retracted. NOTE: When this incident occurs, both front driver's and passenger's seat belt "D" rings must be cleaned and "refurbished" (renewed) using the following procedural steps. Clean "D" Ring, Install Fluorine Resin Tape NOTE: For 1996-99 Pathfinders built before December, 1998, see bulletin NTB00-003 for additional front seat belt retractor assembly information. 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 5). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 5). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire (provided in the kit listed in the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin) under the seat belt, between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 6). Page 5122 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4339 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6953 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4271 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) 1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector. 2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: Approximately 166.5 - 203.5 ohms [at 20°C (68°F)] If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). Page 2412 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2301 Thermostat: Service and Repair - Be careful not to spill coolant over engine REMOVAL 1. Drain coolant from engine. 2. Remove air cleaner and air duct assembly. 3. Remove water hose from water inlet housing. 4. Remove water inlet housing, then take out thermostat. INSPECTION 1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperature. It should seat tightly. 2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. 3. Then check if valve closes at 5° C (9° F) below valve opening temperature. INSTALLATION 1. Use a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from water inlet. - Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of front cover. 2. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of water inlet. - Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant Part No. 999 MP-A7007, Three Bond TB1207D or equivalent. Steering - Pull/Drift Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 8620 Tape Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Cassette Tape Player Maintenance Classification: EL90-002 Reference: NTB90-044 Date: May 24, 1990 CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER MAINTENANCE APPLIED VEHICLE(S) All Nissan vehicles equipped with a cassette tape player SERVICE INFORMATION The playback head, capstan, and roller will attract dirt or residues from the tape material each time a cassette is played. This causes a deterioration of sound quality (i.e. distortion, reduced frequency response, and reduced clarity/fullness). If residues and dirt are not removed, loss of channel(s) or tape continuity (also referred to as: "tape eating") may occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE To ensure the optimum performance from a cassette tape player, the following Periodic Maintenance guidelines should be observed: ^ Clean the cassette tape player (specifically, the tape head and capstan rollers) after 10 hours of play or once a month (whichever occurs first). ^ Use a cassette cleaning kit (such as: Nissan Cassette Deck Cleaning System, P/N 999U2-A7000 or equivalent), being careful to follow the kit manufacturer's instructions. Additionally, the following Cassette Tape Care guidelines should be observed: ^ Before turning off the radio, eject the cassette being played. Leaving the tape mechanism stopped while a tape is engaged can damage the tape, pinch roller, or capstan. Use tapes which are 90 minutes or less in play time. ^ Store cassette tapes properly, when not in use; 1. Use protective plastic case to prevent tape from unwinding and accumulating dust. 2. Protect tapes from extreme heat, direct sun light, and extreme cold. After turning off the radio, do not leave the tape in the cassette door pathway. Remove it to allow the tape slot door to close and keep out airborne dirt. ^ Do not use tapes that are more than 5 years old. Older tapes suffer from stretch and increased tape head residue. The preceding information should be given to the customer at the time of vehicle purchase (Sales Department) and during vehicle servicing (Service Department). Page 8357 3. Slide the seat belt latch plate to a position higher than the button position (i.e., between the button location and the shoulder anchor loop). See Figure 2. 4. Find the original button position (hole). Then insert the button half (with the center pin) into the belt. Go in from the plastic side of the latch plate (see Figure 2). 5. On the opposite side of the belt (on the metal side of the latch plate) fit the button half with the hole over the protruding pin (see Figure 2 & 3). 6. Use an adjustable wrench with smooth jaws. Place it as shown in Figure 4, then finger tighten the jaws. Page 3738 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Mechanical Specifications Axle Shaft: Mechanical Specifications DIMENSIONS Drive Shaft Axial End Play ................................................................................................................................................ 0.45 mm (0.0177 inch) or less Shaft Diameter ............................................................................................ ..................................................................................... 29.0 mm (1.142 inch) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Slide Joint Housing .............................................................................................................................. .................................. 34 - 44 Nm (25 - 33 ft. lbs.) Page 7473 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 149 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Service and Repair Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Discharge refrigerant using the recovery/recycling equipment (ACR4). 2. Remove side marker lamps. 3. Remove front grille (4 fasteners). 4. Remove harness clip from hood lock stay, if equipped (gently press out). 5. Remove grille apron (5 nuts). 6. Remove hood lock stay brace (4 bolts). Remove hood latch (3 bolts). 7. Remove hose (high-pressure) clamp bracket from radiator core support. 8. Disconnect high-pressure hose at condenser. 9. Disconnect dual-pressure switch harness connector. 10. Disconnect high-pressure tube (liquid tank to cooling unit) at liquid tank. 11. Remove liquid tank and bracket. 12. Remove lower core support seal (4 bolts). 13. Loosen windshield washer tank bolts. 14. Remove condenser mounting bolts (2 bolts). 15. Remove condenser assembly. CAUTION: Carefully lift condenser without damaging radiator (fin and tube). Page 3652 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 9164 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3752 Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6262 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM controls torque converter clutch solenoid valve to cancel the lock-up condition of A/T. When the solenoid valve is turned on, lock-up is cancelled. When the solenoid valve is turned oft, A/T lock-up is operational. Conditions for lock-up cancel: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned "ON" when; Throttle valve is fully closed (during idling or deceleration) - Engine coolant temperature is below 40° C (104° F) - Engine is stopped Conditions for lock-up operation: Under 55 to 63 km/h (34 to 39 MPH) (2/8 throttle on flat road), lock-up does not operate even when the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is "OFF". - Over 58 to 66 km/h (36 to 41 MPH) (2/8 throttle on flat road), lock-up should operate because the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is "OFF". To confirm vehicle lock-up, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve must be in operation ("ON" during idle and deceleration, and "OFF" during acceleration) and engine speed should drop. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there will be no lock-up. CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Injector: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 8949 Audible Warning Device: Electrical Diagrams EL-CHIME-01 Warning Chime (Part 1 Of 2) Models With Power Door Locks Circuit Diagrams Page 5627 Ground Distribution Page 3588 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Relay (Type 1M) Green or Blue Precautions Classification: EC93-016 Reference: NTB93-176 Date: November 29, 1993 GREEN OR BLUE (TYPE 1M) RELAY CAUTION APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION When servicing a customer's vehicle, exercise caution when diagnosing / checking at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay). SERVICE PROCEDURE When diagnosing at any green or blue colored relay (type 1M, 1 make-normally open relay), observe the following cautions to prevent damage to the Engine Control Module (ECM): 1. Note that the schematic on the fuel pump relay is rotated 90 degrees from the orientation of the relay terminals in the relay connector (see diagram): 2. Exercise caution to ensure that the correct terminals are being probed at the relay connector during diagnosing / checking. Note: If terminals 2 or 3 (battery voltage) are connected to terminal 1, the ECM will become damaged if the circuit being tested has terminal 1 connected to the ECM. Page 4553 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 9196 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5790 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 5113 Ground Distribution Diagram Information and Instructions Absolute Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Grounding Point: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 5165 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 812 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7859 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Description and Operation Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .......................................... Double-Acting Hydraulic Page 630 Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 2629 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 5195 EGR Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 7572 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. Page 3501 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 2365 Page 1697 Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - R134a Charge Amount/Lubricant Chart Classification: HA95-013 Reference: NTB95-068 Date: July 5, 1995 R134a CHARGE AMOUNTS/PAG LUBRICANT CHART APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All equipped with R134a A/C systems SERVICE INFORMATION For reference, the chart in this bulletin has been prepared. It contains information by vehicle model and year regarding A/C systems conversion dates to R-134a type systems. Please note, the dates shown indicate the conversion date at the manufacturing level, not on dealer installed units. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Locations Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Locations BR-ABS-01 Anti-lock Brake System (Part 1 Of 5) Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch SRS Component Parts Location Page 212 Ignition Control Module: Electrical Diagrams WIRING DIAGRAM Page 4602 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2568 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 1387 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. Page 2458 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3700 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 4351 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 9131 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4454 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 728 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3284 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 9242 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6249 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1190 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Audio - Speaker Noise, Cellular Phone Interference Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Speaker Noise, Cellular Phone Interference Classification: EL99-005 Reference: NTB99-017 Date: April 1, 1999 NISSAN SPEAKER NOISE DUE TO CELLULAR PHONE INTERFERENCE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Cellular phone charging may cause a popping or crackling noise in the audio speakers of Nissan vehicles. If this condition exists, it is most likely to occur when the customer's cellular phone is turned off, plugged into the 12 volt cigarette lighter socket nearest the audio head unit, and placed within one foot of the audio head unit. The condition may occur more frequently in vehicles with audio systems with amplified speakers. Refer to the appropriate owner's manual for cautions regarding the use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for other accessories. Use the procedure below to verify that the condition exists as described above and provide instruction for the customer to reduce the possibility of future cellular phone interference. SERVICE PROCEDURE Perform the following test procedure to verify the condition exists as described: 1. Ask the customer for the cellular phone and charging adapter. 2. Confirm the cellular phone has been turned off for at least 30 minutes before proceeding. NOTE: Do not turn the cellular phone on at any time during the procedure. If the phone has to be turned from on to off, you will have to wait 30 minutes for the phone to reset to proceed with the test. 3. Plug the phone into the 12 volt cigarette lighter socket nearest the audio head unit. 4. Turn the ignition to the "ON" position (do not turn the cellular phone on). 5. Turn the audio unit on. 6. Place the cellular phone close to the front of the audio head unit. 7. Listen for a popping or crackling noise from the audio speakers. 8. If the noise is heard, move the cellular phone back from the audio unit. The noise should be reduced as the cellular phone is moved further away from the audio unit. 9. If the condition is confirmed through the above procedure, advise the customer to keep the cellular phone at least one foot away from the audio head unit to reduce the possibility of future cellular phone interference. Page 3523 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6776 3. Press axle shaft into inner race of wheel bearing. Maximum load P: 47.1 kN (5.3 US ton) NOTE: Be careful not to damage or deform grease seal. 4. Install plain washer and a new wheel bearing lock washer. 5. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut to 245 - 294 Nm (181 - 217 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Fit wheel bearing lock washer lip in wheel bearing lock nut groove correctly by tightening lock nut. Be sure to bend it up. 6. Check wheel bearing preload. a. Turn bearing cage (with respect to axle shaft) two or three times. It must turn smoothly. b. Attach spring gauge to bearing cage bolt (as shown at left) and pull it at a speed of 10 rpm to measure preload. Spring gauge indication: 6.9 - 48.1 N (1.5 - 10.8 lbs.) 7. Install new oil seal to rear axle housing using a suitable tool. NOTE: After installing new oil seal, coat sealing lip with multi-purpose grease. 8. Install new O-ring to rear axle housing. Page 3931 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Sensors and Switches - Engine. Page 4456 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6961 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1609 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Specified type: [1] .................................................................................................................................................. Ethylene glycol base anti-freeze/coolant [1] 50% mix of anti-freeze/coolant and soft water. Page 7350 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3569 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor is a basic component of the ECCS. it monitors engine speed and piston position. These input signals to the ECM are used to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other functions. The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-forming circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for a 1° (POS) signal and 4 slits for a 180° (REF) signal. The wave-forming circuit consists of Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes. The rotor plate is positioned between the LED and the photo diode. The LED transmits light to the photo diode. As the rotor plate turns, the slits cut the light to generate rough-shaped pulses. These pulses are converted into on-off signals by the wave-forming circuit and sent to the ECM. The distributor is not repairable and must be replaced as an assembly except distributor cap. Specifications Page 2679 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Recall - A/T Shifter Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 98-032 Date: 980401 Recall - A/T Shifter Replacement Reference: NTB98-032 Date April 1, 1998 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 1998 FRONTIER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SHIFTER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION NO: 98V-064 APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998 Frontier (D22) APPLIED VIN: 1N6DD21S*WC305007 to WC330328 INTRODUCTION There is a possibility that on some 1998 Frontier trucks, a securing pin inside the Automatic Transmission Shifter Assembly could come loose. This could allow the shift lever to be inadvertently moved out of the "Park" position without the key in the ignition and could result in unexpected movement of the vehicle if the parking brake is not engaged. There may also be difficulty in shifting the lever in or out of "Park" with the key in the ignition. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number 98V-064 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED Approximately 3,000 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this campaign which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in dealer inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new cars, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to also correct any used trucks in their inventory which fall within the range of this campaign prior to sale. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Check Service Comm to verify that the campaign procedure has not already been performed on this vehicle. Page 3556 Ground Distribution Page 3184 Ground Distribution Page 6492 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4799 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 497 Ground Distribution Page 7083 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position switch is "ON". ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground exists. Wheel Fastener Torque Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Torque Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Lug Nut ................................................................................................................................................ ............................ 118 - 147 Nm (87 - 108 ft. lbs.) Page 6368 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 1008 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2460 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 9282 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 4391 EC-FRO2/H-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Page 2509 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 8822 Reference: TS87-145 Date: September 28, 1987 PAINT SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Paint spotting incidents occurring in the U.S. market are not unique to Nissan, but are being experienced by all manufacturers. To date, two separate types of paint spotting incidents have been identified as follows: 1. Particulate Fallout - Tiny solid particles which collect on horizontal panels, causing a dark stain which will penetrate into the paint if not cleaned. 2. Water Spotting - A ringlet or multiple water-drop-shaped light discoloration on dark painted horizontal panels. THESE TYPES OF SPOTTING ARE NOT DUE TO PAINT DEFICIENCY, AND CAN BE PREVENTED THROUGH PROPER CARE. SERVICE PROCEDURE Particulate Fallout Ash, dust, soot and other tiny solid particulate matter from industrial and other sources can be carried many miles. Particulate fallout is most noticeable on the horizontal surfaces (hood, luggage compartment lid, and roof) of the vehicle. If left on a moist, painted surface, the particles will slowly dissolve and bond to the paint, frequently leaving a red stain. This stain can be present even on plastic surfaces such as bumpers if the fallout has an iron content. These spots may be visible on both solid and metallic paints (especially light colors). The particulate can be felt as a sharp point on the paint surface. When viewed through a magnifying lens, the staining may be evident. VEHICLE CARE Every 10 days, or more frequently depending upon local conditions, particulate fallout must be washed off with mild detergent and water to prevent its bonding and staining action. A good carnuba wax coating can help protect against damage from particulate fallout. PARTICULATE FALLOUT REPAIR PROCEDURE In most cases, thoroughly washing the affected area with a water and mild detergent solution (to avoid scratching the finish with dislodged particles) will remove the particulates. After washing the vehicle, a stain, generally orange or red, may still be visible on white or other light colored vehicles. This stain can be removed with a fine compound material. DO NOT APPLY THE COMPOUNDING MATERIAL BEFORE ALL PARTICLES IN THE AFFECTED AREA ARE REMOVED BY THOROUGH WASHING. Water Spotting A photograph of typical water spotting is shown on page 26 of the Nissan Paint Refinishing Guide* (PIN 5REFGD). The spots are most visible when viewed at an angle, usually under fluorescent light. The paint surface is usually smooth to the touch because the spotting is a change in the top surface itself. This is not hard-water residue which will wash off with soap and water. These spots are visible on both solid and metallic paints with dark colors. VEHICLE CARE When a vehicle is stored outside and unprotected, dust patterns develop on the painted surfaces. These patterns guide moisture droplets from a light rain or morning dew to the same location each time. The strong sunlight, repeatedly concentrated on these water droplets, greatly contributes to the spotting. When storing a vehicle unprotected, where the painted surface is repeatedly exposed to a combination of sunlight and light rain (or morning dew), the vehicle MUST be washed AND thoroughly dried at least every two weeks, or more frequently if there is light rain or dew followed by strong sunlight. When washing any vehicle, it must be out of direct sunlight and the painted surfaces should be cool to the touch. WATER SPOTTING REPAIR PROCEDURE The method of repairing a water spotted finish varies with the severity (depth of spot in finish) of the spotting. After a thorough washing, perform the Page 6092 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5062 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6329 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 3458 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-AP/SEN-01 Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Diagrams Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 4294 Ground Distribution Page 3953 Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Connectors Page 4147 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5870 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 7782 a. Install steering gear on Tool. b. Turn stub shaft all the way to right and left several times. c. Measure turning torque at 360° position from straight ahead position with Tools. Turning torque 360°: 0.15 - 0.78 Nm (1.3 - 6.9 inch lbs.) d. Measure turning torque at straight ahead position. Straight ahead position is a position where stub shaft is turned 2.14 turns (two full turns and 50°) from lock position. Turning torque at straight ahead position: 0.25 - 1.32 Nm (2.2 - 11.7 inch lbs.) higher than turning torque at 360°. Maximum turning torque: 1.03 - 1.47 Nm (9.1 - 13.0 inch lbs.) If turning torque is not within specifications, adjust by turning sector shaft adjusting screw. 2. Tighten adjusting screw lock nut with tools. Pre-Disassembly Inspection Page 9146 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3295 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Diagram Information and Instructions Leak Detection Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4417 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2680 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Cassette - Poor Sound Quality/Loss of Channel/Jamming Tape Player: Technical Service Bulletins Cassette - Poor Sound Quality/Loss of Channel/Jamming REFERENCE: NTB93-017 CLASSIFICATION: EL93-004 DATE: January 21, 1993 TITLE: CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER MAINTENANCE APPLIED VEHICLES(S): All Nissan vehicles equipped with cassette tape players SERVICE INFORMATION In normal use, the playback head, capstan and rollers of any cassette tape player will attract dirt or residues from the tape material each time a cassette is played. This causes a deterioration of sound quality (i.e., distortion, reduced frequency response, and reduced clarity). If residues and dirt are not removed, loss of channel(s) or "tape eating" may occur. In order to help your customers to avoid these incidents and ensure optimum performance from their cassette tape players, please advise them of the need to perform the following maintenance procedures: SERVICE PROCEDURE Use a cassette cleaning kit to clean the cassette tape player (specifically the tape head and capstan rollers) after every 30 hours of play or once a month, whichever comes first. You may use the Nissan Cassette Deck Cleaning System, P/N 999U2-AD010 or equivalent. Be careful to follow the kit usage instructions. CASSETTE TAPE CARE GUIDELINES: - Before turning off the radio, eject the cassette being played. Allowing the tape mechanism to stop while a tape is engaged can damage the tape, pinch roller or capstan. After turning off the radio, do not leave the tape in the cassette door pathway. - Use tapes which are 90 minutes or less in play time. - Use protective plastic cases to store cassettes when not in use. This will prevent them from unwinding and collecting dust. - Protect tapes from extreme heat, direct sunlight, extreme cold, and from foreign material such as liquids or sticky substances. Discard damaged or contaminated tapes. - Do not use tapes that are more than 5 years old. Older tapes suffer from stretch and increased tape residue. NOTE: If your customer complains of deterioration of sound quality, loss of channels(s) or "tape eating," please clean the cassette tape player using the Cassette Deck Cleaning System as described above. In most cases, this procedure will return the cassette deck to full efficiency. Page 1296 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1457 Page 2227 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 9296 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2698 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IATS-01 Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Circuit Diagrams Intake Air Temperature Sensor (DTC: P0110) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 3618 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 2577 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9421 Ground Distribution Page 3859 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3557 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 3308 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 7016 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 8212 Comments regarding R-134a manifold gauge set: ^ Be certain that the gauge face indicates R134a or 134a. ^ Be certain that the manifold gauge set has the 1/2" - 16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses, ensuring that only R-134a service hoses are used. ^ Be certain that no refrigerants other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricants) are used with the manifold gauge set. Page 2268 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1481 Overall inspection sequence Page 2198 2. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of water pump. - Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant Part No. 999 MP-A7007, Three Bond TB1207D or equivalent. Page 6093 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4572 indications with no drop-outs or spikes. Note: A 2-3 mph (3-5 kph) difference between the CONSULT display and the speedometer is normal. 4. a) If the speedometer and speed sensor values are 0K, proceed to # 5. b) If the speedometer and speed sensor data are erratic, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to service manual for Diagnosis information. 5. Check the existing ECM part number in the vehicle that is listed either on the CONSULT freeze frame data or checked by CONSULT ECM Part Number function (see Figure 1). 6. If existing Part Number is one of those listed in Table 1, install the appropriate P/N listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Specifications Power Steering Pressure Switch: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................................... .............................. 1.7 - 2.3 Nm (15 - 20 inch lbs.) Page 715 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9511 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7152 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 1210 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6497 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 6151 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2476 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Power Transistor 1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor & power transistor harness connector and ignition coil harness connector. 2. Check power transistor resistance between terminals (2) and (8). If NG, replace distributor assembly. Page 4161 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-MAFS-01 Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Diagrams Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 1282 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 3617 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 7395 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8959 Audible Warning Device: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Ground Circuit Check Main Power Ground Circuit Check (With Power Door Locks) Models With Power Door Locks Main Power Ground Circuit Check (Without Power Door Locks) Models Without Power Door Locks Main Power Supply Circuit Check Main Power Supply Circuit Check (With Power Door Locks) Models With Power Door Locks Main Power Supply Circuit Check (Without Power Door Locks) Models Without Power Door Locks Electrical Components Inspection Page 376 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2941 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2579 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 2775 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1446 3. Adjust stopper bolt if necessary. Standard length "L1" (2WD): 20 mm (0.79 inch) (Length before cap is mounted.) Standard length "L2" (4WD): 26.5 mm (1.043 inch) (Length before cap is mounted.) Page 5701 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 6290 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Checking Fluid Level Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Level Check fluid level engine off. Check fluid level referring to the scale on the dipstick. Use "HOT" range for fluid temperatures of 50 - 80° C (122 - 176° F). Use "COLD" range for fluid temperatures of 0 - 30° C (32 - 86° F). CAUTION: ^ Do not overfill. ^ Recommended fluid is Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) type Dexron III, or equivalent. Page 7792 Page 4964 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7398 Fuse: Locations Fuse ID Power Supply Routing: Schematic (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4722 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 8207 Page 2240 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3309 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2886 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 9087 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Locations Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Service and Repair Axle Nut: Service and Repair Manual Lock Free Running Hub REPLACEMENT 1. Set knob of manual-lock free running hub in the FREE position. 2. Remove manual-lock free running hub. 3. When installing manual-lock free running hub, make sure the hub is in the FREE position. NOTE: Apply multi-purpose grease to the parts shown in the illustration. 4. Check operation of manual-lock free running hub after installation. INSPECTION - Check that the knob moves smoothly and freely. - Check that the clutch moves smoothly in the body. Auto Lock Free Running Hub Page 7209 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 1686 Comments regarding condensers: ^ The parallel flow condenser can be identified by the refrigerant end tanks, and smaller, more closely spaced center section tubes. Page 9372 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 658 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 9528 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Specifications Page 3138 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 1160 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6116 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4908 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6396 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2814 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 732 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3535 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake air temperature sensor Check resistance as shown in the figure. If NG, replace intake air temperature sensor. Page 6704 Use the "Combination" Op Codes as indicated with the appropriate Section "JA", "JC", or "JD" coding that best represents the A/T R&R; and repair/replacement performed. Service Procedure Page 5712 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 2355 Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 797 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS-01 Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Circuit Diagrams Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 9562 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3956 EC-FRO2-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0134) Circuit Connectors Response Monitoring Page 3865 Ignition Output Signal: Electrical Diagrams WIRING DIAGRAM Page 3078 Leak Detection Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 438 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-MAFS-01 Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Diagrams Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 3801 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 223 SRS Component Parts Location Alignment Specifications Page 3442 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6160 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7354 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 200 Ground Distribution Page 713 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2694 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4620 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 9448 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 6571 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 8150 1. Visually inspect the metal tube portion of the A/C low hose between the compressor flange and the rubber hose for cracks or signs of leakage such as traces of oil or dirt deposits (see Figure 1). NOTE: Use a mirror and flashlight (as needed) to view the underside of the hose end. Low Hose Leak Detector Inspection 1. Use an approved electronic leak detector (Kent Moore model # J39400 or # J41995) to check the A/C low hose for leaks. Refer to pages HA-48 through HA-50 of the 1998 Frontier Service Manual for the leak check procedure. NOTE: Make sure the electronic leak detector is properly calibrated and that the probe tip filter is clean before performing the leak check. Refer to the leak detector owner's manual to calibrate and/or change the probe tip filter as needed. A/C Low Hose Installation 1. Use appropriate equipment to discharge and recover all remaining refrigerant from the vehicle's A/C system. Refer to pages HA-51 and HA-52 of the 1998 Nissan Frontier Service manual for the discharge and recovery procedure. Page 1927 Timing Components Page 8281 performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding. Page 7035 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 205 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 129 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7639 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4705 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 2756 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 1909 Oil Pump Page 3670 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 9110 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 9466 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5040 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5908 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 8928 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Service and Repair Fan Blade: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION - Do not release the drive belt tension by removing the fan/water pump pulley. - Fan coupling cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. If front mark (F) is present, install fan so that side marked (F) faces the front. - Install the drive belt only after the fan and fan coupling to water pump flange bolts/nuts have been properly torqued. - Proper alignment of these components is essential. Improper alignment will cause them to wobble and may eventually cause the fan to separate from the water pump causing extensive damage. INSPECTION Check fan coupling for rough operation, silicon oil leakage and bent bimetal. After assembly, verify the fan does not wobble or flap while the engine is running. WARNING: WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING, KEEP HANDS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVING PARTS SUCH AS DRIVE BELTS AND FAN. Page 4061 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 1396 The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center Page 1101 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1621 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Specified type: Continental U.S. and Alaska ....................................................................................... ............................................................................... Nissan Matic "D" Canada ......................................................................................................................................................... Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid NOTE: Dexron III/Mercon or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an Infiniti dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of Dexron III/Mercon Automatic Transmission Fluid. Page 1268 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 9293 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1586 Page 6904 Counter Gear: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Page 2922 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 9230 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 1321 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5686 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3233 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 7615 Lower Arm Pivot Height "H" [1]: 45.5 - 49.5 mm (1.791 - 1.949 inch) NOTE: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. - "H" is the distance from the center of lower link spindle to the bottom of tension rod attaching bolt. Page 5177 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2426 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and (32) (ECM ground). Page 8732 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 5964 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3225 Ground Distribution Page 6257 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 611 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 486 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1931 Water Pump and Thermostat Housing REMOVAL AND TIGHTENING SEQUENCES Intake Manifold, Exhaust Manifold and Throttle Body Page 3613 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5248 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 9445 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4931 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 4233 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 3191 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Classification: EC99-005b Reference: NTB99-053b Date: January 22, 2002 NISSAN REVISED TPS ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE This bulletin amends NTB99-053a. The Service Information and Service Procedure has been revised. In addition, TPS Connector tool (Kent-Moore # J45178) information has been included. Please discard all copies of NTB99-053a. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1995-1998 Maxima (A32) 1996-1998 Pathfinder (R50) 1995-1998 240SX (S14) 1995-1998 Sentra/200SX (B14) w/GA16 & SR20 engines 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998 Frontier (D22) 1995-1997 Altima (U13) 1998 Altima (L30) 1996-1998 Quest (V40) SERVICE INFORMATION The adjustment procedure for the throttle position sensor (TPS) has been revised and standardized for all the Applied Vehicles. ^ The TPS contains a closed throttle position switch (CTPS) and a variable output throttle position sensor. ^ This procedure uses the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) status (ON or OFF) instead of the throttle position sensor (variable output voltage) to adjust the TPS. ^ Incorrect adjustment of the CTPS may cause one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to be displayed: P1447, P0120, P0510, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P1705. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check fast idle cam (FIC) function, if equipped (refer to appropriate Service Manual). When finished, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and the fast idle cam (if equipped) has released. Then turn the engine "OFF". 2. Disconnect the harness connector (see Figure 1) from the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) position of the throttle position sensor (TPS). 3. Connect an ohmmeter across the terminals for the closed throttle position switch (CTPS). Page 5117 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Locations Fuse Block: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3874 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 6949 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 578 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 185 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 5046 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 5877 Ignition Ballast Resistor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Resistor 1. Disconnect resistor harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals (1) and (2). Resistance: Approximately 2.2 K Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] If NG, replace resistor. Page 6845 4. Apply multi-purpose grease to each bearing cone. 5. Pack grease seal lip with multi-purpose grease, then install it into wheel hub with suitable drift. Page 4136 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 1233 Impact Sensor: Locations G Sensor SRS Component Parts Location Description G Sensor The G Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Sunroof - Headliner Squeak Noises Sunroof / Moonroof: Customer Interest Sunroof - Headliner Squeak Noises Classification: BT98-003 Reference: NTB98-040 Date: June 1, 1998 1998 FRONTIER SQUEAK NOISE IN HEADLINER NEAR SUNROOF APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1998 Frontier (D22) - sunroof models only SERVICE INFORMATION If a 1998 Frontier exhibits a "scratchy" type of squeak noise in the headliner around the edges of the sunroof, the cause may be the headliner panel rubbing on the vehicle body. Use the following procedure to resolve the incident: SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof panel as follows: A. Remove the sunroof shade panel by turning the securing knobs counterclockwise and pulling the panel down and towards the rear of the vehicle to release (see Figure 1). B. Disconnect the sunroof handle from the sunroof handle latch by depressing the two release buttons on the handle latch while pushing up on the sunroof panel (see Figure 2). Page 3342 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 8923 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Suspension - Steering Pull Diagnosis Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Steering Pull Diagnosis Classification: ST01-003 Reference: NTB01-083 Date: November 28, 2001 1998-2002 FRONTIER AND 2000-2002 XTERRA STEERING PULL DURING BRAKING APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2002 Frontier (D22) 2000-2002 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied Frontier or Xterra exhibits a slight steering pull (left or right) during: ^ Moderate application of the brakes to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from a speed of between 20 and 30 mph. The following steps should be performed in order given; 1. The vehicle suspension should be inspected. 2. Vehicle ride height should be checked. 3. Alignment should be checked to ensure that all measurements are within factory specifications. When performing an alignment, refer to the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for specifications and adjustment procedures. Trouble Diagnosis (For USA) Headlamp: Testing and Inspection Trouble Diagnosis (For USA) Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses Chart Adjustments Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage: Adjustments 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. While pressing lock plate, move adjusting tube in Direction T. 3. Release lock plate. (Adjusting tube is locked at this time.) 4. Move throttle drum from P2 (idling position) to P, (Full throttle position) quickly and release. 5. Ensure that throttle wire stroke "L" is within the specified range, between full throttle and idle. Throttle wire stroke "L": 39 - 43 mm (1.54 - 1.69 inch) - Adjust throttle wire stroke after accelerator wire is installed and adjusted. - When connecting throttle wire to throttle drum, do not use tools. Manually hook wire. - Put mark on throttle wire for measuring wire stroke. If throttle wire stroke is improperly adjusted, the following problems may arise. - When the throttle drum fully-open position "P1" is too far toward Direction T, the shift schedule will be as shown by (2) in the figure, and the kickdown range will greatly increase. - When the throttle drum fully-open position "P1" is too far toward Direction U, the shift schedule will be as shown by (1) in the figure, and kickdown will not occur. Page 754 Throttle Full Close Switch: Connector Views Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 1062 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 428 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 8193 Comments regarding leak detector use: ^ Existing R-12 leak detectors currently will not detect R-134a. ^ Many R-134a leak detectors will detect R-12; check with the equipment manufacturer. ^ Always refer to and follow the equipment manufacturers recommendations when operating leak detectors. Comments regarding weight scale use: ^ If the scale allows electronic control of the flow of refrigerant through the scale, (i.e. internal solenoid valves) be certain that the hose fitting size is 1/2"-16 ACME, and that no refrigerant other than R-134a (along with only specified lubricant) have been used with the scale. Charging Cylinder ^ The use of a charging cylinder is not recommended because: ^ The refrigerant may be vented into the air from the top valve of cylinder when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. ^ The accuracy of a charging cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Service Procedures ^ The service procedures for R-134a A/C systems are basically the same as for R-12 A/C systems, however, the following should always be kept in mind: ^ Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge R-134a systems. ^ If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service work. ^ R-134a and R-12 A/C components are not interchangeable. Cleaning of used (in service) components for use with another type of refrigerant and/or lubricant is not an acceptable practice, and may result in A/C system failure. ^ Always use the proper PAG oil when servicing an R-134a A/C system. The Nissan part number for the appropriate PAG compressor oil can be found on the A/C specification label in the engine compartment, and also in the Factory Service Manual, and on the label on the compressor. These oils are only available from your Nissan Parts Department. ^ When leak checking an R-134a system, be certain that you are using a detector which will detect R-134a. ^ As mentioned previously in this bulletin, the R-134a PAG lubricants absorb moisture; PAG oil containers and A/C components containing PAG oil must remain tightly sealed until ready for use. ^ Unlike R-12 systems, R-134a systems do not exhibit a "clear sight glass", even when properly charged. For this reason, the R-134a A/C systems have no sight glass. ^ With R-134a systems it is important to properly control the amount of refrigerant charged into the system during system charging. A charging machine or weight scale must always be used during charging for proper charge determination. ^ Questions regarding R-12 or R-134a should be addressed to your Regional Service Staff or the FIXS Hotline. Page 1107 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS-01 Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Circuit Diagrams Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 6373 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9212 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 153 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 2503 Ground Distribution Page 5647 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3035 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 8476 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Description 4WD Models The diagnosis sensor unit will deploy the air bags if the G-sensor and/or the crash zone sensor activates simultaneously with the safing sensor while the ignition switch is ON. The passenger air bag does not deploy when the passenger air bag deactivation switch is turned to the OFF position. Page 4802 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) G Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair G Sensor SRS Component Parts Location Description G Sensor The G Sensor is located in the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. It can not be serviced separately. Malfunction of the G Sensor requires replacement of the Diagnosis Sensor Unit. Refer to Diagnosis Sensor Unit / Service and Repair. Page 4538 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4458 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 9219 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams EL-STOP/L-01 Stop Lamp Wiring Diagram Circuit Diagrams Stop Lamp Circuit Connectors Page 4196 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CMPS-01 Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Circuit Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Diagram Information and Instructions Mirrors: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 3155 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6843 2. Remove brake caliper assembly without disconnecting hydraulic line. CAUTION: Be careful not to depress brake pedal, or piston will pop out. - Make sure brake hose is not twisted. 3. Remove lock washer. (4WD) 4. Remove wheel bearing lock nut. 2WD: With suitable tool 4WD: With Tool 5. Remove wheel hub and wheel bearing. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop outer bearing. 6. After installing wheel hub and wheel bearing, adjust wheel bearing preload. DISASSEMBLY Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 4018 Page 3582 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 2516 Absolute Pressure Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-AP/SEN-01 Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Diagrams Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 3483 Ground Distribution Page 3609 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location Page 1690 Page 8405 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 868 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9468 Parking Lamp: Connector Views Parking, License And Tail Lamps (Part 1 Of 2) Parking, License, And Tail Lamps (Part 2 Of 2) Parking, License and Tail Lamps Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4017 Page 435 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1195 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 290 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 7486 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 2473 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 6325 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 963 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 5670 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 8386 12. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to make sure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 12). 13. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 14. Confirm that the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring by latching and unlatching it and allowing it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 15. Repeat steps 1 through 14 of this procedure on the remaining front seat belt. Page 6596 Page 5502 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 3085 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9381 EL-DTRL-02 Headlamp Wiring Diagram (For Canada) (Part 2 Of 3) Page 3854 Ground Distribution Page 447 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5128 Leak Detection Valve: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Vacuum Cut Valve Check vacuum cut valve as follows: 1. Plug port (C) and (D) with fingers. 2. Apply vacuum to port (A) and check that there is no suction from port (B). 3. Apply vacuum to port (B) and check that there is suction from port (A). 4. Blow air in port (B) and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port (A). 5. Open port (C) and (D). 6. Blow air in port (A) check that air flows freely out of port (C). 7. Blow air in port (B) check that air flows freely out of port (D). Page 4954 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 6259 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4478 Throttle Full Close Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-TP/SW-01 Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Circuit Diagrams Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 5977 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 3962 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0139) Circuit Connectors Page 7388 Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker Inspection For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. Circuit breakers are used in the following systems. ^ Power Window & Power door lock ^ Multi-remote Control System ^ Theft Warning System ^ Warning Chime (with power door locks) ^ Room lamp (with power door locks) Page 3274 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CMPS-01 Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Circuit Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 4791 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6370 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5447 CLAIMS INFORMATION If only the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. If the ground wire connections are cleaned and the sending unit and speedometer assembly (unified control meter) are replaced, submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding as shown. Page 4134 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3149 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5893 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3488 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5728 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5784 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 410 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 770 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3066 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3662 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 555 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2830 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Resistance 166.5 - 302.5 ohms at 68 deg F Page 4492 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Resistance 166.5 - 302.5 ohms at 68 deg F Page 2190 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CHECKING Check valve clearance while engine is warm but not running. 1. Remove rocker cover and all spark plugs 2. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke - Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. - Check that valve lifters on No 1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No 4 are tight. If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as above. 3. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 4. Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement adjusting shim. Valve clearance (Hot): Intake: 0.31 - 0.39 mm (0.012 - 0.015 inch) Exhaust: 0.33 - 0.41 mm (0.013 - 0.016 inch) 5. Turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align mark on crankshaft pulley with pointer. 6. Check those valves shown in the figure. Page 4436 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6166 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2600 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 8992 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 910 Ground Distribution Page 3440 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3887 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Idler Pulley Whine Noise at 3000 rpm Classification: HA99-006 Reference: NTB99-070 Date: October 5, 1999 A/C IDLER PULLEY WHINE NOISE AT 3000 ENGINE RPM (FOUR CYLINDER ENGINE ONLY) APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) - 2WD 2000 Xterra (WD22) - 2WD APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle exhibits a whine noise at or around 3,000 engine RPM, the cause may be the air conditioning (A/C) idler pulley. Use the service procedure listed below to diagnose and correct the incident. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Run the engine at or around 3,000 RPM with the A/C ON and OFF to determine when the whine noise occurs. NOTE: The A/C will operate with the A/C button turned off if the mode selector is in the foot/defrost or defrost position and the fan is turned on. To ensure the A/C is off, move the fan speed selector to the off position. A. If the whine noise occurs with the A/C off (A/C compressor not operating), look for other sources of the whine noise. B. If the whine noise only occurs when the A/C is on (A/C compressor operating) and the noise can be pin pointed to the idler pulley with a stethoscope or Chassis Ears(TM), proceed with step 2. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Loosen (but do not remove) the nut that secures the idler pulley (see Figure 1). 4. Remove the E-ring from the idler pulley adjusting bolt (see Figure 1). 5. Remove the idler pulley adjusting bolt. 6. Remove the A/C compressor drive belt from the idler pulley. Page 2734 Knock Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-KS-01 Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Circuit Diagrams Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 8860 3. Open the driver's side door and locate the Seat Back Recline Control Handle at the side of the driver's seat (see Figure 1) 4. Remove the screw that retains the handle and save it for reuse. 5. Remove the old handle. 6. Install the replacement handle and secure with the original screw. 7. Open the passenger's side door and locate the Seat back Recline Control Handle at the side of the passenger's seat. 8. Repeat steps 4 through 6 above. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign Line (CM) claim using the claims coding table shown. Page 6951 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 575 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 7603 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 4325 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 1370 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 1007 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3438 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7400 Fuse Block-Fuse Arrangement Page 2118 Page 3240 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. Page 5107 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 4257 Ground Distribution Page 1822 Axle Nut: Service and Repair Diagrams Page 7070 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5352 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 1133 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1086 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4265 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3755 Page 4407 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT INSPECTION Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "RR O2 SENSOR" as the monitor item with CONSULT. (3) Check "RR O2 SENSOR" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%. "RR O2 SENSOR" should be above 0.56V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" is +25%. "RR O2 SENSOR" should be below 0.54V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" Is -25%. OR Without CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals (56) (sensor signal) and (32) (ECM ground). (3) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once. If the voltage is above 0.56V at step 3, step 4 is not necessary. (4) Check the voltage when racing up to 5,000 rpm under no load. Or keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with "OD" OFF (A/T). The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once. Page 4855 3. Directly above this 25 mm hole, drill one 8 mm (0.31 in.) hole in the inside edge of the vehicle bed rail (see Figure 3). 4. Deburr both drilled holes and coat the bare metal surfaces with an anti-corrosive paint. 5. Install the rubber grommet (from the kit) into the 25 mm drilled hole. 6. Install the metal breather tube into the grommet and fasten the upper plastic bracket to the bed rail through the 8 mm drilled hole with the bolt and nut from the kit (see Figure 4). Installation of the EVAP System 1. Install the EVAP canister. 2. Install the EVAP vent control valve. 3. Reconnect the two small diameter original hoses to the canister. 4. Reconnect the vent control valve electrical harness. Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3648 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3436 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 4738 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 7132 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Overhaul COMPONENTS DISASSEMBLY 1. Push out pistons and dust covers with compressed air. Use a wooden block so that both pistons come out evenly. WARNING: DO NOT PLACE YOUR FINGERS IN FRONT OF PISTON. CAUTION: ^ Do not scratch or score cylinder wall. ^ CL28VD type front disc brake uses plastic pistons, handle them carefully. 2. Remove piston seals with a suitable tool. INSPECTION Cylinder Body Check inside surface of cylinders for scores, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign objects. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. - Minor damage from rust or foreign objects may be eliminated by polishing the surface with a fine emery sandpaper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. CAUTION: Use brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oil. Piston Page 4736 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7565 ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. Page 7749 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1261 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 4249 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3594 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Specifications Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Horizontal Mounting Nuts .......................................................................................................................................... 10.8 - 14.7 Nm (96 - 132 inch lbs.) Vertical Mounting Bolts ................................................................................................................................................ 17.7 23.5 Nm (13 - 17.4 ft. lbs.) Diagram Information and Instructions Leak Detection Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 7410 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location A/C - New Connections & O-Rings A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - New Connections & O-Rings Classification: HA97-O12 Reference: NTB98-005 Date: February 1, 1998 NEW A/C CONNECTION 0-RINGS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan (except Quest) SERVICE INFORMATION This service bulletin identifies differences in A/C 0-rings as they apply to the NEW and FORMER type A/C connections. The NEW type connection has a groove in the tube end in which the 0-ring is seated. The FORMER type connection does not have a groove but instead has an inflated portion on the tube end to support the 0-ring. Refer to Figure 1 for illustrations identifying each connection type. Diagnostic Procedure Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection Diagnostic Procedure INSPECTION FLOW SYMPTOM: Blower motor does not rotate. Page 6703 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance 2.1 - 2.9 K ohms at 68 deg F 0.27 - 0.38 K ohms at 176 deg F Page 7477 Fusible Link: Diagrams Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: ^ If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of problem. ^ Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 6586 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 5808 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 7966 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 6418 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1928 Page 8233 Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Thermo Control Amp. Check POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK Check power supply circuit for thermo control amp. with ignition switch ON. 1. Disconnect thermo control amp. harness connector. 2. Connect voltmeter from harness side. 3. Measure voltage across terminal (1) and body ground. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Check body ground circuit for thermo control amp. with ignition switch ON, air conditioner switch ON and fan switch ON. 1. Disconnect thermo control amp. harness connector. 2. Connect ohmmeter from harness side. 3. Check for continuity between terminal No. (2) and body ground. If the ground circuit is NG, check the following. - A/C switch - Fan switch - Harness for open or short between thermo control amp. and A/C switch - Harness for open or short between A/C switch and fan switch - Fan switch ground circuit. Page 4394 EC-RRO2/H-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0141) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Page 8726 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2436 Fuel Pump Relay: Connector Locations Main Harness (Part 1 Of 2) Page 914 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4160 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) DTC: (P0100) Circuit Connectors Page 6135 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 6163 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Spark Plug Torque Values Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Torque Spark plug torque 14-22 ft. lb Page 5745 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Locations Throttle Full Close Switch: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 188 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2906 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 7223 Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection - Check fluid level in reservoir tank. It should be between Max and Min lines on reservoir tank. - If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks. - If the brake warning lamp comes on, check brake fluid level switch and parking brake switch. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 9580 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair - Each switch can be replaced without removing combination switch base. COMBINATION SWITCH BASE REMOVAL - To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching screws. - Before installing the steering wheel, align the turn signal cancel tab with the notch of combination switch. Page 5232 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3506 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 399 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 1850 WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC REPLACEMENT 1. Remove free running hub assembly. (4WD) Refer to Locking Hub / Service and Repair. Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4656 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5357 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 4965 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Grounding Point: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. Page 3322 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4001 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 3238 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS-01 Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Circuit Diagrams Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 4245 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3069 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 5056 Leak Detection Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. 2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. 4. Check output voltage between ECM terminal (62) and engine ground. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply vacuum below -20 kPa (-150 mmHg, -5.91 inHg) or pressure over 20.0 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg). 5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Page 5363 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2533 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 8414 CAUTION: Do not use pliers to squeeze or compress the button halves together. This can scratch and/or damage the button. 7. Using water pump pliers, tighten the adjustable wrench. Compress the button to approximately 0.2 in. (5.4-5.8 mm) thickness (see Figure 4). 8. Make sure the center pin of the button is securely crimped to hold the other half of the button in place (see Figure 2). 9. Confirm that the seat belt latch plate cannot slide past the button and it is held at shoulder height when the seatbelt is retracted. NOTE: When this incident occurs, both front driver's and passenger's seat belt "D" rings must be cleaned and "refurbished" (renewed) using the following procedural steps. Clean "D" Ring, Install Fluorine Resin Tape NOTE: For 1996-99 Pathfinders built before December, 1998, see bulletin NTB00-003 for additional front seat belt retractor assembly information. 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 5). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 5). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire (provided in the kit listed in the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin) under the seat belt, between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 6). Page 6498 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 29 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 5970 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3849 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2382 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 2087 7. Install distributor, aligning as shown in Figure 10. 8. Install vacuum hoses, electrical harnesses and connectors. Page 9235 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 670 EC-FRO2-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Response Monitoring) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0133) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 4906 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 2390 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2340 ^ Titania 02 sensors use the smaller 12 mm diameter tool: J-43897-12. 3. Make sure that the tool is clean of all debris from prior usage. 4. Liberally apply the anti-seize compound, specified in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, into the flutes (see Figure 1) of the thread repair tool. CAUTION: Only use the anti-seize material specified. Other materials may chemically damage the 02 sensor. 5. Carefully screw the thread repair tool into the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter by hand. It needs to be installed until the tool's taper is fully inserted within the internal thread of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. CAUTION: Ensure the tool goes in straight. 6. After the thread has been adequately started by hand, a tool such as a socket or wrench can be used to continue the removal of the material. ^ When only light removal of material is needed, screw the thread repair tool in until the cutting surface of the mating surface shave cylinder (see Figure 1) touches the sealing surface for the 02 sensor. Then turn it one full turn further. ^ When there is a lot of material to be removed, occasionally back off the tool to remove accumulated material from around the tool before continuing. CAUTION: Do not expect the tool to screw in to an absolute stop. The tool's spring and mating surface shave cylinder will rotate until the spring is completely compressed. 7. Wipe the threads of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter to remove any debris or anti-seize before replacing the 02 sensor. NOTE: If the 02 sensor could not be removed or there is permanent damage to the internal threads, it will be necessary to replace the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 8. Install the 02 sensor and confirm that there is no exhaust leak from the mating surface of the 02 sensor to the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. If there is leakage, then there may have been permanent damage to internal threads. This would require replacement of the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 9. Completely clean the anti-seize compound and metal debris from the tool to ready it for its next use. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9513 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Testing and Inspection Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Switch/Check Combination Switch Check Page 5630 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 3785 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6638 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 8528 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 2269 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1910 Water Pump and Thermostat Housing REMOVAL AND TIGHTENING SEQUENCES Intake Manifold, Exhaust Manifold and Throttle Body Page 3028 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 3765 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 5642 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Mass air flow sensor 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between terminal (54) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above check. 5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust. Page 5650 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 668 EC-FRO2/H-01 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Diagrams Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater (DTC: P0135) Circuit Connectors High Voltage Page 4071 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Locations Idle Up Control Valve: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 1425 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 6579 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1535 Page 9166 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 1738 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7165 4. Apply multipurpose grease to each bearing cone. 5. Pack grease seal lip with multipurpose grease, then install it into wheel hub with suitable drift. Page 6185 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 451 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Ignition - Distributor Rotor Replacement Ignition Rotor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Distributor Rotor Replacement Classification: EC97-002a Reference: NTB97-004a Date: May 19, 1999 DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR REPLACEMENT This amended version of NTB97-004 adds B14, D21, WD22, and L30 information to the Applied Vehicles section. Please discard all paper copies of NTB97-004. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1995-1999 Sentra (B14) - GA16DE Engine only 1995-1998 200SX (B14) GA16DE Engine only 1990-97 Truck (D21) - KA24 Engines only 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) KA24DE Engine only 1998-2000 Altima (L30) - All 2000 Xterra (WD22) - KA24DE Engine only SERVICE INFORMATION Distributor rotors are now available as replacement parts for the vehicles listed in the Applied Vehicles section of this bulletin. Order them as P/N 22157-4B000. CAUTION: The rotor hold-down screw securing the distributor rotor to the distributor shaft must be torqued to 32 +/- 3 in-lb (37 +/- 3 kg-cm). If not secured to the proper torque the rotor may come loose causing the engine to stop without warning. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1199 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 3249 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 634 ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 4390 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit EC-FRO2-01 Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Diagrams Front Oxygen Sensor (Circuit) (Front HO2S) (DTC: P0130) Circuit Connectors Heater Page 6352 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 4162 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. it measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 5944 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3271 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6095 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 9300 Dome Lamp: Connector Views MODELS WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS Interior Room Lamp (Part 1 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp (Part 2 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp Circuit Connectors MODELS WITHOUT POWER DOOR LOCKS Interior Room Lamp (Part 3 Of 3) Interior Room Lamp Circuit Connectors Page 258 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 7909 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 3763 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 279 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 8979 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 955 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7998 Axle Nut: Specifications Axle / Bearing Lock Nut TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Screws ................................................................................................................................. .................................. 49 - 69 Nm (36 - 51 ft. lbs.) Page 484 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7358 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Passenger Compartment (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6338 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 2419 Page 8976 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3971 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor COMPONENT INSPECTION Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor With CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "RR O2 SENSOR" as the monitor item with CONSULT. (3) Check "RR O2 SENSOR" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%. "RR O2 SENSOR" should be above 0.56V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" is +25%. "RR O2 SENSOR" should be below 0.54V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" Is -25%. OR Without CONSULT (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals (56) (sensor signal) and (32) (ECM ground). (3) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once. If the voltage is above 0.56V at step 3, step 4 is not necessary. (4) Check the voltage when racing up to 5,000 rpm under no load. Or keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), D position with "OD" OFF (A/T). The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once. Page 2550 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 746 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 8023 Wheel Hub (Locking): Specifications Page 6077 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1955 Piston Ring: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Block. Specifications Page 20 Engine Compartment Engine Compartment Page 3084 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4403 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the rear healed oxygen sensor heater corresponding to the engine speed. OPERATION Page 9236 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3264 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 5269 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 9488 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Absolute Pressure Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Exhaust Manifold: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Thread Cleaning and Other Precautions Classification: TE98-005 Reference: NTB98-089 Date: November 15, 1998 02 SENSOR THREAD REPAIR FOR EXHAUST TUBE, EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER APPLIED VEHICLE: All models with 02 sensors SERVICE INFORMATION When removing a front or rear 02 sensor, material may remain on the internal threads of the exhaust tube, catalytic converter, or exhaust manifold. Special service tools (see Figure 1) are available to clean the internal threads in such cases. This will minimize the need to replace these components. These required special tools will be mailed separately. Use this bulletin when replacing 02 sensors as part of the 1996 Maxima OBDII Campaign (NTB98-073) or whenever there is a need to clean 02 sensor threads. NOTE: This tool is not to be used for tapping threads. SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always follow these general guidelines when servicing 02 sensors. Do not apply severe shock to the sensor when installing it. Do not use an impact wrench for installing it. Discard any sensor that has been dropped. Never attempt to clean an 02 sensor by applying solvent to it. Anti-seize must only be applied to the threads, not the sensing element. 1. Remove the 02 sensor from the exhaust tube, exhaust manifold, or catalytic converter. 2. Select the correct thread repair tool based on the thread diameter of the removed 02 sensor (see Figure 1). ^ Zirconia 02 sensors use the 18 mm diameter tool: J-43897-18. Page 5711 Throttle Full Close Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-TP/SW-01 Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Circuit Diagrams Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 2356 Page 6570 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4638 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 4781 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 4471 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 560 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1434 Alignment: Specifications Caster GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 1°40' (1.67°) Nominal ...................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. 2°10' (2.17°) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 2°40' (2.67°) Left And Right Difference ............................................................................................................................................................ 0°45' (0.75°) or less Page 8868 Page 7949 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Technical Service Bulletin # 96-032 Date: 960417 Engine Controls - Idle, Base Idle & Timing, Startability Classification: EC96-004 Reference: NTB96-032 Date: April 17, 1996 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START OR IS HARD TO START APPLIED VEHICLE: All SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin has been developed to address complaints of an engine which cranks over normally, but is difficult to start or will not start at all. Service Procedure 1. Connect CONSULT. If the vehicle you are working with is not CONSULT compatible, connect a tachometer (digital readout if possible). 2. Start the engine (the accelerator may have to be opened and/or the fuel pump fuse removed during cranking to get the engine to start), and warm it to operating temperature. Note: If the engine will not start after performing the above procedure, clean and dry the spark plugs, and attempt to start the engine again. 3. Run the engine at 2000 rpm (no load) for two minutes. Then shut the engine off. 4. Check the oil level and correct if necessary (between the "L" and "H" marks on the dipstick). If the oil level is overfull and has a gasoline odor, change the oil and filter before performing this procedure. If the crankcase is overfull with oil, idle speed adjustment may be affected. 5. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS) connector. Now re-start the engine. Note: When the engine is in this condition (TPS disconnected), the IACV-AAC valve and the ignition timing are held in a "fixed" position, and the idle speed is called "base idle." If the engine stalls with the TPS disconnected, the base idle speed is adjusted too low. Temporarily increase the base idle speed by turning the adjusting screw on the IACV-AAC valve until the engine will idle. Note: On 1989-1994 Maxima's (J30) with VG30E engine the IACV-AAC valve is a "stepper motor" type valve. To set base idle on these vehicles, set the ECCS ECM mode screw fully "clockwise". This will close the IACV-AAC valve completely to allow base idle speed adjustment. Return the ECCS ECM mode screw fully counter-clockwise after setting the base idle (see step 9). 6. Rev the engine 2-3 times to 2000-3000 rpm, then allow it to idle (all accessories "off"). 7. Check the ignition timing with a timing light and adjust it to specification (if necessary). Page 8174 Change the filter/dryer (see Figure 2) when 3OOlbs of refrigerant (approximately 150 cars) has been recovered (display reads "CH-F") or sooner if the moisture indicator does not turn green during recycling. ACR4 Leak Check Check the ACR4 for leaks every 3 months or as specified by state or local laws. Weight Scale Platform Securing Screw Make sure the weight scale platform securing screw is properly tightened. Weight Scale Accuracy Check the weight scale accuracy at a minimum of every 3 months (or sooner if the scale is suspected to be inaccurate). Use the following procedure to check the scale accuracy. 1. Simultaneously press the "SHIFT/RESET" and "ENTER" buttons to get into the diagnostic mode (see Figure 3). 2. Press "6" on the key pad to display the approximate scale platform weight Page 6742 Ring Gear: Specifications Rear Differential Page 3695 Page 4049 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3861 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 6572 Ground Distribution Page 3472 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Replacement Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Replacement COMPONENTS WARNING: CLEAN BRAKE PADS WITH A VACUUM DUST COLLECTOR TO MINIMIZE THE HAZARD OF AIRBORNE MATERIALS. REMOVAL 1. Remove torque member fixing bolts and connecting bolt. 2. Remove brake hose retaining bolt. INSTALLATION 1. Install caliper assembly. 2. Install brake hose to caliper securely. Page 6712 1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris (see Figure 12). A. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 inch) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal debris is found, the radiator/oil cooler can be re-used. B. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter (see Figure 13), the oil-cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/oil cooler must be replaced. Final Inspection: After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components. Page 3065 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5769 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 473 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-CMPS-01 Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Circuit Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 6350 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7155 Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 2822 Ground Distribution Page 3220 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7711 Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications Model PB59K Power Steering Line Flare Nut ............................................................................................................................................... 39 - 51 Nm (29 - 38 ft. lbs.) Page 6011 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 944 Ground Distribution Page 1798 Disclaimer Page 683 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater COMPONENT INSPECTION Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater Check resistance between terminals (3) and (1). Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 ohms at 25°C (77°F) Check continuity between terminals (2) and (1), (3) and (2). Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the front heated oxygen sensor. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 7634 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 7027 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 6408 Ground Distribution Page 4171 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2548 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2616 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 672 EC-RRO2-01 Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Diagrams Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (High Voltage) (Rear HO2S) (DTC: P0140) Circuit Connectors Maximum Voltage Monitoring Page 5289 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2246 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Views Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 8921 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 6988 Main Shaft: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Transfer Case; Service and Repair; Transfer Case Overhaul. Page 3117 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4185 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Service and Repair Oil Pan: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and support it with safety stands. 2. Remove engine under cover. 3. Drain engine oil. 4. Remove front final drive together with differential mounting member. 5. Remove front suspension member. 6. Remove oil pan bolts. 7. Remove oil pan. Page 213 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ignition Coil & Power Transistor The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to the power transistor. The power transistor switches on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. As the primary circuit is turned on and off, the proper high voltage is induced in the coil secondary circuit. Engine - Timing Chain/Front Cover Revised Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 98-094 Date: 981115 Engine - Timing Chain/Front Cover Revised Procedure Classification: EM98-006 Reference: NTB98-094 Date: November 15, 1998 FRONTIER TIMING CHAIN/FRONT COVER REVISED SERVICE PROCEDURE APPLIED ENGINE: KA24DE PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the "Revision B" pages of the Nissan "1992-1999 Warranty Flat Rate Information Manual", Section "AG", Op Codes AG14AA, AG143A, AG144A, AG22AA, and AG24AA. You will note that the descriptions and Flat Rate Times applicable to the D22 vehicle for these Op Codes have been revised to reflect this new procedure. Also note that Op Codes AG5OAA and AG504A have been deleted. Service Information A revised service procedure for the engine front cover/timing chain has been adopted for the KA24DE. It is no longer recommended to remove the cylinder head when removing the timing chain/front cover(s). Utilize the following steps when servicing the front cover, timing chain, guides or tensioner(s). Caution ^ After removing the timing chain, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately or the valves will strike the piston heads. ^ When installing chain tensioners or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. ^ Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing the camshaft sprockets and the crankshaft pulley. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belts. ^ Please refer to the Service Manual for the correct tightening torque. Removal of Upper Timing Chain 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly, 2. Remove the spark plug wires. 3. Set # 1 piston at TDC on its compression stroke. 4. Remove vacuum hoses, electrical harness, connectors, and harness clamps. 5. Remove the power steering belt. 6. Remove the power steering pump and position it to the side. Remove the idler pulley and bracket as well. 7. Remove the rocker cover. 8. Remove camshaft sprocket cover. Page 1842 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 3744 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 3680 EGR Backpressure Transducer: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION EGRC-BPT Valve 1. Plug one of two ports of EGRC-BPT valve. 2. Vacuum from the other port and check leakage without applying any pressure from under EGR-BPT valve. Leakage should exist. Page 8994 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4943 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 4720 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS-01 Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Circuit Diagrams Throttle Position Sensor (DTC: P0120) Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 2292 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 5637 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1276 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5941 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2813 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3195 Throttle Full Close Switch: Connector Views Closed Throttle Position Switch (DTC: P0510) Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Connectors Page 947 Leak Detection Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1809 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Wheel Bearing - Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. - Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 4066 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 1658 Make sure the tank is properly positioned/seated (especially after moving the ACR4 machine) on the scale platform and that it does not touch surrounding components (such as the back bar, hoses, etc.). Also, make sure the weight scale platform securing screw is properly tightened. Residual Refrigerant Recover all residual refrigerant from the hoses before connection to the vehicle. Residual Refrigerant Oil Drain all refrigerant oil from the oil separator (see Figure 4) before recovering refrigerant. This prepares the oil separator to measure the amount of oil removed during the recovery process. Disturbing the ACR4 Machine Do not disturb or touch the ACR4 machine when it is recovering or recharging as this will upset the weight scale and cause the machine to record an inaccurate recovery amount and/or dispence an incorrect charge. Transfer All Refrigerant to Vehicle Use the following steps to ensure all of the refrigerant charge is transferred to the vehicle's A/C system. 1. When the display shows "CPL" (charge is complete), close the control panel high side valve (both control panel high and low side valves should now be closed). 2. Start the vehicle and let the A/C run until the gauge readings stabilize. Check for cold air at the vents. 3. With the compressor running, close the high side (red) coupler valve (on the end of the high side hose) and disconnect it from the vehicle. 4. Open the control panel high and low side valves. This will allow the residual refrigerant to be drawn into the vehicle's A/C system through the low (blue) hose. 5. Close the low side (blue) coupler valve (on the end of the low side hose) and disconnect it from the vehicle. NOTE: If your dealership purchases R134a in small, disposable (12 oz) cans, do not charge the vehicle's A/C system with the can directly. Transfer the refrigerant from the small can to the ACR4 refrigerant tank (see page 17 of the ACR4 Operating Instruction Manual). Charging the A/C system directly from the 12 oz refrigerant can (using a "can tap" gauge set) will not properly control the weight of refrigerant being transferred. This will result in an overcharge or undercharge condition and improper A/C performance. Page 6049 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1405 Page 4378 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 9543 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 9218 Brake Lamp: Connector Views Stop Lamp Circuit Connectors Page 4264 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1031 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Tank fuel temperature sensor Check resistance by heating with hot water as shown in the figure or a heat gun. If NG, replace tank fuel temperature sensor. Page 992 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2896 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 2656 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 3234 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 16 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 4368 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 3246 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 3530 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 2817 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 6404 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 4511 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 9224 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5075 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3750 Page 2197 Water Pump: Service and Repair CAUTION: When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belts. - Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. - After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester. REMOVAL 1. Drain coolant from engine. 2. Remove fan coupling with fan. 3. Remove power steering pump drive belt, generator drive belt and A/C compressor drive belt. 4. Remove water pump. INSPECTION - Check body assembly for rust or corrosion. - Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. INSTALLATION 1. Use a scraper to remove liquid gasket from water pump. - Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block. Page 7972 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 3047 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6154 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 8355 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for this incident. Claims to Nissan for the repair of this incident may be denied if the repairs are not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. Service Procedure NOTE: DO NOT REPLACE the front driver's or passenger's seat belt assemblies before first using the Service Procedure in this bulletin to: ^ Replace the missing/broken retaining button(s), and ^ Clean the "D" rings and install the fluorine resin tape on both seat belt assemblies. Replace Missing/Broken Retaining Button 1. Make sure the seat belt is not 'twisted' by sitting in the seat and latching the seat belt. If the belt is twisted, correct this before beginning button replacement. 2. Determine the original retaining button position. CAUTION: It is important that the replacement button be positioned on the seat belt exactly where the original button was placed at the factory. Page 6000 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 7101 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation The sensor unit consists of a gear-shaped sensor rotor and a sensor element. The element contains a bar magnet around which a coil is wound. The sensor is installed on the back of the brake rotor and the back of the rear brake drum. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a sine-wave pattern. The frequency and voltage increase(s) as the rotating speed increases. Page 6194 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 5277 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 584 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 1369 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 6962 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Locations Dome Lamp: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1013 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Locations Absolute Pressure Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 6425 Without Scan Tools (1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. (2) Perform test drive in "D" position (OD "ON") at least 20 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. Engine speed: Less than 2,150 rpm (Single cab model) Less than 2,300 rpm (King cab model) Vehicle speed: 76 - 100 km/h (47 - 62 MPH) (3) Stop the vehicle, turn ignition switch "OFF", wait at least 5 seconds and then turn "ON" (4) Perform "Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)" with ECM. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE COMPONENT INSPECTION Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve 1. Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3). Resistance: Approximately 25 Ohms [at 25° C (77° F)] 2. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 3. Supply the solenoid valve terminals (1) and (3) with battery voltage and check the solenoid valve operation. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve should be operated. 4. If NG, replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Page 6282 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3097 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 6042 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7387 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 2462 Ground Distribution Page 7078 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6014 Ground Distribution Page 2647 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2394 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 734 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 422 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 8303 SRS Component Parts Location Page 6213 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. * Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 7756 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-PST/SW-01 Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Diagrams Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 3622 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7555 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 6240 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7140 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 5538 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4286 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 6537 6. Disconnect the overdrive (O/D) switch connector located on the top of the steering column and remove it from the mounting bracket using a door trim removal tool. (see Figure 4). CAUTION: Be careful not to break the connector or the bracket. If the bracket is unavoidably broken, see Step 22 of this procedure. 7. Expose the clevis pin by sliding back the rubber boot from the base of the shifter lever (see Figure 5). Remove and retain the pin clip and the clevis pin. 8. Out the tie wrap that secures the overdrive switch wire to the main shifter pivot rod and remove the shift lever from the A/T shifter assembly (see Figure 5). NOTE: The shift lever, pin and clip will be reused. Page 1158 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3468 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 3224 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 6659 - Check each valve spring for damage and deformation. Also measure free length and outer diameter. - Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. Control Valves Inspection Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage. Assembly Page 286 Ground Distribution Page 2232 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1201 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 5199 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Description and Operation Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation CONTROL UNIT (Built-In ABS Actuator And Electric Unit) The control unit computes the wheel rotating speed by the signal current sent from the sensor. Then it supplies a DC current to the actuator solenoid valve. It also controls ON-OFF operation of the valve relay and motor relay. If any electrical malfunction should be detected in the system, the control unit causes the warning lamp to light up. In this condition, the ABS will be deactivated by the control unit, and the vehicle's brake system reverts to normal operation. Page 2400 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 3697 Page 593 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3730 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6158 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7545 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. Page 1130 Ground Distribution Page 8593 M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 7787 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT Refer to the illustrations when servicing, noting the following: 1. Remove air bag module and spiral cable. Refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 2. Disconnect horn connector and remove steering wheel nut. 3. Remove steering wheel using steering wheel puller tool No. ST27180001, or equivalent. Page 7074 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5987 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Ballast Resistor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 4030 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 9132 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 6127 Ground Distribution Page 5524 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3347 Knock Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-KS-01 Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Circuit Diagrams Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 5110 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Specifications Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bracket Mounting Bolts .......................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 4 Nm (26 - 35 inch lbs.) Reservoir Tubes To Hoses .......................................................................................................................................... 2.5 - 3.4 Nm (21.7 - 30.4 inch lbs.) Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 495 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2617 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3423 7. Determine replacement adjusting shim size as follows. a. Using a micrometer determine thickness of removed shim. b. Calculate thickness of new adjusting shim so valve clearance comes within specified values. R = Thickness of removed shim N = Thickness of new shim M = Measured valve clearance Intake & Exhaust: N = R + [M - 0.37 mm (0.0146 inch)] Shims are available in thicknesses from 1.96 mm (0.0772 inch) to 2.68 mm (0.1055 in), in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch). c. Select new shim with thickness as close as possible to calculated value. 8. Install new shim using a suitable tool. - Install with the surface on which the thickness is stamped facing down. 9. Place Tool (A) as mentioned in steps 2 and 3. 10. Remove Tool (B). 11. Remove Tool (A). 12. Recheck valve clearance. Page 8465 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Description and Operation Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch The vehicle is equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch which can be operated by the customer. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the passenger air bag is enabled and could inflate in a frontal collision. When the switch is turned to the OFF position, the passenger air bag is disabled and will not inflate in a frontal collision. After turning the ignition switch ON, a passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator illuminates on the instrument panel for bulb check. The indicator will stay lit if the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the OFF position. If the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the ON position, the indicator will turn off after about 7 seconds. After SRS maintenance or repair, make sure the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the same position (ON or OFF) as when the vehicle arrived for service. Activation / Deactivation Passenger Air Bag If the passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator operation does not correspond to ON/OFF operation of the passenger air bag deactivation switch, perform self-diagnoses for SRS and repair according to the self-diagnostic failure. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". If no self-diagnostic failure is detected, replace the passenger air bag deactivation switch including the key cylinder. Page 386 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 606 Ground Distribution Page 2527 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 6706 Chart A & B Cooler Inlet And Outlet Locations Cooler Cleaning (in radiator) CAUTION: You must refer to Charts A and B to determine the location of the oil cooler inlet and outlet hoses for the vehicle your working on. If these hoses are not identified correctly, debris may be left in the cooler and transmission damage may occur. 1. Place an oil drain pan under the automatic transmission cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses. Page 5721 Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications Completely Closed Approx. 0.5 K ohms at 77 deg F Partially Open 0.5 - 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Comqletely Open Approx. 4.0 K ohms at 77 deg F Page 5673 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 7059 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7062 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 6211 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) (DTC: P0325) Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Connectors Page 1344 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 9223 Brake Light Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 1095 Ground Distribution Page 4846 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Remove the EVAP canister. 3. Remove the hose between the EVAP vent control valve and the crossframe member (the largest diameter hose in the rearward position). 4. Check the EVAP control valve. Air should pass through the valve passage when voltage is not applied. A. Apply battery voltage to the valve and make sure the air passage closes (see Figure 1). B. Disconnect the battery voltage and make sure the air passage opens again and does not stick closed. C. Look inside the valve air passage and make sure there is no corrosion/rust on the metal shaft. 5. Check the EVAP canister. A. Check that no liquid will drain from the EVAP canister. B. Weigh the canister (with the vent control valve). The weight should be less than 4 lbs. 6. If either the EVAP vent control valve or the EVAP canister fail one or more of these checks, replace both the vent control valve and the canister (see Parts Information). Installation of the Breather Tube Kit 1. Remove the bedliner (if so equipped) 2. Drill one 25 mm (1 inch) hole in the floor of the vehicle bed at the location shown (see Figure 2). Specifications Power Steering Pressure Switch: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................................... .............................. 1.7 - 2.3 Nm (15 - 20 inch lbs.) Page 4182 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 3804 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 4787 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 4319 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 5982 Ignition Coil: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 6420 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 6332 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 2958 indications with no drop-outs or spikes. Note: A 2-3 mph (3-5 kph) difference between the CONSULT display and the speedometer is normal. 4. a) If the speedometer and speed sensor values are 0K, proceed to # 5. b) If the speedometer and speed sensor data are erratic, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to service manual for Diagnosis information. 5. Check the existing ECM part number in the vehicle that is listed either on the CONSULT freeze frame data or checked by CONSULT ECM Part Number function (see Figure 1). 6. If existing Part Number is one of those listed in Table 1, install the appropriate P/N listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 285 Ground Distribution Page 1687 Comments regarding liquid tanks: ^ For R-134a, the sight glass has been deleted. Refer to the service procedures section of this bulletin for additional information regarding the refrigerant charge determination. Pressure switches are not interchangeable between R-12 and R-134a systems. Page 2454 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 3888 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 8565 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2233 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5556 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Specifications Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE DATA SNAP RING Page 8596 Audio (Part 2 Of 2) Premium Audio System Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 651 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 9565 Tail Lamp: Connector Views Parking, License And Tail Lamps (Part 1 Of 2) Parking, License, And Tail Lamps (Part 2 Of 2) Parking, License and Tail Lamps Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 2648 Ground Distribution Page 508 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Views Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 4119 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 4370 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Air Bag Module - Air Bag Warning Lamp ON Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag Module - Air Bag Warning Lamp ON Classification: RS99-007A Reference: NTB99-065A Date: December 5, 2000 FRONTIER AND XTERRA ASSIST AIR BAG MODULE OPEN CIRCUIT ATTENTION: This bulletin amends NTB99-065. Information has been added to the Service Information and Claims Information sections. Please discard all paper copies of NTB99-065. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1998-2000 Frontier (D22) - Including Crew Cab 2000 Xterra (WD22) SERVICE INFORMATION If the air bag indicator light on a 1998-2000 Frontier or 2000 Xterra remains illuminated during normal driving conditions and the CONSULT screen indicates "Assist A/B Module [Open]," use the following Service Procedure to verify and repair the condition. NOTE: This is the only authorized repair for this incident. DO NOT REPLACE the passenger air bag module. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the air bag light is on. 2. Connect CONSULT to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch "ON". 4. Select "START" and "AIR BAG". 5. Check the Current and Past SELF-DIAG. Modes for trouble codes: A. If "Assist A/B Module [Open]" is displayed, perform the procedure provided in Steps 6 through 18, below. B. If any other diagnostic trouble code is displayed, diagnose and repair as outlined in the appropriate Service Manual. 6. Record the radio presets. 7. Disconnect both cables of the vehicle battery. Allow the vehicle to sit with the battery disconnected for at least 3 minutes before performing any further steps in the procedure. WARNING: For approximately 3 minutes after the battery cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag to deploy. Do not work on any air bag system connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. 8. Remove the glove box assembly. 9. Remove the air bag connector clip from the housing on top of the glove box lid. Page 5850 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6824 Page 8767 The charts identify 1998 Nissan paint codes, New Cross Link Clear Coat (NCLC) usage, color names and refinish paint codes for major automotive paint manufacturers. For approved NCLC clear coat products and procedures, refer to Nissan Bulletin PI95-004, dated March 8, 1995 Page 8718 Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Ballast Resistor: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6007 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 62 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 929 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Locations Throttle Full Close Switch: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 3666 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 1479 Page 8581 Ground Distribution Page 5202 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9411 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 3292 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7602 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 7681 Page 9524 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 7635 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 6825 Page 7578 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Page 4709 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5088 Leak Detection Solenoid: Connector Views Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (DTC: P1490) Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 4578 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7600 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 7804 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Lower Ball Joint UPPER AND LOWER BALL JOINT REPLACEMENT - Separate knuckle spindle from upper and lower links. Refer to Steering Knuckle. INSPECTION - Check joints for play. If ball is worn and play in axial direction is excessive or joint is hard to swing, replace.as a upper link or lower link. Axial end play "C": Upper link = 0 mm (0 inch) Lower link (2WD) = 1.3 mm (0.051 inch) or less (4WD) = 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less - Check dust cover for damage. Replace dust cover and dust cover clamp if necessary. Page 5939 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 4915 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 856 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Specifications Power Steering Pressure Switch: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................................... .............................. 1.7 - 2.3 Nm (15 - 20 inch lbs.) Page 4708 Ground Distribution Page 9544 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7175 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 1678 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT TYPE REFRIGERANT TYPE HFC-134 (R134a) Locations Alarm Horn: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1951 Piston Pin: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Block. Page 6284 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5347 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 9304 Dome Lamp: Description and Operation MODELS WITH POWER DOOR LOCKS Power supply and ground Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 30 A fusible link (Letter [f], located in the fuse and fusible link box) ^ to circuit breaker terminal (1) ^ through circuit breaker terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (1). Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [28], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to key switch terminal (1). Power is supplied at all times: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [26], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to room lamp terminal (+). When the key is inserted into ignition key cylinder, power is supplied: ^ from key switch terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (24). With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ^ through 7.5 A fuse [No. [5], located in the fuse block (J/B)] ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (11). Ground is supplied: ^ through body grounds (M14) and (M68) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (10). When the LH door is opened, ground is supplied: ^ from door switch LH terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (15). When the RH door is opened, ground is supplied: ^ from door switch RH terminal (1) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (35). When the LH door is unlocked, the smart entrance control unit receives a ground signal: ^ through body grounds (M14) and (M68) ^ to door unlock sensor terminal (4) ^ from door unlock sensor terminal (2) ^ to smart entrance control unit terminal (12). When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the smart entrance control unit, ground is supplied: ^ through smart entrance control unit terminal (9) ^ to room lamp terminal (SW). With power and ground supplied, the interior room lamp illuminates. Switch operation When the room lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied: ^ through body grounds (M14) and (M68) ^ to room lamp terminal (-). With power and ground supplied, the room lamp turns ON and remains ON until the room lamp switch is turned to OFF or turned to the "DOOR" position and the doors are closed. Interior room lamp timer operation When the room lamp switch is in the "DOOR" position, the smart entrance control unit keeps the interior room lamp illuminated for about 30 seconds when: ^ LH door is unlocked ^ key is removed from ignition key cylinder while driver's door is closed ^ driver's door is opened and then closed while ignition switch is not in the ON position. Page 1725 Fuse: Locations Fuse ID Power Supply Routing: Schematic (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6559 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2502 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 1436 Alignment: Specifications Camber GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 0°06' (0.10°) Nominal ...................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. 0°36' (0.60°) Maximum ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 1°06' (1.10°) Left And Right Difference ............................................................................................................................................................ 0°45' (0.75°) or less Caster GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Allowable Limit: Minimum .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 1°40' (1.67°) Nominal ...................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. 2°10' (2.17°) Page 3455 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 7018 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 3072 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Specifications Page 7314 JIS = Japan Industrial Standard, used for Japan produced batteries CCA = Cold Cranking Amps, standard for North American produced batteries IMPORTANT: ^ JIS batteries have different testing specifications than CCA batteries. ^ If you must use the GR-8 Battery Tester in a mode other than MODEL mode, JIS Mode MUST ALWAYS BE USED for JIS batteries otherwise an incorrect result will occur. NEVER test a JIS battery using the CCA test in the GR-8; the test software in the GR-8 is different for JIS and CCA modes. ANY CCA value you may have for a JIS-type battery is inaccurate for testing purposes. ^ ALWAYS test with the GR-8 using the MODEL mode (if available). ^ Selecting MODEL and vehicle type will automatically select the proper JIS or CCA value for the Original Equipment battery. ^ If the applicable vehicle is not listed, update the GR-8 to make sure it has the most recent data package. (1) (1) To run the Midtronics Update Wizard for the GR-8 tester in CONSULT III: ^ Make sure the cables from the GR-8 to the multitasker are connected and both units are turned on. ^ Click on the ASIST icon. ^ Click on INFO. Tool Box. ^ Select Midtronics GR-8. ^ Midtronics Update Wizard file screen displays. ^ Click on Change MUP File. ^ The Select a MUP file window displays with the path: C:\ProgramFiles\Midtronics\MUW. ^ Select 192-725C and click OK. ^ Click on next and follow the prompts on the Midtronics Update Wizard screen. If the applicable vehicle still is not listed: 1) Determine which type of battery (CCA or JIS) is installed in the vehicle. See below for descriptions of each battery. 2) Select CCA or JIS in the GR-8 based on the type of battery installed. See below for more information. Determine the Battery Type Batteries with JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) Number Page 3268 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 8124 Page 7373 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Air Bleeder Screw 5 - 7 ft.lb Page 1212 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 909 Ground Distribution Page 4098 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Adjustment Procedure Revised Classification: EC99-005b Reference: NTB99-053b Date: January 22, 2002 NISSAN REVISED TPS ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE This bulletin amends NTB99-053a. The Service Information and Service Procedure has been revised. In addition, TPS Connector tool (Kent-Moore # J45178) information has been included. Please discard all copies of NTB99-053a. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 1995-1998 Maxima (A32) 1996-1998 Pathfinder (R50) 1995-1998 240SX (S14) 1995-1998 Sentra/200SX (B14) w/GA16 & SR20 engines 1996-1997 Truck (D21) 1998 Frontier (D22) 1995-1997 Altima (U13) 1998 Altima (L30) 1996-1998 Quest (V40) SERVICE INFORMATION The adjustment procedure for the throttle position sensor (TPS) has been revised and standardized for all the Applied Vehicles. ^ The TPS contains a closed throttle position switch (CTPS) and a variable output throttle position sensor. ^ This procedure uses the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) status (ON or OFF) instead of the throttle position sensor (variable output voltage) to adjust the TPS. ^ Incorrect adjustment of the CTPS may cause one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to be displayed: P1447, P0120, P0510, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P1705. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check fast idle cam (FIC) function, if equipped (refer to appropriate Service Manual). When finished, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and the fast idle cam (if equipped) has released. Then turn the engine "OFF". 2. Disconnect the harness connector (see Figure 1) from the closed throttle position switch (CTPS) position of the throttle position sensor (TPS). 3. Connect an ohmmeter across the terminals for the closed throttle position switch (CTPS). Page 9168 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. On-Vehicle Inspection Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection On-Vehicle Inspection PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION If vibration is present at high speed, inspect propeller shaft runout first. 1. Raise rear end of vehicle until wheels are clear of the ground. 2. Measure propeller shaft runout at several points along propeller shaft by rotating final drive companion flange using hands. 3. If runout exceeds specifications, disconnect propeller shaft at final drive companion flange. Rotate companion flange 180 degrees, then reconnect propeller shaft. Runout limit: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) 4. Check runout again. If runout still exceeds the limit, replace propeller shaft assembly. 5. Perform road test. APPEARANCE CHECKING - Inspect propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks and replace as necessary. - Check center bearing for noise or damage and replace as necessary. Page 3104 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 7153 Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - On-Car Rotor Refinishing Classification: BR04-007 Reference: NTB04-094 Date: August 20, 2004 NISSAN: ON-CAR BRAKE ROTOR RESURFACING APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan If YOU CONFIRM: A vehicle needs to have the brake rotors resurfaced (front or rear), ACTION: Use the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe to perform brake rotor resurfacing and follow the tips listed in this bulletin. ^ The ProCut(TM) PFM Series brake lathe has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing. ^ The ProCut(TM) PFM Series brake lathe can be ordered from TECH-MATE at 1-800-662-2001. ^ ProCut(TM) technical support or service can be obtained by calling 1-800-543-6618. NOTE: Brake rotors may need to be resurfaced during routine brake repair or for brake "Judder" incidents. ^ Brake judder: A brake pedal pulsation and/or steering wheel shimmy when braking that occurs when there is too much thickness variation of the brake rotors (see NTB00-033). TIPS FOR USING THE PROCUT(TM) PFM SERIES ON-CAR BRAKE LATHE ^ Read and follow all instructions contained in the Technical Manual provided with your ProCut(TM) equipment. ^ The ProCut(TM) brake lathe also comes with an instructional video that can be used as a training aid. ^ Additional training is available from your local ProCut(TM) representative by calling 1-800-543-6618. A. Make sure the cutting tips are sharp, in good condition and installed "right-side" up. ^ Make sure to use ProCut(TM) brand tips. ^ The cutting tip "UP" side has a groove or letters. NOTE: A tip mounted upside-down will produce a surface finish that looks like an old LP record. ^ Each cutting tip has three cutting corners. Rotate or replace the tip as needed. NOTE: You should get at least 7 cuts per corner. However, tip life is affected by variables such as rust or ridges. In order to determine when to rotate tips, monitor the rotor finish. If the rotor finish begins to look inconsistent or feels rough to the touch, tips should be rotated or replaced. Tips that are chipped or cracked should never be used. Page 4604 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Connector Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (DTC: P0500) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 2867 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 5738 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 9130 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 4534 HORN .................................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... Horn IATS ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGN/SG .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Ignition Signal ILL ........................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. Illumination INJECT ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................... Injector INT/L ............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Spot Lamp KS ........................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Knock Sensor LKUP .................................. .................................................................................................................................. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve MAFS .............................................................................................. ................................................................................................... Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN ............ .......................................................................................................................................................... Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER ................................................................................................................................................. Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL ............................................................ .................................................................................................................... MIL and Data Link Connectors MIRROR ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Door Mirror MULTI ............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... Multi-remote Control System PGC/V .............................................................................................................................................. EVAP canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PNP/SW ................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ Neutral Position Switch POWER ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... Power Supply Routing PRE/SE ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PST/SW .................................................................................................................................. ....................................... Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ROOM/L ............................................ ................................................................................................................................................... Interior Room Lamp RRO2 .................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor RRO2/H ......................... ................................................................................................................................................ Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater S/SIG ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Start Signal SHIFT ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... A/T Shift Lock System SROOF .................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Sunroof SRS ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... Supplemental Restraint System START ........................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. Starting System STOP/L ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Stop Lamp SW/V ............................................................... ............................................................................................................ MAP/BARO Switch Solenoid Valve TAIL/L ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................... Parking, License, and Tail Lamps TFTS ...................................................... ............................................................................................................................... Tank Fuel Temperature Sensor THEFT ............................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Theft Warning System TP/SW ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Throttle Position Switch TPS .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Throttle Position Sensor TURN .................. .................................................................................................................................................. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VENT/V ....................................................................................... ................................................................................. EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VSS ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Vehicle Speed Sensor WARN ................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... Warning Lamps WINDOW ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Power Window WIPER ............................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Wiper and Washer Diagram Instructions FINDING ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Electrical diagrams can be found by selecting the specific component or by selecting diagrams at vehicle level. REFERENCED DIAGRAMS In many instances electrical diagrams will refer you to another electrical diagram to complete the circuit. These referenced electrical diagrams can be found at vehicle level under "Diagrams". DIAGRAM IDENTIFICATION The referenced electrical diagrams are displayed by system: AT-DIAGRAMS...............Automatic Transmission BR-DIAGRAMS...............Brake System EC-DIAGRAMS...............Engine Control System EL-DIAGRAMS...............Electrical System HA-DIAGRAMS...............Heater And Air Conditioner RS-DIAGRAMS...............Restraint System Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if approached logically. Before beginning, it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the Page 2771 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 7788 ^ For installation, refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. Page 4930 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Electrical Diagrams EC-PGC/V-01 Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve (DTC: P0443) Circuit Diagram Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve (DTC: P0443) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 5042 Ground Distribution Page 1142 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (DTC: P0340) Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) Circuit Connectors Page 8180 ^ Do not introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component, because contamination will occur. ^ R-134a in the presence of oxygen and under pressure may form a combustible mixture. Therefore, never introduce compressed air into any R-134a container, cylinder, A/C component, recover/recycle equipment, or other service equipment. This includes "empty" containers. Refrigerant Terminology Please use the correct name or names when specifying refrigerants. The guidelines are listed below: ^ Freon --> is a registered trademark of DuPont, and should only be used if referring to DuPont R-12. ^ DuPont's trade name for R-134a (automotive use) is Suva-->Trans A/C. ^ When referring to refrigerants, the terms Freon-->and Suva--> should not be used as a general reference. The proper terms are R-12 and R-134a Comments regarding refrigerants: ^ R-12 and R-134a are not compatible with each other and should never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. ^ R-134a for automotive use has a special tank fitting size (1/2" - 16 ACME) which is compatible with automotive service equipment ^ When purchasing R-134a, be certain that the fitting size on the tank is 1/2" - 16 ACME. This thread size is easy to recognize by the square thread, as shown. ^ Although R-134a has no ozone depletion potential (ODP), it does have a slight global warming potential (GWP). Due to this slight GWP, as well as its high cost, venting of R-134a into the air is not recommended. ^ Recovery/recycling of R-134a will be required by U.S. Federal Law, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990. Page 6096 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 6292 Ground Distribution Page 8445 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 4381 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1257 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 9203 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 573 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 8295 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Description and Operation Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Switch The vehicle is equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch which can be operated by the customer. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the passenger air bag is enabled and could inflate in a frontal collision. When the switch is turned to the OFF position, the passenger air bag is disabled and will not inflate in a frontal collision. After turning the ignition switch ON, a passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator illuminates on the instrument panel for bulb check. The indicator will stay lit if the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the OFF position. If the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the ON position, the indicator will turn off after about 7 seconds. After SRS maintenance or repair, make sure the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the same position (ON or OFF) as when the vehicle arrived for service. Activation / Deactivation Passenger Air Bag If the passenger air bag deactivation switch indicator operation does not correspond to ON/OFF operation of the passenger air bag deactivation switch, perform self-diagnoses for SRS and repair according to the self-diagnostic failure. Refer to "SRS Operation Check". If no self-diagnostic failure is detected, replace the passenger air bag deactivation switch including the key cylinder. Page 5923 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6120 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 2230 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. M/T - Clutch Operating Cylinder Service Information Clutch Slave Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Operating Cylinder Service Information Classification: MT95-003 Reference: NTB95-114 Date: December 6, 1995 CLUTCH OPERATING CYLINDER - DUAL CUP PISTON SEAL ARRANGEMENT SERVICE INFORMATION Figure 1 The piston cup for the clutch operating cylinder has been changed from a single cup to a dual cup. The parts are interchangeable with a piston kit (piston assembly, piston spring and dust cover), see Figure 1. Please update the CL section of your service manuals to show the dual cup piston seal arrangement. Please refer to your microfiche parts catalog for the appropriate vehicle and part number. Page 4433 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 6956 Ground Distribution Page 6568 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Specified amount ................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 10.375 pts. (4.9 Liters) Page 4947 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ^ The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. ^ The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Work Flow Chart Page 1124 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 7810 Page 3743 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 1996 Page 7991 10. Measure starting force "A" at wheel hub bolt. 11. Install lock washer by tightening the lock nut within 15 to 30 degrees. 12. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions to seat wheel bearing correctly. 13. Measure starting force "B" at wheel hub bolt. Refer to step 10. 14. Wheel bearing preload "C" can be calculated as shown below. C = B - A Wheel bearing preload "C": 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) 15. Repeat steps 3 through 14 until correct axial end play and wheel bearing preload are obtained. 16. Tighten screws to 1.2 - 1.8 Nm (10.4 - 15.6 inch lbs.). 17. Install free running hub. Page 1843 Wheel Hub (Locking): Specifications Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 6710 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible. Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the air cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the air cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds (Point A, Figure 8). 5. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the air cooler Outlet hose (see Point B, Figure 9). 6. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of the air cooler Outlet hose. 7. Blow compressed air regulated to 5-9 kg/sq.cm (70 - 130 PSI) through the air cooler Outlet hose to force any remaining oil or cleaner through the air cooler and out of the air cooler Inlet hose (see Point A, Figure 9). 8. Proceed with Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles), below. Diagnosis Procedure (All Vehicles) You will be taking a sample of the debris to determine if the radiator/oil cooler must be replaced. CAUTION: You must refer to Charts A and B to determine the location of the Inlet and Outlet hoses for the oil cooler in the radiator of the vehicle you are working on. If you do not identify the Inlet and Outlet hoses correctly, debris may be left inside the "in radiator" cooler and transmission damage may occur. NOTE: Failure to clean the exterior of the Cooler Inlet hose properly may lead to inaccurate debris identification. 1. Place an oil drain pan under the automatic transmission "in radiator" cooler Inlet and Outlet hoses. 2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler Inlet hose. 3. Insert the "extension adapter hose" from a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the Outlet hose of the oil cooler in the radiator (see Figure 4). CAUTION: ^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ^ Spray Cooler Cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ^ Do not breath vapors or mist from spray. 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler Outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler Inlet hose for 5 seconds. NOTE: For Quest vehicles (V40/V41 Models); Page 7012 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 141 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 4062 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 1741 Fusible Link: Diagrams Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: ^ If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of problem. ^ Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Adjustments Neutral Safety Switch: Adjustments 1. Remove control linkage and manual lever from manual shaft. 2. Set manual shaft in "N" position. 3. Loosen inhibitor switch fixing bolts. 4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both inhibitor switch and manual as near vertical as possible. 5. Tighten inhibitor switch fixing bolts. 6. Remove pin. 7. Reinstall any part removed. 8. Adjust control linkage. Refer to Transmission and Drivetrain. 9. Check continuity of inhibitor switch. Page 3205 11. Using CONSULT-II select ENGINE, DATA MONITOR (Manual trigger), Selections From Menu, CLSD THL/P SW, and Enter. 12. Stop engine (turn ignition switch "OFF"). 13. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least five seconds. 14. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least ten seconds. 15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for 1 to 16 times until CLSD THL/P SW in CONSULT-II changes to "ON". Page 1211 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 586 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake air temperature sensor Check resistance as shown in the figure. If NG, replace intake air temperature sensor. Page 136 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 7224 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid DOT 3. ^ Always keep fluid level higher than minimum line on reservoir tank. ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. CHANGING BRAKE FLUID 1. Clean inside of reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to each air bleeder valve. 3. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. 4. Refill until brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to refill brake fluid. Refer to Bleeding Brake System. Page 6279 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 6287 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 6810 Axle Nut: Specifications Axle / Bearing Lock Nut TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Mounting Screws ................................................................................................................................. .................................. 49 - 69 Nm (36 - 51 ft. lbs.) Page 7300 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear REPLACEMENT Refer to the illustration when servicing Page 387 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 5736 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 2596 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 501 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 850 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6965 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Locations Fuse Block: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccurate Classification: EL99-011 Reference: NTB99-064 Date: September 21, 1999 1998-99 FRONTIER FUEL GAUGE INACCURATE APPLIED VEHICLE: 1998-99 Frontier (D22) APPLIED DATE: See note under Service Information APPLIED ENGINE #: KA24DE only SERVICE INFORMATION If the fuel gauge on a 1998-99 Frontier exhibits the symptoms listed below (indicated by bullet points), the cause may be wire harness to body ground contact points, the fuel sender (in the fuel tank) or the unified control meter (contained in the speedometer assembly). NOTE: The wire harness to body ground and fuel sender conditions only apply to vehicles built before September 1, 1999. The unified control meter condition only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. ^ Fuel gauge indicates less than full after the fuel tank is filled. ^ Fuel gauge moves down rapidly to 7/8 or 3/4 after the fuel tank is filled. Use the following service procedure to repair the vehicle if these incidents occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm the incidents occur as described above. A. If the incidents occur, proceed with step 2. B. If the incidents do not occur, this bulletin does not apply. 2. Remove the machine bolt from body ground M68 (located behind the passenger side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and the body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 1). Reinstall the bolt carefully to avoid damaging the threads. A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 4431 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 5091 Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister. The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from being applied to the fuel tank. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the fuel tank. Page 9396 Low Beam If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check aiming. Use the aiming chart shown in the figure. ^ Upper edge and left edge of high intensity zone should be within the range shown at left. Adjust headlamps accordingly. ^ Dotted lines in illustration show center of headlamp. "H": Horizontal center line of headlamps "WL": Distance between each Headlamp center Page 5114 Ground Distribution Wire Color Code Identification B: Black BR: Brown CH: Dark Brown DG: Dark Green G: Green GY: Grey L: Blue LG: Light Green OR: Orange P: Pink PU: Purple R: Red SB: Sky Blue W: White Y: Yellow When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White stripe. Page 2247 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Diagrams EC-ECTS-01 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Circuit Diagrams Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (DTC: P0115) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) (Circuit) Circuit Connectors Page 39 Passenger Compartment (Part 2 Of 2) Passenger Compartment Page 814 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 7013 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 3314 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) 1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector. 2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Resistance: Approximately 166.5 - 203.5 ohms [at 20°C (68°F)] If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). Page 7975 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Sensors and Switches - Engine. Testing and Inspection Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Page 7973 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 108 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 5744 The flowchart indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Use the flowchart after locating probable causes of a problem following the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check. If you must check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected properly. Key to Symbol Signifying Measurements or Procedures Key To Symbols Signifying Measurements Or Procedures Page 9037 NOTE: Do not over-tighten the machine bolt when reinstalling it. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw from body ground M14 (located behind the driver's side kick panel) and clean the contact surfaces of the ground wire eyelet and body panel as necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 2). Reinstall the screw carefully to avoid damaging the threads. NOTE: If the body threads are stripped, install a slightly larger self-tapping screw to secure the body ground wire eyelet. 4. Replace the fuel sender located in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel sending unit can be accessed by either removing the fuel tank from the bottom of the vehicle or removing the truck bed from the top of the vehicle. Before removing the bed, make sure there is sufficient space around the vehicle to safely remove and store the bed. If the fuel tank is removed, refer to the FE section in the appropriate service manual for instruction on removing the fuel tank/fuel sender. NOTE: The following step (step # 5) only applies to vehicles built before January 1, 1999. 5. Replace the speedometer assembly*. Refer to the BT section in the appropriate service manual. * The speedometer assembly includes the unified control meter, which controls the fuel gauge, speedometer, engine temperature gauge, odometer and tachometer (it equipped). NOTE: Conform to local laws regarding speedometer/odometer replacement. A new speedometer/unified control meter with the odometer set to the correct mileage may be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: The speedometer assemblies listed above must be ordered as described in Claims Bulletin WB/98-017. Page 891 EGR Temperature Sensor: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Sample Diagram Information GI-EXAMPLE-02 Sample/Wiring Diagram Page 1279 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2682 Relationship Between Open/Short (high Resistance) Circuit And The ECM Pin Control: Case 2 Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn on. Therefore, the Control Unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. if possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The sections is broken into the six following topics; ^ Vehicle vibration ^ Heat sensitive ^ Freezing ^ Water intrusion ^ Electrical load ^ Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Connectors & harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT: Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Page 4268 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) (DTC: P0335) Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) Circuit Connectors Page 579 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Locations Throttle Full Close Switch: Locations ECCS Component Parts Location ECCS Component Parts Location Page 8600 Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Audio Antenna Fender antenna replacement ^ Removal 1. Remove one screw securing fender antenna assembly. 2. Disconnect fender antenna cable connector. 3. Remove the fender antenna assembly. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger With Consult 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to make sure that fuel pressure is released. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". OR Without Consult 1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and reconnect fuel pump fuse. Page 8815 Finish Kare products are marketed by mobile distributors which will deliver the product directly to your dealership. If a Finish Kare distributor is not located in your area, Finish Kare can be contacted at the number above for direct shipment from their national office. Page 8974 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 5574 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Suspension - Strut Leak Guideline Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Strut Leak Guideline Classification: FA99-001 Reference: NTB99-001 NISSAN VEHICLE STRUT REPLACEMENT GUIDELINES Date: February 15, 1999 APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1990-2000 Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin provides information to correctly identify leaking struts that qualify for replacement under warranty. Use this bulletin to accurately diagnose a leaking strut, which should be replaced. This bulletin also provides information to correctly identify a strut which has slight oil seepage, a condition which is considered normal, does not affect the strut's operation or performance and does not require replacement. SERVICE PROCEDURE Strut leaks are caused by deterioration of the oil seal due to wear, internal contamination, or external contamination (i.e. outside dust or anti corrosion spray entry). These factors can affect the strut seal mechanism and result in a gross oil leak. In such an instance, the strut needs to be replaced. NOTE: If strut leakage is diagnosed in one strut, do not automatically replace struts on both sides. Replace the leaking strut only. Strut seepage occurs as a thin layer of oil sticks to the strut's shaft and passes through the seal. A very small amount of oil can escape and stain the upper exterior of the strut. The amount of oil seepage present on the strut can be affected by ambient temperature variations and driving conditions (extreme hot or cold weather or rough road conditions can increase the amount of seepage). Seepage is considered a normal condition since it does not affect the operation and performance of the strut. Use the following information to identify strut leakage versus strut seepage: The following criteria can also be applied to shock absorbers. 1. Strut Leakage - Strut Needs To Be Replaced: Page 3439 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 5568 Ground Distribution Page 7320 5) Re-install the cell plugs. 6) Check that the terminal connections are tight. Clean and tighten the connections as needed. NOTES: ^ If it is difficult to see the electrolyte level on the front of the battery case, follow steps 1 through 5 under "Batteries With Black Cases". ^ For optimum performance and battery life, fill all cells to the "Upper Level" mark. ^ If you remove the battery cables to clean the terminals, record the radio pre-sets before removing. Re-set the radio pre-sets and the clock after cables are reinstalled. CAUTIONS: ^ Always use distilled water when adjusting battery fluid levels. DO NOT use tap water or electrolyte (acid). ^ DO NOT overfill the battery cells. Page 8182 ^ The graph on the following page shows that PAG oil left open to air (e.g. in an unsealed container) will absorb 2% moisture (by weight) in 120 hours (5 days). ^ PAG containers, and any A/C component which contains PAG oil (such as the compressor) should remain tightly capped and sealed until ready for use. ^ If you believe that a container of PAG oil may not have been adequately re-sealed after opening, dispose of the oil properly and use oil from a new sealed container. ^ When installing or servicing an A/C system, the refrigerant tube and hose connections should be sealed (all connections made and tightened to specification) without delay. ^ The above precautions will keep the absorption of moisture into the system to a minimum. Using moisture saturated PAG oil in R-134a systems may lead to the formation of acids and related system damage or failure. ^ Do not allow refrigerant oil (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S) to contact styrofoam, as the lubricant will damage this material. Page 7230 1. Tighten all flare nuts and connecting bolts to: - Flare nuts: 15 - 18 Nm (11 - 13 ft. lbs.) - Connecting bolts: 17 - 19 Nm (12 - 14 ft. lbs.) 2. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. 3. Bleed air. Refer to Bleeding Brake System. Page 1001 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 4783 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 6479 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 7176 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 1787 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 296 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 6476 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 2898 The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases, the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Ground Distribution Cell Codes Page 2635 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5204 EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Views EGR Temperature Sensor (DTC: P1401) EGR Temperature Sensor Circuit Connectors Page 4527 Optional Splice Example Diagrams Page 2728 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 6255 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2636 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 643 Description Description Chart Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. CODE .................................................................................................................................................. ................................ WIRING DIAGRAM NAME A/C ....................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Air Conditioner A/T .................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . A/T AAC/V ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. IACV-AAC Valve ABS ........................................................... ................................................................................................................ Anti-Lock Brake System (4WD ABS) ABS .................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Anti-Lock Brake System (2WD ABS) AP/SEN .......................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure Sensor ASCD ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Automatic Speed Control Device AT/IND .................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .. A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO ............................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... Audio BACK/L ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................. Back-up Lamp BYPS/V ..................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve CHARGE ................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................... Charging System CHIME ............................................................................................. ............................................................................................................ Warning Chime CIGAR .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Cigarette Lighter CKPS ...................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Crankshaft Position Sensor (OBD) CMPS . .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Camshaft Position Sensor D/LOCK ....................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Power Door Lock DTRL ................................................................................................................................................... .................... Headlamp-With Daytime Light System ECTS ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... ECE Temperature Sensor EGRC/V ............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ EGRC-Solenoid Valve EGRC1 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ EGR Function ENGSS ....................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. Engine Speed Signal F/PUMP .............................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. Fuel Pump FICD ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... IACV-FICD Valve FRO2 .......................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Front Heated Oxygen Sensor FRO2/H . .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater FUEL .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... Fuel Injection System Function H/LAMP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. Headlamp HEATER ........................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Heater System Page 3696 Page 7874 6. Tighten the adjusting nut so the torsion bar length corresponds with dimension "L", previously measured during torsion bar removal. Tighten the lock nut to specifications. If a new torsion bar spring or anchor arm is installed, tighten the adjusting nut to the dimension indicated in the figure, then tighten the lock nut to specifications. Standard length "L": (2WD) = 54 mm (2.13 inch) (4WD) = 70 mm (2.76 inch) 7. Bounce vehicle with tires on ground (Unladen) to eliminate friction of suspension. 8. Measure vehicle posture "H". a. Exercise the front suspension by bouncing the front of the vehicle 4 or 5 times to ensure that the vehicle is in a neutral height attitude. b. Measure vehicle posture, i.e. dimension "H" H = A - B mm (inch) "Unladen" Refer to Alignment Specification table. 9. If height of the vehicle is not within allowable limit, adjust vehicle posture. 10. Check wheel alignment if necessary. Page 5806 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): Customer Interest Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 1353 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Page 9470 EL-TAIL/L-02 Parking, License, And Tail Lamps Wiring Diagram (Part 2 Of 2) Circuit Diagrams Parking, License And Tail Lamps (Part 1 Of 2) Parking, License, And Tail Lamps (Part 2 Of 2) Parking, License and Tail Lamps Circuit Connectors Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 5193 Ground Distribution Testing and Inspection Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Switch/Check Combination Switch Check Page 6584 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (DTC: P1775) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 6650 Lower And Upper Bodies Inspection - Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in lower body. - Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in upper body. - Be careful not to lose these parts. - Check to make sure that oil circuits are clean and free from damage. - Check tube brackets and tube connectors for damage. Separator Plates Inspection - Check to make sure that separator plate is free of damage and not deformed and oil holes are clean. Overdrive cancel solenoid valve and torque converter clutch solenoid valve Check that filter is not clogged or damaged. - Measure resistance. Assembly 1. Install upper and lower bodies. Page 7441 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3558 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow This Flowchart Work And Diagnostic Procedure 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in image, as shown in the following example. 2. Measurement results Required results are indicated as shown. These have the following meanings: Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V Resistance: Continuity should exist -> Approximately 0 Ohms 3. Cross reference of work symbols in the text and illustrations Illustrations are provided as visual aids for work procedures. For example, symbol [A] indicated in the left upper portion of each illustration corresponds with the symbol in the flowchart for easy identification. More precisely, the procedure under the "CHECK POWER SUPPLY" outlined previously is indicated by an illustration [A] 4. Symbols used in illustrations Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Direction Mark Refer to "Connector Symbols" Flow Chart Example How To Follow Flow Chart In Trouble Diagnoses: Example Page 6039 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Page 9610 Most windshield damage that occurs due to impact is easily identified as shown above. Cracks can spread and become larger from the original strike point or crush mark due to: ^ Thermal stresses caused by temperature fluctuation ^ External physical stresses, such as hand touch, wind force, or vehicle vibration during driving (pot holes) A lead, or crack from one of the star cracked impact points can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Single crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass Single cracks must be inspected along the entire crack for impact marks. ^ If any impact mark is found anywhere along the crack, it indicates the damage occurred from an object striking the windshield. This is not covered under warranty. Page 8950 EL-CHIME-02 Warning Chime (Part 2 Of 2) Models Without Power Door Locks Circuit Diagrams Warning Chime (Part 1 Of 2) Models With Power Door Locks Circuit Connectors Page 3687 Page 9390 Ground is supplied to terminal (16) of the combination meter through body grounds (M14) and (M68). With power and ground supplied, the high beam head lamps and HI BEAM indicator illuminate. DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION With the engine running, the lighting switch in the "OFF" or parking lamp (1ST) position and parking brake released, power is supplied: ^ to daytime light control unit terminal (3) ^ through daytime light control unit terminal (6) ^ to terminal (M) of LH headlamp ^ through terminal (E) of LH headlamp ^ to daytime light control unit terminal (7) ^ through daytime light control unit terminal (8) ^ to terminal (M) of RH headlamp. Ground is supplied to terminal (E) of RH headlamp through body grounds (E12) and (E54). Because the high beam head lamps are now wired in series, they operate at half illumination. Page 8014 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 3230 Flow Chart Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Connector And Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2834 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Electrical Diagrams EC-PST/SW-01 Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Diagrams Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Connectors Page 3741 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5256 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 1406 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. Page 1103 Inspection Procedure If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the items in the diagram. Harness Connectors ^ All harness connectors have been designed to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ^ The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. Standardized Relays Page 9135 Sensors & relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ^ Connectors not fully seated. ^ Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ^ Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ^ Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ^ Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. First, check that the system is properly grounded. Then, check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams, inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind the instrument panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating areas An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases, you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60° C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing Page 7163 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Remove free-running hub assembly. 2. Remove brake caliper assembly without disconnecting hydraulic line. Be careful not to depress brake pedal, or piston will pop out. Make sure brake hose is not twisted. 3. Remove lock washer. - 4WD 4. Remove wheel bearing lock nut. 2WD: With suitable tool 4WD: With Tool 5. Remove wheel hub and wheel bearing. Be careful not to drop outer bearing. 6. After installing wheel hub and wheel bearing, adjust wheel bearing preload. DISASSEMBLY Page 5929 Testing For "SHORTS" In The Circuit Resistance check method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No continuity: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. Continuity: Short is between relay and solenoid (point C). No continuity: Check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e., SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B+ side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B+ terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Voltage: Short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). No Voltage: Short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. Voltage: Short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). No Voltage: Retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, Page 377 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 9238 correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. SHORT There are two types of shorts. ^ SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ^ SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. Testing For "OPENS" In the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity check method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure no power is supplied to the checked component. Always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the image above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end (At the fuse block in this example). 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. It there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point A). 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point B). 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition (point C). Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage check method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous image. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than SW1. No Voltage: Open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the relay. No Voltage: Open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. Voltage: Open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. No Voltage: Open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Testing For "SHORTS" In the Circuit Page 5181 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Page 6375 Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 2 Of 2) Page 4383 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 2562 Description (Part 2 Of 2) Description Charts CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Connector Symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ^ Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5564 Measuring Voltage Drop - Step By Step Measuring voltage drop - Step by step The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the computer controlled system operate on very low amperage. Computer controlled operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Relationship between open/short (high resistance) circuit and the ECM pin control System Description: When the switch is ON, the Engine Control Module (ECM) lights up the lamp. Input-output Voltage Chart *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single stand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control Unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does turn ON. Therefore, the Control Unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. Page 6415 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2570 dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt screw or clip. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet, make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 Ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations: Undersized wiring (single strand example) Corrosion on switch contacts Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring voltage drop - Accumulated method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. NOTE: In the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 Volts drop between the battery and the bulb. Page 1969 Valve Guide: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that is part of, please refer to Cylinder Head. Page 4752 Norman Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Type Of Standardized Relays (Part 1 Of 2) Page 534 Ground Distribution Page 3082 ^ Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Probing From Terminal Side - Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5980 Ground Distribution Page 5127 Leak Detection Valve: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister. The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from being applied to the fuel tank. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the fuel tank. Page 2289 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. ^ If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing From Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. ^ If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ^ Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Female Terminal There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. ^ Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 8380 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for this incident. Claims to Nissan for the repair of this incident may be denied if the repairs are not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. Service Procedure NOTE: DO NOT REPLACE the front driver's or passenger's seat belt assemblies before first using the Service Procedure in this bulletin to: ^ Replace the missing/broken retaining button(s), and ^ Clean the "D" rings and install the fluorine resin tape on both seat belt assemblies. Replace Missing/Broken Retaining Button 1. Make sure the seat belt is not 'twisted' by sitting in the seat and latching the seat belt. If the belt is twisted, correct this before beginning button replacement. 2. Determine the original retaining button position. CAUTION: It is important that the replacement button be positioned on the seat belt exactly where the original button was placed at the factory. Page 5200 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. Unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Loading Procedure Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Consult Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure Page 7956 Page 6451 Fluid Pump: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Page 4654 Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ^ ignition switch is OFF, ^ doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ^ pedals are not depressed, and ^ parking brakes is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines with different thicknesses are used to represent wires. ^ A line with regular thickness (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which (ECM) (Engine Control Module) can detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. ^ A line with less thickness (thinner line) represents a "non- detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. MULTIPLE SWITCH Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications Front SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload ................................................... ............................................................................................................ 7.06 - 20.99 N (1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) Return Angle ................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 15 - 30° TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Lock Nut: Initial .................................................................................................................................................... ............................ 78 - 98 Nm (58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Final ............................................................................ ............................................................................................ 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) Rear SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0 mm (0 inch) Bearing Preload [1] ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.9 - 48.1 Nm (1.5 - 10.8 lbs.) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bearing Cage To Baffle Plate ................................................................................................................................................ 54 - 74 Nm (40 - 54 ft. lbs.) Bearing Lock Nut ........................................................................................................................................................... 245 - 294 Nm (181 - 217 ft. lbs.) [1]: At bearing cage bolt. Page 3061 Description (Part 1 Of 2) Page 6640 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views Park/Neutral Position Switch (DTC: P1706) Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit Connectors Super Multiple Junction (SMJ)-Terminal Arrangement M65, E43 Super Multiple Junction Terminal Arrangement Page 5030 ^ Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ^ Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black. ^ Connector guides for female terminals are shown in white. Harness Indication ^ Connector numbers in a signal oval (M33) indicate harness connectors. ^ Letter designations next to test meter probes indicate harness (connector) wire colors. Component Indication ^ Connector numbers in a double oval (F211) indicate component connectors. SWITCH POSITIONS Child Restraint - Top Tether Strap Anchor Installation Child Restraint: Technical Service Bulletins Child Restraint - Top Tether Strap Anchor Installation Classification: RS01-003 Reference: NTB01-052 Date: August 21, 2001 INSTALLATION OF ANCHOR BRACKET FOR CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM WITH A TOP TETHER STRAP APPLIED VEHICLE: All 1990 to 2000 MY Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION Child restraint systems that use a top tether strap need to be secured to an anchor bracket. ^ Nissan provides an anchor bracket assembly as a genuine Nissan accessory for all 1990-2000 models that do not have a factory installed top tether strap anchor bracket. ^ Certain 2000 model year Nissan vehicles have a factory installed top tether strap anchor bracket. ^ All 2001 models incorporate a factory installed top tether strap anchor bracket. SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ Check the Vehicle Owner's Manual and the anchor point in the vehicle to see if the anchor bracket is factory installed. If the anchor bracket is not factory installed, order the part number noted in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Refer to the Vehicle Owner's Manual section on Child Restraints for the location and the proper installation procedure of the top tether strap anchor bracket. ^ Refer to the manufacturer's Owner's Manual of the child restraint system for further safety and installation information. PARTS INFORMATION